JP2022155864A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine for preventing interest in a game from decreasing easily by preventing erroneous operation of an operation part.SOLUTION: Both a ball-dispensing button and an adjustment button provided in a ball tray are not turned on even if game tokens run on to the buttons.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 90

Description

Regarding gaming machines.

In a conventional pachinko game machine, a special game is executed when the winning lottery result is a big hit, and a large number of prize balls are won by entering the game balls into the big prize opening during the execution of the special game. . In addition, after the special game is finished, the machine is shifted to a high-base state, which is a time-saving state, and the high-base state is continued until the winning lottery is performed a predetermined number of times, thereby improving the easiness of acquiring the special game. In addition, by providing a plurality of periods of the high base state (the number of win/fail lotteries in which the high base state can be continued), the playability of the high base state has been enhanced (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2006-296598 A

Since there are already many pachinko gaming machines adopting such a configuration as conventional models, it is necessary to further improve the amusement of the games in order to differentiate them from the conventional models.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a pachinko game machine capable of improving the amusement of a game.

a ball lending button,
and a return button,
It is configured to detect the operation of the ball lending button when the operation part of the ball lending button is pressed and the operating part of the ball lending button moves a predetermined distance,
The load applied to the operating part of the ball lending button when the operating part of the ball lending button is pressed and the operating part of the ball lending button moves a predetermined distance to detect the operation of the ball lending button is a predetermined load of 0.06 N or more. A game machine designed to load.

Any combination of the constituent elements according to the above invention, and the constituent elements and expressions of the present invention are mutually replaced among methods, devices, systems, computer programs, recording media storing computer programs, data structures, etc. Configurations according to the embodiments and modifications described in the detailed description are also effective as aspects of the present invention.

According to the pachinko game machine according to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine to be assumed. It is a perspective view in the front direction of the pachinko game machine with the frame member opened. It is the perspective view of the back direction of the state which opened the frame member of the said pachinko game machine. It is a perspective view showing a game board attached to the pachinko game machine assumed. It is a functional block diagram of the pachinko game machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing the transition of the game state of the pachinko gaming machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing the power-on processing of the main control board of the pachinko gaming machine to be assumed. It is a figure which shows the game stop state setting process during the said power-on process. It is a diagram showing the interrupt processing of the main control board of the pachinko gaming machine to be assumed. It is a figure which shows the success-or-failure lottery table of the pachinko game machine which is assumed. It is a diagram showing a winning symbol lottery table of the premise pachinko gaming machine. It is a diagram showing a variation pattern lottery table during the low base state of the pachinko gaming machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing a variation pattern lottery table during the high base state of the pachinko gaming machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing a special variation pattern lottery table that is referred to during a limited period of the pachinko gaming machine that is assumed. It is a diagram showing the power-on processing of the effect control board of the pachinko game machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing an interrupt process of the effect control board of the pachinko game machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing a game effect of symbol variation display (decorative symbol stop display) during normal game (low probability/low base) of the premised pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure showing the game production|presentation of the situation where the ready-to-win production|presentation with high expectation which becomes a big hit of the premise pachinko game machine is performed. It is a diagram showing a game effect in a state in which a jackpot game is being executed in the pachinko gaming machine as a premise. It is a diagram showing a game effect during operation of the electric chew support function, which is a specific game state (high probability or low probability/high base) of the premised pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the game flow in the pachinko game machine of a present Example. It is a diagram showing an example of production (holding charge production) of a specific game (breakthrough zone) in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of production (breakthrough zone battle production) of a specific game (breakthrough zone) in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of production (breakthrough zone battle victory production) of a specific game (breakthrough zone) in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example (V prize promotion production|presentation) at the time of a small hit game in the pachinko game machine of a present Example. It is a diagram showing an example of production (jackpot type notification production) during the special game start demonstration in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of production during a special game (first big win) when shifting to a specific specific game (pseudo big win) in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of production during a specific game (pseudo jackpot) in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of production during a special game (second jackpot) after execution of a specific specific game (pseudo jackpot) in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example (battle mode first half) in specific game (battle mode) in the pachinko game machine of a present Example. It is a diagram showing an example of the effect (reserved charge effect (battle mode)) of the effect displayed in a maximum of four remaining pending from the final variation in the specific game (battle mode) in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the effect (battle mode final battle effect) that is displayed in the maximum four remaining pending from the final variation in the specific game (battle mode) in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of arrangement|positioning relationship, such as a prize-winning device, in the game area of the pachinko game machine of 2nd Example. It is a diagram showing a game flow in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2-1 embodiment. It is a diagram showing a distribution ratio of big hit (small hit) symbols in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2-1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example of the long-time chance state production of the pachinko game machine of 2-1 Example. It is a diagram showing an example of the production of the normal electric accessory opening production in the pachinko game machine of the 2-1 embodiment. It is a figure which shows the game flow in the pachinko game machine of 2-2 Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation in the chance time of the pachinko game machine of 2-2 Example. It is a diagram showing another example of the effect during the chance time of the pachinko game machine of the 2-2 embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation in the super chance time of the pachinko game machine of 2-2 Example. It is a figure which shows the game flow in the pachinko game machine of 2-3 Example. It is a diagram showing a distribution ratio of big hit (small hit) symbols in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2-3 embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen for setting the automatic operation function of the pachinko game machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen after setting the automatic operation function of the pachinko game machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen for selecting the production|presentation which wants to set the automatic operation timing of the pachinko game machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen for setting the automatic operation timing of the pachinko game machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows an example of arrangement|positioning relationship, such as a prize-winning device, in the game area of the pachinko game machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation screen regarding generation|occurrence|production of the "relief function" of the pachinko game machine of 4th Example (when the hold|hold which concerns on a 1st special design exists at the time of the 699th rotation). It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation screen regarding generation|occurrence|production of the "relief function" of the pachinko game machine of 4th Example (when the hold|hold which concerns on a 1st special design does not exist at the time of the 699th rotation). It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern regarding the special design lottery of the pachinko game machine of 4th Example. It is a diagram showing an example of success or failure, symbols, and variation patterns regarding normal symbol lottery of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of arrangement|positioning relationship, such as a prize-winning device, in the game area of the pachinko game machine of 5th Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation screen regarding generation|occurrence|production of the "relief function" of the pachinko game machine of 5th Example (when the fluctuation|variation of the 500th rotation is a fluctuation|variation of a 1st special design). It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation screen regarding generation|occurrence|production of the "relief function" of the pachinko game machine of 5th Example (when the 500th rotation fluctuation|variation is a fluctuation|variation of a 2nd special design). It is a figure which shows an example of arrangement|positioning relationship, such as a prize-winning device, in the game area of the pachinko game machine of 7th Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation screen during the special game of the pachinko game machine of 7th Example. It is a diagram showing another example of the effect screen during the special game of the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation screen after completion|finish of the special game of the pachinko game machine of 7th Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation screen when the special game which concerns on the 1st special design of the pachinko game machine of 7th Example is performed. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation screen when the special game which concerns on the 2nd special design of the pachinko game machine of 7th Example is performed. It is a figure which shows the symbol classification regarding the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol of the pachinko game machine of 8th Example. It is a figure which shows the game flow in the pachinko game machine of 8th Example. It is a diagram showing the termination conditions of the high base state in the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example of the high base state (ST mode) in the pachinko game machine of 8th Example. It is a figure which shows the production example of the high base state (battle mode) in the pachinko game machine of 8th Example. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation of the high base state (super-invincible battle mode) in the pachinko game machine of 8th Example. It is a figure which shows the production example of the high base state (invincible battle mode) in the pachinko game machine of 8th Example. It is a diagram showing the game flow of the pachinko gaming machine of the 9-1 embodiment. It is a diagram showing a production example (battle victory) in the pachinko game machine of the 9-1 embodiment. It is a diagram showing a production example (battle defeat) in the pachinko gaming machine of the 9-1 embodiment. It is a diagram showing a production example (final battle) in the pachinko game machine of the 9-1 embodiment. It is a diagram showing a production example 1 in the pachinko game machine of the 9-2 embodiment. It is a diagram showing a production example 2 in the pachinko game machine of the 9-2 embodiment. It is a diagram showing the time between rounds in the pachinko game machine of the tenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol classification regarding the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol of the pachinko game machine of 11th Example. It is a figure which shows the game flow in the pachinko game machine of 11th Example. It is a diagram showing the termination conditions of the high base state in the pachinko game machine of the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation screen before generation|occurrence|production and after generation|occurrence|production of a "relief function" in the pachinko game machine of 11th Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the holding|maintenance object in the pachinko game machine of 11th Example, and the said variable object. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern in the pachinko game machine of 11th Example, and an effect pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead effect|action in the pachinko game machine of 11th Example, and a pseudo-continuous effect|action. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation using the production accessory in the pachinko game machine of 11th Example. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation of the high base state (challenge mode) in the pachinko game machine of 11th Example. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation (example of production|presentation regarding transition to battle mode) of the high base state (battle mode) in the pachinko game machine of 11th Example. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation (example of production|presentation regarding transition to consecutive villa mode) of the high base state (battle mode) in the pachinko game machine of 11th Example. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation of the high base state (consecutive mode) in the pachinko game machine of 11th Example. It is a figure which shows the design classification regarding the 1st special design and the 2nd special design of 12th Example, and the end conditions of a high base state. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume setting function in the pachinko game machine of 13th Example. It is a figure which shows the upper surface of the upper ball plate in the pachinko game machine of 14th Example. It is a diagram showing the energy applied to the button of the substantially horizontal upper surface portion of the upper ball tray in the pachinko game machine of the fourteenth embodiment. It is a diagram showing the energy applied to the button of the inclined upper surface portion of the upper ball tray in the pachinko game machine of the fourteenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the ball lending button in the pachinko game machine of 14th Example. It is a front view of the upper part of the game machine in the pachinko game machine of the fifteenth embodiment. It is a right side view of the upper part of the game machine in the pachinko game machine of the fifteenth embodiment. It is a game board front view in the pachinko game machine of the 16th embodiment. It is a game board front view in the pachinko game machine of the 16th embodiment. It is a game board front view in the pachinko game machine of the 16th embodiment. It is a game board front view in the pachinko game machine of the 16th embodiment.

(Prerequisite technology)
Hereinafter, a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "prerequisite technology") on which the present invention is based will be described with reference to the drawings. 1 and 3 show a pachinko game machine as a representative example of the pachinko game machine according to the base technology, and FIG. 4 shows a game board provided in this pachinko game machine. First, the mechanical configuration of the pachinko game machine will be explained. In the following description, for convenience, the directions indicated by the arrows in FIG. 2 are referred to as the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction.

[Machine configuration of pachinko machine]
First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko game machine P will be described. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko game machine P is configured in a rectangular outer shell, and is configured in a rectangular shape with a size matching the opening of the outer frame P1 in front of the opening of the outer frame P1 fixed in the game facility. The front frame P2 is mounted so that it can be horizontally opened, opened, and detached by means of upper and lower hinge mechanisms (upper hinge portion 10, lower hinge portion 20) disposed on the front left edges of each other.

A game board P5 and a glass frame P3 are detachably set on the front frame P2. The glass frame P3 has a square shape, and is assembled and held on the front side of the front frame P2 so as to be able to open, close, and detach from the front using upper and lower hinge mechanisms (upper hinge portion 10, lower hinge portion 20). The game board P5 is detachably set on the front side of the front frame P2, and configured so that the player can visually recognize a game area P501 provided on the front side of the game board P5 through the glass P301 of the glass frame P3 which is closed and held. It is In addition, the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 can be rotated in either the left or right direction by inserting a key into the keyhole of the locking portion P30 provided on the front right edge of the pachinko game machine P, depending on the direction of rotation. , the locking of the outer frame P1 and the front frame P2 is released, or the locking of the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 is released. As a specific example, when the key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking portion P30 and rotated to the right, the locking of the outer frame P1 and the front frame P2 is released, and the key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking portion P30 and rotated to the left. By doing so, the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 are unlocked.

Under the glass frame P3, upper and lower ball trays P340 (upper ball tray P341 and lower ball tray P342) for storing game balls are provided. In addition, the glass frame P3 is provided with a production lamp P350 that emits light according to the progress of the game, and a speaker P370 that can output sounds such as sound effects according to the development of the game. An effect operation unit P380 for performing a predetermined effect operation is attached to the lower center of the glass frame P3. The button P381 allows the player to operate at all times, while the lever P382 is one of the movable objects (frame movable accessory P360) provided on the glass frame, and the operation means itself. is displaced to an upward projecting state (input permission state), operation input is possible (a plurality of operations are possible with one effect operation means).

A handle P204 is provided at the lower right portion of the front frame P2 for controlling the shooting operation of the game ball and the shooting intensity. A shooting device unit P240 is further provided at the lower part of the front frame P2, and although illustration is omitted, a ball feeding mechanism P241 that feeds game balls stored in the upper ball tray P341 one by one, and the ball feeding mechanism P241 feeds out the game balls. A launching device P242 having a launching mechanism (ball-hitting mallet driven by a rotary solenoid) that launches a game ball toward the game area P501, a launch control board P243 that synchronously controls the operations of the ball feeding mechanism P241 and the launching device P242, etc. is provided.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board P5 (game board unit) is configured with a base material formed in a rectangular flat plate shape using transparent synthetic resin or wood. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine P including the game board P5, and FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the game board unit P5. FIG. 4 shows a state in which the production accessory P560 (also called "movable production device", "movable production body", "movable production accessory", etc.) provided in the game board unit is in operation. On the front surface of the game board P5, an arc-shaped outer rail P502 is arranged from the lower left to the upper right, and a circle is arranged from the lower left to the upper left inside the outer rail P502 from near the lower center of the game board. An arc-shaped inner rail P503 and a rail decoration P504 formed in a curved shape that is arranged between the end of the upper right outer rail P502 and the lower part of the board surface and opens leftward, and the outer rail P502 A substantially circular game area P501 is defined inside surrounded by the inner rail P503 and the rail decoration P504. The game area P501 is divided into a left area P501L (left-handed area), which is an area on the left side of the center role P540, and an area on the right side of the center role P540, which is disposed substantially in the center. and a right area P501R (right hitting area). Further, the outer rail and the inner rail form a guide passage for guiding the game ball launched by the launcher unit P240 to the game area P501.

In the game area P501, along with a large number of game nails P510 and a windmill P511 (not shown), there are a first start winning opening P711 (first starting opening), a second starting winning opening P721 (second starting opening), a general winning opening P731, Various ball entry devices (referred to as "winning devices" when prize balls are generated) such as a normal pattern operation port P741 (normal pattern operation gate device), a large winning prize port P751 (attacker), etc. are provided. It should be noted that the number of the big prize winning opening may be one, or it may be configured to have a plurality of openings. Further, in this specification, due to the structure of the ball-entering device, the game ball is ejected after entering the ball-entering device, or further flows down the game area P501 after entering the ball-entering device (gate type). On the other hand, when a game ball is detected by an internal detection switch, it is called "entering ball" or "winning (especially when a prize ball is generated)", and flows down to the downstream game area like a gate type ball entrance. There are cases where it is described separately from "passing" in particular. Also, the ball entry device is sometimes referred to as a ball entry port, and the prize winning device is sometimes referred to as a prize winning port.

In addition, at the lower right of the game area P501, the main control display device P50 which is lighting controlled by the main control board described later, such as the first special symbol display device P51, the second special symbol display device P52, the normal symbol display device P53, etc. are centrally located. A center accessory P540 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area P501, and the screen of the effect display device P80 is provided so as to be visible through the opening of the center accessory P540. Above the center accessory P540, etc., there is provided a production accessory P560 (movable accessory device) that performs a production operation according to the development of the game. At the lower end of the game area P501, an out port P790 is provided through which a game ball that has flowed down without entering the winning port of various ball entry devices can pass. A game ball that has entered a prize winning opening of various prize winning devices or a game ball that has flowed into the outlet P790 flows down to the rear side of the game board P5 through a through hole (not shown) formed through the game board P5 from front to back. Then, it is collected in the collection channel (played ball passage) at the bottom of the front frame P2 and passes through the out ball sensor P792 (shot ball number sensor) provided at the bottom of the front frame for detecting the total number of shot game balls. After that, it is discharged out of the game machine.

The first starting winning device P710 is provided as a starting winning device corresponding to the first special symbol game. This first start winning device P710 is provided with a first start winning opening P711 into which a game ball can enter. The entry of the game ball into the first start winning hole P711 is a trigger for acquiring a random number (also referred to as the first random number, details will be described later) used for the lottery related to the first special symbol, and the first start Based on the entry of the game ball into the winning hole P711, the lottery relating to the first special symbol is executed after the timing immediately after the entry of the ball or the holding period has elapsed.

The second starting winning device P720 is provided as a starting winning device corresponding to the second special symbol game. This second start prize winning device P720 has a second start prize winning port P721 into which a game ball can enter, and a state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second start prize winning port P721 when winning a normal symbol lottery to be described later. A normal electric accessory P770 (also referred to as a variable member), which is a switching movable body, is provided. The entry of the game ball into the second start winning hole P721 is a trigger for acquiring a random number (also referred to as a second random number, details will be described later) used for the lottery related to the second special symbol, and the second start Based on the entry of the game ball into the winning hole P721, the lottery relating to the second special symbol is executed after the timing immediately after the entry of the ball or the holding period has elapsed. The second start winning device P721 is an open state where the game ball can enter the second start winning port P721 or is easy to enter by the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 (also referred to as an auxiliary game), and the game ball is the second start It changes to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the winning opening P721. In other words, the second starting winning device P720 has a structure in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting winning port unless it is displaced to the open state, and a predetermined opportunity described later (a chance to win the normal symbol lottery) When it becomes an open state at , the ease of entering a game ball increases. In addition, the structure of the normal electric accessory P770 is known in various forms, and there are cases where it is not a structure that changes the ease of entering a ball by opening the movable body P771. ” may be expressed as “easy-entering state (easy-entering mode)” and “difficult-entering state (difficult-entering state)” respectively.

The general winning device P730 has a left general winning device P730L arranged in the left hitting area P501L and a right general winning device P730R arranged in the right hitting area P501R. In the pachinko gaming machine P according to the underlying technology, the left general prize winning device P730L is configured as one unit with three general prize winning ports P731La to P731Lc, while the right general prize winning device P730R is a large prize winning device P750 described later. configured as part of Entry of a game ball into the general winning hole P731 triggers the payout of prize balls as with other winning devices. It should be noted that the number and positions of the general winning openings P731 of the pachinko game machine, which are assumed, are merely an example, and may be configured to be arranged only in the right-handed area P501R.

The normal pattern operation gate device P740 (normal pattern operation port) is provided as a starting entrance ball corresponding to the normal pattern game. This normal figure operation gate device P740 is provided with an operation gate P741 through which a game ball can pass, and the entered game ball is configured to be able to further flow downstream of the game area of the game board. The passage of the game ball to the operating gate P741 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the second starting prize winning device P720, that is, whether or not to operate the normal electric accessory P770. . It should be noted that, as a modification, it is also possible to configure the above-described general winning port P731 to have a function that triggers the normal symbol lottery. It is also possible to provide the function of generating as one winning device (normal drawing operation winning port).

The big winning device P750 has a big winning opening P751 (special electric role P755) that opens and closes when the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery results in a big win or a small win. and is sometimes referred to as an “attacker (device)”. The big winning device P750 has an open state in which a game ball can enter the big winning opening P751 or is easy to enter (for example, a state in which a special electric accessory is activated P755), and a game ball cannot enter the big winning opening P751. Or it changes to a closed state where it is difficult to enter (for example, the special electric accessory P755 is inactive). In the jackpot game, a plurality of round games (unit games) accompanied by opening and closing operations of the jackpot P751 are performed. Even when the special electric accessory P755 is activated, a series of activation patterns (also called "open pattern") may cause the movable body P756 that constitutes the big winning opening P751 to be in a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the ball. have It should be noted that the name of the special game may be subdivided depending on the number of round games to be executed. It is suitable to call it a 10R special game, etc. (“R” is the initial letter of “Round”=“ROUND”). Furthermore, the name of the special game may be subdivided in association with the game state to which the special game is to be executed. is preferably called a 10 round probability variable jackpot, a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 10 round probability variable special game, a 10R probability variable special game, etc., a special game in which a round game is executed three times, and a special A special game in which the probability variation function does not operate after the end of the game is preferably called a 3-round normal jackpot, a 3R normal jackpot, a 3-round normal special game, a 3R normal special game, or the like.

In addition, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the big winning device P750 may have a specific area P760 (referred to as "V zone" or "V area" through which game balls can pass). (referred to as "area", "continuation area", etc.) may be provided. As a function related to this "specific area", (a) activating the probability fluctuation function (described later) after the big win game triggered by passing through the specific area during the big win game, (b) passing the specific area during the small win game to activate the accessory continuous operation device (flag for continuously operating the special electric accessory) and grant the right to execute the jackpot game, (c) specified in a specific round during the jackpot game Examples include deterministic or non-execution of subsequent rounds based on whether or not a region has been passed. In addition, an opening/closing member P761 (valve member), which is a structure for changing the ease of passage, may be provided for the "specific area". It may be configured to pass through the specific region P760 or other non-specific regions. Also, during the big hit game or the small hit game, it may have a period during which the passage of the game ball in the specific area P761 is valid and a period during which it is invalid.

Incidentally, in the pachinko gaming machine P as a premise, the big winning device P750 is provided in the right region P501R (right-handed region) in the game region P501. Therefore, in the big-hit game or the small-hit game, when the game ball is shot toward the game area P501, it is easy to enter the big winning hole P751 by hitting the right side area P501R, that is, hitting the right side. It's becoming

Next, the basic structure of the back side of the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, will be described. On the rear side of the front frame, a back set unit P4 having a front-to-rear communicating window is mounted for mounting the game board unit P5 in the center. The reverse set unit P4 includes a storage tank P401 for storing a large number of game balls supplied from the gaming facility side, a gutter member P402 for flowing down the game balls from the storage tank P401, and a game ball guided by the gutter member. A prize ball payout unit P410 to be put out, a back side passage member P403 for causing the game balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit P410 to flow down to the upper ball tray P341 or the lower ball tray P342, and the like are provided. In addition, on the game ball flow down path from the storage tank P401 to the ball tray P340, there is a ball removal mechanism (ball removal operation lever P405, a valve member that forms a flow path that ejects the game ball from the flow path in conjunction with the operation lever. P406) is provided.

On the back side of the game board P5, a main control board P40 (also referred to as a main game section) that controls overall game progress of the pachinko game machine P, and a general effect that matches the game progress accompanying the control of the main control board P40. Effect control board P41 (also referred to as a sub-game section) that controls , image control board P42 (also referred to as an image control section) that controls image display according to game development, etc. are attached. In the pachinko game machine P of the underlying technology, the effect control board P41 and the image control board P42 are integrated with the effect display device P80 (liquid crystal display device, also referred to as effect display section) to form an effect display unit in an assembled state. Configure. On the other hand, on the back side of the back set unit P4, there are a payout control board P43 (also referred to as a payout control unit) that controls the payout of game balls, various control boards and electrical/electronic controllers that receive power from the gaming facility side. A power supply board P44 (not shown, also referred to as a power supply section or a power supply section) for supplying power to the components is attached. In addition, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, these control boards are housed in a board case made of transparent resin having a caulking structure and a sealing structure. , respectively. These control boards and the electric/electronic parts of each part of the pachinko game machine are interconnected via harnesses (connector cables) to enable the progress of games and the execution of effects in the pachinko game machine P. .

[Function block]
FIG. 5 shows functional blocks of a pachinko game machine as a premise.

The pachinko game machine includes a power supply board P44 that generates power to be used in the game machine based on AC power supplied from the outside of the game machine, and a main control board P40 (main control CPU ), a payout control board P43 (payout control CPU) as a frame control device for controlling payout of prize balls and shooting of game balls, and a performance control board P41 for controlling performance operations and processes. It is configured in the form of In addition, the arrows shown in the figure indicate upper transmission/reception relationships by solid-line arrows and electrical connection relationships by broken-line arrows.

By operating a power switch P47 provided on the board, the power board P44 is connected to a main control board P40, a performance control board P41, a payout control board P43, and various game devices electrically connected to them. On the other hand, it generates and supplies the power required for operation. Although the details will be described later, since the power-on operation of the power switch P47 is a switch operation that triggers the start of processing of information related to the settings of the gaming machine, the power switch is covered with an opening/closing cover to prevent unauthorized operation. protected in good condition.

The main control board P40 includes a first start winning opening P711 (special figure 1 starting opening switch P712), a second starting winning opening P721 (special figure 2 starting opening switch P722), a large winning opening P751 (large winning opening switch P752), Various detection switches related to game progress such as normal pattern operation port P741 (normal pattern operation port switch P742) and other detection switches general winning port P731 (left side general winning port, right side general winning port), out port P790 It is also connected to switches and sensors such as the setting key switch P49, the vibration detection sensor P72, and the magnet sensor P73, which are used for managing various games and monitoring fraud. The main control board receives input of information related to the occurrence of various game states from these switches, determines control details related to the progress of the game, and is composed of solenoids, etc. A special electric accessory driving means P70 driven to expand the winning opening P751, and a normal electric accessory driven to make the normal electric accessory P770 easy to enter when winning the normal symbol lottery. Information relating to the driving mode is output to a game device such as the driving means P71.

Sensors and the like connected to the main control board P40 are connected to terminals called input ports on the main control board and notify the main control board P40 of the presence or absence of occurrence of various game states based on sensor detection as information, special electric Accessory drive means P70, normal electric accessory drive means P71, and other information output from a terminal called an output port, such as a launch permission signal for the launcher P242, is received to control each device.

In addition, the main control board P40 includes special symbol display devices P51 and P52 (also referred to as a first special symbol display unit and a second special symbol display unit) that perform variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and a big hit and a small A main control display device P50 that performs various displays such as a round indicator light P54 that notifies the type of win (number of rounds) and a state indicator light P55 that notifies the game state, and the performance of the gaming machine (for example, the base value during normal play, That is, it is connected to a performance display device P59 or the like that displays the ratio of the number of prize balls to the total number of shots. Regarding the "base value", there are various other calculation methods such as data that excludes the winning of the starting prize opening P711, etc. Details are omitted in the explanation of the pachinko game machine.

In addition to the above, the main control board P40 is configured to be electrically connectable to devices outside the gaming machine through an external information output terminal P77, a test terminal P78, and the like, and transmits and receives various control signals to and from each of them. The main control board P40 is also electrically connected to the effect control board P41 and the payout control board P43, which are other control boards in the gaming machine.

The payout control board P43 controls the payout of prize balls by the payout device P410 based on signals indicating the payout of prize balls and the control state of the main control board transmitted from the main control board P40. In response to the operation of , control relating to shooting of the game ball by the shooting device unit P240 is performed. The payout device P410 has, for example, a payout motor P411 and a ball counting sensor P412, and is configured to be able to pay out game balls one by one by the rotation of the payout motor P411. The launching device (shooting device unit) P240 moves the game balls staying in the ball tray P340 (upper ball tray P341) one by one to the position where they can be shot by the ball feeding unit P241, and then hits the game ball with the hitting mallet. It is configured to shoot a game ball by hitting it. The payout control board P43 is provided with a ram clear switch P48, which is mainly used for initializing the game machine and canceling errors that occur during the game. Operation information of the ram clear switch P48 is input to the main control board via the harness and connector used.

The production control board P41 includes the production display device P80, the drive source and position detection sensor (for example, drive motor, initial position detection sensor, production position detection sensor) of the production movable accessory P560, the speaker P83 (upper speaker P370, lower speaker 141), production operation unit P380 (for example, production button P381 which is production operation means P81, production lever P382, cross key P383, etc.), production lamp P82 (“decorative lamp”, “board lamp (P550)”, “frame lamp (P350) ”), and transmits and receives various control signals to and from each of them. Also, the effect control board P42 and the effect display device P80 are connected via an image control board P42 (VDP) or the like that controls the display of the effect display device P80 (for example, a device that displays an image such as a liquid crystal display device). It may be something to do. In addition, in the pachinko game machine on which this assumption is made, the speaker P83 is configured to be controlled by the performance control board P41. may be configured to control

Transmission and reception of data between the main control board P40 and the effect control board P41 is performed by unidirectional data transmission/reception so as to be in one direction from the main control board P40 to the effect control board P41. Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main control board P40 to the effect control board P41 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from the configuration included in the effect control board P41 to the configuration included in the main control board P40. , it is not possible to request data transmission. Therefore, the effect control board P41 cannot refer to the information unless the information generated by the main control board P40 is transmitted. Incidentally, in the pachinko game machine P assumed here, data transmission and reception are performed bidirectionally between the main control board P40 and the payout control board P43. However, as in the case between the main control board P40 and the performance control board P41, it may be configured to transmit and receive data in one direction from the main control board P40 to the payout control board P43.

[Basic game progression]
Next, the basic game progress and game method in the pachinko game machine P as the underlying technology configured as described above will be described for each game state. The "game state" is roughly divided into a "normal game state" and a "special game state" in which game balls are easier to obtain than in the normal game state. The "normal game state" is a state in which the player aims to acquire the right to transition to the "special game state". A plurality of states are provided, and among the plurality of normal game states, the state in which it is relatively easy for the player to acquire the right to transition to the special game state (which is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state (low probability/low base state)) State) is expressed as "specific game state". The ``special game state'' corresponds to so-called ``big win game'' and ``small win game'', and the main control board P40 drives the special electric accessory drive means P70 to open the big winning opening P751, and the game ball is acquired. It means a state in which it is easy to

[Normal game state (low probability / low base state)]
First, the game method and the progress of the game in the normal game state will be explained. It should be noted that the normal game state described here is a description of the "normal game state (low probability / low base state)" (see FIG. 6) excluding the specific game state, and generally in the situation where the player starts the game The game state will be explained, and the game method, the progress of the game, and the meanings of the terms "low (high) probability" and "low (high) base" in the specific game state will be described later.

As a game method in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), first, the player operates the handle P204 to shoot a game ball toward the game area P501 provided on the game board P5. In the premised pachinko game machine P, in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), the player controls the operation amount of the handle P204 so that the game ball shoots toward the left area P501L (left-handed area) of the game area. The game is played by operating so that the

When a game ball is shot to the left area P501L of the game area by the player, the shot game ball flows down the game area P501 and hits a game nail P510 (also called "obstacle nail" or "nail") (not shown) or , While displacing the flow direction by the windmill P511, the first start winning opening P711 arranged at the substantially lower center position in the game area P501 of the game board called "navel" etc., or the general winning opening P731L of the left general winning device The ball enters (wins a prize), or enters an out hole P790 as a game ball that has been played without entering any of the winning holes. When the ball enters the first start winning hole P711 or the general winning hole P731, the main control board P40 sends information (control command ) is output, and the player acquires new game balls by paying out prize balls.

Here, a special figure 1 start opening switch P712 is arranged inside the first start winning opening P711. , When the ball is entered into the first start winning opening P711, the game ball detection information of the special figure 1 start opening switch P712 is input to the main control board P40.

When the main control board P40 receives the input of the game ball detection information of the special figure 1 start port switch P712, in addition to paying out a predetermined number of game balls, the lottery related to the control of the first special symbol is performed. Get a random value to do. Acquisition of the random number is based on the detection of the game ball, the acquisition of the random number generated by the random number generation circuit on the electric circuit (hard latch), or the control device of the main control board P40 by software processing. There are methods such as executing processing to obtain random numbers from the random number generation circuit when detecting information on game balls, or obtaining updated random numbers in software (soft latch). It is possible to use them properly according to the random number value to be obtained, or to use them in combination. It should be noted that when the ball enters the general winning slot, the random number related to the special symbol is not acquired, and only the prize ball is paid out.

A lottery related to the control of the first special symbol is a "special symbol lottery", and the "special symbol lottery" includes a "win/fail lottery", a "winning symbol lottery", and a "fluctuation pattern lottery". The "win/fail lottery" is a process of determining whether the lottery result using the obtained random number value is a "big hit" or a "loss" (depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the lottery result may include a "minor win"). ). The "hit symbol lottery" (sometimes simply referred to as "symbol lottery") is a process of determining the display pattern of the stop display symbol indicating the winning or failing lottery result in the special symbol display device P51 (P52) of the main control display device P50. It is possible to determine one pattern from a plurality of stop display patterns for one lottery result (big win, small win), and "big win" or "minor win" according to the stop display pattern determined here. It is possible to make the execution mode of the special game in . "Variation pattern lottery" is a process for determining at what timing the stop display pattern indicating the result of the winning lottery is to be displayed in the special pattern display device P51 (P52), and the special pattern in the special pattern display device P51 (P52). It determines the time (referred to as "variation display time" and "variation pattern") during which variable display indicating that the lottery has been executed is performed. It is common to use different random numbers for the "win/fail lottery", "win pattern lottery", and "fluctuation pattern lottery". called "random number". In addition, the lottery related to the control of the second special symbol, which is performed based on the detection of the game ball of the special figure 2 starting port switch P722, is also the same "special symbol lottery". Also, the explanation of the "special symbol lottery" will be given later.

Returning to the description of the game method in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), the player shoots a game ball into the left area P501L of the game area. Then, the game ball is entered into the first start winning hole P711, the lottery (special symbol lottery) relating to the first special symbol is executed, and the special symbol indicating "big win" ("small win") on the special symbol display device. is displayed, a game aiming at acquiring the execution right of the special game is performed.

In the process of the player receiving the special symbol lottery, the variable display of the special symbols is performed according to the time determined by the variation pattern lottery. During this special pattern variable display period, when there is a new start winning hole (first start winning hole P711, second start winning hole P721), a special pattern lottery is executed a predetermined number of times. It has a hold function that temporarily stores random numbers corresponding to rights. In the premised pachinko game machine P, as a holding function corresponding to the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first start winning hole P711, it is possible to suspend the special symbol lottery up to four times. It should be noted that the holding function can be set for each special symbol, and in the pachinko gaming machine P of the underlying technology, apart from the holding of the first special symbol, the holding function of the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol can be set up to four times. It is possible to reserve the random number used for the special symbol lottery.

In this way, in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), the player shoots the game ball to the left area P501L of the game area and executes the special symbol lottery related to the first special symbol. Then, in the special symbol lottery, when the lottery result of the special game state such as "big win" or "minor win" is won, and the fact that the right to shift to the special game state is acquired is displayed on the special symbol display device. , the game state of the pachinko game machine P shifts to a special game state.

[Special game state]
Next, the game method and the progress of the game in the special game state will be explained. The special game state includes "big win (game)" and "minor win (game)". , and the big winning hole P751 is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball. The big difference is that the "small hit" is completed by the operation of the special electric role product once, as opposed to being based on the operation of the operating device. Another difference is that in the operation of the special electric role product (jackpot) based on the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device, it is possible to make the operation mode more advantageous to the player regarding the operation of the special electric role product P755. Specifically, the total opening time of the big winning opening P751 in the operating state (big win) of the role product continuous operating device is allowed up to 30 seconds, while the total opening time of the big winning opening P751 in the small winning is allowed. There is a point that the time is limited to 1.8 seconds. In the following description of the game method and the progress of the game in the special game state, the jackpot will be described as an example.

The game progress of the special game in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the underlying technology, is chronologically called a "special game start demo" (in the case of a big win, it is called a "jackpot start demo", a "role combination operation start demo", etc.). In the case of a hit, a performance period called "small win start demo") to inform the player that various special games have been won, and a single time called "round (game)" (also referred to as "unit game") The operation period of the special electric accessory P755 and the “special game end demo” (in the case of a big win, it is called “big win end demo”, “role combination operation end demo”, etc., and in the case of a small win, it is called “small win end demo” ), which is mainly composed of the game results (such as the number of acquired game balls) during the special game and the period for performing notification related to the type of the normal game state (including the specific game state) of the transition destination.

Next, the game method during each special game period described above will be described. First, during the “special game start demo” period, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the underlying technology, the big winning opening P751 is arranged in the right area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area, and the normal game state (low probability/low Even if a game ball is shot into the left area P501L similar to the base state), it is almost impossible to expect the ball to enter the big winning hole P751, so the big winning hole P751 in the special game is in an easy-to-enter state Before the start of the round game In addition, a right-handed notification effect that prompts the player to shoot a game ball to the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area is provided by the production display device P80, speakers (lower speaker P141, upper speaker P370), and production lamps. Execute using P82. The player adjusts the amount of operation of the handle P204 to increase the shooting intensity of the game ball according to the right-handed notification effect, and changes the shooting position so that the game ball flows down to the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area. to (perform a right-handed stroke).

During the “round (game)” period, in the pachinko machine P of the underlying technology, the main control board P40 outputs a driving signal to the special electric accessory driving means P70, thereby causing the large winning opening P751 to enter the easy-to-enter state or It is specified that it is more advantageous for the player to be in a state where it is difficult to enter a ball, and to congratulate the player for winning a big win (minor win) in accordance with the execution period of the special game, or to shift to a normal game state after the special game is over. An effect such as an effect suggesting whether or not the player is in a game state is executed. A player shoots a game ball to the right area P501R (right hitting area) of the game area in order to enter the game ball into the big winning hole P751 and obtain a large number of game balls.

During one "round (game)" period, the opening pattern (operation mode of the special electric accessory) of the big winning opening determined based on the type of big win (minor win) is completed (opening time elapses). Alternatively, the game ends when a predetermined "specified number" (which may be expressed as "count", "C", etc.) of game balls enter the game. Then, according to the type of special game state being executed (type of big win or small win), when all the round games to be executed are completed, the state shifts to the state of "special game end demo".

Subsequently, during the "special game end demo" period, the pachinko machine P, which is the underlying technology, displays the number of game balls acquired during this special game state period, and Acquired in the special game state (acquired without transitioning to the normal game state (low probability / low base state)) to notify the total number of acquired game balls, or normal game that shifts after the special game state Effects such as the notification of the type of state and the notification related to the game method in the game state of the transition destination (such as the above-described right-handed notification effect) are executed. The player operates the steering wheel in preparation for a game corresponding to the type of normal game state to which the game is to be transferred from the effect being executed.

In many pachinko gaming machines P that are assumed, except for some exceptions, when a jackpot game as a special game state is executed, a special game state for the player is called a "specific game state" as a normal game state. The right to transition to is shifted to a state where it is easy to acquire, and the specific game state and the special game state are continuously repeated, so-called "Renso".

[Specific gaming state]
Next, a description of the "specific game state" will be given. As shown in FIG. 6, there are roughly three specific game states in the specific game state. And, there are "probability state" and "base state" as elements for classifying those types, and a specific game state is constituted by a combination thereof.

(probability state)
"Probability state" is a function that changes the probability that the lottery result will be a "big hit" in the winning lottery in the special symbol lottery. If it is expressed as "high probability (state)"("probability change state", "probability change state" when the success or failure lottery in the special symbol lottery becomes a "jackpot" with a higher probability than when it is not activated. There is also), and the state where the probability variation function is not operating is expressed as "low probability (state)". The "high probability (state)" is a game state more advantageous than the normal game state (low probability/low base state) in that the probability of winning a big hit in one special symbol lottery is high.

(base state)
The "base state" is a state related to the "base", that is, the ratio (expected value) of game balls obtained as prize balls when a predetermined number of game balls are fired. The state in which the operation of P770 is easier (advantageous) than the normal game state (low probability / low base state) is called "high base (state)" (also called "electric support (electric support) state"). . In addition, depending on the specifications of the game machine, even if the "electric chew support function" is not activated, the recommended shooting position of the game ball is switched, so that "when a predetermined number of game balls are fired, it is possible to obtain prize balls." If the "proportion of game balls to be played" increases, it may be expressed as "high base state". "High base (state)" means that the number of game balls paid out as prize balls increases (it becomes easier to pay out) during the period until the special game state is acquired, so that the consumption of game balls is suppressed and the special This is a game state that is advantageous to the player in that the player can aim to acquire the game state.

"Electric chew support function" is a state in which the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is easier than in the normal game state (low probability / low base state), but mainly a combination of three functions (at least one ). The three functions that make up the “electric chew support function” are “normal symbol probability change”, “normal symbol time saving”, and “open extension (of normal electric accessories)”. "Normal pattern probability variation" refers to a state with a high probability of operating the normal electric accessories in the "normal symbol lottery". "Normal symbol time reduction" shortens the time from executing the normal symbol lottery to displaying the result of the normal symbol lottery in the normal symbol display means P53 (also referred to as the normal symbol display unit) in the main control display device P50. It refers to the state of "Extension of opening of ordinary electric role" is, for the type of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery, the ordinary electric role is placed in a manner in which the game ball can easily enter the winning opening related to the ordinary electric role P770. It refers to changing so as to operate, and as an example, it corresponds to extending and lengthening the total time in which the normal electric accessory is in the easy-to-enter state.

"Normal symbol lottery" is that the above-mentioned special symbol lottery is a lottery related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755, whereas the normal symbol lottery is a lottery related to the operation of the normal electric accessory P770. It differs in that the execution trigger is the entry of a game ball to the normal pattern operation gate device P740, but it is almost the same in that the success or failure, the pattern, and the variation pattern are determined by lottery and that it has a holding function. If you want to express the lottery of the normal pattern lottery, the pattern, and the variation pattern, you can say "normal pattern lottery", "normal pattern lottery", "normal pattern fluctuation pattern lottery", such as "normal pattern lottery" (or " Ordinary design") is attached to the beginning.

"Probability state" and "base state" have been explained as elements that distinguish the types of "specific game state", but as an element that constitutes the specific game state, there are also "time reduction state" ("fluctuation time reduction state" , a state in which the "fluctuation time reduction function" is activated). In general, the "time saving state" refers to a state in which the variable display time (variation pattern) per special symbol is shortened and the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed per unit time increases. It is an advantageous state in that many special symbol lotteries can be received per unit time. "Time saving state" (fluctuation time shortening state) is often controlled at the same time as the above-mentioned "high probability state" and "electric chew support state", and rarely constitutes a specific game state by itself.

[Specific game state 1: low probability / high base state]
Returning to the description of the "specific game state", first, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) is made by the game state transitions shown in (1), (8) and (12) in FIG. As the game state transition conditions of (1), (8), and (12) in FIG. ) only) and so on. Although not shown, there is also a case where the specific game state 1 goes back to the specific game state 1 via a jackpot game. On the other hand, when the conditions for ending the special game state are met, transitions are made as shown in (2), (7), and (11) in FIG. These game state transition conditions (2), (7), and (11) are (c) to obtain a jackpot game of the type that transitions to each game state in the specific game state 1, and (d). The elapse of a predetermined number of games (*(2) only) can be mentioned. It should be noted that the "number of games played" refers to, for example, "the number of times a special symbol lottery is executed".

When shifting to the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state), in the premise pachinko game machine P, both the above-described "electric chew support function" and "fluctuation time reduction function" are activated. In the arrangement configuration of each winning device on the game board P5 of the pachinko game machine P as a premise, the right side area P501R (right hitting area) of the game area is the normal figure operation gate device P740, and the second start winning relating to the ordinary electric accessory A mouth P721 is arranged, and the player can easily receive a normal symbol lottery and a special symbol lottery by performing "right-handed hitting" in which a game ball is shot to the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area. In addition, the pachinko game machine P, which is assumed, is also controlled in the above-described "time saving state" in the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state).

To explain the progress of the game in more detail, when the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) occurs, the player shoots the game ball to the right side area P501R (right hitting area) of the game area, Entering (passing) the operation gate device P740 is performed as the first procedure, and by entering (passing) the normal pattern operation gate device P740, the normal symbol lottery is received in the main control board P40. The normal symbol lottery in the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) is a hit with a high probability (about 1/1) due to the operation of the normal pattern probability variation function, so the game ball is 1 to the normal pattern operation gate device P740. When the ball enters (passes), one operation of the normal electric accessory P770 occurs. When the normal electric accessory P770 operates, the pachinko game machine P on which the premise is, the second start winning opening P721 that triggers the special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol becomes easy to enter, and the player continues the second. As a procedure, a game ball is shot toward the second start winning opening P721. When the game ball enters the second start winning hole P721, the detection information is input to the main control board P40, the special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol is executed, and the execution right of the special game (big win, small win). A lottery related to the acquisition of is executed.

The specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) is predetermined by the game state transition conditions (for example, if the execution of the jackpot, the type of jackpot executed, etc.) The game ends when the number of games (the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or when a new jackpot game is obtained (there is a case where the game shifts to this state again after the jackpot game). In the case of winning a small winning game, it is often assumed that the specific game state does not end, but depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, winning a small winning game (or winning multiple small winning games, or In some cases, it is designed to end with the acquisition of a small winning game. When the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) ends due to the number of games played, it shifts to the normal game state (low probability/low base state).

[Specific game state 2: high probability / high base state]
Next, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state) is made by the game state transitions shown in (3), (7) and (9) in FIG. The game state transition conditions of (3), (7), and (9) in FIG. 6 are (A) to obtain a big hit game in each state. Although not shown, there is also a case where the specific game state 2 is transferred to the specific game state 2 again via the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the conditions for ending the special game state are satisfied, transitions are made as shown in (4), (8), and (10) in FIG. These (4), (8), and (10) game state transition conditions are (a) to acquire a jackpot game of the type that transitions to each game state in the specific game state 2, (c) For example, a predetermined number of games has passed.

When moving to the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state), in the premise pachinko game machine P, the "probability change function" was further activated for the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state). It differs in that it is "high probability (state)". The progress of the game and the method of playing in the specific game state 2 are the same as those in the specific game state 1, and the difference is that the player can win the big win earlier than the special symbol lottery because the probability of winning the big win is high. do.

The specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) is predetermined by the game state transition condition (for example, if the big win is executed, the type of the executed jackpot, etc.) The game ends when the number of games (the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or when a new jackpot game is obtained (there is a case where the game shifts to this state again after the jackpot game). It is common that the specific game state 2 is not terminated in the case of winning a small winning game. If the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) ends due to the number of games played, normal game state (low probability / low base state), specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state), specific game state Go to 3 (high probability/low base state).

[Specific game state 3: high probability / low base state]
Next, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) is made by the game state transitions shown in (5), (10) and (11) in FIG. As the game state transition conditions of (5), (10), and (11) in FIG. ) only) and so on. Although not shown, there is also a case where the specific game state 3 is transferred to the specific game state 3 again via the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the conditions for ending the special game state are met, transitions are made as shown in (6), (9), and (12) in FIG. These (6), (9), and (12) game state transition conditions are (c) to obtain a jackpot game of the type that transitions to each game state in the specific game state 3, (d) The elapse of a predetermined number of games (*(6) only) can be mentioned.

When moving to the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state), in the premise pachinko game machine P, the "probability fluctuation function" is activated "high probability (state)", specific game state 1 and specific game Unlike state 2, the "electric chew support function" and the "fluctuation time reduction function" are not activated. In the arrangement configuration of each winning device on the game board P5 of the pachinko game machine P as a premise, the normal figure operation gate device P740 in the right side area P501 (right hitting area) of the game area, and the second start winning relating to the ordinary electric accessory Although the mouth P721 is arranged, it is assumed that in the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state), the player hits to the right by shooting a game ball to the right side area P501R (right hitting area) of the game area. Also, the probability of winning a hit in the normal pattern lottery is low, and there is no advantage in hitting right.

Therefore, the player proceeds with the game by shooting the game ball to the left area P501L (left-handed area) of the game area, and since this is a high-probability state, there is a high probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery. The game method and game progress are the same as those in the normal game state (low probability/low base state) except that the jackpot game can be obtained early because of the high value.

The specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) is predetermined by the game state transition conditions (for example, if the big win is executed, the type of the executed jackpot, etc.) The game ends when the number of games (the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or when a new jackpot game is obtained (there is a case where the game shifts to this state again after the jackpot game). It is common that the specific game state 3 is not terminated in the case of winning a small winning game. When the specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) ends due to the number of games played, it shifts to the normal game state (low probability/low base state).

In addition, the specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) is different from the board arrangement configuration of FIG. Arrangement configuration of winning devices on the game board, such as by arranging the third start winning port of the type that does not have and activating the "time saving state" so that many special symbol lotteries can be received in a short time And depending on the control of the time saving state, there may be a game state where "right hitting" is recommended.

As described above, the premised pachinko gaming machine P progresses through a plurality of game states, but does not necessarily have all the game states described above. Therefore, among game machine specifications constituted by combinations of a plurality of game states, etc., game machine specifications (sometimes referred to as "specs") that can be adopted in the premise pachinko game machine P are exemplified below.

Regarding representative game machine specifications ("specs"), examples of the types of game machine specifications related to the operation of the probability variation function of the special symbol lottery are "(until the next time) probability change", "ST (number of times cut probability change)". , “V probability variation (also called “ball probability” and “attack round system”)”, and “latency probability variation” can be adopted. The difference in gaming machine specifications due to the difference in the probability variation function is sometimes expressed as "this gaming machine is a '○○ machine (eg: ST machine)'". In addition, in a gaming machine that does not have a probability variation function, by passing through the specific area P760 inside the big winning opening P751 during the small winning game, the accessory continuous operating device will then operate (that is, shift to the big winning game). There is also a game machine specification called "small hit V".

[(Until the next time) fixed]
First of all, I will explain “(until the next time) probability change”. "Variable probability until the next time" is generally, among the plurality of specific game states provided in the pachinko game machine P, the most advantageous game state among the above-mentioned specific game states, "Specific game state 2 ( High probability/high base state) will continue until the next jackpot game right is acquired"Pachinko game machine specifications". In other words, the gaming machine with the “probability change until the next time” is configured so that the specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state) continues until the right to the next big hit game is acquired, and does not end depending on the number of symbol fluctuations. It is

It should be noted that depending on the type of jackpot, it may be controlled to the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) or the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state). Also, in the "pachinko machine that continues until the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) acquires the right to play the next big hit", the probability variation function continues until the next big hit. It may be called "probability change until next time", but the base state is "low base state", and the same game as the normal game state (low probability / low base state) may be required for the electric chew support function. , In this way, it is expressed as "latency probability change" because it is probability change until the next time when the electric chew support function is not operating.

[ST (Variable number of cuts)]
Next, "ST (Variable number of cut probability)" will be explained. "ST" is an abbreviation of "Special Time", and generally, "special game state 2 (high probability / high base state) performs a special symbol lottery for a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of times symbol variation is executed) or the pachinko game machine that will continue until the right to win the jackpot game" is shown.

It should be noted that depending on the type of jackpot, it may be controlled to the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) or the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state). Also, in the same way as the above-mentioned "probability change until the next time", the game state is a specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state). For cases to be controlled, it is also possible to configure so as to have a state called "latency probability change (latency ST)".

In addition, even if it is "ST (variable number of cuts)", the period in which the game state is controlled to ST, such as when the special symbol lottery lottery is "until 10000 times", is substantially in a high probability state If it is a gaming machine specification that can be said to guarantee a big hit until the next time, it may be expressed as "until the next time".

As mentioned above, "probability change until the next time" and "ST (number of times cut probability change)" are different in terms of the end of the probability change function of the special symbol lottery, which distinguishes the "probability change state" as a game machine specification is. On the other hand, as in "V probability variation (" ball probability "" attack round system ")" described below, whether or not the probability variation function of the special symbol lottery in the specific game state is activated, that is, regarding the start of execution of the probability variation function, Game machine specifications (“specs”) may be expressed by requiring special conditions.

[V probability change]
Next, a game machine specification called "V probability variation" will be described. "V probability change" is a "specific area P750"("Vzone","Varea", etc.) provided in the big winning opening P751 during the jackpot game before the game state shifts to the specific game state. ), when the passage of the game ball ("V winning") is detected under predetermined conditions (such as during the execution of a specific jackpot round), the probability variation function is activated after the jackpot game The game machine specifications of the pachinko game machine that performs control to shift to the specific game state (specific game state 1 or specific game state 3) are shown. Regarding the “specific region” used for “V probability variation”, it may be particularly referred to as “probability variation function operating region”.

As described above, "V probability variation" is a gaming machine specification that indicates whether or not the probability variation function is activated depends on the game result during the big hit game (depends on whether the game ball passes through the specific area P760). Yes, depending on whether the activated probability variation function ends with the same control as the previously described "probability variation until the next time" or ends with control equivalent to "ST" "V probability variation (V-loop) ” and “V-ST” are used to indicate game machine specifications.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P that adopts "V probability change" as a game machine specification, if the V prize is not won during the jackpot game, the probability change function does not operate after the jackpot game, and the normal game state and the specific game It is controlled to state 1 (low probability/high base state). In addition, it is possible to switch whether or not the game state in which the probability variation function is activated after the big win game, depending on whether or not the V prize is won, and at the same time, it is possible to change the operation mode of the electric chew support function. As an example, in the "V probability variation (V-loop)" machine, if you win a V prize, the probability variation function and electric chew support function will continue until you win the next big hit, and if you do not win a V prize, the probability variation function will not operate. First, the electric chew support function is limited until the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times.

[small hit V]
Next, a description will be given of a game machine specification (spec) called "small win V" as a game machine specification capable of providing a game state advantageous to a player in terms of winning a big win without having a probability variation function.

"Small hit V" is a "specific area P760" (sometimes referred to as "V zone", "V area", etc.), the game machine specification that activates the accessory continuous operation device following the small winning game, that is, starts the big winning game. be. In other words, it is a game machine specification that allows a big win game to be obtained without obtaining a big win result as a result of a special symbol lottery by passing through the specific area P760 during a small win.

"Small win V" is a "type 1 (pachinko)" game that activates the continuous activation device and special electric accessories as a result of the special symbol lottery, and the special electric accessories while the continuous activation device is not in operation. It is a specification that activates the role continuous operation device when passing through the specific area P760 during operation (during the opening of the big winning hole P751), and is sometimes referred to as "1st class small win V", while the conventional pachinko game It is sometimes referred to as a "mixture of 1 type and 2 types" because it has playability similar to the specifications of so-called "2 types of pachinko" machines.

In general, a pachinko game machine that adopts "small hit V" as a game machine specification does not have a variable probability function (probability variable function), and changes the degree of advantage depending on the presence or absence of an electronic chew support function. That is, when the electric chew support function is activated, the winning opening related to the normal electric role product P770, which is easy to win, becomes a change trigger for special symbols (for example, winning a small win at 1/2) that makes it easy to win a small win. By constructing a starting winning port, it is easy to win a small win under the condition that an electric chewing support function is operating, and it is possible to aim for a big win by winning a V prize during a small winning game. By doing so, it is possible to increase the possibility of obtaining a big win by a small win instead of increasing the random number range of the big win like the variable probability function.

[Other game machine specifications (specs)]
The game machine specifications described above are typical ones, and since there are several other characteristic game machine specifications known, they will be briefly described below.

(limiter)
"Limiter" is a state in which a specific game state in which the probability variation function and the electric chew support function are activated occurs repeatedly with the execution of the jackpot game (so-called "Consecutive" state). Even if a jackpot game that should originally operate the probability variation function or the electric chew support function is executed when the set number of repetitions (number of consecutive games) is reached, the probability variation function or the electric chew support function It is a function that restricts the operation. As a limiter function, the function that limits the "probability fluctuation function" based on the number of consecutive times is called "probability variable limiter", and the function that limits the "electric chew support function" based on the number of consecutive times is called "time-saving limiter (electric support limiter)". call. A game machine having a limiter function is called a "limiter machine".

(Fall)
"Falling" is a game machine that executes a "falling lottery" that determines whether or not to end the probability variation function every time a special symbol lottery is performed during the period when the probability variation function of the special symbol lottery is operating. Show specifications. In the situation where the electric chew support function is operating along with the probability fluctuation function, if you win the fall lottery, the operation of the electric chew support function will end when the probability fluctuation function ends, or only the probability fluctuation function will end. However, the operation of the electric chew support function may continue.

In addition, it is possible to combine a plurality of game machine specifications described above. 1) Winning the fall lottery, (2) Performing a special symbol lottery for a predetermined number of times, (3) Acquiring the right to play a big hit, If either of these conditions is satisfied, the specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state) ends (shifts to another game state).

Next, the control of the main control board P40 governing the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise, will be described. It should be noted that the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise of the description of the present embodiment, will be described on the premise of a pachinko gaming machine that adopts "ST (variable number of cuts)" as the gaming machine specifications (specs) described above. . In the description of the embodiment, the notation of "P-s ◯◯" indicating the processing step in the figure is described as "step ◯◯" in the text.

[Main control board power-on processing (main control board main loop processing)]
The main control board P40 of the premised pachinko game machine P first executes a power-on process (step 1000) when the power of the pachinko game machine P is turned on. Here, details of the power-on process will be described with reference to FIG.

When the power-on processing is started in the main control board P40 of the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, the initial setting relating to the operation of the CPU, which is the arithmetic device provided on the main control board P40, is performed (step 1002). The initial setting is to appropriately perform settings necessary for subsequent operation of the CPU, and the details thereof will be omitted.

When the CPU initial setting is completed, input port confirmation processing (step 1004) and power failure information confirmation/checksum processing (step 1006) are executed. ).

More specifically, the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is a "set value ” can be changed, and the flag indicating whether or not the ``setting confirmation process'' for confirming the ``setting value'' is in the state of performing This is a process of generating information for determining whether or not to be established (whether to turn on) in the game stop state setting process to be performed later. In the premised pachinko game machine P, the detection status of the frame open switch P131 (a switch that detects that the front frame is opened with respect to the outer frame), and the detection status of whether the ram clear switch P48 is operated by the player , data including data indicating whether or not the setting key switch P49 is rotated is generated as 1-byte data.

In the subsequent power-off information confirmation/checksum processing (step 1006), the pachinko game machine P normally shuts down the power when the power was turned off last time, and the control data related to the game state when the power shut-off occurred normally. This is a process for confirming whether the data is normally saved and stored in the storage area of the CPU of the main control board P40. If the data is not normal, the game is stopped in the game stop state setting process (step 1008) described later as an error. This is the process of setting (turning on) a flag to stop.

In the "game stop state setting process" (step 1008), after the process in the power-on process is completed and the process shifts to the main loop process to start the game, a flag is set to prevent the player from actually playing the game. Based on the results of the input port confirmation process (step 1004) and the power failure information confirmation/checksum process (step 1006), the "setting change status", "setting confirmation status", and "unrecoverable status" are displayed. This is a process of setting a flag for shifting to any game progress disallowed state of "error state". Details of the "game stop state setting process" are described in FIG.

In the game stop state setting process, first, it is determined whether the frame is open based on the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) (step 1100). If the front frame P2 of the pachinko game machine P is open to the outer frame P1 when the power is turned on (YES in step 1100), the specific bit of the 1-byte data is "1" Therefore, the subsequent processing of step 1102 is omitted. On the other hand, if the frame is not open when the power of the pachinko game machine is turned on, it is assumed that some of the essential operations for executing the setting change process are not satisfied, and the 1 generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004). Operation information of the setting key switch is calculated from the byte data so that it becomes OFF data. Although not shown, whether the result in step 1102 is YES or NO, calculation is performed so that the frame open bit in the 1-byte data is also OFF data.

In the subsequent step 1104, it is determined whether or not the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is information that allows determination of "there is a setting change operation". In the premise pachinko game machine P, the situation where it is determined that "there is a setting change operation" is (1) the frame opening switch P131 is ON (the frame is being opened when the power is turned on), and (2) the setting key switch P49 is ON. and (3) the ram clear switch P48 is ON. As described above, among the 1-byte data, the information of the frame open switch P131 is set to OFF, and it is determined in this step whether both (2) and (3) are satisfied. For example, if two specific bit data are "1", it is determined that there is a setting change operation (the active data indicating that the two switches are on does not necessarily have to be "1"; One data may be "0"). Then, if it is determined that there has been a setting change operation, that is, if it is determined YES in step 1104, data indicating "setting being changed" is stored as a game stop state flag, and the game stop state setting process is terminated ( step 1106, step 1118). On the other hand, if NO is determined in step 1104 , the process proceeds to step 1108 . In addition, when the setting value information stored in the RAM (RAM=Random Access Memory) of the main control board P40 is abnormal data (in the case of recovery operation from an unrecoverable error state), as the initial setting value The data corresponding to the setting value "1" is set in the setting value storage area (step 1118).

Next, at step 1108, it is determined whether or not a game stop error has occurred. A game stop error is an error that requires RAM clearing and setting (change) processing of setting values when the game cannot proceed, such as checksum abnormality (RAM abnormality) or setting value abnormality. refers to The determination of step 1108 determines whether or not to set the game stop state based on the processing result of the power-off information confirmation/checksum processing (step 1006) and the error information stored during the previous power-off processing. . When it is determined that an error state should be established (when determined as YES in step 1108), the game stop state flag is set to "unrecoverable error state" and the game stop state setting process is terminated (steps 1110 and 1118). If it is determined that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to the subsequent step 1112 .

In the subsequent step 1112, it is determined whether or not the ram clear switch P48 has been operated. In the game stop state setting process, as a state when proceeding to the step,
(a) When an operation to shift to the setting confirmation state is being performed, in other words, in the determination of "there is a setting change operation", (1) the frame opening switch P131 is ON (frame is being opened when the power is turned on). , (2) the setting key switch P49 is ON, and (3) the ram clear switch P48 is ON, is not satisfied,
(a) when the ram clear operation for data clear is performed, in other words, (2) the setting key switch P49 is on, and (3) the ram clear switch P48 is on. when it is sufficient,
(c) When the power is turned on without performing any operations such as "setting change operation", "setting confirmation operation", "ram clear operation",
Either In these states, the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) are: (a) bit data indicating ON/OFF of the setting key switch P49 is "1 (ON data)"; Either the bit data indicating ON/OFF of the operation detection state of P48 is "1 (ON data)" or (C) all 1-byte data is OFF data (for example, all bits "0").

Then, in step 1112, it is determined whether or not the ram clear switch P48 has been operated, and if there has been a ram clear operation (if YES is determined in step 1112), the pachinko gaming machine enters the game ready state after clearing the ram. In order to make the transition, a process of clearing the game stop state flag is performed (step 1114). On the other hand, except when the RAM clear operation is performed, the current 1-byte data is set as it is. If NO), the bit data indicating the operation status of the setting key switch P49 is "1", and the 1-byte data indicating the game stop state flag is stored as data indicating "setting confirmation" ( step 1118). Further, when there is neither a RAM clear operation nor an operation to shift to the setting confirmation state, the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation processing (step 1004) is originally data indicating that the game is not stopped as a game stop state flag. It is set as no-game-stop information.

Regarding the game stop state flag set in the "game stop state setting process" (step 1008), if a value indicating some stop state is stored, the main flag which is the game allowable state in the power-on process (step 1000) In the interrupt processing (step 2000) which is the main part of the game progress control executed after the transition to the loop (steps 1028 to 1036), the value indicating the stopped state is referred to, and the progress of the game described as "basic game progress" These controls will be described later in the description of interrupt processing.

Returning to the description of the power-on process in FIG. 7, the following process will be described. When the game stop state setting process (step 1008) ends, it is determined whether or not there is a RAM clear operation (step 1010). The ram clear operation is that the ram clear switch P48 is operated when the power of the pachinko game machine P is turned on. This processing is executed both when the setting key switch P49 is off and when it is on. If it is determined in step 1010 that the ram clear operation has been performed, a predetermined portion of the memory area of the ram of the main control board P40 is initialized.

In the subsequent processing from step 1014 to step 1020, a processing of setting an effect control command (effect command) for recognizing the state of the game machine from the main control board P40 to the effect control board P41 when the power is turned on is performed. More specifically, in step 1014, processing is performed to clear from the storage area the effect control commands that have not been transmitted when the power was cut off last time (when the power was cut off). Then, in step 1016, information about the current game state of the main control board P40 that has returned after power-on is generated as an effect control command. An effect control command indicating the played state is set in an area for storing the transmission data of the effect control command.

When the processing related to the setting of the effect control command at the time of power-on is completed, the necessary data (driving signal ) is output from the output port to the special electric accessory drive means P70 and the normal electric accessory drive means P71. (Step 1022)

Then, when the processing up to step 1022 in the power-on processing is completed, the CPU of the main control board P40 is processed to set the generation interval of the interrupt processing time (step 1024). In the premise pachinko game machine P, the interval at which interrupt processing ( FIG. 9 , step 2000 ) to be described later is executed is set to 4 ms (milliseconds). When this process ends, the game shifts to a cyclic process called a main loop in which the player is ready to play, and the cyclic process in the main loop is repeated until a power failure occurs.

(Main loop)
In the main loop processing of the main control board, as shown in FIG. 7, first, in step 1026, processing is performed to prohibit the occurrence of interrupt processing, and until the processing of the main loop is completed (interrupt is permitted in step 1036). (until) limit the execution of interrupt processing.

When the interrupt is disabled, in the following step 1028, a watchdog timer called a CPU for the main control board P40 runs out of control (such as a situation where the process loops and does not proceed) to monitor the occurrence. Clears (initializes) the area that stores the clock information.

Then, in step 1030, it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (for example, whether a power failure signal sent based on a voltage drop from the power supply board P44 is input to the input port of the CPU of the main control board P40). If a power failure occurs, the current game state is stored, power failure information and checksum information are stored, and power failure processing (step 1032) stops processing of the main control board P40 as a CPU. ). If power failure has not occurred, the process proceeds to the next step.

In step 1034, a process of updating the random number used for the special symbol lottery and the random number value used for the normal symbol lottery is performed. Some of these random values are updated in interrupt processing, which will be described later, and this is processing to prevent the random number update cycle from becoming constant due to random numbers being updated only in interrupt processing. If there are processes that are executed irregularly in the interrupt process, it is also possible to prevent the random number update cycle from becoming constant by adopting a method such as updating random numbers according to those processes. Therefore, it is not essential to provide random number update processing in the main loop.

Step 1036 is the final processing in the main loop, and performs processing for enabling interrupts. Immediately after that, the process returns to step 1026, which is the first process in the main loop, to disable interrupts. If the CPU of the main control board P40 receives an input indicating the state of the state that the state has been set, an interrupt process, which will be described later, is executed.

[Interrupt processing]
Next, the interrupt processing (also called "timer interrupt processing") performed by the CPU of the main control board P40 will be described with reference to FIG. In the premised pachinko game machine P, most of the progress of the game is controlled by interrupt processing (step 2000), and the submodule program provided to be changeable according to the game machine specifications (spec) is universally fixed. are configured to be read out and controlled in the order of The processing for these submodules is briefly described below.

(clear watchdog timer)
At the beginning of interrupt processing, watchdog timer clear processing is provided. This process is the same as the watchdog timer clear process in the main loop process (FIG. 7, steps 1026 to 1036) executed by the CPU of the main control board P40. (Step 2002)

(Input port confirmation processing)
In the input port confirmation process, by confirming the information input to the input port of the CPU of the main control board P40, it is possible to identify whether or not there is input information as information necessary for judgment in subsequent processes. This is the process to generate. (Step 2004)

The information input to the input port includes an input signal indicating the operation status of the ram clear switch P48 and the setting key switch P49, and an input signal indicating the operation status (whether touched or not) of the handle P204. , An input signal indicating the game result by detecting a game ball such as a special figure 1 starter switch P712 and a large winning opening switch P752, a magnetic sensor P73, a door open sensor P131, a vibration detection sensor P72, etc. provided for fraud monitoring There is an input signal that indicates the detection status of the sensor.

In the input port confirmation process, the input signals of these input ports are read three times in 10 μs (microseconds), and the data that becomes the same data (same bit) in all readings is the input data ("level data") for this interrupt. ) in the RAM of the main control board P40. Of the data read three times, the data that was determined in the previous interrupt processing (interrupt processing 4 ms before) is adopted as the level data for the portion that is not the same data in all the readings. If the data cannot be read normally in the above, the data stored in the previous interrupt will not be updated.

Then, when the input data (level data) for this interrupt is determined, a comparison operation is performed with the input data for the previous interrupt to generate "rising data" (data specifying the bit where the input data changed from off to on), Stores data specifying the switch that has been switched to ON input by the interrupt this time.

(random number update process)
Random number update process is software This is a process of updating so-called soft random numbers, which are random numbers to be updated (step 2006). In the premised pachinko game machine P, the random numbers used for the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery are those in which the random number generation circuit updates the random numbers at the update cycle on the circuit, and those which are updated at the software cycle. By combining them, it is configured to maintain the randomness of various random numbers when obtaining random numbers.

In the random number update process, as described above, the process of updating the soft random numbers is performed.
(a) A random number is updated by incrementing (+1) or decrementing (-1), and if the upper limit (or lower limit) of the random number range is exceeded, the lower limit (or upper limit) is set;
(b) Subtracting (or adding) an arbitrary prime number to a random number, and adding (or subtracting) the value of the random number range +1 (or random number range -1) when the random number range is exceeded,
(c) Repeatedly increment (or decrement) from the random number set as the initial value, and when one cycle of updating is completed, set the separately updated "initial random number" as the new initial value and perform the same update. Repeated ones (also called initial value updating random numbers),
Various update methods can be exemplified. It should be noted that the update method is not limited to the one exemplified in this embodiment, and any method may be adopted as long as the method can maintain the randomness of random numbers.

(Setting control processing)
The setting control process is performed when the game stop flag set during the power-on process (see FIG. 7) in the CPU of the main control board P40 is "setting changing" or "setting checking". (Step 2008)

In the setting control process, it is first determined whether the bit data indicating that the setting key operation of the data stored as the game stop flag during the power-on process is ON data. If the setting key has not been turned on when the power is turned on, this process is exited.

On the other hand, if the bit data indicating that the setting key is being operated in the game stop flag is ON data, the current interrupt Referring to the input information of the setting key switch P49 in the process (generated in the input port confirmation process described above), when the setting key switch P49 is turned off, the game stop flag is cleared and the game is enabled. An effect control command for returning (or starting) the effect to the effect control board is set depending on whether the return is from the "setting change state" or the "setting confirmation state".

Also, in the power-on process (see FIG. 7), if the game stop flag is "changing settings", the role of the "setting change switch" at this interrupt timing is played until the setting key switch P49 is turned off. Check the operating status of the ram clear switch P48 (switch operated to change the set value). When the game stop flag is "under change of setting", in the current interruption, when the rising data related to the operation of the setting change switch P48 is generated, the "set value" is changed to the next in the predetermined change order. Change the data so that it becomes the setting value. For example, in the case of a pachinko game machine P having set value data such that the setting is switched in order from 1 to 6, every time there is start-up data based on the operation of the setting change switch (ram clear switch P48), the setting is set in this setting control process. Perform processing to increase the value by "1" (when the set value before the operation is 6, it is changed to 1 as the next value).

In the premise pachinko game machine P, by providing the processing in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state during the interrupt processing (see FIG. 9), the operation of the setting key switch and the setting change switch is monitored at the cycle of the interrupt processing. A program for periodic monitoring during the power-on process (see FIG. 7) that enables the output of display data to the display device by the LED output process described later, and the interrupt process cannot be set separately (see FIG. 7) can be omitted. Note that, during the power-on process, it may be configured to monitor switches related to setting changes and setting confirmation, control the display device, and update the set values.

(Game stop monitoring process)
In the game stop monitoring process, the CPU of the main control board reads the data of the game stop flag generated during the power-on process (see FIG. 7) executed when the power of the pachinko game machine is turned on, and determines whether the game is stopped. This is a process to confirm whether (Step 2010)

In the game stop monitoring process, if some game stop information (game stop flag) is stored in the read game stop flag data, for example, if the game stop flag data is not 0 but one of the bits is "1 ”, it is determined that the game is in a stopped state (a state in which the game needs to be stopped), and assuming that the game is stopped, part of the processing during the interrupt processing (“timer subtraction processing (step 2014)” in FIG. 9 to “special electric Accessory control process (step 2028)") are omitted.

In the premise pachinko gaming machine P, as a state in which the game needs to be stopped, that is, in a state in which the player cannot play the game, "setting changing", "setting checking", "unrecoverable error" is occurring" can be exemplified.

(Timer subtraction processing)
The timer subtraction process is a process of updating the timer data used for time management regarding the progress of the game (step 2014).

Examples of timer data update processing include management of the variable display time set when the variable display of special symbols is started, operation time of the special electric accessory P755 during the big hit game (open time of the big winning opening P751 ) and other timer data update processing triggered by game progress, timing processing for error determination such as detecting ball clogging, LED lighting pattern in main control display device P50 such as special symbol display devices P51 and P52 and a process for timing a period for outputting information from the external information output terminal P77 or the like to an external device (such as a hall computer).

The timer data to be updated by the timer update process is stored in the storage area (ram storage area) of the main control board P40, divided by type of timer data such as "1-byte timer" and "2-byte timer". Each is stored in a storage area.

In the timer update process, processes such as "1-byte timer update process" and "2-byte timer update process" are performed on the storage area that stores the types of individual timer data, and the time values of various timers are updated. I do. In the timer update process, the timer data stored in the storage area is decremented (-1). If the stored timer data is already "0", it will be processed to be "0" even after processing (if it becomes a negative value, it will be set to "0", Do not decrement if "0", etc.).

In the premised pachinko game machine P, the cycle of one interrupt is 4 ms, so in the case of 1-byte timer data, only the managed object that ends in a maximum of 255 updates (about 1 second) is controlled. It is possible, but if there is no game information managed within one second (when there is little), it is possible to configure only with 2-byte timer data and without 1-byte timer update processing. is. Also, if it is necessary to manage a time value that cannot be managed with a 2-byte timer, it may be configured to have timer data that can manage a longer time than a "3-byte timer".

(Effective period setting process)
Validity period setting processing is a period for controlling the easy-to-enter mode or the difficult-to-enter mode for winning holes that can be changed to the easy-to-enter mode or the difficult-to-enter mode (mainly the big winning hole P751 and the winning hole related to the normal electric accessory P770). And, it is a process of setting the valid period in the valid extension period, and setting the invalid period for the other period (when the winning opening is in the difficult-to-enter state and the valid extension period is not valid). (Step 2016)

In the premise pachinko game machine, the winning of the second start winning opening P721, which is the second starting winning opening P720 provided with the large winning opening P751 as the big winning device and the normal electric accessory P770, is set as the valid period. It becomes the processing to do.

In addition, during the effective extension period, in order to treat the game ball entered at the timing just before the large winning opening P751 or the normal electric role P770 shifts to the difficult entry mode P755) and ordinary electric accessories such as P770 are treated as effective periods even after the control period for executing the opening control has passed. control period.

Further, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, when the specific area P760 (V area) is provided, an effective extension period for the passage of the game ball with respect to the specific area P760 may be set. The validity period of the specific area is also set.

(Prize monitoring process)
The winning monitoring process determines whether or not the winning is valid based on the winning of game balls to various winning ports (large winning port P751, starting ports P711, P721, general winning port P731) in the pachinko game machine, It is a process of generating information that triggers the process of generating (occurrence of suspension) the right of special symbol lottery for balls and starting entrance balls. (Step 2018)

The contents of the processing are (a) detecting the presence or absence of a winning prize for each of the various winning ports in a predetermined order based on the data generated in the input port confirmation processing (step 2004); If there is a winning during the valid period, and if there is a valid winning for each winning slot, (c) a performance control command indicating winning information for each winning slot to be sent to the performance control board P41. setting, (d) updating a counter value (referred to as a "winning counter") for storing the number of occurrences of operation triggers based on winning for each winning opening (in other words, among operations based on detection of various winning openings); update a counter value that stores the number of unprocessed operations in ).

In addition, in the winning monitoring process, not only the occurrence of winnings to various winning holes, but also the out ball detection switch P792 provided for counting out balls, the operation hole switch P742 that triggers the normal symbol lottery, and the game machine Depending on the specification, it is also determined whether the game ball enters or passes through the specific area P760 (V area), and in addition to the occurrence of the prize ball and the occurrence of the special symbol lottery, the operation of the gaming machine (for example, In this process, presence or absence of detection of the game ball required for the process of transmitting information indicating that the operation port switch P742 or the specific area P760 has passed is performed with respect to the effect control board P41.

(Working opening monitoring process)
In the operation port monitoring process, when the start-up data of the normal pattern operation port switch P742 is generated from the data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), the normal symbol lottery is held (also referred to as the normal symbol hold). ) is performed. (Step 2020)

More specifically, when the normal pattern operation port switch P742 is detected, the number of reservations related to the normal symbol lottery is confirmed, and if the number of reservations is less than the upper limit, a random number is stored as a new reservation. Because it is possible, after incrementing (+1) the data in the storage area that stores the number of reservations and increasing the number of reservations information by 1, the general pattern accuracy random number, the general pattern random number, and the general pattern fluctuation pattern random number Get it from the generator circuit or get the current corresponding soft random number and store it as pending.

(Normal symbol control process)
In the normal symbol control process, normal symbol lottery, normal symbol fluctuation display, and normal electric accessory P770 are processed (step 2022). These processes shift to different submodule processes depending on whether the data indicating the control state of the normal symbol called normal symbol status or the control state of the normal electric accessory is performed, and control is performed according to the state. As the status of the normal design, "0: Normal design waiting", "1: Normal design changing", "2: Normal design stop display", "3: Normal electric accessory in operation", "4: Normal "Demonstrating the end of electric accessories" is available, and processing is performed according to each state.

<<Normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process>>
The normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process is a sub-module process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "0: normal symbol standby".

In the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the number of reservations related to the normal symbol lottery is "0". If it is "0", the right to change the normal symbol has not occurred, so the normal symbol control process is exited. On the other hand, if the number of reservations related to the normal symbol lottery is not "0", it means that the normal symbol fluctuation right has occurred, and it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation start conditions are satisfied, and the normal symbol fluctuation is started. Execute the process related to start.

When it is determined to start changing the normal pattern, after subtracting 1 from the holding number information from the area that stores the holding number information related to the normal pattern lottery, the general pattern success or failure random number, the general pattern random number, and the general pattern fluctuation pattern random number are respectively Call it and perform a general pattern lottery, a general pattern pattern lottery, and a general pattern variation pattern lottery, store the lottery results in the storage area of the main control board, clear the random number information used this time, and save the storage area for the pending number information. While performing a process of shifting so as to be processed in the stored order, the normal design status is updated to "1: during normal design fluctuation". Regarding the normal symbol lottery, different lottery tables are used according to the operation status of the above-mentioned "base state" (normal symbol probability variation function, normal symbol variation time reduction function), and it is easy to win in the high base state. , The variable display time of normal symbols tends to be determined to be short.

《Processing during normal symbol fluctuation》
The normal design changing process is a sub-module process called from the normal design control process when the normal design status is "1: normal design changing".

In the normal symbol fluctuation process, the normal symbol fluctuation display time corresponding to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determined during the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process elapses, that is, the timer that manages the normal symbol fluctuation display (normal Until the symbol variation display timer) becomes 0 in the timer update process, the normal symbol display device P53 is a process of executing variation display of normal symbols.

More specifically, when the normal symbol fluctuation display timer is not 0, the maximum value of the general pattern display switching counter is "5" every time this process is executed, and the general pattern display switching counter is " 5", a process of storing information on the next light emission pattern is performed in a storage area for storing data for designating the light emission pattern of the LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device P53. It should be noted that the normal map display switching counter is reset to the initial value of "0" at the timing when it reaches the maximum value of "5". That is, the variable display of the normal design is such that the lighting pattern of the normal design display device P53 is switched at intervals of 5 interrupts (4ms×5=20ms). In addition, the switching interval can be set as appropriate, for example, if the maximum value of the normal pattern display switching counter is set to 25, the display pattern of the normal pattern display device P53 is switched at intervals of once every 25 interrupts (once every 100 ms). be done.

When the normal pattern fluctuation display time ends, that is, when the normal pattern fluctuation display timer is "0", in this process, the display pattern of the normal pattern stop display pattern determined by the normal pattern lottery is displayed on the main control display device. The data for designating the LED lighting pattern indicating the stop display mode is stored in the storage area for storing the LED lighting pattern of the normal design display device P53 so that it is stopped and displayed on the normal design display device P53 in P50. Then, the normal symbol fixed time (time for displaying the stop display symbol) is stored in the normal symbol stop display timer, and the normal symbol status is updated to "2: during normal symbol stop display".

<<Normal symbol stop display process>>
The normal symbol stop display process is a sub-module process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "2: normal symbol stop display".

In the normal symbol stop display process, it is confirmed whether the value of the normal symbol stop display timer, in which the symbol fixed time is set at the end of the normal symbol fluctuation process, is "0", and at the timing when it becomes "0" Then, a setting process for moving to the next game operation is performed.

When the normal pattern stop display timer becomes "0", if the result of this normal pattern lottery is "hit", according to the winning pattern and the operating state of the base state (normal electric accessory extension function) , Call the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory P770, set the operation pattern, clear the prize counter related to the normal electric accessory P770, etc., and set the normal symbol status to "3: Normal electric accessory in operation ”.

On the other hand, when the normal symbol stop display timer becomes "0", if the result of this normal symbol lottery is "lost", the normal symbol status is updated to "0: normal symbol waiting". I do.

《Processing during operation of ordinary electric accessories》
The normal electric auditors product operating process is a submodule process that is called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "3: normal electric auditors product in operation".

In the normal electric accessory operating process, based on the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory P770 set in the normal symbol stop display process, the opening operation (change to easy entry mode) and closing operation of the normal electric accessory (Change to difficult-to-ball mode) and monitor the establishment of the operation end condition of the normal electric accessory. The end of the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is (a) when the specified number of normal electric accessories winning set as the end condition of the normal electric accessory occurs, (b) the operation of the preset operation pattern ends This is the case (when the opening operation period of the normal electric accessories has ended).

When the condition for ending the operation of the normal electric accessory is established, the timer area for storing the effective extension period of the normal electric accessory is used to measure the extended period of a certain time predetermined corresponding to the structure of the ordinary electric accessory P770. set the time. Then, the time value related to the normal electric accessory operation end demonstration is set to the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer, and the normal symbol status is set to "4: Normal electric accessory end demonstration in progress".

《Demonstration process for ending operation of ordinary electric accessories》
The normal electric auditors product operation end demonstration process is a submodule process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "4: normal electric auditors product end demonstration".

In the normal electric accessory operation end demonstration process, wait until the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer set in the normal electric accessory operation process becomes "0", and the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer becomes "0" When it becomes, the process of updating the normal symbol status to "0: normal symbol standby" is performed.

(Starting door monitoring process)
Starting port monitoring processing, from the data generated in the input port confirmation processing (step 2004), when the rising data of the special figure 1 starting opening switch P712 and the special figure 2 starting opening switch P722 are generated, a special symbol lottery Retention pertaining to the lottery of the 1st special design, also referred to as the 1st reservation and the 1st special design reservation, and the reservation pertaining to the lottery of the 2nd special design, the 2nd reservation ) is generated. (Step 2024)

More specifically, when the special figure 1 starter switch P712 and the special figure 2 starter switch P722 are detected, check the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery, and if the number of reservations is less than the upper limit , because it is possible to store a random number as a new hold, after incrementing (+1) the data in the storage area storing the hold number and increasing the hold number information by 1, the success or failure random number, pattern random number, variation pattern A random number is obtained from the random number generator or the current corresponding soft random number is obtained and stored as pending.

It should be noted that, in the pachinko gaming machine P, as a premise, there are two types of special symbols, a first special symbol (sometimes referred to as special figure 1) and a second special symbol (sometimes referred to as special figure 2). Since the symbols are provided, for each starting port provided on the game board P5, the holding number of the corresponding special symbol and the data of the starting port switch are called, and the pending number is added and the random number is acquired for each starting port. is processed.

In addition, when the starting opening to be processed is composed of the starting opening (electric chew) related to the normal electric accessory, the starting opening winning related to the normal electric accessory P770 is valid in the valid period setting process described above. After judging whether or not it is performed within the period, if it is within the effective period, the above-described processing is performed.

In addition, when storing random numbers, pattern random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers, the obtained random number information is used in advance by using the advance notice judgment value table, and the content of the variation when the variation based on the various random numbers to be withheld is executed in advance. Information that can be guessed is generated, and notified as an effect control command to the effect control board P41 (referred to as "pre-determination command", "pre-determination information", and "pre-reading determination command"). Pre-judgment commands are generated for each of the win/fail random numbers, pattern random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers, and when transmitted to the effect control board P41, the effect control board P41 uses the lottery related to the execution of the "prefetch effect" described later. be done.

(Special symbol control processing)
The special symbol control process (step 2026) includes state information for managing special symbols called special symbol status (also referred to as "special symbol status") and special electric accessory status (also referred to as "special electric game status"). Depending on the state information for managing the operating state of the called special electric accessory, any of the special symbol variation start management (special symbol variation start monitoring control process), special symbol variation process, and special symbol stop symbol display process or

The special symbol status includes "0: waiting for special symbol fluctuation", "1: special symbol fluctuating", "2: missing symbol stopped display", "3: big hit symbol stopped displayed", "4: small hit The status of the special electric role product is "0: Waiting for winning", "1: Special electric role product in operation", "2: Closed big prize opening", "3 : Big win end demonstration in progress", "4: Small win special electric power in operation", "5: Small win closed", and "6: Small win end demonstration in progress". It should be noted that, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, there may be cases where no small win is provided, and in that case, there is no status data related to the small win. Control based on these statuses will be described later.

The special symbol control process is performed based on a predetermined order (priority order) when there are a plurality of special symbols. As a predetermined order, the second special symbol is preferentially controlled, and in the situation where both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are held, the second special symbol is changed first. The game machine specification processed so as to be started (the second special symbol preferentially fluctuates) is called "second special symbol (special figure 2) priority digestion control", and the implementation of the pachinko game machine P as a premise In the description related to the form, the processing related to this type will be illustrated and described.

In the special symbol control process, first, the second special symbol is controlled. When the control of the second special symbol is started, the information of the special symbol status of the first special symbol and the special electric accessary product status is referred to first. If the special electric role product status is data indicating that the big win game or the small win game is in progress (when the special electric role product status is other than "0: waiting for winning"), the first special symbol is fluctuating. If the special symbol status of the special symbol is other than "0: waiting for special symbol variation", the process is completed without performing the process.

When the situation is such that the control of the second special symbol is executed, a process of updating the timer value of the control related to the second special symbol is executed. The timer is updated by decrementing (-1) the data in the storage area storing the timer, and if the result of the decrement is a negative value, "0" is set. Then, when the update of the timer ends, based on the special symbol status corresponding to the special symbol 2, a sub-module process, which will be described later, is called and executed. Although it has a timer subtraction process even during the interrupt process, the timer data updated by the special symbol control process is not included in the timer updated by the timer subtraction process, and in the special symbol control process It manages timer data for control related to special symbols.

<<Special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process>>
The special symbol variation start monitoring control process is a sub-module process that shifts when the special symbol status is "0: waiting for special symbol variation".

In the special symbol variation start monitoring control process, it is confirmed whether or not the special symbol being processed as a target is reserved, and if there is no reservation, the process is finished, and if there is a reservation, the subsequent process is executed. The subsequent process is a special symbol lottery that is performed when the fluctuation is started. In the special symbol lottery, first, the data stored as set values are read and inspected to determine whether or not the set value information is appropriate. If the set value is appropriate, the data in the area storing each flag indicating the game state etc. is referred to, and the appropriate lottery table is selected. After being stored in the storage area, the special symbol status is updated to "1: during special symbol fluctuation". In addition, the content determined by the special symbol lottery is transmitted to the performance control board P41 as a performance control command (win/fail command, symbol command, variation pattern command), and the content of the variable performance executed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol. is used as information for determination processing (lottery processing). The details of the special symbol lottery will be described later.

《Processing during special symbol fluctuation》
The special symbol fluctuating process is a sub-module process that shifts when the special symbol status is "1: special symbol fluctuating".

In the special symbol variation process, the timer for managing the variation display time of the special symbol is monitored until the variation time of the special symbol determined by the variation pattern lottery passes, and until the remaining variation time becomes "0", every interruption. With the special symbol display switching timer (maximum value "24") to be updated, the special symbol display device (second special symbol display device P52 (at the time of control of special symbol 1) to show the variable display of the special symbol every 25 interrupts performs switching processing of the lighting display pattern of the first special symbol display device P51)).

When the remaining variable display time of the special symbols becomes "0", it indicates that the variable display of the special symbols has been executed once for an external device (data counter, hall computer, etc.) connected to the pachinko game machine P. Setting of information for outputting an external signal, processing of setting a symbol fixation time for fixed display of a special symbol stop display pattern, and stop display indicating a stop display pattern determined as a result of a win-or-fail lottery and a pattern lottery. Setting of lighting pattern data for displaying the pattern on the special pattern display device P52 (P51) is performed. Then, the special symbol status is set to any one of ``2: Losing symbols are stopped and displayed'', ``3: Big win symbols are stopped and displayed'', and ``4: Small win symbols are stopped and displayed'' according to the result of the lottery.

<<Process during special symbol missing symbol stop display>>
The special symbol lost symbol stop display process is a process that shifts when the special symbol status is "2: during lost symbol stop display".

In the special symbol lost symbol stop display process, it is checked whether the value of the timer for managing the symbol fixing time set in the special symbol fluctuation process has become "0", and if it becomes "0", it becomes a processing target. Update the special symbol status of the special symbol that is currently running to "0: special symbol variation standby", and the remaining game count of the game state (probability variation function, electric chew support function, variation time reduction function) related to the special symbol lottery As well as updating, it confirms whether the end condition is satisfied, and when the game state transition condition is satisfied, it performs control (flag off, etc.) related to the transition of the game state.

<<Processing during special symbol jackpot symbol stop display>>
The special symbol big-hit symbol stop display process is a process that shifts when the special symbol status is "3: big-hit symbol stop display".

In the special symbol big hit symbol stop display processing, it is checked whether the value of the timer managing the symbol fixing time set in the special symbol fluctuation processing has become "0", and if it becomes "0", it becomes a processing target. While updating the special symbol status of the special symbol that is being played to "0: special symbol variation standby", the special electric role product status is updated to "2: large winning opening closed". Furthermore, in order to end the game state (probability fluctuation function, electric chew support function, fluctuation time reduction function) related to the special symbol lottery, the processing of clearing the remaining number of times information storage area and the operation flag storage area is executed. Then, in order to execute a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot pattern, the information in various storage areas used as data during the previous jackpot game is initialized from the jackpot pattern information, and the special electric role product P755 is controlled during the jackpot game. Set content data.

In the special symbol big hit symbol stop display process, further, a process of transmitting an effect control command for executing a big win game effect (big hit start demo effect) to the effect control board P41 is executed. In addition, in accordance with these processes, a right-handed indicator P56, which is one of the constituent elements of the main control display device P50, indicates a game state in which a right-handed game in which a game ball is shot aiming at the right side of the game area is recommended. Setting of the lighting pattern data for lighting the LED which is lit at times is also performed.

<<Process during special symbol small hit symbol stop display>>
The special symbol small-hit symbol stop display process is a process that shifts when the special symbol status is "4: during small-hit design stop display".

As in the special symbol big hit symbol stop display process, the special symbol big hit symbol stop display process is performed with the end of the symbol fixing time, setting data related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755, and turning on the right hand indicator light P56. Such setting processing is performed. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the underlying technology, when a small winning game is executed (stop display of small winning symbols), unlike when the big winning symbols are stopped, the game state related to the special symbol lottery (high probability state or High base state) does not have processing to end, and the game state is determined based on the determination result of whether or not the end condition is satisfied for each game state, similar to the processing of the special symbol lost symbol stop display process. Control. In addition, in accordance with these processes, the special electric role product status is updated to "5: Closed for small prizes". Depending on the specifications of the game machine, as a modified example, when a small winning game is executed, the specification is designed to have a process for forcibly ending the game state (high probability state or high base state) in the same way as when the big winning pattern is stopped. is also possible.

When any one of the above sub-module processes is selectively performed, the first special symbol process is performed following the second special symbol process. Regarding the processing of the first special symbol, only the information to be referred to is different from the processing of the second special symbol (for example, regarding whether or not the fluctuation can be started, the special symbol status of the second special symbol is not the special symbol status of the first special symbol. , etc.), the description is omitted because almost the same processing is repeated.

《Entrance order digestion control, parallel control》
In addition, in the explanation of the special symbol control process described above, the explanation was based on the process related to the "second special symbol priority digestion control", but in the case of adopting a game machine specification different from the pachinko game machine on which this assumption is made. Alternatively, it is possible to proceed with the special symbol control process in a different process. A brief description of typical examples will be given below.

"Entering ball order digestion control" is a game machine specification in which the reservation information corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is processed one by one in the order of occurrence. While one pattern is fluctuating, the other is not displayed, and in a certain game state, both the reserved ball corresponding to the first special pattern and the reserved ball corresponding to the second special pattern are generated. It is a specification that is often adopted when it is expected.

"Parallel control (parallel digestion)" is different from the above-mentioned "second special symbol preferential digestion control" and "entering order digestion", and at the same time both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time. It is a type of game machine specification that can be used. Since two symbols can be digested at the same time, it is possible to increase the number of special symbol lotteries per unit time. In addition, when the special electric accessory P755 is activated along with the stop display of one special symbol (when a big hit or a small hit is executed), the other symbol is forcibly lost and the symbol is stopped, or the variable display is performed. A specification that suspends the subtraction of the remaining time is appropriately adopted. As an example, when one special symbol becomes a big hit, the other special symbol is forcibly removed and stopped and displayed, and when one special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is displayed. It is possible to adopt a specification that temporarily suspends the variable display of special symbols.

(Special electric accessory control processing)
The special electric role product control process executes submodule processing related to the operation of the special electric role product P755 according to the data content (value) of the special electric role product status (sometimes referred to as the special electric role product status). This is the process of managing the operation of the object (step 2028). In other words, when executing the big winning game or the small winning game, each state in the big winning game or small winning game state is controlled, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening P751 is controlled.

As described above, the special electric role product status includes "0: Waiting for winning", "1: Special electric role item in operation", "2: Closed big prize opening", and "3: Demonstrating the end of big win". , ``4: small winning special electric is in operation'', ``5: small winning closed'', and ``6: small winning ending demonstration in progress''.

Among these special electric role product statuses, if the status is "0: Waiting for winning", it is because the player has not yet acquired the right to execute the big winning game or the small winning game by playing the game. , The special electric accessary product control process ends without performing the process.

Then, when the special electric role product status is other than "0: Waiting for winning", one of the processes described later is executed according to the status.

<<Process during operation of special electric accessories>>
Special electric auditors product in operation process is a process that is executed when the special electric auditors product status is "1: special electric auditors product in operation" or "4: small hit special electric in operation". This process is a process in a state in which a so-called round game (unit game) is being executed in a special game (a state in which the opening of the big winning opening P751 can be controlled).

In the special electric accessary product in operation process, first, a process of determining whether or not the end condition of the round game (unit game) is satisfied is performed. The conditions for ending the round game are (a) whether the specified number of winnings (also called "count") corresponding to the activated special electric accessory has been performed, or (b) the operation pattern of the special electric accessory to be executed. It is determined that the opening time (opening pattern) set as has ended or has ended when either of the following is satisfied. If these conditions are not met, the special electric accessary product control process in this interrupt process is terminated without performing subsequent processes. In addition, among the operation patterns (opening patterns) of the special electric accessory P755, there is a pattern that opens and closes the big winning opening P751 multiple times, and when these patterns are executed, one round While the timer used for the determination of (a) becomes "0" multiple times during the game, after confirming whether or not there is next operation data during one round game, condition (c) " If it is determined that there is no next operation pattern data in the current unit game, it is determined that the above (b) is satisfied.

On the other hand, if either of the round game end conditions (a) or (b) is satisfied, as a subsequent process, the closing time of the big winning opening is stored in the closing time management timer of the special electric accessory. , the special electric role product status is incremented to be "2: Closed big prize opening". Then, the command data for notifying that the round game has ended is set as the effect control command to the effect control board P41, and the process ends.

《Processing while the big winning mouth is closed》
The large winning opening closing process is a process that is executed when the special electric role product status is "2: large winning opening closed" or "5: small prize closed". This process is a process in a state of being controlled "between rounds" between so-called round games in a special game, and before the start of the first round at the start of a big win game or a small win game When the state is controlled by the state of "big win start demonstration (period)" or "minor win start demonstration (period)", or after the round game of the final round is completed, the process during the winning end demonstration, which will be described later, is executed. This is a process related to the state of being controlled during the waiting period until it becomes possible.

In the big winning opening closing process, first, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening closing time set in the special electric accessory operating process has passed, and the closing time management timer is not "0", that is, the closing time If has not elapsed, the special electric accessary product control processing in this interruption is terminated.

When the closing time of the big winning opening has passed, whether the operation (round game) of the special electric role product P755 whose operation has ended first was the final round game in the current winning game (big winning game, small winning game). It is determined whether or not, and different processing is executed at the end of the final round game and at the end of the round game other than the final round (or at the time of winning start demonstration). It should be noted that, to determine whether or not it was the final round game, the cumulative data of the number of times of operation of the special electric auditors P755 operated during this winning game is the maximum number of times of operation of the special electric auditors P755 in this winning game , and the accumulated data of the number of operations of the special electric accessory P755 is "0" at the time of the winning start demonstration.

When it is determined that the final round game is finished in the processing during closing of the big winning opening, the execution pattern of the winning end demonstration according to the type of winning (the type of special symbol that started the big winning or small winning). (mainly winning end demonstration time data) is read and set. Then, the special electric accessory status is incremented to set "3: big win end demonstration in progress" or "6: small win end demonstration in progress", and a production command for executing the winning end demonstration production is set in the production control board P41. to do Furthermore, in order to set the effective extension period of the big winning opening P751, the time value data determined as the effective extending period is stored in the timer that manages the effective extending period of the big winning opening P751, and the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end of a game other than the final round game (or at the time of a winning start demonstration) in the processing during closing of the big winning opening, the effect control command for the effect control board P41 is issued to the effect control board P41. Information that makes it possible to identify whether there is (N round start demo command * N is an integer) and recommended firing position during winning game Sends information to instruct (right-handed command).

Then, the special electric role product status is decremented and updated to ``1: special electric role product in operation'' or ``4: small winning special electric prize in operation'', and the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening P751 during the round game. Initialize the data in the data area for counting. Then, the operation pattern data of the big winning opening P751 (special electric accessory P755) in the round game is set as the time value related to the first opening of the big winning opening P751 during the round game (or closing immediately after the start of the round game). and increment the data in the storage area regarding the cumulative number of operations of the special electric accessory P755.

(Prize ball control processing)
The prize ball control process is a process for giving a game ball as a prize ball to the player in response to winning of a game ball in a prize winning hole arranged on the game board P5. The processing contents are configured to execute the following three sub-module processes. (Step 2030)

<<Payment data reception monitoring process>>
The payout data reception monitoring process is a process of confirming the presence or absence of a control command related to execution of prize ball payout transmitted from the payout control board P43 to the main control board P40, and receiving (storing) the transmitted command. . The main control board P0 stores the information transmitted from the payout control board P43 in two registers (storage areas). Register 1 is called a status register, and stores information for determining whether or not there is information transmitted from the payout control board P43 and whether or not the transmitted information has been transmitted normally. It is The other register is called a data register, and stores control content information regarding payout control transmitted from the payout control board P43. If the status register is abnormal, the data in the data register is stored as payout control information. store in the area.

<<Payment command request processing>>
In the payout command requesting process, winning counter data for each winning opening storing data on the number of winnings of various winning openings stored in the winning monitoring process (step 2018) is confirmed to confirm whether or not there is an unpaid winning. In the confirmation process, each winning hole is confirmed in a predetermined order, and if it is determined that the winning counter data for one winning hole is not "0", the number of winning balls of the corresponding winning hole , a process of transmitting a control command for executing the payout of game balls to the payout control board P43. By this process, even if the winning counter data for a plurality of winning holes is not "0", the number of payout control commands transmitted to the payout control board P43 in one interrupt is limited to one.

<<Payout command control process>>
In the payout command control process, it is checked whether or not the payout control board P43 has normally received the information regarding the number of payouts. It will happen. Until the command reception status is determined in the payout command control process (it is determined whether the command has been received normally or an error has occurred), the next payout control command transmission in the payout command request process is performed by the payout command request process. And it is temporarily interrupted by the flag data set to ON/OFF respectively in the payout command control process.

(abnormality detection processing)
The anomaly detection process is a process for confirming whether or not an anomaly has occurred based on information from a sensor provided for fraud detection in the premise pachinko game machine P. FIG. (Step 2032)

More specifically, regarding the input of sensors such as the vibration sensor P72, the magnetic sensor P73, the radio wave detection sensor P74, and the frame opening sensor P131, the occurrence of an abnormality is detected based on the input information generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004). This is the process of determining whether or not the In addition to the various sensors, the sensor also detects unplugged harnesses for electrical connection, short circuits on wiring, and the like.

Then, when there is abnormal data for any of the determination information, after storing the corresponding error flag to be turned on, a command for notifying the error information is set as the effect control command for the effect control board P41. do.

(Sensor detection judgment processing)
In the sensor detection determination process, the period during which sensor or switch detection was continuously performed is determined from the sensor or switch detection data (level data) generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), and the process is performed. This is processing for establishing a flag. (Step 2034)

In the sensor detection determination process, when the level data of the target sensor and switch detection data information is ON, the data for counting the continuous ON input period of the corresponding switch is incremented and updated, and various processes are executed. It is determined whether or not a start condition is satisfied, and if the condition is satisfied, a process corresponding to the switch to be monitored is executed. When the monitored switch is no longer ON data, the data counting the continuous input period is initialized (updated to "0").

For example, if the winning hole detection switch provided in the winning hole continuously detects that the switch is in the ON state, it is determined that the ball clogging has occurred, and the error state is controlled and produced. Processing of setting command information for performing error notification to the effect control board P41 as a control command, and generation and output request of signal data for notifying the occurrence of an error to an external device (hall computer, etc.).

Switches to be detected in this process include a touch sensor switch provided on the steering wheel P204 and a switch for fraud detection. It also targets sensors that require on-data input for a certain period of time.

(Game state display processing)
The game state display process is a process of generating lighting data for displaying information about the progress of the game on the main control display device P50. Although the name is display processing, output of display contents to the main control display device P50 is performed not by this processing but by LED output processing described later. (Step 2036)

In the premised pachinko game machine P, as an example, an error indicator light (status indicator light P55) indicating that it is in an error state, a special symbol hold indicator light (special figure 1 hold indicator light) that displays the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery P61, special figure 2 reservation indicator light P62), normal design reservation indicator light P63 that displays the number of reservations related to the normal design lottery, etc. are generated, and the lighting data (lighting pattern) is generated and output in the LED output process. Store.

In addition, in the game state display process, when blinking display is required for the LED indicator lights whose lighting is controlled, the lighting pattern switching process is performed by updating the display switching counter for the corresponding LED and comparing the counter value with the threshold value. done. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise, the number of pending special symbol lotteries can be held up to four, but two LED indicator lights constitute a special symbol holding indicator light (special figure 1 pending indicator light P61 , Two LEDs are provided for each of the special figure 2 pending indicator lights P62), so if there are 3 or more pending numbers, at least 1 LED is not a continuous lighting display, but a blinking display. It is designed to do so.

(output port output processing)
The output port output process is a process of setting to transmit a signal related to a game operation to an electric accessory, which is an operation device on the game board P5 connected to the main control board P40, or to the payout control board P43. (Step 2038)

More specifically, during normal symbol control processing or during special electric auditors control processing, when the operation pattern of normal electric auditors or special electric auditors is set, by processing during output port output processing, normal electric Signal data for opening (or closing) each electric accessory is output to the accessory drive means P71 and the special electric accessory drive means P72 (solenoids in the pachinko game machine).

Also, to the payout control board P43, a control signal (shooting permission signal) for permitting or prohibiting the shooting of the game ball based on the player's handle operation is generated by the output port output process and output. The output content of the launch permission signal is set according to the state of communication with the payout control board P43 and the occurrence of an error that requires the game to be stopped.

(Production control command transmission process)
The performance control command transmission process is a process of outputting a performance control command to the performance control board P41. It is a specification for transmission (step 2040). Regarding the setting of the effect control command to be transmitted, it is set (set) in a predetermined storage area as an untransmitted effect control command during other processing.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, a storage area called a ring buffer, which cyclically refers to a storage destination, is used as an area for storing unsent effect control commands. In the storage area called the ring buffer, in the next process called "write pointer" and "read pointer", which are updated by each process of writing (setting) the effect control command and reading (sending) the effect control command It is a specification to execute writing and reading of the effect control command using information for calculating the address of the storage area where the command is written and the address of the storage area where the command is read.

Also, in the pachinko game machine P, the configuration of the effect control command is composed of two data, MODE data indicating the type of the command and EVENT data indicating the content of the command.

Returning to the description of the specific processing contents of the effect control command transmission processing, the description will be given. In the performance control command transmission process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the information of the write pointer and the read pointer match, and if they match, it is determined that there is no performance control command to be transmitted, and the processing ends. On the other hand, when the data of the write pointer and the data of the read pointer do not match, it is determined that there is an effect control command to be transmitted, and the process proceeds to the next process.

When it is determined that there is a performance control command to be sent, MODE data and EVENT data are called from the address of the storage area of the main control board P40 calculated from the data of the read pointer, and temporarily stored in the register in the CPU of the main control board P40. After storing and clearing the effect control command in the read destination ring buffer, the value of the read pointer is updated to the value used in the next process.

As effect control commands, MODE data and EVENT data stored in the register of the main control board P40 are transmitted P41 to the effect control board in order. First, the MODE data is set to the effect command output port which is an output port for transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board P41, and the strobe signal for causing the effect control board P41 to perform the reading operation is output. The main control board P40 will subsequently output the EVENT data, but in order to ensure a sufficient period until the effect control board P41 receives the MODE data, after performing processing with a waiting time of 26 μs, the MODE data As in the case of transmission, setting of the EVENT data to the output port and output of the strobe signal are performed. When the strobe signal is confirmed, the performance control board P41 generates a performance control command reception interrupt and receives the performance control command transmitted from the main control board P40.

(external information output processing)
In the external information output process, the external information output terminal 77 outputs, as a signal, information related to the game status and information related to security such as the occurrence of an error to an external device (data counter or hall computer) connected to the premised pachinko game machine P. (Step 2042). The signal output from the external information output terminal 77 is output based on the data set to the output port of the main control board P40, and when a signal output trigger occurs, it transmits a pulse signal that is ON potential for a certain period. Others continue to output an on-potential until a condition for terminating signal output is satisfied.

In the external information output process, first, a signal regarding the game state is generated. As a signal related to the game state, in order to be able to identify the type of the specific game state, in the premise pachinko game machine P, the operating state (probability state) of the probability variation function and the operating state (base state) of the electric chew support function By referring to the corresponding information and the information indicating that the special game is in progress (big win or small win), external output data is output so that the corresponding data is transmitted when each game state is controlled. Update. Note that depending on the specifications of the game machine, the output signal is generated based on information indicating whether or not there is a variable time reduction function, or information indicating that a particular type of jackpot is being won. There may be cases.

As an output signal output in the external information output process, not only a signal relating to the game state but also information based on the occurrence of a predetermined game result is output. For example, the variable display of the special pattern is executed, a signal (also referred to as a "fixed pattern signal") that is transmitted each time it is displayed stopped, and the starting port switch (special 1 starting port switch P712, special 2 starting port switch 722) or the big winning opening switch P752, or every time a game ball is detected entering each winning opening, or the payout of winning balls based on the winning balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). Each time, data is set in the external output data, and there is a signal that is transmitted to the external device. These signals are mainly composed of pulse signals, and a signal of 1 is transmitted as a pulse signal with a continuous ON potential of 128 ms. After the output of the pulse signal is finished, the pulse signal is output again after outputting an off-potential for a certain period of time.

In the external signal output process, the data in the storage area storing the error flag as a result of the confirmation in the abnormality detection process (step 2032) and comparison data for confirming whether or not an error requiring security notification has occurred. are calculated and compared, and if it is determined that a security signal needs to be output, the output data to be set to the output port is updated so as to turn on the bit corresponding to the security signal in the external output data.

(LED output processing)
The LED output process is a process for outputting data indicating a lighting pattern to a plurality of LEDs constituting the main control display device P50, causing the LEDs to emit light, and displaying the game progress and game status. (Step 2044)

The LEDs that make up the main control display device P50 are the first special symbol display device P51 (8 LEDs), the second special symbol display device P52 (8 LEDs), the first special symbol holding indicator light P61 (2 LEDs), the second Special symbol holding indicator P62 (2 LEDs), normal symbol display device P53 (2 LEDs), normal symbol holding indicator P63 (2 LEDs), round indicator P54, status indicator P55, right-handed indicator (total It has a total of 32 LED display units (8 LEDs).

In addition, the state indicator light P55 is a collective representation of indicator lights related to a plurality of game states, and in detail, a special figure probability variation indicator light indicating whether the probability variation function is operating or not, and the operation of the normal symbol probability variation function It refers to indicator lights such as the normal map probability indicator light that indicates the presence or absence (whether or not the electric chew support function is activated), and the error indicator light that indicates the error state.

In the LED output process, 1 byte of the lighting data for the display section of the main control display device is set to the output port for each interrupt processing to light the main control display device P50, and the main control display device P50 is updated for each interrupt processing. LEDs of the main control display device P50 to be lit by this interruption are selected based on the value of the digit counter, lighting pattern data corresponding to the gaming situation is selected, and set as display data to control the lighting of each LED. It's like

That is, in the premised pachinko game machine P, the main control display device P50 is used for 32 LEDs, and the main control display device P50 is operated by a dynamic lighting method in which lighting data is output in order using at least four interrupt processes. controlling.

In addition, in the LED output process, in addition to the LED display to be visually recognized by the player as the main control display device P50, lighting control is performed only when the game stop flag is in a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or an unrecoverable error state. It also controls the lighting of the LED display.

Incidentally, in the pachinko game machine P on which the assumption is made, if the game stop flag stores a flag indicating some kind of game stop state, the setting of the lighting pattern data for the main control display device P50 is omitted. , during setting change, during setting confirmation, and during an unrecoverable error, the LEDs constituting the main control display device are all extinguished. As a modification, when the game stop flag is set, light emission may be displayed using a fixed lighting pattern set for each state. For example, the main control display device P50 may be configured to light up all the LEDs constituting the .

(Outside area control processing)
Out-of-area control processing includes test signal output processing for outputting signals used for testing pachinko gaming machines (processing for outputting signals used for testing pachinko gaming machines) and performance display device display. It is configured by a process for controlling (step 2046). The meaning of "outside the area" is that it is a process executed by a program in a storage area that is not included in the calculation of the capacity of the program storage area stipulated by the pachinko game machine rules.

In the test signal output process, a process of setting information relating to the game result and game state to the output port from the test terminal P78 of the pachinko game machine P to an external test device is performed. In the performance display process, the game state is confirmed, the number of out balls and the ratio (base) of the number of out balls and the number of prize balls are calculated, updated as display data, and displayed on the performance display device P59. This is the process of outputting.

[Special design lottery]
Next, the special symbol lottery executed by the CPU of the main control board P40 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 to 14. FIG. The "special symbol lottery" is mainly composed of "win/fail lottery", "hit symbol lottery", and "fluctuation pattern lottery".

(Lottery drawing)
The "win or fail lottery" is a lottery that determines whether or not the special electric accessory P755 will be activated based on the result of the executed special symbol lottery. , "big win", "minor win", or "lose". Depending on the specifications of the pachinko game machine P, there are some machines that do not have a "minor win" as a lottery result of the winning lottery. In addition, when configured to have the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it has a "small hit" as the lottery result of the win or lose lottery for one special symbol, and the lottery result of the other win or fail lottery is "small hit". It may be configured so as not to have "hit".

Win/fail lottery uses a random number called a "win/fail random number" out of the random numbers acquired and stored when a game ball enters the starting port (first starting winning port P711, second starting winning port P721, etc.). lottery. In the premised pachinko game machine P, the range of possible random numbers (random number range) of the success/fail random number is 65536 from "0" to "65535", which is composed of so-called 2-byte random numbers. When a lottery is performed, the result of the lottery is determined by comparing the value of this random number with a lottery table (called a "lottery table") used for the lottery according to the game state and set values. process.

FIG. 10 illustrates several lottery tables used for lottery. FIG. 10(A) shows a winning/failing lottery table in a setting value of "1" and a low probability state, and FIG. 10(B) shows a winning/failing lottery table in a setting value of "1" and a high probability state. (C) and (D) of FIG. 10 respectively show win/fail lottery tables in a low probability state and a high probability state when the set value is "6".

For example, in the situation of executing the lottery lottery using the lottery table of FIG. Assuming that the numerical value is "1500", the flow of the lottery will be explained.

First, it is determined whether or not it belongs to the jackpot random number range ("0" to "327") as the result of the first lottery. Specifically, the process of subtracting the random number value range "328" of the big hit to be determined from the random number value "1500" of the hit/fail random number of this time is performed. At this time, the result of the subtraction is "1172", which is not a negative value. Therefore, it is determined that the hit/fail random number of this time does not belong to the big hit random number range.

As a subsequent process, the random number value "1172" after the calculation of the previous big hit judgment is compared with the random number range ("328" to "65370") as the determination area for the success or failure lottery result of the success or failure lottery table. . More specifically, the random value range "65043" to be determined is subtracted from the primary data "1172" of the hit/fail random number. At this time, since the calculation result is a negative value, information corresponding to the result of "lost" is stored as the result of the lottery.

Hypothetically, if a special symbol lottery is performed in a high probability state with respect to this random number "1500", the lottery will be made on the win/fail lottery table shown in FIG. Determine whether it belongs to the range (“0” to “1639”). At this time, the result of the comparison operation (subtraction) between the hit/fail random number and the random value range is a negative value, so the result of the hit/fail lottery is determined to be a "big win".

The pachinko machine P, which is the premise, adopts a method of judging the lottery result by sequentially comparing the data obtained as random numbers and the random number range according to the lottery result of the lottery table. The same lottery method is adopted for the winning pattern lottery and the fluctuation pattern lottery, which will be described later. In addition, the lottery method is not limited to the above example, and a method of directly determining whether or not the obtained random number matches the random number that will be the big hit may be adopted. may be employed.

(Hit design lottery)
"Hit symbol lottery" receives the lottery result of the special symbol lottery described above, the control contents related to the operation of the subsequent special electric accessory P755, and the lottery table of the fluctuation pattern lottery described later (see FIGS. 12 to 14) ) is the process of determining the stop display design of the special design as the lottery result necessary for switching.

FIG. 11 shows a jackpot pattern lottery table (see FIG. 11A) used in the winning pattern lottery when the lottery result is "big hit", and when the lottery result is "small hit". , a small winning symbol lottery table (see FIG. 11 (B)) used in the winning symbol lottery, and a losing symbol lottery table (Fig. 11 ( C)) is shown.

The "symbol random number" used in the winning symbol lottery has a random value range of "1000" ("0" to "999"). 0” to “3”, and the lower 1 byte is represented by “0” to “255”.

To explain the winning symbol lottery with a specific example, for example, when the winning lottery result is a big hit, the first special when the symbol random number is "400" (the upper byte is "1" and the lower byte is "144"). In the case of the winning pattern lottery for the pattern, using the lottery table of the upper 1 byte "1" shown in FIG. is obtained as a result of the lottery, and when the special symbols are changed and displayed, the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is the first special symbol display device P51 (in the case of the second special symbol lottery, the second special symbol display device P52) is stopped.

Then, when the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device P51, the jackpot game corresponding to the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is executed. At this time, when "5R probability variation 2" is displayed as a stop display symbol on the first special symbol display device, and when "5R probability variation 1" is displayed as a stop display symbol, each of the 5 rounds of the jackpot game. The content of the round game (opening pattern and opening time of the big winning hole P751, etc.) may be varied based on the stop display pattern, and control may be performed to vary the control content in the specific game state that shifts after the jackpot game. It is possible. These jackpot games and control assignments in the specific game state are appropriately determined in order to realize game performance according to the specifications of each pachinko game machine P, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Incidentally, in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise, the lottery shown in FIG. After determining the type of jackpot such as 5R probability variable 2", the type of jackpot is determined by performing another lottery from a plurality of patterns to determine the stop display pattern for executing the jackpot of the corresponding type. , and determination of the symbols to be displayed to be stopped, and the winning symbol lottery may be executed in two stages.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P as a premise, as shown in FIG. , the types of winning symbols that can be determined are different. More specifically, in the premised pachinko gaming machine P, the possibility of determining "10R probability variation 5" to "10R probability variation 8" is increasing in the second special symbol jackpot, and the first special symbol It can be said that it is easier to win a big win with a large number of rounds than a winning symbol lottery, and it is easy to win a big win that shifts to a high probability / high base state as a specific game state.

FIG. 11B illustrates a small winning symbol lottery table. The small winning symbol lottery table is a table referred to in the winning symbol lottery when the result of the special symbol lottery success or failure lottery is "small win", and the lottery method is the above-mentioned big winning symbol lottery table. is similar to

In the small winning symbol lottery table shown in FIG. 11 (B), most of them are winning the "small winning 1" symbol, and when the second special symbol lottery result is "small winning". , a "small hit 2" can be determined. It should be noted that one type of small winning pattern may be used, or three or more types of patterns may be determined.

As an example of the purpose of providing a plurality of small winning symbols like the pachinko game machine P that is the premise, the number of game balls that can be obtained by simply changing the opening mode of the big winning opening P751 during the small winning game For example, in a pachinko game machine P that adopts a small win V as a game machine specification (spec), to separate a small win game that is easy to win a V in a specific area and a small win game that makes it difficult to win a V. The purpose is to execute a mode such as differentiating the small winning patterns and differentiating the small winning patterns in order to separate the type of the specific game to be shifted after the execution of the big winning game after winning the V prize. It should be noted that the "small winning game that is easy to win V" and "small winning game that makes it difficult to win V" refer to the opening and closing member P761 ( This is realized by dividing the flow path by the action of the valve member). Specifically, (1) during the small winning game, the large winning opening P751 is opened multiple times (for example, 10 times of 0.1 second opening), and the first opening of the large winning opening P751 during the small winning game is performed. Immediately after the start of opening (for example, 0.1 seconds after the start of the first opening of the big winning opening P751), the opening and closing member P761 (valve member) switches to a flow path that guides to the specific area side, Immediately after the last opening of the winning prize opening P751 (for example, 0.1 seconds after the tenth opening of the big winning prize opening P751 is completed and closed), or 10 small wins, which is the predetermined specified number. By entering a ball during the game, the opening of the current large winning opening (any of the 1st to 10th times) is forcibly terminated and immediately after closing (for example, any of the 1st to 10th times of the large winning opening P751) 0.1 seconds after the opening is completed and closed), the opening and closing member P761 (valve member) is switched to a flow path that does not guide to the specific area side. is. In other words, if the player continues to shoot game balls toward the big winning hole P751, there is a probability that all 10 balls, which are the predetermined number of balls entering the big winning hole P751, are realized. A small winning game in which the probability of at least one of the 10 balls passing through the specific area is approximately 100% is approximately 100%. On the other hand, (2) during the small winning game, the large winning opening P751 is opened once (for example, once for 0.2 seconds), and the first opening of the large winning opening P751 during the small winning game is performed. After a long period of time has passed since the start (for example, 5 seconds after the start of one opening of the large winning opening P751), the opening and closing member P761 (valve member) switches to a flow path that guides to the specific area side, and 0.1 from the switching A small-hit game in which the opening/closing member P761 (valve member) switches to a flow-down path that does not lead to a specific area after seconds is a "small-hit game in which V winning is difficult". In other words, even if the player continues to shoot game balls toward the big winning hole P751, the probability that all 10 balls, which are the predetermined number of balls, will not enter the big winning hole P751 is about 100. %, and even if some game balls enter the big winning hole P751, the probability that they will not pass through the specific area at all is almost 100%. is a game,

FIG. 11(C) illustrates a lost symbol lottery table. The lost symbol lottery table is a table referred to in the winning symbol lottery when the result of the special symbol lottery lottery is "lost", and the method of lottery is the jackpot symbol lottery described above with respect to the first special symbol. It is the same as the time of the table, and has a different method for the second special symbol.

More specifically, FIG. 11(C) shows only the winning symbol lottery table for the first special symbol. Only in this case, lottery processing is performed, and either "lose 1" or "lose 2" is determined as the stop display symbol.

The "lost 2" pattern is a winning design with a probability of about 6.4% when the 1st special pattern is lost. A special lottery table (not shown) is referred to to facilitate determination of the variation pattern (variation time). For this reason, "losing 2" may be referred to as "reaching loosing pattern" or the like.

In addition, the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, does not have a winning symbol lottery table for the second special symbol, and is designed to determine a winning symbol of 1 regardless of the random number of symbols. The table comparison process itself is omitted, and one missing pattern is stored. It should be noted that it is also possible to use a lottery table that always wins one symbol so that a winning symbol is won.

(fluctuation pattern lottery)
The "fluctuation pattern lottery" is a process of randomly determining the fluctuation display time until the stop display symbol, which is the lottery result of the special symbol, is stopped and displayed. In the premised pachinko game machine P, a special pattern lottery is used as the performance time required for notifying the performance display device P80 whether or not the jackpot is a big hit, and what the type of the jackpot is in the case of a big win. is determined using a variation pattern table, which will be described later.

FIG. 12 mainly shows a normal game state (low probability/low base medium) and a low base state (non-electric chew support state), that is, in the premise pachinko game machine P, a game ball is shot to the left area P501L of the game board. It represents the “low base medium fluctuation pattern lottery table” in which it is recommended that

The "ID" shown in FIG. 12 represents information stored as a result of the variation pattern lottery, and the "variation pattern" is displayed on the effect display device P80 when the same ID is won. It shows a representative example of the mode of production of variation. "Variation time" is the variation display time value of the special symbol in the target variation pattern lottery result (variation pattern ID), and represents the time from when the special symbol is variably displayed to when it is stopped.

"Holding 1 fluctuation" to "Holding 4 fluctuation" in FIG. Then, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) is N, the fluctuation pattern lottery is executed using the fluctuation pattern table of "Hold N fluctuation". That is, the variation pattern lottery for the first special symbols in the low base state is configured to vary the variation pattern table to be used depending on the number of reservations. It should be noted that, when the game ball enters the start winning hole in the state where there is no suspension, it is temporarily stored as suspension for processing, so the variation pattern lottery is executed using the variation pattern table of "Hold 1 variation". be.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12, the variation pattern lottery corresponding to the second special symbol is independent of the number of reservations, and is configured to use a common lottery table regardless of the number of reservations. It should be noted that, although not shown, as a result of the pattern lottery, if "missing 2 (reaching lost pattern)" is determined, even if it is a variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol, 1 variation that does not depend on the number of reservations It is configured to perform a variation pattern lottery using a pattern table (fluctuation pattern table for loss 2).

"10R probability variation", "5R probability variation", "10R normal", and "5R normal" in FIG. is a "big hit", and represents that the lottery is performed by appropriately selecting the variation pattern table according to which symbol the symbol lottery result is. In FIG. 12, since the second special symbol is not the subject of the game in the low base state, the big hit variation pattern table is expressed so as to be determined in a form independent of the big hit symbol, but the big hit of the second special symbol is also expressed. , and may have a plurality of patterns according to the type of the jackpot.

Here, a specific example of the variation pattern lottery in the low base state will be described with reference to FIG. As a specific example, it is a lottery of the first special symbol, the situation where the variation pattern random number is "30000" and the number of pending balls at the start of variation is 3 (situation where the number of pending is 2 after the start of variation). I will explain the situation where the winning or losing lottery result and the winning symbol lottery are "lose 1".

First, since the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation is "3", the fluctuation pattern table of "maintain 3 fluctuation" is used. The lottery process compares (subtracts) the variation pattern random number and the random number range corresponding to the variation pattern ID of each lottery result, similarly to the lottery process in the winning lottery described above, and determines whether the random number belongs to the same range. do. By performing this process, at the timing of normal fluctuation B of ID "2", the result of repeating the comparison operation between the fluctuation pattern random number and the random value range becomes a negative value, and the same ID is determined as a fluctuation pattern lottery, special After the variation display for 7 seconds is performed as the symbol variation display, the missing symbol 1 is displayed on the first special symbol display device P51.

Next, the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state will be explained using FIG. The configuration of the variation pattern table in the high base state has a configuration that is the same as the variation pattern table in the low base state shown in FIG. It is constructed so as to have a table and a table for each jackpot pattern at the time of jackpot. Although FIG. 12 and FIG. 13 are configured so that many fluctuation patterns can be determined in common, this is also for the purpose of simplifying the explanation, and is determined by the low base state and the high base state. It is also possible to configure such that the variation patterns overlap only a few times or do not overlap at all.

In addition, as a feature of the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state, the lottery result of the second special symbol "H3 fluctuation" and "H4 fluctuation" at the time of loss is the shortest fluctuation time of the pachinko game machine P that is assumed. A 2-second variation (variation pattern ID “12”) is configured to be determinable.

Furthermore, as a characteristic point of the variation pattern in the high base state, the 10-second variation of the variation pattern ID "4" is always determined for the lottery of the first special symbol. The reason for configuring the first special symbol with a variation of 10 seconds is that the player's profit in the case of a big hit is large in the big hit symbol lottery table shown in FIG. This is due to the fact that there are many jackpot patterns that shift to the probability fluctuation state as the specific game state), and by performing a large number of variable displays corresponding to the second special pattern with priority, the jackpot that is more advantageous to the player. is intended to make it possible to obtain In addition, even if there is almost no difference in the degree of advantage between the first special symbol and the second special symbol jackpot game, the first special symbol is based on the fact that the second special symbol priority digestion control is adopted. It is easy to hold the hold established in the normal game state (low base state) until the end of the specific game state (high base state), which is an advantageous state, to avoid the variable display. Another object is to avoid requiring a large amount of game balls to cause the first special symbol hold in the low base state, relative to the amount of game balls used to generate the special symbol hold.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a special table for a limited period, representing a special variation pattern table that is referred to during a specific period. In FIG. 14, as an example of a special variation pattern table provided in the pachinko game machine P as a premise, special variation pattern tables for three periods are comprehensively described.

More specifically, FIG. 14 shows the period from the 1st to the 4th fluctuation after the big hit (so-called "retained ream" (retained ream), which is a big hit with 4 holds that exist at the time of the big win). period), and the reach variation of 55 seconds, which is referred to in the n-th to m-th variation after the big hit, is likely to be selected. Referred to in the high frequency reach table (IDs "52", "53", "54", "72") and the last variable display in the high base state, the "result effect" described later is mainly executed. It is shown that a different "result variation table" (for IDs "55" and "73") is provided in the premise pachinko game machine P.

Such a special variation pattern table that is referenced for a limited period of time is called a "special variation pattern table" or a "limited frequency (pattern table)".

In the premise pachinko game machine P, the reference period of the limited frequency pattern table can be referred to during a predetermined period after the jackpot game (operation of the special electric role product, in other words, operation of the role product continuous operation device). is doing. Regarding these reference periods, it is possible to change whether or not to refer to them depending on the type of jackpot (jackpot pattern). It is also possible to configure them differently. What kind of special variation pattern table to refer to in what situation can be appropriately set for each pachinko game machine, and the details are not limited to the examples, and if necessary, the details can be explained in a separate description. and

Next, the control of the effect control board P41 that performs control related to the effect operation in the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, will be described. The operation control of the performance control board P41 is less restricted in the model test of the game machine, and has a higher degree of freedom in design than the control of the main control board P40, so it will be explained in the following explanation. It is not limited only to the processing, and the timing at which the processing is performed can also be changed as appropriate.

[Power-on processing of production control board to main loop processing]
In the premise pachinko game machine P, power-on processing (step 4000) is executed in the CPU of the effect control board P41 when the power of the game machine is turned on. Here, details of power-on processing of the effect control board P41 will be described with reference to FIG.

When the power-on process (step 4000) is started in the effect control board P41 of the pachinko game machine P as a premise, the initial setting process relating to the operation of the CPU, which is the arithmetic device provided on the effect control board P41, is performed. (Step 4002). The initial setting process is to appropriately perform settings necessary for the operation of the CPU thereafter, and details thereof will be omitted. There is a time lag between the completion of the power-on processing (Fig. 7) and the power-on processing of the effect control board (Fig. 15). Since there is a risk of deviation, in the initial processing of the effect control board P41 at the time of power failure recovery, the effect information etc. are often initialized so that the effect that was being executed before the power failure is not executed ("effect called “control board reset” and “sub-reset”).

(Main loop of production control board)
In the premise pachinko game machine P, the main loop process is performed after the initial setting process. In the premised pachinko game machine P, the image control board P42 connected to the effect display device P80 (image display device) is set so that the cycle (frame) for drawing the effect image is drawn 30 times per second. Since the cycle is set to approximately 33 ms (30 FPS), the main loop processing loop is performed once at a cycle of 16 ms, which is approximately half the cycle (steps 4002 to 4016).

In the main loop processing of the effect control board P41, clear processing of the watchdog timer for detecting runaway of the CPU is first performed (step 4004).

Subsequently, a process of updating the effect control random number data (step 4006) is performed, and various effect control random numbers used when an opportunity to execute the effect lottery occurs are updated.

Next, input port monitoring processing is executed (step 4008). The pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, is designed to monitor the input port even during the interrupt processing of the effect control board P41, which will be described later. Therefore, monitoring of inputs such as switches, which are necessary monitoring objects in the system, is limited, and monitoring of inputs such as sensors necessary for controlling the effect of the effect movable accessory P560 is omitted. As a modified example, sensors to be monitored for performance may be checked in the input port monitoring process in the main loop process.

The contents of the input port monitoring process are the same as the input port confirmation process of the main control board, from the input data of various sensors, level data is generated and stored, and rising (falling) data is stored. be done.

Subsequently, the effect control board P41 performs effect device control processing (step 4010), and executes control related to effect operations other than the effect display device P80 (image display). The production devices controlled in this process include lamps P82 ("board lamp (P550)" and "frame lamp (P350)"), speakers P83 (upper speaker P370, lower speaker 141), production movable accessories P560, and the like. An effect operation command corresponding to the content of the effect decided to be executed by a process such as the effect control process (step 4012), which will be described later, is transmitted to each effect device to execute the effect operation.

This is because the output of the effect operation commands to various effect devices in the effect device control process (step 4010) must be executed (started) in synchronization with the effect image displayed on the effect display device P80 (image display device). , the signal transmitted at regular intervals from the image control board P42 controlling the effect display device P80 to the effect control board P41 or the signal for forcibly synchronizing is received (the input port monitoring process described above). ), it synchronizes with the effect switching timing of the effect display device P80, and outputs the effect operation command to various effect devices.

In addition, regarding the operation control of the effect movable accessory P560 among the effect devices, it is necessary to control the driving means of the effect movable accessory P560 in a shorter period, so the effect set in this process Regarding the operation pattern of the effect movable accessory P560 to be executed by the operation command, sensor monitoring and operation switching are executed even during an interrupt process (see FIG. 16) of the effect control board P41, which will be described later.

Next, the effect control processing (step 4012) executed in the main loop processing of the effect control board P41 will be described. Effect control processing is based on the result of analyzing the effect control command received from the main control board P40 in the effect control command analysis process to be described later, and the information of the received effect control command itself (such as the lottery result ID of the special symbol lottery) ), input port monitoring processing (step 4008), interrupt processing (FIG. 16), etc., based on the flags established during other processing, lottery or selection processing to determine the contents of the presentation to be executed by various presentation devices. is.

The effect control process selects the effect determination process to be executed based on each flag information and command analysis information, and calls and executes the corresponding effect determination submodule process. As an example of the production content determined here, the process of determining the variation production corresponding to the variation of one special symbol based on the command (win/fail command, symbol command, variation pattern command) related to the execution result of the special symbol lottery (processing to determine the content of notices, reach, and decorative patterns to be stopped), and pre-reading performance (" Based on the information sent as a production control command when executing a pre-reading lottery process that determines whether or not to execute a special game (big hit or small hit), the content of the production during the special game is determined. There is a special game effect content determination process and the like.

In addition, the effect control process is not only the process for the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40, but also the determination process of the error display content when an error is detected by the effect control board P41 (error transmitted from the main control board). (including determination processing of error display content based on information), adjustment of the volume output from the speaker P83 based on the player's input operation such as the effect button P381 and the cross key P383 which are the effect operation means P81, and the lamp P82 It also executes the determination of the effect contents such as the light amount adjustment for changing the light emission luminance of the display and the customization of the effect contents and the effect content determination tendency.

It should be noted that the processing for determining the contents of various effects performed in the sub-module processing called in the effect control process is often subject to the invention, since the specifications unique to each gaming machine are often used. When the pachinko game machine P executes a characteristic process, the details will be explained in the explanation of the embodiment of the pachinko game machine P which is the object of the invention.

Returning to the description of the main loop processing of the effect control board, the effect control command analysis processing (step 4014) will be described as the last processing of the main loop processing.

The effect control command analysis process is based on the information stored as the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40. and set flags. In this process, it is necessary to determine the processing contents according to the command transmitted from the main control board P40. process is executed.

Since there is a possibility that one command (MODE data and EVENT data) will be transmitted for each interrupt processing (every 4 ms) of the main control board P40, the effect control command can Until the period (16 ms) of the main loop processing of the substrate P41 elapses, the analysis of the effect control command is repeatedly executed as long as it can be processed (step 4016).

[Interrupt processing of production control board]
Next, the interrupt processing executed in the CPU of the effect control board P41 will be described. Interrupt processing in the effect control board P41, unlike the interrupt processing of the main control board, has a plurality of interrupt processing that is started at different execution timing (see Figure 16 (A) and (B)). In addition, priority is set for these multiple interrupt processes, and if an interrupt with a higher priority occurs, even if the interrupt process is being executed, the higher interrupt process will be executed. controlled by In this description, the production control timer interrupt process (FIG. 16(A)) and the production control command reception interrupt (FIG. 16(B)) will be described as representatives.

(Production control timer interrupt processing)
Effect control timer interrupt processing (FIG. 16(A)) is interrupt processing executed at a 1 ms cycle in the CPU of the effect control board P41.

Port input/output processing (step 5002) is input from the input port of the effect control board P41 to the sensor provided for detecting the position of the effect movable accessory P560 and other sensors (input sensor of the effect operation means P81). From the output port, the drive means (solenoid, stepping motor, etc.) of the movable accessory P560 is driven according to the operation pattern set in the production device control process. A process for outputting a signal is executed. Also, when data is output from the output port, the data in the counter (storage area) for counting the number of times of output is updated if necessary.

The timer update process (step 5004) is a process of subtracting or adding a timer for measuring the switching timing of the effect operation. When the update processing for each timer is completed, a comparison operation is performed with a comparison value, and it is determined whether or not the switching condition for the performance operation has occurred, and information necessary for determining the content of the performance in the performance control processing (step 4012) A process for storing the flag in the storage area is performed.

The sensor monitoring process (step 5006) is based on sensor detection data generated in the port input/output process to obtain sensor detection information related to the switching of the effect operation, such as whether or not the condition for switching the effect operation of the effect movable accessory P560 is met. is determined, and processing for switching the operation pattern table is performed, and processing for setting a condition flag for determining the content of the performance in the performance control processing (step 4012) is performed.

The effect button monitoring process (step 5008) is a process for judging whether or not the effect switching condition is established based on the inputs of the effect button P381, the lever P382, the cross key P383, etc., which are the effect operation means P81. In the effect button monitoring process, the level data indicating the input state of each input device generated in the port input/output process (step 5002) and the rising data (data indicating that the level data has changed from OFF last time to ON this time) are used to generate effects. It determines whether or not the operating means P81 is operated and how it is operated.

For example, when start-up data is generated as input information for the effect operating means P81, it is assumed that the player has operated the effect operating means P81, and information such as a flag for executing the corresponding effect is stored. . In addition, if the input is judged only by the rise data, there is a possibility that the effect operation will be switched due to erroneous detection due to electrical noise. It may be determined that the player's operation (sometimes expressed as "single push (single pull) operation" or "single blow operation") on the effect operation means P81 is triggered by the continuation.

Further, when the ON input level data is continuously detected 500 times, that is, when it is determined that the effect operation means P81 has been operated for 0.5 seconds, it is determined as a "long press (long draw)" operation, It is configured to handle as a special operation. In addition, the falling data (data indicating that the level data has changed from the previous ON to the current OFF) may be electrically detected as noise when judging whether or not there is a "long press (long pull)" operation. , In this case as well, similar to the measures to prevent false detection described above, after detection of falling data, based on the detection of input of level data (off data) multiple times, input of "long press (long draw)" operation It is also possible to determine the end.

Then, in the premised pachinko game machine P, depending on the content of the effect being executed, the effect operation means is executed once at a constant cycle (for example, every 0.3 seconds) by executing the "long press" operation on the effect button P381. It is possible to repeat the processing that assumes that there is a "single press (single pull)" input operation on P81. Execution of repetitive processing assuming that a "single-press" operation has been performed is called an "automatic repeated-press" operation. It should be noted that the "automatic repeated hitting" operation is not limited to the operation content illustrated, but by operating a plurality of effect operation means P81 at the same time or by turning on and off a DIP switch provided as a switch different from the effect button, It is also possible to adopt a method of assuming that the "automatic repeated hitting" operation has been executed based on the input of the effect button P381.

Note that the input to the effect operation means P81 has a period treated as a valid operation (“operation valid period”) and a period treated as an invalid operation (“operation invalid period”) depending on the execution status of the effect.

Multi-task processing (step 5010), depending on the value of the task counter (updated between the value "0" ~ "15") that is updated each time the effect control timer interrupt process is executed, effect control generated this time This is a process performed by changing the contents of the process to be executed during the timer interrupt process. The task counter is configured to circulate at a cycle of 16 ms, and the processing for each counter value is executed substantially in synchronization with one cycle of the main loop processing. As an example of processing in each task, whether or not the operation of the image control board P42 can be executed is determined based on a signal (input information is generated by port input/output processing) transmitted from the image control board P42, and the image is displayed. A process of monitoring the operation status of the control board P42 is performed.

The image control command transmission process (step 5012) sends an image control command ("inter-sub command") to the CPU of the image control board P42 so as to execute an image display corresponding to the content of the effect determined in the effect control process P41. ) to the CPU of the image control board P42. Although the image control board P42 and the performance control board P41 may be configured by the same board, they are referred to as the image control board P42 for the sake of convenience in this specification.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, the effect control board P41 consists of a first command indicating the type of display content and a second command designating the pattern of the display content as the image control command. It is configured to send.

In addition, the pachinko game machine P, which is assumed, is configured to transmit image control commands in the effect control timer interrupt process. It is also possible to configure such that transmission and reception are performed by providing interrupt processing.

(Production control command reception interrupt)
In the effect control command reception interrupt (FIG. 16(B)), a strobe signal is output in the effect control command transmission process (step 2040) in the interrupt process (FIG. 9) of the main control board P40, and the strobe signal is transmitted to the effect control board. This is an interrupt process that occurs when P41 receives.

When the effect control command reception interrupt is started, the effect control board P41 reads the effect control command (MODE data or EVENT data) transmitted from the output port of the main control board P40, and updates and stores the temporary buffer data (step 5502, step 5504).

When the update of the temporary buffer data ends, it is determined whether or not the reception of one effect control command (a combination of MODE data and EVENT data) has been completed (step 5506). It should be noted that the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40 has specific bits of "1" and "0" in the 1-byte data.

When updating the temporary buffer data (2-byte data storage area) in step 5504 described above, processing is performed to store the content of the effect control command received this time in the normal lower 1-byte storage area. At this time, if the part of the specific bit in the lower 1-byte storage area of the current temporary buffer data before update indicates that it is MODE data, the storage data of the temporary buffer data is shifted to the upper 1-byte storage area. After that, the EVENT data received this time is stored in the lower 1-byte storage area of the temporary buffer data.

Then, in the determination of completion of reception of the effect control command in step 5506, it is determined whether or not a specific bit in the lower 1 byte of the temporary buffer data is data indicating EVENT data, and it is determined that it is EVENT data. In the case, the reception of the effect control command of 1 is completed (step 5506 YES) and proceeds to the next process, and when it is determined that it is MODE data (step 5506 NO), the transmission of EVENT data from the main control board P40 Until receiving the strobe signal based on, it exits the effect control command reception interrupt, performs other processing and waits.

In step 5506, when it judges that reception of the production|presentation control command was completed, it judges whether the sent production|presentation control command was normal (step 5508). This process is determined, for example, based on whether or not matching data exists in the list data of the effect control commands that can be transmitted from the main control board P40. Then, when it is determined that the command is normal, it is stored in a storage area for storing the effect control command received so as to be analyzed by the effect control command analysis process during the effect control timer interrupt process, In the case of abnormal data, the temporary buffer data is discarded.

[Example of basic image display effects]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20, the basic effects in the pachinko game machine P as a premise will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing symbol variation display (during display of decorative symbols stopped) during normal game (during low probability/low base), and FIG. It is a figure showing the situation where it is. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a state in which a jackpot game is being executed, and FIG. 20 shows a game performance during operation of the electric chew support function during a specific game state (high probability or low probability/high base). It is a diagram of

(Example of effect display in normal game state)
《Decorative pattern》
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing symbol variation display (decorative symbols are stopped) during a normal game (during low probability/low base). Three numbers are displayed in a substantially central area of the screen in such a manner that the player can clearly see them. These three patterns are called "decorative patterns (P801)" (also called "design"), and are dramatic display items displayed corresponding to the result of the special pattern lottery, and the fluctuation of the special patterns. The display is changed according to the display. Although only numbers are shown in FIG. 17, each number may be displayed with a decoration image such as a character image. Also, in the case where each number is displayed with a decoration image, the display mode of the decoration image and each number may be changed according to the game state. Such a configuration makes it easier for the player to determine the current game state.

The decorative pattern P801 is variably displayed as one effect for one variable display of the special pattern (one special pattern lottery), except when a special effect is performed. Although not shown, when the decorative pattern P801 is variably displayed, the decorative pattern is variably displayed at high speed (transparent display or non-display depending on the case), and animation and production effect images are displayed. By the production called "notice", the production that raises the expectation of acquiring the right of the big hit game is performed.

The decorative pattern P801 shown in FIG. 17 is displayed by scrolling in the vertical direction (from top to bottom) when the variable display is started, and then the left pattern (P801a), the right pattern (P801c), and the middle pattern (P801b) in this order. The stop display symbols determined by the effect control board P41 are stopped and displayed for each symbol row. Generally, when the three decorative patterns P801 are stop-displayed in the same manner (zoroshi), a big hit is reported in a dramatic manner. In addition, while one symbol is displayed in a variable manner, other symbols are displayed. The state in which the right and left symbols are displayed in the same pattern (temporary stop display) is called "reach" ("reach state", "reach state").

The variable display of the decorative pattern P801 is often displayed in a form of scroll display in the vertical direction (from top to bottom), but the form of the variable display is not limited to the vertical direction, and can be scrolled forward and backward using the horizontal direction and depth ( It is also possible to perform a scroll display operation in a diagonal direction, or to perform a rotation operation on the spot without scrolling and to switch the display in order.

Also, the decorative symbol P801 may be stopped and displayed a plurality of times during one time of variable display of the special symbol. At this time, when the stop display is performed a plurality of times, the stop display showing the result of the special lottery is a stop display displayed at the same timing as the stop display pattern of the special pattern is stop-displayed on the special pattern display device. A stop display at a timing other than this is called a "temporary stop (display)." In addition, the stop display of the special symbol and the stop display at the same time may be expressed as "main stop".

When the decorative pattern P801 is temporarily stopped, the decorative pattern P801 is not completely fixed in order to distinguish it from the final stop display of the pattern (main stop). It is configured to rotate, move in directions such as up and down or left and right, and swing around one rotation axis. Such a state may be expressed as "shaking fluctuation" in addition to temporary stop.

After the decorative pattern P801 is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display may be repeated again, and generally, the re-fluctuation from the state where the symbols other than the jackpot pattern are temporarily stopped is called a "pseudo-variation (pseudo-run)" effect. , The re-fluctuation that may change the jackpot pattern that is stopped and displayed after the jackpot pattern is stopped is called "promotion (fluctuation)" effect. In addition, when the promotion performance is executed, it may be configured not to change to a jackpot pattern that is more disadvantageous than the stopped jackpot pattern, or to not change to a losing pattern.

In addition, when the decorative pattern P801 is stopped and displayed, there is a kind of special decorative pattern that is not displayed during normal variable display and is displayed only when a part of the effect is executed. (P804)” (special symbol). The special design has a meaning in each pattern, for example, suggesting that a specific jackpot will be executed, suggesting that the above-mentioned pseudo-fluctuation effect will be performed, or a specific reach effect (reach mode) Examples include those that suggest that the advance notice effect displayed in the case) will be executed. When a special symbol is used, the special symbol may be temporarily stopped as the decoration symbol (middle symbol P801b) to be temporarily stopped at the end. A special pattern may be temporarily stopped as a decorative pattern.

《Simple layout (mini layout)》
Three numbers displayed in the same manner as the decorative pattern P801 are displayed on the upper right of the screen. This design is also called "simple design (P802)"("simpledesign") or "mini design", and shows the lottery result of the special design according to the variable display of the special design, similar to the above-mentioned "decorative design". Displayed as a display object.

Unlike the "decorative design", the simple design P802 (mini design) is different from the "decorative design". In accordance with the display on the display devices P51 and P52, one stop display is always performed for one special symbol lottery.

In addition, the variable display of the simple design P802 may be configured to form the same ready-to-win state when the decorative pattern P801 described above is in the ready-to-win state, or to notify the result of the special design lottery. In order to achieve the minimum purpose, it is possible to adopt a simple variable display method such as performing constant display switching until the variable display of the special symbol is in a stopped display state regardless of the decorative symbol P801. good.

《Reserved display area》
A pending display area P810 is provided in the lower area of FIG. In the reserved display area P810, a reserved object P811 corresponding to the reserved (random number) corresponding to the unexercised right is displayed as the special symbol lottery right acquired by the player. The example of FIG. 17 shows a state in which three special symbol lottery rights are reserved.

In the example of FIG. 17, the earlier the execution time of the special symbol lottery is (that is, the earlier the hold is), the closer the position is to the center of the lower part of the screen, and the hold display area P810. The display position of the reserved object located on the rightmost side of the screen is called "H1 (display area)", and as it goes to the left side of the screen, it is "H2 (display area)", "H3 (display area)", and "H4 ( display area)”.

Further, in the vicinity of the right side of the reserved display area P810, an object having substantially the same form as the reserved object P811 of the reserved display area P810 is displayed at a higher position and larger in size than the reserved object P811. This display area continues to display the pending display corresponding to the random number value that triggered the current special symbol variable display from the pending display area, and is called the "variable object display area (P812)". . In addition, the object displayed in the variable object display area P812 is called "the variable object (P813)", but it may also be called "the pending display", and is differentiated from the pending object P811 in the pending display area P810. Therefore, the acronym “applicable” is used.

The display mode of the changing object P813 in the changing object display area P812 does not have to be completely the same as that of the suspended object P811. In some cases, the shape may change or disappear (hidden). Further, the variable object P813 may also be configured so that the display mode can be changed in the same way as the pending display in the pending change look-ahead described later (for example, the shape and color of the object change at the timing during the variable display). ).

《Simple hold display》
Two numbers are displayed side by side in the vertical direction at the substantially central position in the height direction on the left side of the screen. These two numbers represent the current number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols, and are called "simple reserved display (P814)". In the example in FIG. 17, the reserved number of the first special symbol is indicated by the numerical value "3" displayed above, and the reserved number of the second special symbol is indicated by the numerical value "4" displayed below. .

(Look-ahead effect)
《Pending change lookahead》
Also, in FIG. 17, the reserved object P811 in the H3 display area in the reserved display area P810 is displayed in a different manner from the reserved objects P811 in the H2 and H1 display areas. The premise pachinko game machine P is configured such that the display mode of the 3rd retained object P811 has a higher possibility of winning a big hit than the display mode of the 2nd retained object P811. In this way, the effect of changing the display mode of the pending object P811 and displaying it for a specific pending is called "holding change (prefetching)".

It should be noted that it is not limited to the mode illustrated in FIG. may be changed.

In addition, not limited to "suspension change (prefetch)", when it is determined that the random value stored as suspension is to be executed, the variable display corresponding to the suspension that is the execution target of the production is started. The production that suggests that there is a high possibility that the pending jackpot, which is the target of execution of the production ahead of time, is called the “pre-reading production” (sometimes referred to as the “pre-judgment production”). I'm in.

Then, when executing the "prefetching effect", the hold determined as the hold that is the execution target of the effect may be referred to as "prefetch target hold", "trigger hold", "criminal hold", etc. , The variable display of special symbols based on prefetch target suspension is referred to as "prefetch target variation", "trigger variation", "culprit variation", and the like.

Here, some representative examples that can be adopted in the premise pachinko game machine P are exemplified as "prefetching effect".

《Foresight of Opportunity》
"Chance eye look-ahead" is the variation display of the decorative symbols P801 until the variation of the look-ahead target variation is started. It is a production that will be done. As an example of the rule of the stop display mode of the decorative pattern P801 predetermined as the chance eye, (a) when the winning pattern is stopped by combining only the patterns with the same hue of the numerical portion of the decorative pattern, (b) When displayed in a regular stop display mode such as ``1'', ``2'', ``3'', ``5'', ``4'', ``3'', etc. (c) A special number such as "7" or a pattern different from a number such as "first" is stop-displayed as a medium-sized stop display pattern.

《Direction movable role-reading》
"Effective movable accessory look-ahead" reads ahead the effective movable accessory P560 or the frame movable accessory P360 (such as the lever P382 of the premise pachinko game machine P1) provided on the game board P5 or the frame (glass frame P3). This is an effect that makes a lively action from the start of the change until the change display of the target change starts or straddles the look-ahead target change according to the effect operation pattern.

《Zone Transition Look Ahead》
"Zone transition look-ahead" moves to a special production mode (called "zone") in the variable display of special symbols before the look-ahead target variation starts, and until the look-ahead target variation is displayed, special This is a look-ahead effect suggesting that the possibility of a big win is high by executing a notice lottery for executing a notice effect corresponding to a special effect mode. For example, "normal background display -> look-ahead background display -> big hit", or "normal background display -> look-ahead background display -> winning pattern stops and returns to normal background".

(Display example when executing reach effect)
Next, FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a situation in which a ready-to-win effect with a high expectation of a big hit is being performed. As described above, the "ready-to-win effect" is a situation in which decorative patterns (left pattern P801a, right pattern P801c) other than one decorative pattern (middle pattern P801b) are displayed in the same manner, and one more pattern is displayed. It means an effect in a state in which it is announced that a big win will be achieved if the game is stopped in the same mode.

In many cases, the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, has a specification for notifying a big hit by displaying three decorative patterns P801 in the same stop display mode via a ready-to-win effect.

In the example of FIG. 18, the left pattern P801a and the right pattern P801c of the decorative patterns are displayed as "5", and "4", "5", and "6" are displayed as the patterns in the middle pattern row during fluctuation. It shows a situation in which the "4" symbol vibrates violently, and if it switches to "5", it will be a big hit.

Here, in the example of FIG. 18, the left and right decorative symbols "5" are displayed in a smaller size than the decorative symbols P801 during stop display in FIG. The decorative pattern P801b of the row is displayed in a larger size than the decorative pattern P801 at the time of stop display, and is highlighted. At this time, the decorative symbols displayed in small sizes corresponding to the left symbol P801a and the right symbol P801c may be called "retreat symbol (P803)" or "reach symbol". In the ready-to-win effect, in addition to the example shown in the figure, whether or not a big hit will be announced depending on how the animation of the advance notice effect (ready-to-win effect) displayed with the variable display of the decorative pattern will end. In some cases, the left pattern P801a and the right pattern P801c, which have already been temporarily stopped and displayed, are displayed (or hidden) in a reduced size in the retracted pattern P803 so as to enhance the visibility of the effect that the player wants to pay attention to. ing.

Also, there is a game machine that does not display three decorative symbols P801, and there is also a multi-line reach that simultaneously forms a reach mode of multiple lines, but the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As an exception to the ready-to-win effect, there is a ready-to-win effect called “full-rotation ready-to-win” in which all three decorative symbols P801 are synchronously and variably displayed in the same manner. What is the standard for ready-to-win performance, ``a situation in which decorative symbols other than one decorative symbol are displayed in the same manner, and a state in which it is notified that a big win will occur if one more symbol stops in the same manner''? Depending on the context, a full spin reach is also recognized by those skilled in the art as a reach performance.

Also, in FIG. 18, an "effect setting display area (P850)" is displayed in the lower right area of the screen, and in the example of FIG. 18, a volume setting display P851 is displayed as the effect setting display.

The production setting display area P850 has a volume setting function for adjusting the volume level output from the speaker P83 of the game machine P, a light amount adjustment function for adjusting the emission brightness of the decoration lamp P82 of the game machine P, and a production mode. This is an area for displaying the setting status and change status of the presentation mode change function for changing the type of notice presentation to be called and for changing the frequency of occurrence of notice presentation.

The effect setting display area P850 is not always displayed, but is temporarily displayed when the player performs an operation related to the above-described various effect settings (volume adjustment function, light amount adjustment function, effect mode change function). For example, by operating the cross key P383 in the left/right direction, it is possible to display an effect setting display (volume setting display P851) related to the volume adjustment function shown in FIG. In the situation of FIG. 18, when the player further operates the right button of the cross key P383, the set volume level (black area in the figure) increases, and the volume setting value changes from "3" to It is designed to change to "4".

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, when adjusting the light amount, it is configured so that the change operation is performed by operating the cross key P383 in the up and down direction, and the effect mode change function is performed according to the operation of the effect button. An example of switching the production mode in a predetermined order is given. It should be noted that the operations related to these effect settings may adopt different operation modes in relation to the execution of effects during the game, and can be appropriately adopted other than the exemplified method of changing the settings.

In addition, regarding the display of the effect setting display area P850 and the use of various effect setting functions, it is possible to set a period during which the player's effect setting operation is valid and a period during which it is invalid. When executed, the effect setting display area P850 is hidden and the use of various effect setting functions is disabled.

(Example of effect display during jackpot game)
Next, based on FIG. 19, a description will be given of the display mode of the effect in a state in which a jackpot game is being executed in the premised pachinko game machine P. FIG.

《Production display indicating the type of jackpot》
At the bottom left of the screen and the top right of the screen in FIG. 19, the decoration pattern P801 that triggered the execution of the big hit game is displayed. At the lower left of the screen, similarly to during execution of the ready-to-win production described above, 1 decorative pattern P801 (also called "big hit design (P805)") is displayed in a display mode smaller than the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable display, and the upper right of the screen is displayed. , the simplified design P802 that was displayed when the variable display of the special symbols was completed is still displayed.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, the type of the jackpot executed by the player and the number of game balls that can be obtained during the jackpot are determined by the type of the decorative pattern P801 that triggered the jackpot (stopped and displayed when the jackpot occurred). and the game state after the end of the jackpot (normal game state). Therefore, by displaying the decorative patterns (jackpot design P805, simple pattern P802) that triggered the execution of the big win, the type of the big win and the number of game balls expected to be obtained can be determined even during the big win game. It makes it possible to suggest

Further, as a display indicating the type of jackpot, in FIG. 19, an icon image P821 imitating a pentagonal shield is displayed below the character string "ROUND6" (referred to as "round display (P820)"). The letter "MAX" is written in the center of P821. An icon P821 in the figure indicates a jackpot suggested by the character string "MAX", and indicates that a jackpot game of the maximum round of the premise pachinko gaming machine P is executed. This icon P821 is called a "jackpot icon" or a "consecutive (display) icon", and every time the specific game state and the jackpot game are repeatedly executed, the display increases cumulatively, and the so-called "consecutive game" is displayed. This is an effect display for informing the player how many times and what kind of jackpot he has won in the state so that the player can understand.

Although not shown in the figure, the pachinko machine P on which the premise is assumed, "00 bonus!" An effect of informing the player of the type of the big win is executed by displaying "△△ Chance" (suggesting a big win other than the maximum round).

In addition, for example, even if it is suggested that it is a big hit such as "△△ chance" in which the number of rounds to be executed is small, the execution round of the big hit will be performed as "Extra bonus! + 0 rounds" during the big hit round. In fact, it is also possible to execute a "jackpot promotion effect" such as notifying that the jackpot is the maximum round.

It should be noted that the "jackpot promotion effect" is also used when suggesting that a jackpot game is being executed in which a transition to a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the previously notified jackpot type is performed. There is something. For example, from the production of a jackpot game that suggests that the probability fluctuation function does not operate after the jackpot game (referred to as "non-probability variation jackpot" and "normal jackpot"), the probability fluctuation function will operate after the jackpot game (" There is an effect display such as switching to the effect of "probable variable big hit", "specific big hit").

<<Production display showing the progress of the jackpot game>>
Next, when executing the big win game, the effect display showing the progress of the big win game will be described. In FIG. 19, as an effect showing the effect display of the big hit, "round display (P820)" executed by displaying the character string "ROUND_〇" at the upper left of the screen, and displaying the character string "TOTAL_○○pt" at the lower right of the screen. "Acquired ball number display (P822)" executed in , and "Count display (P825)" displayed with 10 circular image objects substantially in the center of the right side of the screen. Although not shown, during the jackpot game, in addition to these displays, an image display such as an animation called "round effect" is displayed.

《Round display》
"Round display (P820)" is a display indicating what round the round game (unit game) being executed is during the jackpot game. The numerical value on the right side of "ROUND" is updated at the timing when the round game is started. The example of FIG. 19 shows a situation in which the sixth round game is being played.

It should be noted that the "round display (p820)" does not necessarily need to be synchronized with the actual number of rounds executed during the jackpot game. For example, in the specifications of the "small win V" described above, the small win game is counted as the first round, and the first round of the big win game executed after the V winning is treated as the second round. In another example, when the opening pattern of the large winning opening P751 in the round game ends with a transition to the easy ball entry state for a short period of time, the value of "round display" is not updated and the large winning opening P751 is closed. There may be a case where the substantially executed round is treated as a “substantial round” only when the open pattern of is in a state of easy ball entry for a long period of time.

《Acquired number of balls display》
"Number of winning balls display (P822)" is a special game sandwiched between "Number of winning balls display (P823 * not shown)" that displays the cumulative number of game balls that have been acquired in one big hit game during execution. There is a type such as "accumulated winning ball number display (824)" that displays the number of game balls cumulatively acquired in multiple jackpots. FIG. 19 shows an example in which a 5-digit display of the number of acquired balls, ie, "accumulated number of acquired balls display (P824)" is displayed. It should be noted that the "big hit acquired ball number display (P823)" and the "accumulated acquired ball number display (P824)" may be simultaneously displayed in parallel.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, the "number of won balls display (P822)" displays the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on the balls entering the big winning hole P751 during the big win game. However, as the accumulation target of the prize ball payout of the acquired ball number display P822, the payout based on the ball entry into the general winning hole P731 and the second start winning hole P721 arranged in the right area P501R of the game board P5 is accumulated and added. may

In addition, as another modification, the display period of "display the number of acquired balls (P822)" may be displayed not only during the jackpot game but also during execution of a specific game, or "display the number of acquired balls (P822)" , may be extended not only during the big win game but also during the specific game or the small win game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P on which the assumption is made, in addition to the "display of the number of winning balls (P822)", the number of accumulated prize balls paid out is divided into "2500 balls", "5000 balls", "10000 balls", etc. Only in a special situation such as when the number of payouts has been reached, it is possible to execute an effect of ``display of the number of obtained balls'' to emphasize and notify the player in addition to the ``display of the number of obtained balls'' (for example, ``GET 10000! !”).

《Count display》
"Count display (P825)" indicates how many more balls can be entered up to the number of game balls set as the closing condition of the big winning hole P751 in one round game, or how many game balls can be entered in this round game. This is a display showing whether the ball has entered the big winning hole P751. The former is displayed as a circular object that is shaded in FIG. 19, and the latter is displayed as a white circular object in two columns at the approximately center position on the right side of the screen.

In the example of FIG. 19, as the sixth round of the game, five balls have already been entered into the big winning slot (indicated by white circular objects), and five more balls can be entered (indicated by shaded circular objects). display) is indicated by the count display P825. The count display P825 is reset to the initial mode each time a new round is started.

During the execution of the round game of the jackpot game, the number of game balls exceeding the closing condition of the big winning hole P751 is consecutive to the game balls that satisfy the closing condition of the big winning hole P751 depending on the flow of the game balls. Winning may occur, and the occurrence of winning with the number of game balls exceeding the closing condition is called "over winning".

Although not shown, when an "over winning" occurs, a special effect is performed using the object display of the count display P825, special light emission of the effect lamp P82, and special effect sound is emitted from the speaker P83. You may notify Further, with respect to the above-described winning ball number display P822, the number of winning balls paid out based on the winning of "over winning" may be added or may be excluded from addition.

<<Other production display during jackpot game>>
Next, another effect display that is executed in FIG. 19 will be described.

First, the two numbers displayed at the substantially center position on the left side of the screen are the aforementioned simple hold display P814.

The display "Sound_2" displayed on the right side of the decoration pattern (jackpot layout P805) at the bottom left of the screen is the "Selected Music Display (P854)" indicating the title of the song being played during the current jackpot game. . In the premise pachinko game machine P, the player can arbitrarily select a piece of music to be reproduced by operating the production button P381 or the cross key P383 during the first round or the second round during the jackpot game. have specifications. As for the selected music display P854, when the music can be changed, an image of "can be changed with (up) and (down) keys" is displayed near the selected music display P854 as shown in FIG.

In addition, the selection of the production during such a jackpot game is not limited to the selection of music, but it is also possible to change the round production and select the production (production mode) during the specific game after the jackpot game (generally (referred to as “effect customization display (P853)”), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Finally, the "Right shot" and the right arrow symbol displayed at the bottom of the simplified layout P802 on the upper right of the screen are image displays related to "Shooting division notification (P830)" (also called "recommended firing position notification" etc.) is. In the premise pachinko game machine P, during the jackpot game, it is a game state in which it is recommended to shoot the game ball to the right side area P501R of the game area, so "Right shot notification (P832)" ("Right shot" , and the right arrow symbol display) are being executed.

The "beating notification" is displayed not only during the jackpot game, but also during the game in the specific game state or during the game in the normal game state. In particular, in a situation where the game state changes (occurrence/end of a big win or occurrence/end of a specific game state), a display of a size larger than the split notification P830 shown in FIG. 19 is displayed so that the player can easily recognize it. is temporarily displayed in the center of the screen, etc., an effect is executed to notify the player of the recommended firing position in the next game state.

It should be noted that in the "beating division notification (P830)", the one that is temporarily displayed in a large size at the timing of the transition of the game state is the "first division notification image" ("right hitting large display (P831)", " left-handed large display (P833)"), and during the jackpot game or during the specific game state, the recommended firing position in the game state is displayed almost all the time during which the game state continues. It may be expressed as "announcement image" ("right shot small display (P832)", "left shot small display (P834)").

In addition, as another type of effect of "beating split notification (P830)", when detecting a situation in which the game ball is shot at a position other than the recommended shooting position, for example, during a big hit, the left side area of the game area ``Left-handed warning notification'' (``Right-handed attention alerting notification (P835)'' for alerting the player that the game ball should be shot to the right side area P501R of the game area when the game ball is shot to P501L) ) to display a message such as "Please hit right"). In addition, in a situation where the recommended firing position and the player's actual firing position are opposite to each other, "Right-handed warning notification" ("Left-handed attention calling notification (P936)") is executed.

(Example of effect display during specific game state)
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a game effect during operation of the electric chew support function during the specific game state (high probability or low probability/high base). There are a wide variety of effects displayed in the figure, but the explanation of what was explained in the previous explanation is omitted, and the effects that have not been explained so far, and the differences from the above explanation A description will be given regarding the effect display having.

First, as an effect display that has not been explained so far, as an explanation of the effect display during the specific game state, the "production mode display (P840)" and the "remaining number of games display (P841)" will be explained.

<<Production mode display>>
The "effect mode display (P840)" is a display that indicates the state of the current effect display mode, and is a display that indicates that an advance notice effect corresponding to the corresponding mode is being drawn according to the state information called the effect mode. . When the presentation mode display is different, it is common that the type of announcement presentation visually recognized by the player is made so that the visual impression is greatly different, although there are some announcement presentations that are partly common. . In FIG. 20, "RUSH_MODE" is displayed, indicating that the game state of the pachinko game machine P as a prerequisite is "ST (variable number of cuts)" (high probability/high base state). ing.

It should be noted that the "production mode display (P840)", in addition to notifying the production mode in the specific game state, may be displayed in the normal game state (low probability / low base state), or may be displayed in one game When the state has a plurality of production modes, the display may be performed temporarily or continuously until the production mode ends each time a condition for switching the production mode is satisfied.

《Remaining number of games displayed》
"Remaining game count display (P841)" is the number of times the special symbols are displayed variably until the specific game state ends (the number of special symbol lotteries), and the number of times the special symbols variably displayed until the current production mode ends. It is a display showing the number of times. In FIG. 20, the display "remaining _56" is executed in the upper center of the screen, and the game state of "ST (variable number of times cut probability)" is played until the special symbol lottery is executed 56 more times. people are notified.

Next, in the example of the effect display in the specific game state shown in FIG. 20, the display that is different from the example of the effect display in the other game states described above will be described.

《Decorative pattern (specific game state)》
At the center of the screen in FIG. 20, a variable display of the decorative pattern P801 is displayed. The display of the decorative pattern P801 is displayed smaller in the example of the decorative pattern P801 in the specific game state in FIG. 20 than in the decorative pattern P801 in the normal game state of FIG.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, as the effect display of the specific game state, the effect mode display P840, the remaining game count display P841, and the jackpot icon display P821 are performed in the upper part of the screen, and the selected music is displayed in the lower part of the screen. P854 and display of the number of balls acquired P824 are performed. In the specific game state, such additional display that is not displayed in the normal game state (low probability/low base state) is performed. In this case, the display of some symbols overlaps with a part of each display, and there is a possibility that the visibility of the stop display symbols is lowered. The display of the decorative pattern P801 is made small and simplified so that it is difficult for the display to occur. In addition, as an example of simplifying and displaying the decorative pattern P801, it is possible to adopt a method of reducing the size and not displaying a character image or the like that is displayed along with the number indicating the pattern.

《Reserved display area (specific game state)》
In the premised pachinko gaming machine P, as shown in the lower left of the screen in FIG. A display area is provided for the pending object of "H4". Note that the display of the variable object display area P812 (and the variable object display P813) is omitted in the "RUSH_MODE" rendering mode state.

When the change display shown in FIG. 20 ends and a new change starts in the state, the display of the pending object P811 positioned at the bottom in FIG. The display is controlled so that the display is enlarged.

In addition, although not shown, a description will be given of the "result display effect", which is an important effect displayed during the specific game.

《Result display performance》
The "result display effect" is mainly used in the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, when the final variation of the specific game state (high base state) is executed, or when the hold that occurred during the specific game state disappears. This is a performance that is performed at the timing when the player recognizes that the “Renso” state has ended, and in the so-called “Renso” state, information on how many times the jackpot game has been won, and how many game balls have been played in total. This is an effect for informing the player whether or not the ball has been acquired (corresponding to display of the number of acquired balls).

[This embodiment]
The pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration of the above-described underlying technology. In the following, differences from the base technology will be mainly described, and descriptions of common points will be omitted or simplified. Among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, elements identical or corresponding to elements described in the base technology are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment is a pachinko gaming machine that adopts the "small win V" described in the description of the typical gaming machine specifications ("specs") of the premised pachinko gaming machine, According to the "base state" in the normal game state when starting the winning (or big winning) game, after the execution of the big winning game (or during the small winning game, by passing through the specific area P760 inside the big winning opening P751, The contents of the ``specific game state'' in the normal game state (especially the length of the period in which the ``base state'' is maintained at the ``high base state'') are varied after the execution of the jackpot game based on the activated accessory continuous actuating device. This is a pachinko game machine that provides new gameplay.

In particular, the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment is controlled to the "(low probability/) low base state" immediately after the normal game state "specific game state" (low probability/high base state) ends. If you acquire the right of a small hit (or a big hit) in the special pattern reservation (reservation of the second special pattern) that is the subject of the game in the specific game state that is digested when you are playing, after the special game state (big hit game) The period of maintaining the specific game state (low probability / high base state) as the game state is configured so that the next small win (or big win) can be obtained substantially, so that substantially two small wins ( It adopts a characteristic game feature that the right to win (big hit) can be obtained.

A detailed description of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment having the features described above will be given below.

(board configuration)
First, the configuration of the board configuration (configuration of the game area) of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment will be described.

The pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment can be implemented with substantially the same board configuration as the premised pachinko game machine shown in FIG. Since the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment employs the later-described game characteristics (specs), it is configured to include a specific area P760 inside a large winning opening (attacker) P751. It should be noted that as long as it is a change that does not change the gameplay disclosed below (or a change that is only minor), a different board configuration may be adopted as appropriate.

(spec)
Next, the game performance (specifications) of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment will be described. In addition, in this explanation, regarding the "setting" (setting value) that affects the ball output performance, only the specifications related to "setting 1" will be explained, but various numerical values related to other setting values are set as appropriate. is.

In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the winning/losing lottery probability is set to a jackpot probability of 1/269 (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) and a small winning probability of 1/9.1 (only the second special symbol). The number of prize balls is 4 balls for the first start prize opening (first start opening) P711, 3 balls for the second start prize opening (second start opening) P721, 3 balls for the left general prize opening P731L, The right side general winning hole P731R is set to 2 balls, and the big winning hole (attacker) P751 is set to 15 balls.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment employs the second special symbol priority digestion control, and when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are reserved, the second special symbol is Priority is given to variable display. In addition, in the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, only the second special symbol is configured to have a "small hit" as a special symbol lottery result, but the first special symbol may be configured to have a "small hit". It is possible. It should be noted that, if the game property of the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment is not lost, not only the second special symbol priority digestion control but also the first special symbol priority digestion control is applied as a modification, or Needless to say, entry-ball order digestion control may be applied, in which balls that enter the ball first are digested first.

The pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment employs a game feature (spec) called "small win V" described as the underlying technology, and in addition to the "big win" in the special symbol lottery, special A "small win" is obtained in the symbol lottery, and when the game ball passes through a specific area P760 inside the big winning opening P751 during the small win game executed thereafter, the accessory continuous operating device is operated and the big win game is started. It is designed to be executed. In this embodiment, when a small winning game develops into a big winning game, a series of special game states from the start of the small winning game to the end of the big winning game are set to "small winning V" or "small winning development big winning". etc.

The types of big wins (including small win V) in the special game state in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment are 3 round big win (first special symbol big win) and 10 round big win (second special symbol big win or small win V). ) is provided. In addition, the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment does not have a probability variation function for a specific game that is an advantageous normal game state, and an electric chew support function (electric support function) after various big hits (including small win V) A specific game (high base state) is executed by activating the

In addition, among the detailed control examples to be described later, the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment is determined in advance during the period of the specific game and/or during the period in which the remaining hold maximum four variable display after the end of the specific game is displayed. The special variation pattern table (limited frequency pattern table) is referred to at the timing, and the variation pattern is selected to ensure the variation display time of the special symbol as required, but the special variation pattern table is referred to, the number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the number of variable display times of the second special symbol after the execution of the special game are separately counted and stored, and the number of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is counted and stored separately. At the start of variation, when the stored information of the number of variations stored corresponding to each is a specific value, the special variation pattern table for the first special symbol or the special variation pattern table for the second special symbol can be referred to. there is

(game flow)
Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the game flow of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment will be described. The game flow shown in FIG. 21 is a flow assuming that a game (normal game) is executed as intended by the player. Note that the game flow when a game (abnormal game, irregular game) that ignores the design intention of the player is executed may be an operation that does not apply to the situation shown in FIG. description is omitted.

First, in the "normal game (low probability/low base state)" of FIG. The game is played with the so-called "left-handed hitting"). When the game ball enters the 1st start winning port, a special design lottery based on the 1st special design (special design 1) is performed, and if the special design lottery result is a big hit, "big hit (special design 1)" is executed (FIG. 21(A)). It should be noted that the state surrounded by double lines in the figure represents a special game state (big hit game, small hit game).

When the "jackpot (special figure 1)" ends, the game state shifts to the specific game state (high base state) (FIG. 21(B)). The specific game state after the "jackpot (special figure 1)" is "breakthrough zone_low probability / high base (special figure 2: 1 time) + remaining pending maximum 4" (details will be described later), and the second The high base state (operating state of the electric chew support function) continues until the special symbol (special figure 2) changes once and is stopped.

After moving to the "breakthrough zone", the player shoots a game ball aiming at the second start winning hole P721 arranged in the right side area P501R of the game area P501, and performs the game by so-called "right hitting". Since the "breakthrough zone" is in a high base state, the movable body P771 of the normal electric accessory P770 provided in the second start winning port P721 is likely to be in an easy ball entry state, and the game ball can be shot into the right region P501R. , a game ball is entered (passed) to the normal pattern operation port P741, a normal pattern lottery is performed, the normal electric accessory P770 is operated, and the second special symbol is entered by the ball to the second start winning port P721. A special symbol lottery based on (Special Figure 2) is performed.

In the "breakthrough zone", since the high base state continues until the variable display of the second special symbol is completed once, one time in the high base state and the maximum number of pending second special symbols (in this embodiment 4), you can receive the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol having the "small hit" which is the lottery result that triggers the small win V. Here, in the "breakthrough zone", a special symbol lottery (up to 5 times) of the second special symbol results in a big hit or a small hit, and the player can "small win V / big win (special figure 2)" (Fig. 21 (C) )) is set at about 45%. In addition, in the "breakthrough zone", if the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol does not win (big hit, small hit), it shifts to "normal game (low probability / low base)" (Fig. 21 ( D)).

When "small hit V / big hit (special 2)" ends, "battle mode _ low probability / high base (special 2: 6 times) + maximum 4 remaining pending" or "pseudo big hit _ low probability / high base (Special figure 2: 95 times) + Remaining maximum 4 pieces" (Fig. 21 (E), (H)).

Here, the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment determines which of the "battle mode" and the "pseudo jackpot" as the specific game state to be shifted after the "small hit V / jackpot (special figure 2)". The pachinko machine P of the present embodiment is not a special pattern (stopped display pattern) that triggered the execution of "small win V / big win (special figure 2)", Depending on the game state when the special pattern hit variation that triggered the execution of the "small win V / big win (special figure 2)" is started, it is decided whether to shift to "battle mode" or "pseudo big win". is doing.

Specifically, when it is controlled to "breakthrough zone", "battle mode", "pseudo jackpot", and when it is in a high base state where the electric chew support function is operating, the fluctuation display starts In the case of "small hit V/big hit (special figure 2)" triggered by the variation of the special pattern that is the hit, "battle mode" after the end of "small hit V/big hit (special figure 2)" (Fig. 21 (E)), and the second special symbol hit variation corresponding to the remaining suspension (holding related to the second special symbol) that starts variation in the low base state where the electric chew support function is not operating After the end of the "small win V/big win (special figure 2)" triggered by is controlled to shift to "pseudo big win" (Fig. 21 (H)).

"Battle mode_low probability / high base (special figure 2: 6 times) + maximum of 4 remaining pending" (details will be described later) stops after the second special symbol (special figure 2) changes 6 times It is a specific game in which the high base state (operating state of the electric chew support function) continues until it is displayed. The player shoots the game ball to the right area P501R in the same manner as the "breakthrough zone", until the second special symbol is displayed with a maximum of 10 times (6 times in the high base state + maximum 4 times for the remaining reserved portion). It is a specific game aiming to acquire "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" during the period (Fig. 21 (F)). In addition, when the second special symbol does not become a small win V or a big win in maximum 10 times of fluctuation display, the game shifts to "normal game (low probability/low base)" (FIG. 21(G)).

"Pseudo jackpot _ low probability / high base (special figure 2: 95 times) + remaining pending maximum 4" (details will be described later) stops after the second special symbol (special figure 2) changes 95 times It is a specific game in which the high base state (operating state of the electric chew support function) continues until it is displayed. The player shoots the game ball to the right area P501R in the same way as the "breakthrough zone" and "battle mode", and the second special pattern is a maximum of 99 times (95 times in the high base state + maximum 4 times of the remaining reserved amount). It is a specific game aiming to obtain "small win V/big win (special figure 2)" before the variable display is performed (Fig. 21 (I)). In the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment, in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, the probability of "small hit" is set to 1/9. By the time the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is performed 95 times, which is the number of times, it can be said that the small win V or the big win will be substantially confirmed, but the "pseudo big win". In the middle of the game, if the result of the special symbol lottery is not a "small hit" or a "big hit" even if the second special symbol is displayed 94 times during the game, it shifts to the production mode of the "battle mode" ( FIG. 21(J)). And, the variation of the 95th rotation of the "pseudo jackpot" is the same as the 6th variation in the "battle mode", and the variation display of the 95th rotation and the hold of the second special symbol are displayed for a maximum of 4 times. If the "big win" or "small win" does not occur, the game shifts to a "normal game (low probability/low base)" (FIG. 21(G)). As a modified example, the transition timing of the production mode to the "battle mode" may be set to an earlier timing, for example, the timing when the second special symbol is displayed 89 times during the "pseudo jackpot". In other words, it is also possible to set the timing at which the number of times equal to the number of continuations of the high base state in the "battle mode", which is 6 times, remains.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment, during the period controlled by the specific game "breakthrough zone", "battle mode", and "pseudo jackpot", the variable display of the second special symbol is used as the end condition for each. In addition to the termination condition based on the number of times, the game may be terminated when the first special symbol is changed five times. 95 times, which is the end condition of the specific game based on the number of times of variation of the second special symbol of the "pseudo jackpot", is the maximum duration of the electric chew support function in the current rule, 100 times of the number of times of variation of the special symbol, and the first special It is set so as not to exceed either the specific game end condition of the variable display of the symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol without being satisfied, for example, the end condition of the specific game based on the number of times of variation of the first special symbol 3 times, the period of the "pseudo jackpot" can be set until the second special symbol (special symbol 2) changes 97 times and is stopped and displayed.

The pachinko machine P of the present embodiment having the game flow as described above has a high probability of winning in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone", the "battle mode", and the "pseudo jackpot". Earn a small hit V (or big hit) based on "hit" and loop "battle mode" or "pseudo big hit" and "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" to get a large amount of balls It is a game property aimed at. In particular, during the digestion of up to 4 remaining reserves that occurred in the specific game of "Breakthrough Zone" and "Battle Mode", that is, after the high base state has ended, the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol "small hit" or " By obtaining a "jackpot", the game is shifted to a "pseudo-jackpot", which is a specific game in which the next small win V (or big win) is substantially decided, and the balls for one small win V (or big win) are given out. Since it is possible to obtain more, as a player's experience, depending on the timing of obtaining the small win V (big win) during execution of the "battle mode", the ball will be released once for the small win V (big win). It is possible to provide a game feature in which whether or not the balls for two V (big hits) are paid out is different.

In the game flow (FIG. 21) of the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment described above, the second The number of variable display times of special symbols is 1 time, 6 times, and 94 times, respectively. Probability of looping "battle mode" or "pseudo big hit" and "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)", for example, the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol, which is the end condition, is set to 4 times, which is the same as the number of reservations. It is possible to adjust appropriately to 10 times in order to increase The number of rounds of the special game executed in is also adjusted accordingly).

In such a modified example, if the number of variable display times of the second special symbol, which is the end condition of the high base state, is less than the maximum number of reservations related to the second special symbol, a win is obtained in a lower base state. It is possible to perform an emphasized effect, and if the number of variable display times of the second special symbol, which is the end condition of the high base state, is the same as the maximum number of reservations related to the second special symbol, for example, "small win V / big win ( Special figure 2)” can be presented in such a way that the chance will come twice. In addition, if the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol, which is the end condition of the high base state, is greater than the maximum number of reservations related to the second special symbol, then in the high base state, "small win V/big win (special figure 2)". It is possible to provide an interesting production and game property that makes the game enjoyable with a sense of anticipation that the game can be obtained many times.

(breakthrough zone)
Next, the game control and performance contents in the "breakthrough zone" will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24. FIG.

In the "breakthrough zone", the second special symbol is displayed once in the high base state, and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to a maximum of four reserved second special symbols that occur during the high base state. This is the production mode corresponding to the period.

In the "normal game (low probability / low base)" (see FIG. 21), the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol becomes a "big hit", and when the "big hit (special figure 1)" is executed, the "big hit" (Special Figure 1)", "breakthrough zone" starts.

After the "breakthrough zone" is started, when the first variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the effect display of the "holding charge effect" shown in FIG. 22 is started. The first variation display of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone" is about 60 seconds long with reference to the special variation pattern table (breakthrough zone 1st variation variation pattern table) in the variation pattern lottery of the main control board P40. A time variation pattern is selected, and the "holding charge effect" is executed for a period of about 30 seconds from the start of variation.

The "suspended charge performance" prompts the player to suspend the second special symbol and display the suspended object P811 in the suspension display area 810 during the performance display period of the "suspended charge performance". It is a performance. The "suspended charge effect" is an effect (effect ) The performance is configured to change so as to improve the degree of expectation for winning, and together with the performance effect, the player can be urged to increase the holding of the second special symbol by hitting to the right.

When the "suspended charge effect" ends at the first variable display of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone", the second special symbol continues during the first variable display of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone" Based on the result of the winning lottery of the first fluctuation display and the preliminary judgment information related to the holding of the second special symbol that occurred during the execution of the "holding charge effect", the "small hit V / big hit (special FIG. 2)” is performed (in the present embodiment, “Breakthrough zone battle effect”, see FIG. 23) is performed.

"Breakthrough zone battle production" is a production that collectively informs the lottery results (including pre-judgment information) for up to 5 fluctuations in the "breakthrough zone", and in a high base state (especially during the execution of "holding charge production") With regard to the holding of the second special symbol that has occurred, the effect notification related to the winning lottery result is not performed other than the variable display of the simple design P802. In addition, regarding the remaining reservation of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone" (reservation of the second special symbol digested after transitioning to the low base state), the main control board P40 has a special variation pattern table (special figure 2 remaining reservation digestion It is configured so that a short variation pattern of about 1 second is selected by referring to the variation pattern table for low base or special figure 2 variation pattern table at low base). In addition, like the "breakthrough zone battle effect", the lottery result of this time's fluctuation display and the notification of all the lottery results, including the pre-judgment information of one or more pending changes that will start from the next time onwards A dramatic change display performed in one change display may be referred to as a "summary change".

During the five fluctuations of the "breakthrough zone", when a hit change that triggers a small win V (big hit) is executed, in the "breakthrough zone battle production", a "breakthrough zone battle" as shown in FIG. Victory effect” is displayed. The ``breakthrough zone battle victory effect'' is displayed if there is a ``hit'' in the remaining reserves even if the first variation display of the second special symbol in the ``breakthrough zone'' is ``losing''. In the example of FIG. 24, since the number of pending of the second special symbol in the simple pending display P814 is 1, the holding that started the fluctuation when the remaining two holdings of the second special symbol is a hit fluctuation. It shows that there was In the "breakthrough zone battle victory effect", if the result of the special symbol lottery is "small hit", the game ball enters (passes) the specific area P760 in the big winning opening P751 ), the big hit (small hit V) is achieved only after the game is finished, so the display of the simplified drawing P802 is not composed of grids, and the “V” pattern, which is not displayed as a normal decorative pattern, is displayed. The player is notified that the license has been obtained. Further, although not shown, when the hit variation is not executed during the five variations of the "breakthrough zone", the "breakthrough zone battle defeat effect" is executed.

When the first variation display of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone" is completed, the game state changes from the high base state to the low base state, and the game state changes from the high base state to the low base state. The timing of the transition is the timing when the variable display time of the second special symbol has passed, and in order to delay the variable display timing of the second special symbol for the first hold that has occurred as the remaining hold, from the high base state to the low base. After switching to the state, a waiting time for a certain period of time (in the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, the symbol fixing time of the special symbol) is set, and the first fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone" is completed. Even if the normal electric accessory P770 of the second start winning port P721 is operated just before, the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is terminated during the standby period ("pseudo jackpot", "battle", which will be described later). The same is true for the high base state final variation in mode"). Therefore, even if the remaining pending digestion is started and the second special symbol can be further held, the possibility that the normal electric accessory P770 of the second start winning opening P721 will operate is normal game ( as well as low probability/low base). In addition, since the standby time is set to a long time of about 6 seconds, the "breakthrough zone battle effect", "breakthrough zone battle victory effect", and "breakthrough zone battle defeat effect" will continue to be executed even during the standby time. It is

In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted, the second special If a hit hold occurs regarding the hold related to the pattern, it is difficult to replace the production content from the "breakthrough zone battle defeat production", so by performing a different alternative production from the "breakthrough zone battle victory production", Acquisition of the right of a small win V (big win) is reported to the player.

In addition, in the "breakthrough zone", the effect display on the effect display device P80 related to the variable display of the first special symbol, which is not the subject of the game, only performs the variable display of the simple design P802. Effect displays that are recognized to be highly relevant to the "Breakthrough Zone" (such as display of advance notice effects related to the "Breakthrough Zone") are not performed. If a "jackpot (special figure 1)" occurs at the timing controlled by "breakthrough zone", "battle mode", and "pseudo jackpot", "battle mode" is used instead of "breakthrough zone". It is also possible to control to shift to

(Small hit V effect and pseudo big hit)
Next, an example of a small hit V (big hit) effect and a “pseudo big win” effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 29 . 25 to 29 are the effects following FIG. 24, when the small win V is won with the rest of the "breakthrough zone" reserved, and the transition to the "pseudo big win" as a specific game. , shows an example of the performance when a small win V (big win) is obtained again during the "pseudo big win".

FIG. 25 shows that during a small winning V game, in order to activate the character continuous device, the player is encouraged to enter (pass through) a game ball into a specific area P760 in the big winning opening P751. It shows a display example of "V Winning Promoting Effect".

In the "V prize promotion effect", an image simulating the game board P5 is displayed in the substantially central area of the screen, and an image simulating the game area P501 is displayed with an arrow image that draws an arc and an emphasized "V ” is superimposed on the character image while adding animation or the like. Also, on the right side of the screen, in addition to the right hitting notification P832, the V winning promotion notification P837 is displayed. It is an effect that encourages the ball to enter the area P760).

Also, during the execution of the "V winning promotion effect", if there is a game ball entering (passing) the specific area P760 in the big winning hole P751, that is, "V winning", "V winning effect" is executed. As an example of the "V prize effect", the character display of "V" (V winning display P837) displayed at the bottom right of the screen in FIG. is mentioned.

The "V winning promotion effect" can be displayed from a period called "small winning start demonstration" of the small winning game to during execution of the round (special game) of the small winning game. In addition, in the small winning game round (special game) of the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, the process of opening the big winning opening P751 for a short time (about 0.120 seconds) and closing it for about 1 second is repeated 13 times. By doing so, it is performed in an open mode in which 10 game balls are almost certainly entered into the big winning hole P751 during the opening of about 1.560 seconds unless there is an abnormality such as ball clogging.

FIG. 26 is displayed during execution of a combination operation start demonstration (jackpot start demonstration), which is the timing at which the small win game in the small win V ends and the transition to the big win game state by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is performed, and the big win is achieved. This is a display mode of "jackpot type notification effect" for notifying the amount of balls to be put out.

In the "jackpot type notification effect" of FIG. 26, two icon displays (jackpot type icon 1P861 displaying "BONUS" and jackpot type icon 2P862 displaying "TWIN_BONUS") are displayed as the jackpot type icon P860. ing. The big hit type icon 1P861 displayed as "BONUS" is the first variation display of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone", that is, the small hit by the variation display of the second special symbol that started to vary in the high base state. This is an icon that is selected when a V is reached, and is an icon that suggests shifting to the "battle mode" after one small win V.

On the other hand, the big win type icon 2P862 displayed as "TWIN_BONUS" is an icon selected in the small win V when any one of the remaining four holds in the "breakthrough zone" is a win. As shown in 21, it is an icon suggesting a shift to a pseudo-big-hit game state (specific game) after the small-hit V. In addition, during the "pseudo big hit", the small hit V (or big hit) acquired during the "pseudo big hit" from the production of the small hit V (or big hit) that triggered the transition to the "pseudo big hit" Since the effect mode is such that a series of effect contents are executed until the effect is executed, the player feels that two small wins V (or big wins) are equivalent to one small win V (or big win). ) will be performed as if it was acquired.

In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, in a part of the "breakthrough zone" and "battle mode" (described later), one variation of the second special symbol that started variation in the high base state and the remaining 4 reserved Since a summary change is performed for each minute, a "jackpot type notification effect" is performed for the acquired small win V, and a small win (jackpot ) is executed as an effect for notifying the player of whether or not the result is a "jackpot type notification effect". It should be noted that during the execution of the summary variation, by checking the number of times of variation display of the simplified drawing P802 and the simple reservation display P814, it is obvious which one is selected in the "jackpot type notification effect", but pachinko If the player is not familiar with the specifications of the gaming machine, he/she can know the amount of winning balls for the first time in the "jackpot type notification effect".

FIG. 27 shows a small hit V (big hit) ahead of "TWIN_BONUS", which is an effect related to the small hit V (big hit), which is executed as a hit in the remaining reserve of "breakthrough zone", "battle mode", and "pseudo big hit". ) is a diagram showing an example of an effect during In the example of this figure, as shown by the round display P820 displayed on the right side of the screen, the "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" for two times executed across the "pseudo big hit" It shows that the 5th round of the small winning V to be executed (counting the small winning game as the 1st round) is being executed.

In the round display P820 shown in FIG. 27, the right column shows the number of rounds of the small hit V (big hit) executed earlier in the two times of "small hit V/big hit (special figure 2)", the number of completed rounds The left column indicates the number of rounds scheduled to be executed for the small win V (big win) obtained in the specific game "pseudo big win". In FIG. 27, the left column of the round display P820 shows the number of rounds of the small win V (big win) being executed, since there is a considerable possibility that the small win V (big win) will not occur during the "pseudo big win". Compared to the round display P820 in the right column to be displayed, it is configured so as not to make a clear display such as a translucent display.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of an effect display during a "pseudo jackpot" which is a specific game. During the ``pseudo big win'' of the specific game, a performance display as if the special game is continuing is performed although it is not in the special game state (during the big win game or the small win game).

In the example of the effect display during the "pseudo jackpot" shown in FIG. 28, an animation is displayed in which a group of cat-shaped spherical objects move from the back side of the screen to the front side, and "TWIN_BONUS_V waiting... ” is displayed. In addition, the round display P820 also continues to display the number of rounds of the preceding small win V (big win) among the two rounds of "small win V/big win (special figure 2)", and the left column of the round display P820. remains translucent to indicate that it is waiting for the subsequent small win V (big win). It should be noted that the effect display during the "pseudo jackpot" is not limited to the one in which the same animation is always executed as shown in the example, but may be configured so that the player can select the content of the animation, the content of BGM (music), etc. at any time. may

In addition, during the "pseudo-big hit", it is necessary to obtain a small hit V (big hit) by causing a ball to enter the second starting prize-winning hole P721 and receiving a special pattern lottery for the second special pattern. , it is necessary for the player to shoot the game ball toward the right area P501R of the game area P501 even during the execution of the "pseudo-jackpot" effect that looks like between the rounds of the big win. Therefore, as shown in the lower part of the example of the effect in FIG. 28, in addition to the usual right-handed information P832, the character ``continue hitting to the right.'' It's becoming

Furthermore, the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment motivates the player to continue hitting to the right during execution of the "pseudo jackpot" in which the effect display looks like between rounds. A rendering object P870 is displayed. In this example, an object similar to the cat-shaped spherical object in the "pseudo-jackpot" animation is displayed as the setting suggestion effect object P870 moving from right to left on the screen so that it can be easily distinguished from other objects. is an example. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment, the display of the setting suggesting effect object P870 is a specification that performs a display lottery with a predetermined probability for each set value for each ball entering the second start winning opening P721, or a second special symbol. For each change, there is a specification of performing a display lottery with a predetermined probability for each set value as a change effect.

"Pseudo-jackpot" is a gaming state in which the high base state continues 95 times, but the main control board P40 refers to the special fluctuation pattern table (pseudo-jackpot fluctuation pattern table) until the fluctuation is displayed 94 times. By doing so, the variation pattern related to the second special symbol is configured so that a short-time variation of about 0.5 seconds to 1 second is likely to be selected. Since the small hit probability is 1/9.1, which is very high probability, it is almost the case that a small hit (big hit) is obtained during 94 fluctuations that repeat short-time fluctuations, but if it is the 95th rotation If the small hit (big hit) is not drawn until the fluctuation display of , the production display during the "pseudo jackpot" shown in FIG. It shifts to an effect display state that is substantially the same as the summary change of minutes. At this time, the display of "TWIN_BONUS" on the upper part of the screen and the big hit effect such as the round display P820 are also terminated.

The reason for shifting to the "battle mode" production display state (production mode) in the 95th rotation fluctuation display is that the fluctuation display of the second special symbol up to the 94th fluctuation tends to be selected for a short period of time. Due to the tendency, it is necessary to make the 95th rotation a long-time fluctuation display and give the player a margin to cause a hold related to the second special symbol, while the long-time fluctuation display of the 95th rotation As a production, by effectively utilizing the production prepared in other production modes, by performing production for the final change of the high base state and the maximum of 4 remaining holds, it is possible to give the player even a little production. It is intended to be interesting.

FIG. 29 shows a small hit V (big hit) during the "pseudo big hit" (within 94 rotations), which is a specific game, and a small hit when the second "small hit V/big hit (special figure 2)" is being executed. This is an effect image that can be displayed during the winning game and combination operation start demonstration period. In the small hit V (big hit) in the "pseudo big hit" and the small hit V (big hit) other than the summary variation of the battle mode described later, it is a specification that shifts to "battle mode" after the small hit V (big hit) Instead of executing the above-mentioned "jackpot type notification effect", an alternative effect display such as displaying a blessing image by a character is performed. Further, when the second "small win V/big win (special figure 2)" is started, the round display P820 is switched from a transparent state to a clear state. It should be noted that the "V" indicating the small winning game of the round display P820 and the "○" indicating the big winning game may be clearly displayed at different timings. Specifically, when the small winning game is started, the display of "V" becomes clear, and when the game ball enters (passes) the specific area P760 in the big winning opening P751, "○" indicating the big winning game ” is clarified.

In addition, as a modification, as the lottery result of the second special symbol, a plurality of small wins V (big wins) with different numbers of rounds and small wins V (big wins) with different types of specific game states after completion are provided. In this case, for the small win V (big win) that was hit in the high base state, the number of rounds (ball amount) of the small win V (big win) this time and the type of specific game after the end are notified. It may be configured to execute "jackpot type notification effect".

As a modified example of the production example during the "pseudo jackpot", in the production example shown in FIG. At the timing when the number of games is 10 times or less, the remaining game number display P841 may be configured to display "remaining _ 10 times", and the second "small win V / big win (special figure 2)" Regarding the round display P820, when the number of remaining games of "pseudo jackpot" is low (when it is 10 times or less), or at the timing when the production mode switches to "battle mode", the display mode becomes more unclear, Alternatively, it may be configured to be hidden.

As another modified example of the production example during the "pseudo jackpot", when it is determined from the prior determination information during the "pseudo jackpot" that the suspension of executing the hit variation related to the second special symbol has occurred, the production The control board P41 is configured so as to notify immediately that a hold related to the second special symbol to be a hit has occurred using the effect display device P80, the effect lamp P82, the speaker P83, the effect accessory P560, and the like. , After notifying that the reservation related to the second special symbol to be a hit has occurred, even when the reservation related to the second special symbol to be a hit occurs, the same notification is continuously made, or a more conspicuous production mode. , it may be configured to be able to notify that a plurality of winning rights have been acquired.

(battle mode)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32, an example of effect display of the specific game "battle mode" will be described. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the first half of the battle mode, and FIGS. 31 and 32 show an example of a final variation (sixth variation) in the high base state of the "battle mode" and a summary variation effect related to a maximum of four remaining reserves. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing;

《Battle Mode First Half》
FIG. 30 is an example of effect display relating to the first half of the battle mode (first to fifth variations of the second special symbol of the "battle mode"). The effect of the "battle mode" is the effect of informing the player of the acquisition of a small win V (big win) depending on whether or not the ally character can defeat the enemy character.

Specifically, the offense and defense between the ally character and the enemy character are staged for each change, and when the enemy gauge P883 becomes "0" (the state where everything is gone), it becomes a small hit V (big hit). is reported. In addition, the ally gauge is displayed at the bottom right of the screen, and by increasing or decreasing using the special symbol lottery result of the second special symbol that is changing and the preliminary judgment information regarding the suspension of the second special symbol that is being held, A player is notified that the expectation of a V (big hit) is increasing (or the expectation is low).

A chance up icon display P880 is displayed on the right side of the screen of the example of effect shown in FIG. The display content of the chance up icon display P880 is determined using the special symbol lottery result of the second special symbol that is changing and the preliminary determination information regarding the suspension of the second special symbol that is being held. An icon display that suggests that a chance-up effect will be displayed so that the ally character will be superior during the execution of the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the symbols, or during the execution of the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols from the next time onwards. It has become.

Of the chance up icon display P880, the item chance up icon P881 is displayed in the upper row, and the character chance up icon P882 is displayed in the lower row. The item chance up icon is, for example, an "attack power UP icon", a "special move icon", or a "weapon icon", suggesting that the attack of the ally character is more advantageous (the enemy gauge P883 is more likely to decrease). , and the character chance up icon P882 is an icon suggesting that a chance up effect that increases the expectation of a big hit will occur by performing an effect related to increase/decrease of the ally gauge P884 according to the character that appears.

There are a plurality of icons in the item chance up icon P881 and the character chance up icon P882, which are the chance up icon display P880. However, if a higher icon is displayed where the icon 1 is displayed, the item chance up icon P881 or the character chance up icon P882 is updated to the icon that was acquired this time. It may be configured to

Further, the item chance up icon P881 and the character chance up icon P882 may indicate occurrence of different chance up effects, respectively, and when a specific combination is displayed, the two icons act simultaneously to expect a big hit. It may be constructed such that one big chance-up effect is generated in which the chance is greatly improved.

《Battle Mode Second Half: Summary Change》
Next, an example of the effect of the "battle mode final change effect" executed for the high base state final change (sixth change) of the "battle mode" and a maximum of four remaining pending will be described.

“Battle Mode Final Variation Effect” is an effect in which the lottery result (including prejudgment information) for 5 variations is notified all at once, similar to the effect of “Breakthrough Zone”, and the effect structure is the same as the effect of “Breakthrough Zone”. , “Suspended Charge Effect (Battle Mode)” and “Battle Mode Final Battle Effect”. The variation display of the sixth variation of the second special symbol of the specific game "battle mode" in which the "battle mode final variation effect" is executed refers to the special variation pattern table (variation pattern table for battle mode final variation), A variation pattern of about 1 minute is selected, and about 30 seconds after the start of the variation is configured with a "holding charge effect (battle mode)", and after the "holding charge effect (battle mode)" ends, " Battle Mode Final Battle Production”. It should be noted that the fluctuation display of the second special symbol for the remaining 4 reserves is such that a fluctuation pattern of about 1 second is selected as in the "breakthrough zone".

In the "suspended charge effect (battle mode)" shown in FIG. 31, an effect display prompting the player to generate a hold related to the second special symbol aiming at the second start winning opening P721 is performed (for example, the bottom center of the screen Displayed nearer to "accumulate power (hold) with right-handed strikes !!"). In addition, the friend gauge P884 moves from the bottom left of the screen to the center, and by displaying the character string "CHARGE" and an arrow, the friend gauge P884 is accumulated (a mode that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is high) ) to prompt the player to hit to the right.

When the player causes the suspension of the second special symbol according to the instruction of the "suspension charge effect (battle mode)", "P" (Power's initial) is displayed, or a chance-like pending object P811 suggesting acquisition (stock) of an item chance-up icon P881 (or a character chance-up icon P882) is displayed. At a predetermined timing (for example, 25 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), these accumulated suspended objects are displayed in an effect display on the friend gauge P884 and the chance up icon display P880, increasing or decreasing the friend gauge P884, and increasing the chance. Acquire (stock) the icon display P880.

In addition, as a further application example of the effect using the reservation display area P810 of the "reserved charge effect (battle mode)", under the situation where four reservations of the second special symbol are accumulated, to the further second start winning opening P721 , the held object P811 displayed once is displayed in a manner that increases the expectation of a big hit (for example, from "P" hold to "P" hold with a flame effect, character chance up icon It may be configured to perform an effect display (holding chance up effect) such as changing to a hold suggesting acquisition).

Further, as another application example, the reserved display area P811 is moved and displayed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method, and the reserved object P811 jumped out of the reserved display area P811 in a state where four reservations of the second special symbol have occurred. According to the aspect of (1), an effect display may be performed on the ally gauge P884 and the chance up icon display P880 so as to increase the expectation of a big hit.

When the "holding charge effect (battle mode)" ends, the process proceeds to the "battle mode final battle effect" shown in FIG. "Battle mode final battle effect" is a effect display in which a ally character unleashes a special move. Depending on whether or not there is a hit, the friend character attacks the enemy character according to the degree of expectation of the small win V (big win).

At this time, the player is urged to operate the performance button P381 to create a performance for reducing the enemy gauge P883 depending on the type of special move performed by the ally character, and the content of the performance is changed according to the operating state of the performance button P381. It can be configured to be selected from several production patterns, such as a button production that can be performed, or a result is displayed without a button production. As for the types of button effects, there are a "single-press" effect in which the result is displayed by operating the effect button P381 only once, a "continuous-hit effect" in which the result is displayed by pressing the effect button P381 multiple times, and an effect lever P382. It has a type such as "lever operation effect" that allows you to operate. In addition, in the "battle mode final variation effect" of the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, the effect pattern that does not execute the button effect is configured to have a higher degree of expectation. There is an example in which the button effect is not executed when the hit is definitely notified by the teammate gauge P884 emitting rainbow color light.

In addition, as described above, if the small hit V (big hit) is not achieved by the 94th spin of the "pseudo jackpot", it will be in the battle mode on the 95th spin. The control of the rotation and the remaining hold (selection of the variation pattern and the content of the effect) is the same as the summary variation in the second half of the battle mode. That is, at the 95th spin of the "pseudo jackpot", the "holding charge effect (battle mode)" and the "battle mode final battle effect" are performed with a variation of about one minute.

《Example of using ally gauge P884》
The ally gauge P884 in the "battle mode" represents the energy of the ally character, and adopts a mode suggesting that the greater the amount, the higher the expectation of the small win V (big win). As a modified example, during the second half of the battle mode, during the hold charge effect of the summary change, the blank area and the colored area of the friend gauge P884 displayed at the start of the change are reversed, and the display of the friend gauge P884 at the start of the summary change is expected to be a big hit. It is possible to employ an effect method in which the degree of expectation for winning in the combined variation (up to 5 variations at the end of the battle mode) increases as the number of degrees is less.

By doing this, in the first half of the battle mode, the more the friend gauge P884, the higher the expectation of a big hit. A novel effect display can be made.

In addition, by configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to display a character that decreases the friend character's friend gauge P884 on the character chance up icon P882, so that the character chance increases in each of the first half and the second half of the battle mode. It is possible to create more interest in the effective interference (increase or decrease in the friend gauge P884) of the character appearing in the up icon P882 to the friend gauge P884. For example, in the "holding charge effect (battle mode)", a character chance-up icon P882 that suggests the decrease of the friend gauge P884 is displayed, and after the effect of reducing the friend gauge P884 is performed, the friend gauge P884 is reversed. Examples include:

Here, several modifications that can be adopted for the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment will be described. In addition, the modification described below may be applied to the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment by combining a plurality of modifications.

(Modification 1)
The pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment, after executing the "small win V/jackpot (special figure 2)", determines whether to be controlled in either the "battle mode" or the "pseudo jackpot" with the "small win V/jackpot (Special Figure 2)” was executed, and a method of determining depending on the game state (base state) at the timing when the hit variation was started was adopted.

In order to adopt the method in the present embodiment, information such as a flag related to the special game to be executed when the result of the special symbol lottery performed at the start of the fluctuation is "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" In addition to setting the special game ("small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)") information related to the game state set as a specific game (the number of times to control to a high base state, various setting values (offset value for calling, etc.) must be stored together, which makes execution possible.

Here, after the execution of "small hit V/big hit (special figure 2)", as a modification 1 regarding whether to be controlled to "battle mode" or "pseudo big hit", "small hit V/big hit (special figure 2 )”, it may be determined after the stop display of the special symbol whether the control is to be performed in the “battle mode” or the “pseudo jackpot”. As a specification to judge after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, the type of specific game of "small hit V / big win (special figure 2)" at the time of V winning during the small win game which is the timing when the transition to the big win is definite. specifications that determine

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment, as described in the present embodiment, the "breakthrough zone", the "battle mode", and the "pseudo jackpot" executed as specific games are finalized in the high base state. When the variation is executed, control is adopted to transition the game state (base state) at the time of stopping the variation of the special symbols.

Therefore, as a modification 1 "specification to determine after the stop display of the special symbol (specification to determine the type of specific game of "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" at the time of V winning during the small winning game)" By adopting it, it is the final variation of the high base state such as the 1st variation of the "breakthrough zone" and the 6th variation of the "battle mode", and the variation display of the special symbols that are collectively varied as a production, When the type of specific game is determined after the execution of "V/jackpot (special figure 2)", the determination is made under the condition of being controlled to a low base state, so the "pseudo jackpot" that is always advantageous to the player. ” can be controlled so that the transition to ” can be obtained as a judgment result.

In other words, the player always shifts to an advantageous specific game called ``pseudo-jackpot'' when a hit is achieved while a high-expectation performance display is performed in which a maximum of 5 fluctuations are executed as collective fluctuations. is guaranteed, and the “breakthrough zone battle performance” and “battle mode final battle performance” as performances corresponding to the overall fluctuations will increase the attention of players and provide highly entertaining performances. can be done.

(Modification 2)
The pachinko game machine P of this embodiment adopts a control method of changing the game state (base state) to the low base state in accordance with the stop display of the special symbol in the high base state final variation, but the game state ( The timing for changing the base state) from the high base state to the low base state may be set to different timings.

Specifically, as a modification 2, the timing for changing the game state (base state) from the high base state to the low base state in the high base state final fluctuation is "while the final fluctuation of the high base state is being displayed and the It may be configured to adopt "when the hold related to the 2 special symbols reaches the upper limit value".

In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, when shifting from the high base state to the low base state in the specific game, it is important to maximize the remaining hold, but as in the second modification " Adopting a method of changing the game state (base state) from the high base state to the low base state when the hold related to the second special symbol reaches the upper limit while the final fluctuation of the high base state is being displayed However, there is no effect on game performance (degree of advantage for the player).

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, the game state is shifted to the low base state when the special symbols are stopped and displayed, which is the final variation of the high base state, and the pattern fixing time for the stop display of the special symbols is set to a long time. By doing so, it was prevented that the normal electric accessory P770 was operating at the time of the first change after shifting to the low base state. Without waiting for the stop display of , it is possible to make the normal electric accessory P770 difficult to operate during the variable display, so that the symbol fixing time when the special symbol is stopped can be configured to be short. become.

In addition, when modification 2 is adopted and the symbol fixing time is shortened, by intentionally setting the hold related to the second special symbol to just before the end of the final variation of the high base state, after shifting to the low base state There is a concern that a state in which the normal electric accessory P770 is activated is created at the start of the first fluctuation, but the timing of the fluctuation end by allowing multiple patterns to be selected for the special pattern fluctuation pattern (variation display time) in the final fluctuation of the high base state Or by making it difficult to aim, or by setting the normal electric accessory P770 to the operation end condition of one or two balls (preferably one ball) entering the second start winning opening P721, there is a method of avoiding intentional capture. can consider.

(Modification 3)
The pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment has a small winning game (small winning V) that is executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a small winning, and a small winning pattern that triggers a 10-round big winning (small winning V). is selected, and as shown in FIG. As the number of rounds of the winning V, it may be configured to have a small winning pattern that executes a small winning V (big win) of a round number other than 10 rounds (for example, 4 rounds, 7 rounds, etc.). ), the electric chewing support function may not be operated after the small win V (big win), that is, it may be configured to have a small winning pattern that does not shift to the high base state.

Adopting a configuration having a small winning pattern (referred to as "no time saving small winning pattern" or "no support small winning pattern") that does not activate the electric chewing support function after the small winning V (big hit) exemplified as Modified Example 3, When the time-saving small winning pattern is stop-displayed and the small winning V is executed, it becomes difficult to generate a new suspension related to the second special pattern after the small winning V (big win), and the consecutive game state is continued. becomes difficult. In addition, in the case of configuring the time-saving small hit pattern to be elected with a certain probability (for example, about 10% at the time of winning the small hit), the small hit itself should not be excessively deteriorated. It is preferable to increase the winning probability of and balance the easiness of winning consecutive houses.

On the other hand, by mixing such a time-saving small winning pattern, for example, there are two or more holdings that trigger a small winning V in the second special pattern currently fluctuating and holding related to the second special pattern. If the preceding small win V is a small winning pattern without time saving and the pattern that triggers the subsequent small win V is not a small winning pattern without time saving, the game state to be shifted after the subsequent small win V is a small winning without time saving. In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, which does not have a winning pattern, it was a "battle mode", whereas in the modification 3, it was a "pseudo jackpot", and the game characteristics changed when a plurality of small wins were consecutive. There is also the advantage of being able to attach

In the case of adopting the no-time-saving small winning pattern, if the winning of the no-time-saving small winning during the continuous game, if there is a remaining hold, the player should be very interested in whether or not the remaining hold will win. can be considered. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the remaining hold that is the hold that occurred in the high base state is digested is "Special Figure 2 Remaining Hold Digestion Fluctuation Pattern Table" (or " It was configured so that a short-time variation pattern was selected by the special figure 2 variation pattern table at low base), but after executing the small hit V based on such a time-saving no small-hit pattern, the special variation pattern By using a table, a variation time of about 10 seconds to 1 minute is selected for each variation, and a performance display regarding whether or not a small win V (or a big win) is won for each variation without being combined variation. is preferably configured to perform

(Modification 4)
In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, in the "breakthrough zone" and the "battle mode", a summary change is performed from the final change of the high base state to the change of the remaining hold maximum of 4, and the high base state and the low base state are changed. A performance specification is adopted in which a "jackpot type notification performance" is used to notify in which of the base states a small win V (big win) is obtained. Since the control of the specific game state after the small hit V (big hit) is different depending on whether it is started or when the fluctuation is started in the low base state, the small hit V (big hit) is a high base It can also be considered preferable to make it possible for the player to recognize whether it was acquired in the state or the low base state as the effect content during the variable display of the second special symbol.

Therefore, as a fourth modification, for the "breakthrough zone" and the "battle mode", the variation display of the second special symbol in the high base state and the second special symbol in the low base state with different types of specific games after the small win V (jackpot) By adopting a method of executing a different production mode (a state in which at least a part of the production display contents are different from each other) with the variable display of 2 special symbols, either a high base state or a low base state can be performed. It is possible to make it clear to the player whether or not a small win V (big win) is obtained.

《Production example when modification 4 is adopted as “breakthrough zone”》
The "breakthrough zone" of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment displays the "suspension charge effect" and "breakthrough zone battle effect" as effects for one variation in the high base state and a maximum of four remaining holds. However, if a method of dividing the high base state and low base state effects as in Modification 4 is employed, the following effect examples can be considered.

That is, after the "jackpot (special figure 1)", "small win V/jackpot (special figure 2)" is acquired, and interest is whether to shift to the continuous state ("battle mode" or "pseudo jackpot") In the "Breakthrough Zone", where the high base state and the low base state are divided, the "suspended charge & logo step-up effect" that is performed with one change in the high base state and the remaining 4 suspensions are performed. A “remaining pending battle effect” can be exemplified.

"Holding charge & logo step-up effect" encourages the player to accumulate four holds in the "breakthrough zone", and at the same time, the "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)” is an effect for notifying whether or not the game has been won. ” is displayed, the character string “battle mode” is displayed, and “battle mode The display mode of the character string "" is gradually changed, for example, the character string is lit one by one or switched to red display, and when all are lit, a win is notified (displayed in rainbow color when all are lit). , The color of the character string "battle mode" changes to blue, green, red, and gold, and finally the effect button P381 is operated to emit rainbow color to notify the hit. A presentation display is executed.

The "remaining pending battle effect" can be exemplified by the same effect mode as the "breakthrough zone battle effect" of the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment. At this time, an effect may be executed in which the ally character and the enemy character confront each other in the collective change for the maximum of four remaining reserves. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs the production|presentation (the production|presentation aspect similar to the "battle mode first half") which a friend character and an enemy character show off for every remaining hold|maintenance fluctuation|variation. In addition, when the maximum 4 fluctuations of the remaining reserve are combined fluctuations, it is necessary to configure the fluctuation pattern related to the first special symbol of the remaining reserve to be a special fluctuation pattern.

In addition, during the execution of "holding charge & logo step-up effect", if the high base state fluctuation display is lost and there is a hit in the pre-judgment information of the remaining pending hold, the logo step-up mode will be changed. , after the rainbow-colored mode (first confirmation notification) for notifying the hit, the character string "BURST!" is added to the character string "battle mode" and the character string "battle mode_BURST!" The display mode (second confirmation notification) may be displayable. When "Battle mode_BURST!" In addition, after the first confirmation notification, the player stops shooting game balls toward the second start winning hole P721, and there is a possibility that a situation may occur in which the step cannot be progressed. The second confirmation notification may be executed without going through the confirmation notification, and regardless of whether or not the rainbow color (first confirmation notification) is reached, the button effect to operate the effect button P381 at the end of the effect and may be configured to be promoted to the second confirmation notification.

《Production example when modification 4 is adopted in “battle mode”》
Next, in the "battle mode" in the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, a specific game that shifts after the special game (big hit, small hit V) depending on the timing of acquiring "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" As an effect to notify whether is a ``battle mode'' or a ``pseudo jackpot'', the effect mode of the high base state and the effect mode of the low base state are divided, and at least a part of the effect is displayed. A method (modification 4) for making it easier for the player to understand the type of the specific game after the special game will be described.

In the "battle mode" of the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, the "battle mode first half" production is performed in the first to fifth variations of the high base state, and the sixth variation, which is the final variation in the high base state, and the low It consists of a "holding charge effect (battle mode)" and a "battle mode final battle effect" that are performed with a summary change of up to 4 remaining holds that are displayed in the base state, but modified example 4 was adopted. In the "battle mode" of the case, the "battle mode first half" production is performed from the 1st to the 6th variation (final variation) in the high base state, and the variation display for up to 4 pending changes is displayed in the low base state. It is possible to adopt a mode in which a "battle mode final battle effect", which is a summary change, is executed.

Here, in the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, a special variation pattern is selected by the special variation pattern table (variation pattern table for battle mode final variation) for the variation display of the special symbol, which is the final variation in the high base state. However, in the modification 4, since it is a specification that performs a summary variation for a maximum of 4 remaining reservations, it relates to the reservation of the second special symbol that is digested first in the low base state A special variation pattern is selected from a special variation pattern table (variation pattern table for battle mode final variation) when variation display is performed.

It should be noted that, when executing the "battle mode" employing the modification 4, since the timing at which the summary variation is executed is after the start of the variation of the remaining hold related to the second special symbol, the gaming state is a low base state, It is already in a state where it cannot be held. Therefore, in the case of the "battle mode" in which the modification 4 is adopted, the "holding charge effect (battle mode)" is not included as the collective change effect. However, if the hold related to the second special symbol is not generated before the end of the sixth variation in the high base state, the probability that the player can obtain the "small win V/big win (special figure 2)" is remarkably lowered. Therefore, it is necessary to prompt the player to hold the second special symbol in the sixth variation in the high base state.

Therefore, in the "battle mode" that adopts modification 4, in the final variation (6th variation) of the high base state, the "battle mode first half" effect, which is the same effect mode from the 1st variation to the 5th variation, is performed. While being executed, in order to give the player a grace period to cause a hold related to the second special symbol, using a special variation pattern table ("Battle mode first half final variation variation pattern table"), from 30 seconds It is configured to perform variable display of special symbols for about 40 seconds, and in the final variation (sixth variation) of the high base state, suggesting the number of reservations related to the current second special symbol, second start winning opening P721 Execute the "second special symbol holding increase promotion performance" that encourages the ball to enter.

``Second special symbol holding increase promotion effect'' is a ``battle mode first half'' effect in the situation where the effect display device P80 displays the ``battle mode first half'' effect in the same manner as up to the fifth variation in the high base state. For example, in the lower right direction of the screen of the effect display device P80 (near the second start winning opening P721), an arrow image having a display area section corresponding to the hold related to the second special symbol divided into four is displayed, and every time a hold related to the second special symbol occurs, the four-divided display area section is changed to a mode indicating "with hold". Also, in addition to the arrow image, a character or a message "Aim for the second start prize opening!" , When there are four reservations related to the second special symbol, characters such as "OK" and "preparation" may be displayed to notify that the purpose has been achieved.

In addition, in the "second special symbol hold increase promotion effect", the display area section divided into four of the arrow image indicating the presence of the hold, like the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, the prior determination information is used. 31), such as displaying an image for acquiring an icon displayed in the chance up icon display P880 as a reserved image.

(Modification 5)
The pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment is composed of only 10 rounds of "small win V/big win (special figure 2)", but special symbols that triggered "small win V/big win (special figure 2)" Depending on the stop display mode, the number of rounds (for example, 4 rounds, 7 rounds) of "small win V/big win (special figure 2)" can be executed.

At this time, the number of rounds is estimated by the effect display during the variable display of special symbols that triggers "small win V / big win (special figure 2)", the start demonstration effect of the small win game, or the stop display mode of special symbols. In addition, it is possible to construct a hit confirmation as a look-ahead effect, or a look-ahead effect with an extremely high degree of expectation of winning that can be executed for the subsequent suspension during the execution of the hit variation, or a plurality of hit determinations ( Alternatively, if a look-ahead effect with a high hit expectation) is configured to be executable at the same time with multiple holds, it is determined that the preceding "small hit V/big hit (special figure 2)" is a hit with a small number of rounds. In this case, the V prize is not intentionally won, and the subsequent ``small win V/big win (special figure 2)'' is intentionally executed in a low base state, discarding the wins of a small number of rounds and winning the subsequent wins. It is presumed that a strategy (fraudulent game) can be executed in which the game state after 2 is virtually determined to be a win.

As a countermeasure against these captures (illegal games), if you have already obtained information that will be a hit as pre-determination information or special symbol lottery result information related to this variable display, the newly generated second special symbol is reserved. Based on the pre-determination information for, it is configured not to execute the look-ahead effect, and the determination of the number of rounds is not based on the stop display mode of the special symbol. It may be configured such that the lottery is performed at the same timing.

(Modification 6)
The pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment wins in any hold ( In the case of a small win), the variable display of the special pattern in the high base state is hit in the "jackpot type notification effect" executed in the special game start demonstration of "small win V / big win (special figure 2)". It was configured to notify whether it was a hit (small hit) or whether the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low base state was a hit (small hit), but the content of the production display during the summary fluctuation was a specific production content (for example Friend characters repeat specific special moves to defeat enemy characters, etc.), or by performing promotion effects for decorative patterns, hits (small hits) with variable display within the maximum of 4 remaining pending It may be configured to notify that it has become.

In addition, before executing the "jackpot type notification effect", if it is notified that it has become a hit (minor hit) within such a fluctuation display within the maximum four remaining holdings, the "jackpot type notification All of the jackpot type icons P860 of "Production" may display "TWIN_BONUS", or an alternative production display may be executed for the period in which the "jackpot type notification production" is executed.

In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment configured as described above and the pachinko game machines P of Modifications 1 to 6, "small win V" is adopted as the specifications of the game machine, and a high base A method of changing the type of the specific game to be shifted afterward (after the big win game) is adopted depending on whether the small win V (big win) is obtained in either the state or the low base state, but similar game characteristics, That is, the timing of the special symbol lottery of the random number (random number of the second special symbol) obtained with the start opening related to the normal electric accessory as a trigger was a high base state or a low base state. If the specifications of the gaming machine are capable of providing "game characteristics that differentiate the types of later specific games," it is possible to implement controls and effects similar to those described in the present embodiment and each modified example. Needless to say.

An example of the specifications of a gaming machine that can provide similar game characteristics is a low-probability gaming machine configured to have a jackpot probability of about 1/100 at low probability (when the probability variation function is not activated), At high probability (when the probability variation function is activated), the V-ST machine (ST 10 times) with a jackpot probability of 1/18, and the number of times of continuation of the high base state of "breakthrough zone", "battle mode", and "pseudo jackpot" , 1 time, 6 times, and 100 times.

In the case of such specifications, even after the end of the "breakthrough zone", there may be a special period in which the special figure 1 is drawn in a high probability state, but this period is a special production period (for example, low probability / It can also be set as a period of staying in the production mode that does not occur when the base state is low. Since the 11th and subsequent variations of the pseudo-jackpot are in a low-probability/high-base state, the probability that the jackpot cannot be obtained during the "pseudo-jackpot" is higher than in the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment. It is not appropriate to shift to the ``battle mode'' just before the end of the ``pseudo-jackpot'' because it is not even in the probability state, so it is preferable to configure so that the end performance is generated while the ``pseudo-jackpot'' screen is displayed.

[Second embodiment]
The pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration of the base technology and the present embodiment described above. The following description focuses on the underlying technology and the differences from the present embodiment, and omits or simplifies the description of the common points. Among the elements that constitute the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, elements that are the same as or correspond to the elements described in the base technology or the present embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals.

Although the details will be described later, the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment is a pachinko game machine that employs the "minor win V" similarly to the present embodiment. In the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, the probability of winning a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol is 100%, and "retention related to the second special symbol occurs. ”Or ``the normal pattern lottery is won, and the normal electric accessory 770 provided in the second start winning port P721 is opened, and the game ball enters the ball'', that is, the big hit game (including the small win V). It indirectly means obtaining the right to execute.

Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment generates a special period in which it is easy to enter the second start winning opening P721 related to the acquisition of the right of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, A big win game (small win V) is executed by the number of reserved numbers corresponding to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbols based on the suspension of the second special symbols generated in a special period. By being configured in this way, the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment has the possibility of continuously executing a plurality of big win games (small win V) and acquiring a large amount of game balls at once. It is possible to provide game characteristics to the player (*because the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment adopts the second special symbol priority digestion control).

Below are three implementations of pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment that are more interesting by changing the possibility of occurrence of a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol with respect to a special period. An example will be described, but before that, the basic configuration of the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment will be described.

(board configuration)
FIG. 33 is a diagram conceptually showing an example of a board configuration (arrangement of winning devices) that can be employed in the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment.

Approximately in the center of the game area P501 of the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, an opening is formed so that the performance display device P80 can be visually recognized. It is attached and constitutes a partition inside the game area P501.

Below the effect display device P80, there is provided a first start winning hole P711A into which the game balls flowing down the left side game area (left side area P501L) of the effect display device P80 enter, and further below it is not shown. An out port P790 is provided. In addition, a general prize winning opening P731 is arranged in the lower area of the left side area P501L of the effect display device P80. That is, when a game ball is launched into the game area on the left side of the effect display device P80, the ball enters the first starting prize winning port P711A or the general winning prize port P731, and it can be expected that a prize will occur. there is

On the other hand, in the game area (right area P501R) on the right side of the effect display device P80, as shown in FIG. 711B, a large winning opening P751 is arranged, and a game ball shot toward the game area on the right side of the effect display device P80 can win.

Here, the first start winning opening P711A and the first starting winning opening P711B are starting winning openings for acquiring the right related to the special symbol lottery of the first special symbols, and the second starting winning opening P721 is the first 2 It is a starting prize opening for acquiring the right related to the special symbol lottery of special symbols. That is, in the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, even if the game ball is shot toward either the left area P501L or the right area P501R of the game area P501, the first start winning opening P711A and the first starting winning opening P711B is configured to be able to acquire the right of the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol.

(spec)
The pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment is a pachinko game machine that adopts the "small win V" as in the present embodiment, and the major difference from the present embodiment in terms of game performance (game performance) is the second In the special symbol lottery of special symbols, the probability of becoming a "small hit" or "big hit" is 100%, and the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is the right of the big win game (small win V). are different.

In addition, the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment also performs a specific game (high base state) by activating the electric chew support function (electric support function) after various big hits (including small win V) as in the present embodiment. However, as a condition for ending the specific game (high base state) in the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, "variation based on the special symbol lottery of the specified number of times of the first special symbol or the second special symbol display is completed" or "the big win game (minor win V) is executed", for example, when the prescribed number of times is set to once, the first special symbol is displayed once. It is configured so that the high base state can end even if it does.

Although not described in detail, other design values (probabilities of big hits, numbers of winning balls in various winning slots, etc.) are not limited to those described in this embodiment, but are appropriately set in accordance with game characteristics. Incidentally, in the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, it is preferable to adopt the second special symbol preferential digestion control, the reason for which will be described later.

(Game progress procedure)
Next, a description will be given of the procedure and progress of the game in the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment. In order to simplify the explanation, the condition for ending the specific game (high base state) will be explained assuming that the "specified number of times" is once.

First, the player operates the handle P204 to shoot a game ball toward the left game area (left area P501L) of the effect display device P80. The game ball shot to the left area P501L enters the first start winning hole P711A, the right of the special symbol lottery related to the first special symbol is generated, and the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is executed.

When the jackpot game is executed by the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, the player increases the operation amount of the handle P204 and directs the game ball to the right game area (right area P501R) of the effect display device P80. Shoot a game ball. A game ball launched into the right area P501R during the jackpot game wins the big winning hole P751 and the first starting winning hole P711B. At this time, if the game balls are shot toward the big winning hole P751 during the big winning game, at least one ball or more will win the first start winning hole P711B, and the first ball will win during the big winning game. It is constituted so that the right of the special design lottery of the special design occurs. In addition, since it is controlled to a low base state (non-electric chew support state) during the jackpot game, there is almost no possibility of winning the second start winning opening P721 related to the normal electric accessory P770.

When the big win game ends and the specific game (high base state) starts, if there is no hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, it is related to the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol generated during the big win game. Variable display is started. In the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, since the second special symbol preferential digestion control is adopted, when the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol is held at the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot is won. After the end, the variable display related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is started.

In the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, in the specific game (high base state) after the end of the big win, a change that results in a big win in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol or a small win in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. Or, when a variation to become a big win is started, a short-time variation pattern (variation time) such as 1 second is selected by a variation pattern lottery, and a big win game (small win V) is executed immediately after the end of the big win.

On the other hand, in the specific game (high base state), when the fluctuation display (lost fluctuation) in which the result of the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is "lost" is started, a long-time fluctuation pattern such as 100 seconds ( The fluctuation time) is determined by a fluctuation pattern lottery, and the high base state continues for about 100 seconds until the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is stopped and finished.

The pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment aims at the operation opening P741 during the period (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "specific period") during which the first special symbol loss variation in the specific game is executed. By playing a game that shoots, the normal electric accessory 770 provided in the second start winning opening P721 is opened by the normal symbol lottery, and the game ball is entered into the second starting winning opening P721 to specify 100 seconds Accumulating the right of the big win game (minor win V) during the period is the main game property (game property) for acquiring a large amount of game balls in the specific game.

Here, in the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, the probability of "hit" in the normal symbol lottery in the high base state is set to, for example, 1/20, and the normal symbol lottery (loss) related to one normal symbol lottery (loss) is set to 1/20, for example. The time of one cycle of the variable display period of the pattern, or the variable display period of the normal pattern related to one normal pattern lottery (hit) and the operation period of the normal electric accessory is set to about 5 seconds, and about 100 seconds in a specific period It is possible to execute 20 normal symbol lotteries. In addition, as the operation end condition of the normal electric accessory 770, "elapse of the opening time of the specified time" or "winning of one game ball" is determined, It is possible to enter one game ball into the 2-start winning hole P721, that is, one "hit" in the normal symbol lottery corresponds to one acquisition of the right of the big hit game (small win V). .

In the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, a new special symbol lottery is not executed in a specific period of a specific game, and a big hit (small win V ) changes, the performance display device P80 displays a pattern for notifying the result of the normal pattern lottery as the decorative pattern P801, and the right of the big win (small win V) is given to the player. It notifies the occurrence of a state that can be acquired (the open state of the normal electric accessory 770 provided in the second start winning opening P721).

In the specific period (the period during which the first special symbol loss variation in the specific game is executed), if a hold related to the special symbol lottery of one or more second special symbols occurs, after the specific period ends, A special symbol lottery of the second special symbol and a big win game (small win V) are repeatedly executed by the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol.

When all the suspensions related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol occurring in the specific period are lost and the last big win game (small win V) is finished, the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol in the specific game (high base state) again. will start and the specific period will occur again. In the specific period, when the hold related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol cannot be acquired, the specific game is terminated and the normal game is resumed.

In the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, which proceeds as described above, the second special symbol preferential digestion control is performed to continuously digest the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol that occurred during the specific period. By continuously executing the big win game (small win V), the game ball acquisition period can be condensed into a short period of time, and the effect of making it easier to feel that a large number of game balls have been acquired. have.

If the first special symbol preferential digestion control or the entering ball order digestion control is used, the first start winning opening P711B during the period when the game ball is fired to the right region P501R in the specific game or the big hit game (small hit V) In the situation where the entry to the ball occurs and the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is suspended, the period until the next big hit game (small win V) occurs again after the specific period occurs again It takes a long time, and there is a risk that the player may not feel that he or she has won a large number of game balls. In addition, it does not deny that the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment is changed to the first special symbol priority digestion control or the entry order digestion control, and if these controls are installed, the second special A specific period can be generated when there is a hold related to the special pattern lottery of the pattern, and the period in which the game can be executed in the specific period increases as a whole, making it easier to acquire the hold related to the special pattern lottery of the second special pattern. There is also an advantage.

As described above, the pachinko game of the second embodiment, which is a pachinko game machine that expects to acquire a large amount of game balls by performing one or more jackpot games based on one or more reservations that occurred during a specific period The machine P has been described above, and the pachinko game machine P in which the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment is further applied to enhance the interest will be described based on three embodiments.

In addition, in the normal normal electric accessory control, after the operation end condition of the normal electric accessory 770 is satisfied, the effective extension period for detecting the residual ball inside the electric accessory is set, but the second implementation In the example pachinko gaming machine P, the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is the right of the big win game (small win V), and one big win game (small Since the intention of the design is to grant the right of winning V), when the operation termination condition of the normal electric accessory 770 is satisfied, it may be configured not to set the effective extension period (especially "1 ball It is preferable to control in this way when the operation of the normal electric accessory 770 is completed with the establishment of "winning of the game ball", and an effective extension period may be set in "elapse of the specified opening time").

[2-1 embodiment]
Regarding the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, a first application example (2-1 embodiment) will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the game flow of the 2-1 embodiment, FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the distribution ratio of the jackpot (small hit) symbols of the 2-1 embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of the long-time chance state production of the 2-1 embodiment, and FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of the normal electric accessory opening production of the 2-1 embodiment.

The characteristic point of the 2-1 embodiment is that the length of the specific period (fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol) that occurs after the big hit (small hit) for the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, It is different depending on the type of special symbol that triggered the execution of the big hit (small hit) just before the specific period occurs.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a state in which the probability that a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol can be generated during the specific period is different, and expectations for Renso (again , Expectations for the grant of a specific period after the big hit) and the number of reservations related to the special pattern lottery of the second special pattern (rights related to the occurrence of the big hit / small win). A state can be provided to a player as a specific period, a change is given as a game of a specific game, and a pachinko game machine with high interest can be provided.

The details of the 2-1 embodiment will be described below. The board structure of the game machine (arrangement of winning devices, etc.) will be described as being the same as in the second embodiment, but it can be changed as appropriate as long as the game described below can be constructed.

(game flow)
First, referring to FIG. 34, the game flow (transition of the game state) of the pachinko game machine P of the 2-1 embodiment will be described.

The normal game (low probability/low base state) is a game state in which the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is the main part of the game, and the player enters the game area (left area P501L) on the left side of the effect display device P80. A ball is shot, the game ball is entered into the first start winning hole P711A, and the goal is to obtain a big hit by a special pattern lottery for the first special pattern.

In the normal game, when the jackpot is won (Fig. 34 (A)), the "jackpot (special figure 1)" is executed, and depending on the type of special symbol that has caused the jackpot to be executed, after the jackpot game, the "short-time chance state ', and 'long chance state' (FIGS. 34(B) and 34(E)).

FIG. 35 shows the result of the symbol lottery (at the time of the big hit) in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment, when the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol results in a big hit, the symbol lottery selects either "special figure 1_jackpot pattern A" or "special figure 1_jackpot pattern B". or is selected. Although only two types of symbols are shown in FIG. 35, these are broadly classified according to the type of the specific game to be executed and the specific game after the big win, and actually the first special symbol display device. There may be two or more types of symbols stopped and displayed on P51.

The "special figure 1_jackpot pattern B" shown in FIG. 35 is a jackpot pattern in which the "short-time chance state" is executed as a specific game after the jackpot game, and the "special figure 1_jackpot pattern A" is a jackpot game. It is a jackpot pattern in which a "long-time chance state" is executed later as a specific game.

《Short-time chance state》
After the "big hit (special figure 1)", when it shifts to the "short time chance state", when the big hit game is executed, the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first start winning opening P711B arranged in the right area P501R. The first special symbol lottery is held based on the reservation related to the special symbol lottery, or the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the 1st special symbol remaining from before the big hit game. As a specific period, a chance state (low probability/high base state) occurs for one minute.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment, in the chance state (low probability / high base state), the player shoots the game ball to the right region P501R, and when the game ball passes through the operation opening P741, the normal symbol A lottery will be held. At this time, the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is shown as a stop display symbol of the normal symbol after the variable display of the normal symbol for one minute is performed by the normal symbol display device P53, and the result of the normal symbol lottery is "hit". , the normal electric accessory 770 is opened, and the ball can be entered into the second start winning hole P721. Then, when the game ball enters the second start winning hole P721, a big win or a small win is won by the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol after the lapse of the specific period, and "small win V/big win (special figure 2)". (Fig. 34(D)). When the result of the normal symbol lottery in the chance state is "lost", or when the normal symbol lottery is "hit", but the ball does not enter the second start winning opening P721, "normal game (low probability/low base state)” (FIG. 34(C)).

In the "short-term chance state", one normal symbol lottery is performed during a one-minute chance state (low probability/high base state), which is a specific period, and a "small chance" is selected depending on whether the normal symbol is a hit or not. Distribution to "Hit V/Big Hit (Special Figure 2)" or "Normal Game (Low Probability/Low Base State)" is performed. In addition, the hit probability of the normal symbol lottery of the pachinko game machine P of the 2-1 embodiment is set to 1/3.3, and in the "short time chance state", the "small hit V/big hit (special 2)” is 30% (see “Continuity Rate” in “Special Figure 1_Big Hit Design B” in FIG. 35).
After execution of the "minor win V/big win (special figure 2)", the game shifts to a "long chance state" (FIG. 34(G)).

《Long Chance State》
"Long-time chance state" shifts to (Fig. 34 (G)) after "big hit (special figure 1)" (Fig. 34 (E)) or after "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" It is a specific game, and the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol after the start of the specific game is lost, and the loss variation of the first special symbol is performed during a specific period.

The duration of the specific period of the ``long-time chance state'' varies depending on the type of special symbol that triggers the execution of the big win game (minor win V) that has been executed immediately before shifting to the ``long-time chance state''. A specific period (loss variation of the first special symbol) is executed at any duration of minutes, 6 minutes, or 9 minutes. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, in the case of "special figure 1_jackpot pattern A" and "special figure 2_jackpot/minor win pattern A", the duration of the specific period is 5 minutes, and "special figure 2_ The duration of the specific period is set to 6 minutes in the case of "big hit/small hit pattern B", and the duration of the specific period is set to 9 minutes in the case of "special figure 2_big hit/small hit pattern C".

In the "long-time chance state" as well as in the "short-time chance state", the normal symbol lottery is performed by entering the game ball into the operation port P741 arranged in the right area P501R, and one normal symbol lottery is performed. The variable display of normal symbols for 1 minute is performed by the normal symbol display device P53. That is, when the duration of the specific period in the "long-time chance state" is 5 minutes, the normal symbol lottery can be received 5 times, and when the duration of the specific period is 9 minutes, the normal symbols are 9 times. can receive a lottery.

In the "long-time chance state", if a "hit" is obtained in the normal symbol lottery and the game ball can be entered into the second start winning opening P721 based on the opening of the normal electric accessory 770, After the lapse of the specific period, the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is canceled, and the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol wins a big win or a small win, and "small win V / big win (special figure 2)". (FIG. 34(F)). In addition, even after the suspension related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol occurs, as long as the specific period continues, it is possible to receive the normal symbol lottery, and it is possible to receive the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. It is possible to accumulate (stock) rights related to the execution of a big win or a small win by the maximum number of pending pending.

In the ``long-time chance state'', it has been explained that the normal symbol variation time is 1 minute, but when the normal symbol is a hit, the normal electric accessory 770 is operated (opened) after the normal symbol variation time has elapsed. Therefore, one cycle including the operation period of the normal electric accessory 770 may be designed to end in about 1 minute as the normal symbol variation time (for example, 55 seconds) which is somewhat shorter than the deviation variation.

In the "long-time chance state", when a hold related to the special symbol lottery of one or more second special symbols occurs, "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)", the second special symbol "Small hit V/big hit (special figure 2)" is executed for the number of times corresponding to the number of reserved coins accumulated (stocked) as reserved. It should be noted that, when the "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" is repeated multiple times, each time it internally shifts to the same low probability / high base state as the long-time chance state, but the second The fluctuation display time of the big win (small win) based on the special pattern drawing of the special pattern is set to 1 second, and the ``small win V/big win (special figure 2)'' resumes immediately after the big win game (small win V) ends. be done.

Therefore, the "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" is executed a big hit production called "STOCK-BONUS", and the big hit production is executed continuously until the second special pattern special pattern drawing is no longer reserved. In addition, even under the condition of being internally in a ``long-time chance state'', the performance for the specific period is not executed, and the performance notifying that the big win (minor win V) is continuously generated is provided. Run.

In the "long-time chance state", when the normal symbol lottery is executed 5 times to 9 times and all are "lost", or the normal electric accessory 770 is opened, the second start winning prize If the ball does not enter the mouth P721, the game returns to "normal game (low probability/low base state)".

Although not shown in FIG. 34, in the "short-time chance state" or "long-time chance state", when the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol becomes a "jackpot", the variation time is 1 second. , and executes a "jackpot (special figure 1)" without the occurrence of a specific period. In addition, in the "long-term chance state" and "short-term chance state", if the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed, the special symbol that becomes a big hit or a small hit is displayed strictly. , a specific period of 1 second is generated, and during this period, there is a case where the variable display of the normal design is performed based on the ball entered into the operation port P741 or the hold related to the normal design lottery.

However, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment, even if the result of the normal symbol lottery is "win", it must be in the high base state (electric chew support state) at the timing when the stop display is made. For example, the opening of the normal electric accessory 770 is not opened in a manner that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening P721, and there is almost no possibility of entering the second starting winning opening P721. is configured as follows. Therefore, even if the normal design lottery becomes "hit" in the first special design or second special design big hit fluctuation (small hit fluctuation) in "long time chance state" or "short time chance state", one minute later is after the special symbols are stopped and the jackpot game is being executed, so the state has shifted to the low base state. State" or "short-time chance state" during the winning variation period of the special symbol, no new suspension related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol occurs.

In addition, in the "long-time chance state", if the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol results in a big hit, it will shift to "big hit (special figure 1)", but this big hit is "special figure 1_jackpot pattern". B", the player will be shifted to a disadvantageous "short-time chance state", and the player may feel disadvantageous. In order to prevent such a disadvantage, if the "special figure 1 _ jackpot pattern B" is won in the "long chance state" or "short time chance state", the game after the "jackpot (special figure 1)" The state may be controlled to be a “long chance state” (specific period of 5 minutes).

(Example of long-term chance state production)
FIG. 36 shows an example of an effect in the "long-time chance state" which is the most advantageous game state for the player (the game state in which the jackpot game is most likely to be obtained) in the pachinko game machine P of the 2-1 embodiment. . In the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment, in the "long chance state", "4 consecutive battle effects" are performed (when the specific period is "5 minutes" and the normal symbol lottery is in the "long chance state" is executed five times in succession after the start of ).

As described above, the pachinko machine P of the 2-1 embodiment is a specific period (N minutes) in which the first special symbol of the specific game in the low probability / high base state is fluctuating, N times A normal pattern lottery can be received, and in the "long-time chance state" when the specific period is 5 minutes, one normal pattern production is performed for one normal pattern lottery, and the second is performed. In the pachinko game machine P of the -1 embodiment, four "battle effects" and one "final chance" effect (a common effect with the short-time chance state) are executed.

The example of the screen in FIG. 36 shows a state in which the third "battle effect" of the "four consecutive battle effects" is being executed. More specifically, the production mode display P840 on the upper left side of the screen displays the production mode title of "continuous battle" indicating that the production is "four consecutive battles". is being executed, indirectly suggesting to the player that there are two remaining "battle effects" (including the third) and a "final chance".

Two pending objects P811 are displayed in the pending display area P811 at the bottom right of the screen, indicating that two pending objects related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol have been obtained.

In the center of the "battle effect" screen, an image of characters facing each other is displayed. It notifies whether the result of the lottery is "hit" or "lose".

A simple design P802 is displayed on the upper right of the screen, and in the pachinko game machine P of the 2-1 embodiment, the simple design drawing P802 displays the result of the normal design lottery as a decorative design. The simplified drawing P802 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery, and if a "win" is stopped and displayed with a double eye, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that he or she has won a big win at that point. For example, it may be configured to notify that the result of the normal symbol lottery is "hit" in a mode in which a "V" symbol such as "3V3" is stopped and displayed in the center. In addition, during the "four consecutive battle" production, since the first special symbol is changed, the result of the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is not notified by the decorative symbol, but the simple symbol lottery for the special symbol lottery It is also possible to display by separately facilitating the drawing P802.

Below the simplified drawing P802 of the normal symbol, a right hitting notification P832 is displayed as a separate hitting notification P830. In the "long-time chance state" and "short-time chance state", it is necessary to enter the ball into the operation opening P741 during the limited time during the fluctuation display period of the loss fluctuation of the first special symbol and receive the normal symbol lottery. In order to prevent the elapse of a specific period without being able to receive the normal symbol lottery as many times as intended, during the variable display period of the special symbol, control regarding the variation of the normal symbol or the operation of the normal electric accessory 770 When the control is no longer performed, after a relatively short time of about 3 seconds, the mode is switched to emphasize the right-handed notification P832, and the player is made to shoot the game ball to the right region P501R and enter the operation opening P741. You may make it alert|report to urge you to do it.

In the "battle effect", if the player side character wins, the "normal electric accessory release effect" is performed as shown in FIG. In the "ordinary electric accessory opening effect", an image simulating the second start prize opening P721 and a character string such as "Aim" are displayed, and the game ball is shot toward the second start prize opening P721. A performance will be held to encourage Ordinary electric accessory 770 has the end condition of "entering one game ball to the second start winning opening P721" or "elapse of the operation period of a predetermined time", so the pachinko game of the 2-1 embodiment In the machine, an indicator display (recommended firing period display) substantially corresponding to the operating period of the normal electric role product is displayed below the image imitating the second start winning opening P721 in the “normal electric role product opening effect”, and the game is played. It shows the period during which the player can enter the second start winning hole P721.

It should be noted that the "ordinary electric role opening effect", considering the time from the launch of the game ball to reaching the second start winning opening P721, during the winning fluctuation of the normal design, the design fixing time of the winning design of the normal design, etc. , may be configured to be performed before the normal electric accessory 770 is activated.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of the 2-1 embodiment configured as described above, it is possible to acquire a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in which the big hit (small hit V) is deterministic in the specific game. The length of the duration of the specific period can be varied according to the type of the special symbol that causes the big win (minor win V) that was executed immediately before the start of the specific game. Like a pachinko machine, we provide a game machine that gives you an interval to acquire a large number of game balls in a short period of time. To provide a pachinko game machine capable of providing different specific games and enhancing the interest of the specific games.

(Modification 1 of the pachinko game machine of the 2-1 embodiment)
In the pachinko game machine of the 2-1 embodiment described above, in the "short-time chance state" and the "long-time chance state", the big hit variation or the small hit variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to 1 second. (A) After the big hit game (small hit V) executed in the pattern type of some special symbols, even if it is a big hit variation, the specific period ( (e.g. 5 minutes) can be generated, (a) special symbol lottery in the "short-term chance state" and "long-term chance state" A big hit can be achieved in a ``short-time chance state'' or a ``long-time chance state'' by determining a fluctuation time of 5 minutes with a probability of several percent in a variation pattern lottery when a small win is made. It may be configured to separately provide a "special chance state" that can acquire a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol during variation (or small hit variation).

In such a "special chance state", if there is a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol at the start, the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is treated as a "recharge chance". It may be possible to restart the "4 consecutive battle production" while notifying that there is, and if there is no hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special pattern at the start, the final of the "4 consecutive battle production" If the second special pattern is not reserved at the time of the battle, the occurrence of a big hit (small hit V) is reported as a resurrection effect, and if the second special pattern can be reserved during the ``special chance state'', the final It may be configured to perform an effect display such that a big win game (minor win V) to be executed in "STOCK-BONUS" is added after the battle.

In addition, when the "special chance state" is triggered by (a) a jackpot game (minor win V) executed in the pattern type of some special symbols, as another modification, the target special symbols In the big hit game (small win V) triggered by the pattern type, or a part (gase) of the big win (small win) that is not the target, a special battle effect is generated as a “STOCK-BONUS” effect, and the game is played in the special battle. It may be configured such that the occurrence of the "special chance state" is notified when a success mode in which the player's side character wins is displayed.

(Modification 2 of the pachinko game machine of the 2-1 embodiment)
In the pachinko gaming machine of the 2-1 embodiment, when the specific period lasts N minutes, it is designed on the assumption that N normal symbol lottery (1 minute / times) is executed, but the specific After shifting to the game, the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, and then there is a time until the normal symbol lottery is performed after entering the operation port P741, or the normal symbol fluctuation display during a specific period. In consideration of the possibility that the player may not be able to receive the normal symbol lottery N times due to, for example, the period in which the drawing is not performed continues, the time for the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol, which is the specific period, is set to N minutes + X seconds. Or, by setting the symbol fixing time after the variable display of N seconds of the first special symbol to X seconds, the guarantee time "X seconds" for the player not to lose the right of the normal symbol lottery is provided. may be configured.

When the guarantee time is provided in this way, after notification of the normal symbol lottery result of N times, the guarantee time " It is necessary to wait for the remaining time of "X seconds", but during these periods, when shifting to a big win (small win), "STOCK-BONUS execution waiting" is displayed, and when returning to the normal game, it is displayed. , may be configured to execute a "result effect" for notifying the total number of acquired balls that can be acquired by Renso.

Also, in order for the player to receive the normal symbol lottery N times, the attention may be called as the remaining time of the guaranteed time "X seconds" decreases. As an effect for calling attention, the right-hand shot notification P832 may be changed to an emphasized mode, and a warning message such as "If you do not hit right, you will lose the right to battle!" The guaranteed time "X seconds" is the period from the start of the first special symbol loss fluctuation (after the start of the specific period) to the normal symbol lottery, and the control related to the normal symbol or normal electric accessory after that is stopped. If the period of time is counted and "X seconds" has passed, a new "1 minute" (corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol lottery and the normal electric accessory operation for one cycle time) is set as the guaranteed time, and the same configured to repeat the control of

[Second-2 embodiment]
Next, a second application example (2-2 embodiment) relating to the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 41. FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the game flow of the 2-2 embodiment, FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of the effect during the chance time of the 2-2 embodiment, and FIG. 40 is a diagram showing the 2-2 embodiment. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing another example of the effect during the chance time of the embodiment, and FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of the effect during the super chance time of the 2-2 embodiment.

The characteristic point of the 2-2 embodiment is that the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment is the first specific period (the period during which it is possible to acquire a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, which is simplified In addition, during the execution of the "chance time" which is sometimes referred to as the "first specific period"), the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is a predetermined condition (in the 2-2 embodiment, the second special symbol When the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery is 2 or more) is satisfied, the second specific period that occurs next time state (which may be simply referred to as a "second specific period") is given the right to be in a more advantageous state than the first specific period, so that the player can play the game during the specific period. It is possible to raise the interest of the game by drawing attention to whether or not it is possible to move to a further advantageous state depending on the result (the number of reserved acquisitions related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol).

The details of the 2-2 embodiment will be described below. The board configuration of the gaming machine (arrangement of winning devices, etc.) will be described as being the same as in the second embodiment and the 2-1 embodiment, but if the game described below can be configured, Appropriate changes are possible.

(game flow)
First, referring to FIG. 38, the game flow (transition of the game state) of the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment will be described. Incidentally, the pachinko game machine P of the 2-2 embodiment also employs the second special symbol preferential digestion control like the pachinko game machine P of the 2nd embodiment and the 2-1 embodiment.

In the normal game (low probability/low base), the game ball is shot to the left area P501L in the game area P501 of the pachinko game machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, and the game ball is entered into the first start winning opening 711A. By doing so, the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is executed, and the game state aims to acquire a "jackpot (special figure 1)" (FIG. 38(A)).

When the "jackpot (special figure 1)" is executed, the "chance time" is started (FIG. 38(B)). "Chance time" is a game state of low probability / high base state (electrical sapo 1 time), similar to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment and the 2-1 embodiment, the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol It is a gaming state in which a specific period in which a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol can be acquired occurs during the period (80 seconds).

In the pachinko game machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, the "chance time" is composed of the 80-second deviation variation of the first special symbol. During this time, by entering the game ball into the operation port P741 arranged in the right side area P501R of the game area P501, receiving a normal symbol lottery (per probability 1/9.99, variation time 10 seconds per time). is possible, and by performing 8 normal symbol lotteries during "chance time", the execution right of "STOCK-BONUS" which is a small hit V / big hit game based on the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol described later It is a game state aiming at acquisition of . That is, in this specific period of 80 seconds, as described above, the normal symbol lottery with a winning probability of 1/9.99 and a fluctuation time of 10 seconds per time can be received eight times.

In the "chance time", winning the above-mentioned normal symbol lottery with a probability of 1/9.99, and entering the game ball into P721 in the easy-to-enter state, relates to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. The probability (continuation rate) of acquiring at least one hold and acquiring the right to execute "chance time" or "super chance time" described later is 56.9. % (in other words, the expected value of getting a hit with a probability of 1/9.99 once in 8 times (80 seconds/fluctuation time of 10 seconds)), the probability of acquiring the execution right of "super chance time" is 19% (in other words, the expected value that a win with a probability of 1/9.99 is obtained twice or more in 8 times (80 seconds/fluctuation time of 10 seconds)). If the hold related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol cannot be obtained in the "chance time", the game returns to the normal game (Fig. 38 (I)).

After the specific period of "chance time" has passed, if there is one hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, "STOCK-BONUS" (small hit V / jackpot game based on the special symbol lottery ) (FIG. 38(D)), and after the end of "STOCK-BONUS", the process shifts to "chance time" (FIG. 38(E)).

Also, in the "chance time", if two or more holdings related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol are obtained, the execution right of the "super chance time" can be obtained. "Super Chance Time" is a period during which small hit fluctuation or big hit fluctuation of the second special pattern, which started to fluctuate when the holding relating to the special pattern lottery of the second special pattern is two, is executed, and is 170 seconds. A specific period, which is a variable display period of special symbols, occurs. That is, in the specific period of 170 seconds, as described above, the normal symbol lottery with the winning probability of 1/9.99 and the fluctuation time of 10 seconds per time can be received 17 times.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, even in a specific period that is a small hit fluctuation or a big hit fluctuation period of the second special symbol, which is the execution period of "super chance time", the special symbol of the second special symbol It becomes possible to acquire a reservation related to the lottery. "Super chance time" (170 seconds) has a longer period than the specific period in "chance time" (80 seconds), so the number of executable normal symbol lotteries is large, and the number of second special symbols It can be said that the possibility of obtaining a hold related to the special symbol lottery is increasing.

In "Super Chance Time", the number of executions of the normal symbol lottery is about 17 times, and it is possible to obtain a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol with a probability of about 83.3%, and again " It is possible to acquire the right to execute "Super Chance Time". If the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol cannot be obtained in the "super chance time", the transition to "STOCK-BONUS" after the end of the "super chance time" (Fig. 38 (G)) In the case that the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the 2 special symbols can be acquired, the process shifts to "SUPER_STOCK-BONUS" (FIG. 38(F)). After executing "SUPER_STOCK-BONUS", the game returns to "Super Chance Time" (FIG. 38(H)).

"STOCK-BONUS", which is executed after "Super Chance Time", is repeated until the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol becomes 0 (the variation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is 1 Seconds, even if it is internally the same as “chance time”, a specific period of 80 seconds does not occur), “SUPER_STOCK-BONUS” executed after “super chance time” is the second special symbol It is repeatedly executed until the number of holds related to the special symbol lottery becomes 2 (170 even if the state is the same as the "super chance time" internally because the variation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is 1 second. specific period of seconds does not occur).

It should be noted that, during the "chance time", if two holds related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol are acquired, the end of the 80-second deviation fluctuation based on the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, which is the "chance time" Later, the "super chance time" will start. That is, the variable display period of the second special symbol is the base state that is the gaming state, in other words, regardless of whether the special symbol variable time reduction function (time saving state) is activated or not, the variable display time of the special symbol depending on the number of reservations When the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol is determined, a variable display period of 170 seconds is selected when the number of reservations is 2, and a variation time of 1 second is selected when the number of reservations is other. It's like

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, even if the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol cannot be obtained in the "super chance time" which is the most advantageous state for the player, After the "STOCK-BONUS" is once executed, the "chance time" is started, so the most advantageous state is the most advantageous state in which two stages are set up until the shift to the normal game. Even when the "super chance time" has ended, the game flow can make the player think that "there is still a chance" and suppress the decline of the player's desire to play.

(Example of production of pachinko game machine P of 2-2 embodiment)
Next, examples of effects of "chance time" and "super chance time" in the pachinko game machine P of the 2-2 embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41. FIG.

<<Example of chance time production of pachinko game machine P of 2-2 embodiment>>
FIG. 39 shows an example of effect display in the chance time after the "jackpot (special figure 1)". At the top of the screen, an effect mode display P840 (character string "chance time") and a remaining number of games display P841 (character string "54 seconds left") are displayed. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, since the specific period is the variable display period of the special symbols, as the remaining game number display P841, the "remaining variation time" of the special symbols (or the fluctuation of the special symbols The remaining time from the end of the display to the end of the electric chewing support state) is displayed.

A pending display area P810 is displayed at the bottom right of the screen. In the embodiment of FIG. 39, there is no pending related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, and the pending object P811 (see FIG. 36) is not displayed. Also in the simple reservation display P814 in the left center of the screen, "0" is displayed as the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol.

At the bottom left of the screen, the cumulative win number display P824 (display of "Total_00600pt") and the jackpot icon display P821 (display of icon "V" and "x1" indicating the number) are displayed. shows the number of winning balls and the number of big winning games (small winning V) in the game.

In the center of the screen, a "7" pattern with a character attached as a variable display of the decorative pattern P801 is displayed stopped (temporarily stopped) in the right and middle rows, and the left pattern is changed. It is shown that it is being displayed. Here, the decorative pattern P801 informs the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery, and the normal pattern is displayed by displaying three 7 patterns in a grid pattern or by displaying other special decorative patterns. It is configured to notify "hit" as a result of the lottery.

In the example of FIG. 39, the 1 decorative pattern P801 (decorative pattern in the left column) is not stopped, and an image simulating the effect button P381 and "Aim for '7 (image)'" are displayed. By operating the effect button P381, it is determined whether three "7" symbols of the decorative pattern P801 are aligned (hit), or whether the decorative pattern P801 other than the "7" pattern is stopped and displayed in the left pattern (loss). A button effect for notification is being executed. Even when a predetermined period of time has passed since the performance button was displayed (when the player does not press the performance button for a predetermined period of time), the final display scheduled image such as 7 alignment or tenpai out is displayed.

In addition, not limited to the production example shown in FIG. 39, as a production to notify the result of the normal symbol lottery during the "chance time", for example, without accompanying the variable display of the decorative pattern P801, production using characters (for example It may be notified that the normal symbol lottery will be successful by executing the battle production) and displaying the success mode (battle victory).

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing another production example of the "chance time" of the pachinko game machine P of the 2-2 embodiment. More specifically, in the "chance time", one hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is obtained (in FIG. 40, one hold object P811 is displayed in the hold display area P810 at the bottom right of the screen This is an example of an effect display displayed under a situation where at least "STOCK-BONUS" has been executed and entry into "chance time" has been confirmed again, that is, under a situation where consecutive villas have been confirmed.

In the example of FIG. 40, the presentation mode display P840 is switched to "Promotion Chance", and a command-like message "Destroy the Seal!!" is displayed below the character string "Promotion Chance". In the center of the screen, a character with a heavy weapon is displayed, and if this character succeeds in ``breaking the seal'', which is required as a production, the result of the normal symbol lottery will be a win. It is suggested that That is, in the situation of "chance time", before and after the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is acquired, the tendency of the effect of notifying the result of the normal symbol lottery and the effect mode are configured to switch. there is

The reason for switching the presentation mode during the "chance time" is that in the pachinko game machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, a hold related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol occurs during the execution of the "chance time". If not, the player is paying attention to whether or not the advantageous state continues (whether or not it is possible to acquire the right to enter "chance time" again), and the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol After the occurrence, interest is focused on whether or not the special symbol lottery for the second second special symbol, which is the right to execute the "super chance time", will occur, so these players have different interests. This is because the effect of enhancing interest can be expected by displaying an optimal effect for the user.

In the example of FIG. 40, a production example using a character with a heavy weapon is shown. You may show the result of a lottery. In addition, even after obtaining the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to execute the same effect display as before the occurrence of the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol as shown in FIG. It may be configured as follows.

It should be noted that, although not shown, under the circumstances shown in FIG. 40, when the hold relating to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is acquired and the right of two or more big hit games (small win V) is acquired. Further, it may be configured so as to change to a state in which an effect is determined in a different effect tendency or effect mode.

<<Example of super chance time production of pachinko game machine P of 2-2 embodiment>>
FIG. 41 shows an example of super chance time effect executed in the pachinko game machine P of the 2-2 embodiment.

In the example of FIG. 41, as the effect of "super chance time", an effect display substantially equivalent to the effect of "chance time" shown in FIG. 39 is displayed. As a different point, in order to celebrate the fact that the situation is controlled in the most advantageous state, the display area of the variable display of the decorative pattern P801 for informing the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery is changed, and the background is changed. The difference is that an animation is displayed as the effect image. In the example of FIG. 41, the background animation is assumed to display an image that is not related to the result of the normal symbol lottery, but the variable display of the decorative symbol P801 informs the expectation that the winning result will be notified. Therefore, there is a case where a preview image (mini character action, addition of effects to the variable display of the decorative pattern P801, etc.) displayed superimposed on the background animation image is displayed.

During the execution of the "super chance time", if there are four holdings related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, the ball entering the second start winning opening P721 is a new jackpot game (small win V) right. , the variable display of the decorative pattern P801 for announcing the result of the normal pattern lottery may be hidden or may be changed to be displayed in a smaller display area. By reducing the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern P801 in this way, the visibility of the animation display of the background may be increased.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, about 10 animations are sequentially displayed for the background animation during the "super chance time" according to the number of times (or consecutive times) the super chance time is executed. configured to be Then, under the circumstances when "super chance time" is executed a specific number of times (for example, 5 times or 10 times), if you acquire a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, in "SUPER_STOCK-BONUS" As the effect of the big win game (small win V) to be executed, a special effect (for example, effect display related to the animation displayed in the immediately preceding "super chance time") may be executed. good.

In addition, in the "super chance time" which is the specific number of times, if the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol cannot be obtained, "chance time" will be after "STOCK-BONUS", If you acquire the right to execute "Super Chance Time" again, the same background animation as the previous specific number of times will be displayed again (delayed effect), and the "Super Chance Time" will be executed. At the time of execution, the background animation in the "super chance time" may be configured not to proceed unless a hold relating to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol is obtained.

In addition, not only the effect display mode as shown in FIG. 41, but also in the "super chance time", the notice effect to notify the result of the normal symbol lottery like "chance time" as shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 The player can select one of a plurality of presentation modes, such as a presentation mode similar to "Chance Time" or a presentation mode based on the above-mentioned background animation. It may be configured to be arbitrarily selectable.

(Modification 1 of the pachinko game machine of the 2-2 embodiment)
Next, a modification of the pachinko game machine P of the 2-2 embodiment will be described. First, as a first modification, the pachinko game machine P of the 2-2 embodiment has two specific periods with different degrees of advantage as the specific period, but there is a modification that further increases such as 3 or 4 Conceivable.

More specifically, as a modification 1 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, when determining the variation display related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, the number of reservations is limited to the variation when two However, even when the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is 3 or 4, a specific period (period during which the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol can be acquired) can be generated. It is conceivable to control so as to determine the time (variation pattern) of the variation display related to the special symbol lottery of the special symbols.

At this time, the larger the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, the longer the specific period may be (for example, 40 seconds when the number of reservations is 2, and 40 seconds when the number of reservations is 3). 50 seconds when the number of reservations is 4, and 60 seconds when the number of reservations is 4). Good (eg, 100 seconds for 2 holds, 20 seconds for 3 holds, 10 seconds for 4 holds).

(Modification 2 of the pachinko game machine of the 2-2 embodiment)
In the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, as described above, the second specific period (the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol when the number of holds related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is two The variation display period of the big hit (small win V) based on) is not dependent on the game state (high base state or low base state), but is determined depending on the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. It was explained that it is performed by the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation pattern lottery table, but when "the number of reservations and the game state related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol are in a high base state" The second specific period may be generated with a variation pattern determined by a variation pattern lottery table referred to as a condition.

By configuring in this way, in the period of the first specific period (loss fluctuation of the first special symbol in the high base state), the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol generates the second specific period Even if the number of conditions for causing the second specific period is met, the game state shifts to the low base state at the end of the first period, and one of the conditions for generating the second specific period is no longer satisfied. After the end of one specific period, it is possible to shift to the big win game (small win V) without fail, and it is possible to perform control so that the second specific period is always executed after the big win game (small win V). becomes.

At this time, in order to acquire the execution right for the second specific period, the condition for generating the second specific period after the execution of the big win game (minor win V) in the first specific period +1 second Although it is necessary to acquire a hold related to the special symbol lottery of 2 special symbols, as described above, after the end of the first specific period, after the end of the second specific period, it will always shift to the big hit (small win V). Also, the start of the first specific period and the second specific period can be always after the execution of the big win (small win V), and the transition of the game state is made easy for the players to understand. can be done.

[2nd-3rd embodiment]
Regarding the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, a third application example (2-3 embodiment) will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43. FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the game flow of the 2-3 embodiment, and FIG. 43 is a diagram showing the distribution ratio of the big winning (small winning) symbols of the 2-3 embodiment.

The characteristic point of the 2-3 embodiment is that the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment has a special By setting one of a plurality of high base states (electric sapo mode) with different control related to the normal symbol lottery depending on the type of symbol (big hit symbol, small winning symbol), a specific period in the specific game (second special symbol The period during which the reservation related to the special symbol lottery can be acquired) can be configured to vary the ease of acquisition of the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, and the game performance in the specific period (regarding the normal symbol lottery To enhance interest in a specific game by a difference in control).

More specifically, in the pachinko game machine P of the 2-3 embodiment, the normal symbol lottery is "hit" as a type of high base state (electric sapo mode) in which the control related to the normal symbol lottery in the specific period is different. It consists of "Electric Sapo Mode 1" with a probability of 1/1 (100%) and "Electric Sapo Mode 2" with a probability of 1/10 (10%) that the normal pattern lottery will be "hit", and further " In the case of controlling to the electric support mode 2", the number of games to be maintained in the high base state is one to three times.

That is, when controlled to "electric support mode 1", by playing the game as intended by the design, it is possible to acquire the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the four second special symbols without fail, and to "electric support mode 2". In the case of being controlled, the game that receives the normal symbol lottery is developed in anticipation of the continuation of the specific game (continuous game).

The details of the second-third embodiment will be described below. Regarding the board structure of the gaming machine (arrangement of winning devices, etc.), the description will be made assuming that it is the same as in the second embodiment, the 2-1 embodiment, and the 2-2 embodiment, but the game described below will be described. As long as it can be configured, it can be changed as appropriate.

(game flow)
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the game flow of the pachinko game machine P of the 2nd-3rd embodiment. In the "normal game (low probability/low base state)" of FIG. 42, the player shoots a game ball into the left area P501L of the game area P501, enters the game ball into the first start winning opening P711A, and By receiving a special symbol lottery of 1 special symbol, it aims to acquire the right to execute the "big hit (special symbol 1)" (Fig. 42(A)).

When the "jackpot (special figure 1)" is started, the player shoots a game ball to the right area P501R of the game area P501, enters the game ball into the big winning hole P751, and shoots the game ball with the prize ball. Acquire. At this time, as in the second embodiment, 2-1 embodiment, and 2-2 embodiment, if the shot is aimed at the big winning opening P751 during the big win game, it will also enter the first starting winning opening P711B. A ball is generated, and a hold relating to the special symbol lottery of at least one first special symbol occurs during the big win game (small win V). After the "jackpot (special figure 1)", the game shifts to "STOCK-TIME 1" as shown in FIG. 42 (FIG. 42(B)).

"STOCK-TIME 1" is a specific game with a low probability / high base state (electric chew support state), and based on the pattern that triggered the execution of "jackpot (special 1)", a normal pattern lottery hit While controlling to one of two high base states (electric sapo mode) with different probability of becoming, based on the pattern that triggered the execution of "big hit (special figure 1)", the big hit game (small hit V) is executed The number of variable display times of the special symbols to be maintained in the high base state when not performed is also controlled to one to three times.

A specific example of the game state of "STOCK-TIME1" is shown in FIG. In the distribution of the jackpot game (small hit V) symbols of the pachinko game machine P of the 2-3 embodiment shown in FIG. The jackpot pattern (group) that is jackpot pattern D" is the jackpot pattern to be controlled at "STOCK-TIME 1".

Here, the "selection probability" in FIG. Indicates the probability to be determined, "electric support number" is the number of games to maintain the high base state set after each jackpot game of "special figure 1_jackpot pattern A" ~ "special figure 1_jackpot pattern D" is shown.

The "normal pattern probability" in FIG. 43 is the probability that the normal symbol lottery will be "hit" in the specific game (high base state) controlled after the "special figure 1_jackpot pattern A" to "special figure 1_jackpot pattern D". A high base state in which the normal symbol probability is 1/1 is defined as "electrical support mode 1", and a high base state in which the normal symbol probability is 1/10 is defined as "electrical support mode 2".

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P of the 2nd and 3rd embodiments, the fluctuation time of the loss fluctuation based on the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol in the high base state is 30 seconds, and the normal symbol based on the normal symbol lottery. The variation time of is about 4 seconds per variation. That is, while the first special symbol loss variation in the high base state (electrical sapo state) is performed once, the normal symbol variation is executed about 7 times, and the duration of the high base state is the special symbol variation display twice. Or when it becomes 3 times, the maximum executable number of normal symbol lotteries increases to about 14 times and about 21 times.

"Continuity rate" in FIG. 43 indicates the probability (expectation) that the second special symbol can be reserved for the special symbol lottery in the specific period (the total period of fluctuation of the first special symbol in the high base state). , indicating that the execution right of the specific game (STOCK-TIME2) is acquired at the indicated continuation rate (probability).

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P of the 2-3 embodiment, there are cases where the number of times to maintain the high base state is multiple times (when the number of times of electric support is 2 times, 3 times), but the first or second time If it is possible to acquire the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol during the execution of the loss fluctuation of the first special symbol which is the second specified period, the second or third specified by the second special symbol preferential digestion control A big win game (minor win V) is executed by the special symbol lottery related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol without executing the period (loss variation of the first special symbol).

That is, in the pachinko game machine P of the 2nd-3rd embodiment, in the specific game controlled to the "Electric Sapo Mode 1", in a short time (30 seconds), 4 holdings related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol are acquired. On the other hand, when it is controlled to "Electric Sapo Mode 2", even if the number of electric sapo times increases, the specific period (first special At the moment when the pattern loss variation) ends, the execution of the specific period that can acquire the hold related to the special pattern lottery of the new second special pattern is canceled, so when it is controlled to "electric support mode 2" Acquisition of a hold related to a special symbol lottery of a plurality of second special symbols is a rare event.

Returning to FIG. 42, the description of the game state (game flow) is continued. In "STOCK-TIME 1", the special symbol of the second special symbol before the number of games of the specified number of times (the number of electric sapo times) based on the jackpot symbol that triggered the execution of the "big hit (special figure 1)" When the holding related to the lottery can be acquired, the "jackpot (special figure 2) 'STOCK-BONUS'"" is executed (FIG. 42(C)). On the other hand, at "STOCK-TIME 1", before the specified number of games (number of electric sapo times) is consumed by the special symbol lottery of the 1st special symbol, the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the 2nd special symbol could not be obtained. If so, it returns to the "normal game" (Fig. 42(D)).

"Big hit (special figure 2) 'STOCK-BONUS'" is a big hit game (small hit V) is controlled to repeatedly execute, and after executing "big hit (special figure 2) 'STOCK-BONUS'" corresponding to the hold related to the special symbol lottery of all the second special symbols, to "STOCK-TIME 2" Move (FIG. 42(E)).

In addition, every time "big hit (special figure 2) 'STOCK-BONUS'" is executed, "STOCK-TIME2" is executed internally, but based on the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol Since the big hit (small hit) variation of the second special symbol ends in a short time variation of about 1 second, there is no suspension related to the special symbol lottery of all the second special symbols, and the special symbol of the first special symbol. The specific period does not occur and the normal electric accessary product 770 is not released in a manner in which it is easy to enter the ball until the loss variation based on the lottery is executed.

"STOCK-TIME2" is a specific game that shifts after the big win game (small win V) based on the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, and has three types of game states as shown in FIG. "STOCK-TIME2" is similar to "STOCK-TIME1". There is no difference as a game mechanism. However, "STOCK-TIME2", which shifts after the big hit game (small hit V) of "Special Figure 2_Big Hit/Small Hit Design A" to "Special Figure 2_Big Hit/Small Hit Design C", is normally drawn by lottery. The normal pattern probability of becoming a “hit” is 1/1. There is a high possibility that it will be played, and it is a game state in which it is easy to acquire a large amount of balls in a short time.

In addition, "STOCK-TIME 2" is configured so that the number of times of electric support in a specific game is at least 2 times even in the case of "power support mode 2" with a normal pattern probability of 1/10, When "STOCK-TIME 1" is executed in "power support mode 2", the minimum number of power support times is greater than 1, and the degree of expectation for continuation of the specific game (continuous game) is also set high.

In "STOCK-TIME 2", when the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is obtained, the "jackpot (special figure 2) 'STOCK-BONUS'" is executed (Fig. 42 (F)), and the second When the hold related to the special symbol lottery for the special symbol cannot be obtained, the game returns to the "normal game" (FIG. 42(G)).

(Modified example of the pachinko game machine of the 2-3 embodiment)
Subsequently, a modified example of the pachinko game machine P of the 2-3 embodiment will be described. In the pachinko game machine P of the 2-3 embodiment, as a state in which the control related to the normal symbol lottery in the high base state is different, the "normal symbol probability", which is the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery, is different. Although "sapo mode 1" and "electric sapo mode 2" have been explained, the types of "sapo mode" are not limited to two, and "electric sapo mode 3", "electric sapo mode 4", etc. having different "normal symbol probability" It may be settable.

In addition, as a method of differentiating the type of "Electric sapo mode", instead of the "normal pattern probability", the type of "normal pattern fluctuation time reduction function (normal pattern time reduction)" is different, and the normal pattern fluctuation A case where the time is set to 2 seconds per variation instead of 4 seconds, or a case where 1 variation is set to 8 seconds may be provided, and the variation time of various normal patterns can be determined and the average is 4 seconds. Such cases may be provided. By making it possible to execute different "electric sapo modes" depending on the "normal pattern time saving", the number of times the normal symbol lottery is executed in a specific period can be changed, and the normal symbol lottery can be executed in a shorter time, It can be sent out as a game state in which a high continuation rate can be expected. In addition, the "electric support mode" may be configured as different specifications by combining the types of "normal pattern probability" and "normal pattern time saving".

As described above, the 2-1 embodiment to the 2-3 embodiment have been described as application examples of the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment. The pachinko game machines P of the 2-1 embodiment to the 2-3 embodiment, which are these application examples, and their modifications can be implemented as independent techniques, but the techniques disclosed in each can be combined as appropriate. It is also possible to implement

In addition, the second embodiment and the application example of the second embodiment are the occurrence of a state where the "hit" of the normal symbol lottery is easy to enter the second start winning opening P721, and the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. Although it has been explained in the embodiment of acquiring such a hold, as a modification to the second embodiment and the application example of the second embodiment, the "hit" of the normal symbol lottery is the second special symbol lottery. It is also possible to construct a modified example as follows so as not to acquire (the right to execute a big win game (minor win V)).

In the second embodiment and the application example of the second embodiment, the "hit" of the normal symbol lottery is a modification that does not acquire the reservation (execution right of the big win game (small win V)) related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. As an example of a method of executing the example, a distribution device (such as a movable valve member) for distributing game balls to two flow paths is provided inside the winning device related to the normal electric accessory 770, and one of the flow paths is the general winning opening P731. It is conceivable to adopt a board configuration in which the other side is configured with a flow path that guides the game ball to the second start winning opening P721.

At this time, the operation pattern of the sorting device inside the prize winning device related to the normal electric accessory 770 is changed according to the winning pattern lottery of the normal pattern in the normal pattern lottery, the type of "electric support mode", etc., and the normal pattern lottery is performed. A state is created in which the winning probabilities for the second start winning port P721 are different when a "hit" is achieved. As a specific example, the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory 770 and the sorting device inside the winning device is set so that the winning probability for the second start winning port P721 is 100% in the "normal symbol _ winning symbol A", "Normal design _ winning design B" has a winning probability of 50% for the second start winning opening P721, and "normal design _ winning design C" has a winning probability for the second starting winning opening P721 of 10% (0% may be acceptable). An example of configuring as follows.

In the second embodiment configured in this way and the application example of the second embodiment, during the execution of the specific period, when a "win" is won in the normal symbol lottery, the "normal electric accessory opening effect" is executed. Then, when the game ball is urged to enter the normal electric accessory 770, and the player enters the game ball into the winning device related to the ordinary electric accessory 770, the general winning opening P731 or the second start winning Regardless of which of P721 the ball was entered, it is notified to increase the degree of expectation related to whether a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol has occurred (the color of the effect effect is "blue" ⇒ " Green” ⇒ “Red” ⇒ “Gold” ⇒ “Rainbow (confirmation of holding acquisition related to special design lottery of 4 second special symbols)”, etc.), and for a specific period At the end timing, it may be configured to notify the acquisition number of pending related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol as the game result (for example, the button effect is executed at the symbol fixed time of the special symbol at the expiration of the specific period Then, by operating a button, the number of pending acquisitions related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is displayed as "V x ○ pieces", etc.).

When configured in this way, it is preferable not to display the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery (display by the reservation display area P810, simple reservation display P814). In addition, by adopting such a modified example, even if the normal symbol is a hit, the suspension related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol does not always occur, so the normal electric accessory 770 can be opened. A pachinko game machine P which is a modified example of the second embodiment and the application example of the second embodiment that can send out many situations and increases the frequency of winning the normal symbol lottery in a specific period and has many changes in performance. can be provided.

(Activation of the variable time reduction function triggered by the number of times the special symbol is activated "relief function")
Operation of the variable time reduction function triggered by the number of times the special symbols are operated "relief function", in the low base state (so-called "normal game"), when the variable display of the special symbols of the predetermined number of games is executed , high base state (operation state of electric chew support function)).

More specifically, after the transition to the low base state (immediately after the RAM is cleared or after the game end condition is satisfied in the high base state, after execution of a special game that shifts to the low base state), a predetermined game When a special game that is the number of times is executed, by generating a high base state, the starting winning opening related to the normal electric accessory 770 (starting winning opening related to the first special symbol or starting winning opening related to the second special symbol It is a function that facilitates the winning of a prize in the mouth), facilitates the acquisition of the special symbol lottery right, and suppresses the excessive consumption of game balls by the player.

"Relief function" sets a plurality of game times as a predetermined number of games, and the number of times of time reduction given when the first relief function is activated (the number of games to maintain a high base state), and the second time ( Third time) may be configured to vary the number of times of time saving given when the relief function is activated.

In addition, in the case where the "relief function" is configured so as to always operate when a special symbol lottery is executed for a predetermined number of games, depending on the performance of the "relief function" that operates, the player may be forced to play excessively. Since there is a possibility that the game will be lost, the lottery related to the operation of the "relief function" is executed when the special symbol lottery of the predetermined number of games is executed, and for example, the operation of the "relief function" is won. It may be configured such that the "relief function" operates at a probability of 50% and 1/2.

(Activation of special symbol fluctuation time reduction function by "time reduction symbol")
In the premise pachinko game machine and the present embodiment, etc., after the execution of the jackpot game (special game), the pachinko game machine P that operates the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function (time saving function) and the electric chew support function has been explained. . The operation of the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function (time saving function) and the electric chew support function is not limited only after the execution of such a special game, but a specific type of special symbol (losing symbol, small winning symbol) is stopped and displayed The operation may be started even when the jackpot game is not executed even when the game is played.

For example, in the special design lottery of the first special design, in the winning design lottery (lost design lottery) when the winning lottery is "lost", if you win the "time-saving _ lost design" that wins at 1/800 In addition, it may be configured to generate a high base state (time saving state, electric chew support state) that continues until 100 special symbol lotteries are executed.

In addition, it is also possible to provide different types of “time saving _losing symbols” so that the number of games to be maintained in the high base state differs according to the type of “time saving _losing symbols”. For example, 50 times for "time saving _ lost pattern A", 100 times for "time saving _ lost pattern B", 10000 times for "time saving _ lost pattern C" (* practically the next big hit confirmed), can also be

The variable time shortening function (time saving function) of the special pattern, the "relief function" related to the electric chew support function, and the "time saving pattern" are the technology disclosed in the present embodiment, the second embodiment, and the application example of the second embodiment. It is also possible to apply to

In particular, for the present embodiment, the second embodiment, and the application example of the second embodiment, which adopts a small hit V as the specification (spec) of the game machine, By adopting the "relief function" and the "time-saving pattern", the second special pattern that becomes a big hit game (minor win V) with a high probability of being easy to acquire the reservation related to the special pattern lottery is the first in the "normal game". It can occur even when a "big win" is not achieved in the special symbol lottery of special symbols, and the effect of more effectively suppressing the consumption of game balls by the player can be expected.

[Third embodiment]
In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment and the second embodiment, the player actually operates the production button P381 to change the production contents or display new production contents. However, the effect using the effect button P381 is not limited to this. In addition, the simple pattern P802 was displayed as a display object indicating the lottery result of the special pattern, but not only such a role, but also the role of ensuring visibility for giving diversity to the production in the decorative pattern P801. It is also possible to configure such that it is displayed as a display object. In addition, it is possible to expand the range of games by applying not only the game property of "small win V" mainly composed of special symbols, but also the game property of "small win V" mainly composed of normal symbols. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a third embodiment, and only differences from the base technology and the present embodiment will be described in detail below, and descriptions of common points will be omitted or simplified. Among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment, elements identical or corresponding to elements described in the base technology or the present embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals.

《Button production and automatic operation function》
As described above, the effect of changing the effect content or displaying new effect content by operating the effect button P381 is referred to as button effect. Depending on the type of button effect, the presence or absence of display of an operation prompting image (details will be described later), the type of operation, and the type of content of effect are different. This button effect allows the player to infer the degree of expectation for a big win. In other words, the degree of expectation for a big hit is different depending on the effect content changed by the button effect or the type of effect content newly displayed (effect content type).

The operation promotion image is an effect image for prompting the player to operate the effect button P381 or the effect lever P382. is displayed on the lever image. , "lever operation" for effecting lever P382, etc.) It refers to an image attached with a character image such as "Hit repeatedly!" or "Pull the lever!" for "lever operation"). When the operation prompting image is displayed, at the same time, a dedicated voice that instructs the operation mode (for example, "Press!" for "Single press", "Press repeatedly" for "Continuous press") is displayed. , if it is a "lever operation", a voice such as "Pull the lever!") may be output. Whether or not an operation prompting image is displayed indicates whether it is a button rendering that displays an operation prompting image or a button rendering that does not display an operation prompting image. (also referred to as a first operation effect), and a button effect in which no operation prompting image is displayed is referred to as a back button effect (also referred to as a second operation effect). As for the back button effect, which is a button effect in which the operation promoting image is not displayed, the operation promoting image is not displayed (therefore, the sound instructing the operation mode described above is not output either), but the effect button P381 and the effect lever P382. is operated to change the content of the presentation or display new content of the presentation.

The operation type is the type of operation mode described above, and is the operation mode of the effect button P381 or the operation mode of the effect lever P382 for changing the effect content or displaying new effect content. In addition to "single press", "continuous hit", and "lever operation", the operation types include "long press", which continues to press the production button P381, and "lever long pull", which continues to pull the production lever P382. The operation prompting image corresponding to such an operation type may be an image of a button image with the words "Press and hold!" ), and if it is a "lever long pull", an image with the text "Keep pulling the lever!" may be used).

The effect content type is the type of effect content displayed by operating the effect button P381 or the effect lever P382. The type of effect content differs depending on the type of operation promotion image or operation mode in the case of front button effects, and differs depending on the other effect contents at the time of execution of the back button effects in the case of back button effects {for example, expectations are high as described above. whether a ready-to-win effect (a developmental effect that develops after forming a ready-to-win state, a so-called super ready-to-win effect) is being executed, or an image of a specific character displayed immediately before execution of a highly anticipated ready-to-win effect is being displayed, etc.}. For example, if the production content type in the table button production is "single-shot push production" (also called "single-shot operation production"), the dialogue production before forming the reach state and after the formation of the reach state (development among multiple development productions If it is a cut-in effect of production A), "Continuous hit production" (also called "Consecutive hit operation production"), meter production before forming the reach state and after forming the reach state (development production B) among multiple development effects In the case of the enemy annihilation effect and the “lever operation effect”, there is a black effect before forming the ready-to-reach state, and after forming the ready-to-reach state (development effect C among a plurality of development effects), and the like. The details of these front button effects will be described later. In addition, as the type of effect content in the back button effect, for example, the ready-to-win effect with a high degree of expectation as described above (a developmental effect that develops after the ready-to-win state is formed, a so-called super ready-to-win effect) is being executed, and the ready-to-win effect develops. Production D (development production A, development production B, and development production C, a reach production with a lower expectation for a big hit than development production C, and a production that has the potential to further develop from development production D to either development production A or development production B. ), the back button effect can be repeatedly hit for 10 seconds during the execution of the development effect D (operation valid period is 10 seconds), and by repeatedly hitting the button, it indicates that the development effect D is being executed. A title color change effect in which the color of the title (the color of the title display that is always displayed during the execution of the development effect D) changes , The color of the title may change in the order of blue → green → red → gold, and the latter color indicates a higher expectation for a big hit or a higher expectation for development A or B) When the image of the specific character is displayed immediately before the high-expectation ready-to-win effect is executed, the back button effect is to press the button once at the timing when the specific character laughs (the operation valid period is 0.5 Seconds), it is a single-timing push effect in which the characters such as "confirmed" are displayed in rainbow colors only when the variation that is executing this effect is a big hit.

A specific example of the button effect in the third embodiment is as follows.
(1) Dialogue effect operation promotion image display: Yes (front button effect), operation effective period is 3 seconds (operation effective period ends with button operation)
Type of operation: Single push Effect content type: Before forming the ready-to-reach state, a character and a button image (no display of "Press!") are displayed, and when the effect button P381 is pressed once, a "word image with speech bubble" is displayed. Is displayed. The color of the image (the color of the balloon) is in the order of blue<green<red<gold, and the expectation of a big hit is high.
(2) Display of cut-in effect operation prompting image: Yes (front button effect), operation effective period is 3 seconds (operation effective period ends with button operation)
Operation type: single-shot push Effect content type: During execution of development effect A, a button image (with a display of "Press!") is displayed, and when the effect button P381 is pressed once, "Allied character cut-in" is performed. Is displayed. The color of the image (the color of the cut-in) is in the order of green<red<gold, and the expectation of a big hit is high. After the cut-in effect, whether or not the game is a big hit is reported (for example, if the ally character wins over the enemy character, it is a big win, and if it is defeated, it is a loss).
(3) Display of meter effect operation promotion image: Yes (front button effect), operation valid period is 5 seconds (The operation valid period does not end with button operation, but the operation valid period ends when the meter reaches 20 stages )
Type of operation: Continuous hit effect Content type: Before forming the ready-to-reach state, a 20-level meter and a button image (with the message "Try multiple hits!") are displayed. "Meter is accumulating" is displayed. The more the meter accumulates, the higher the expectation of a big hit.
(4) Display of enemy annihilation effect operation promotion image: Yes (front button effect), operation valid period is 7 seconds (operation valid period does not end with button operation)
Operation type: Repeated hit effect Content type: During the execution of development effect B, the display of "100 remaining enemies" and the button image (with the display of "Try multiple hits!") are displayed, and the effect button P381 is repeatedly pressed. , "The number of remaining enemies is decreasing" is displayed according to the number of consecutive hits. When the number of remaining enemies reaches 0, a big hit is reported.
(5) Whether or not to display a darkening effect operation prompting image: Yes (front button effect), operation valid period is 3 seconds (operation valid period ends with button operation)
Operation type: Lever operation Effect content type: Before the ready-to-win state is formed, a lever image (with a display of "Retreat!") is displayed, and when the effect lever button P382 is operated, the screen turns black with a sound of "Puchun". , After that, ``Large white characters written as intense heat'' are displayed. Although it is not guaranteed to hit the jackpot, the expectation of winning is relatively high compared to the dialogue and meter effects. ). It should be noted that if the image is a character of "confirmed", the jackpot is confirmed.
(6) Whether or not to display the image to promote the operation of the object falling effect: Yes (front button effect), the operation valid period is 3 seconds (the operation valid period ends with button operation)
Operation type: Lever operation Effect content type: A lever image (with a display of "Close!") is displayed during the execution of the advanced effect C, and when the effect lever button P382 is operated, only when a big hit is achieved. is dropped, and the effect display device P80 becomes a rainbow screen. If the winning is not a big hit, the accessory will not fall and the effect display device P80 will display a gray screen. Compared to the cut-in production and the enemy annihilation production, the expectation of a big hit is relatively high. It is more likely that the character will fall in the production, but if the cut-in is gold, the victory of the ally character may be confirmed).

Regarding the meter effect, the enemy annihilation effect, and the title color change effect, which are ``continuous hit effects'', the contents of the effect change based on the player's actual repeated hit operation, but even if the above-mentioned ``auto repeated hit'' operation is possible, good.

As described above, in executing the button effects, the effects are generated or changed based on the actual player operation. It is possible to generate and change effects in the same way as if there were. Specifically, it is as follows.

In a situation where there is neither a reservation corresponding to the first special design nor a reservation corresponding to the second special design, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed after the fluctuation of the first special design or the second special design has stopped. , the variable standby state. When the effect button P381 is single-pressed in this variable standby state, as shown in FIG. 44, two item screens of "Automatic operation function ON" and "Automatic operation function OFF" are displayed , In a situation where there is neither a hold corresponding to the first special symbol nor a hold corresponding to the second special symbol, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol stopped. Until then, it is not in the variable standby state, so even if the effect button P381 is single-pressed, the two item screens "automatic operation function ON" and "automatic operation function OFF" are not displayed. In a situation where there is neither a reservation corresponding to the special design nor a reservation corresponding to the second special design, the fluctuation standby state may be started immediately after the fluctuation of the first special design or the second special design is stopped, and in that case, the fluctuation Two item screens of "automatic operation function ON" and "automatic operation function OFF" are displayed by single pressing of the effect button P381 immediately after the stop. This item screen can be cursor-selected by operating the cross key in the right and left direction. When the effect button P381 is pressed once again after the cursor is aligned with the item screen of "automatic operation function ON", the screen shown in FIG. As shown, the screen is switched to "Automatic operation function is turned ON", and the automatic operation function is set. In addition, when the cursor is aligned with the item screen of "automatic operation function OFF" and the production button P381 is pressed again, the screen changes to "automatic operation function is OFF", and the automatic operation The function is not set (set is canceled). Although not shown, in the variable standby state, the decorative pattern P801 and the simple pattern P802 continue to be displayed. Even if the "function ON" screen is displayed, the display of the decorative pattern P801 and the simple pattern P802 is continued on the rear layer.

By setting the automatic operation function, the front button effect can be performed when the player actually operates at a predetermined timing within the operation valid period, even if the player does not actually operate it. In the same way as , the production is generated or changed. Specifically, when the dialogue effect is executed, the "line image with speech balloon" is automatically displayed 1.5 seconds after the operation effective period starts, and when the meter effect is executed, 0.2 seconds after the operation effective period starts. Afterwards, the ``Meter is filling up'' display will be automatically displayed as repeated hits at 0.2 second intervals, and during the enemy annihilation effect, `` The number of remaining enemies will decrease” is automatically displayed, and when the darkening effect is executed, 1.5 seconds after the start of the operation valid period, “characters written in large letters with intense heat” (or “confirmed ) is automatically displayed. As described above, even if the player does not actually operate the front button effect, at a predetermined timing within the operation valid period, the effect is generated or changed in the same manner as when the player actually operates the button. You can let In addition, if the automatic operation function is not set and there is no actual operation by the player, the "line image with balloon" will not be displayed when executing the dialogue effect, and the "meter are accumulating” is not displayed, and during the enemy annihilation production, the display of “remaining enemies is decreasing” is not displayed (However, the process of decreasing is not displayed, and if there is a mistake, 1 person, If it is a big hit, it will be displayed as 0 people in the end), and when the darkening effect is executed, "characters written as intense heat in white characters" (or "characters written as confirmed") will be displayed. Do not show.

Here, the cut-in effect, the object drop effect, and the two types of back button effects, which are part of the front button effect, are button effects that are not subject to the automatic operation function. In other words, even if the automatic operation function is set, if there is no actual operation by the player, it will not be considered that there has been an actual operation by the player. However, regarding the cut-in effect and the two types of back button effects, whether or not the automatic operation function is set, the effect will not occur unless the player actually operates it, but the character drop effect will not occur. Regarding, regardless of whether the automatic operation function is set or not, at the timing when the operation valid period expires without the player's operation (that is, at the timing 3 seconds after the operation valid period starts), In the case of a big hit, the role object falls and the performance display device P80 becomes a rainbow screen, and in the case of no big win, the performance display device P80 does not fall and the performance display device P80 becomes a gray screen. By configuring in this way, the automatic operation function is not dared to be applied to the button effects that are greatly related to the confirmation of the big win or the notification of the big win, because the effect is such that the player can feel as if he or she is grabbing the big win. , the generation of the effect depends on the player's operation.

Regarding whether or not the automatic operation function is set (setting and setting cancellation), it is not limited to selecting from the two item screens displayed from the single press of the production button P381 in the variable standby state, the first special symbol or the second It can be set even during the special symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as symbol variation). Specifically, it is as follows.

In a state in which the automatic operation function is not set, during a period in which the operation is not valid during symbol variation (a symbol variation period and not in the operation valid period in the front button effect and the back button effect), the effect button P381 is pressed. The automatic operation function is set by performing a long press (also referred to as “continuous operation” or “continuation of single operation”) for a predetermined time (for example, two seconds). In that case, a screen saying "automatic operation function is turned on" is displayed during fluctuation, as shown in FIG. to be displayed. In addition, if the automatic operation function is set, if the production button P381 is pressed once during the pattern fluctuation, the setting of the automatic operation function will be cancelled. It is also canceled by single pressing of the button P381). In that case, a screen saying "automatic operation function is turned off" is displayed during the fluctuation, but it is smaller than the screen displayed in the fluctuation standby state and is displayed at the lower left instead of the center of the screen. However, these settings and cancellations cannot be made in some situations.
(1) Situation in which the automatic operation function cannot be set (1-1) When the operation effective period of the front button effect overlaps before the long press of the effect button P381 for setting the automatic operation function reaches a predetermined time ( When the effective period of operation of the front button effect starts before the specified time elapses)
(1-2) When the operation valid period of the back button effect overlaps with the operation valid period of the back button effect before reaching the predetermined time of long pressing of the effect button P381 for setting the automatic operation function (the operation valid period of the back button effect is period begins)
(1-3) The pattern variation next to the current pattern variation (the pattern variation that started the long pressing) starts before the predetermined time of the long press of the production button P381 for setting the automatic operation function is reached. Case (2) Circumstances in which the setting of the automatic operation function cannot be canceled (2-1) When the effect button P381 is pressed once during the operation valid period of the back button effect

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set and cancel the setting of the automatic operation in an appropriate situation without waiting for the stop of the pattern variation (exactly, the variation standby state). As a modification, the automatic operation function is not set, and the effect button P381 is activated from the operation valid period during symbol variation (the symbol variation period, the operation valid period in the front button effect and the back button effect). The automatic operation function may be set when a long press is started and the long press reaches a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) after the expiration of the valid operation period. In the case of such a configuration, in the one-shot push effect of the front button, the operation valid period ends at the time of single-press. 2 seconds), the automatic operation function is set when the predetermined time is reached, but if the production button P381 is long-pressed after the start of the operation effective period of the repeated hitting production, the "automatic repeated hitting" operation is performed. , the automatic operation function is not set even after the predetermined time has passed since the start of long-pressing, and only if the long-pressing continues even after the operation valid period ends, the long press after the end of the operation valid period. An automatic operation function is set when the press reaches a predetermined time (for example, taking a meter effect that is a continuous hit effect as an example, a long press starts when there are 4 seconds left in the operation valid period of 5 seconds. In this case, if the long press is continued, the automatic continuous tapping will be executed in the remaining operation effective period of 4 seconds, but the automatic operation function will not be set even if 2 seconds have passed since the long press was started. However, if the long press is continued even after the remaining operation valid period of 4 seconds has passed, and if the long press is continued for 2 seconds after the remaining operation valid period of 4 seconds has passed, the remaining operation valid period is 4 seconds. The automatic operation function is set at the timing when 2 seconds have passed since 4 seconds, which is the operation effective period of , has passed.). In addition, in the case of such a configuration, as a modification of (1-1), until the long press of the effect button P381 for setting the automatic operation function reaches a predetermined time, the operation effective period of the front button effect and Even in the case of overlap (when the operation effective period of the front button effect starts before the elapse of a predetermined time), the automatic operation function may be settable, and furthermore, the effect button P381 for setting the automatic operation function may be set. Even if it overlaps with the operation valid period of the back button effect before reaching the predetermined time of long pressing (when the operation valid period of the back button effect starts before the predetermined time has elapsed), the automatic operation function can be set. It is good as

In the third embodiment, the player can set the automatic operation timing so that the player's tastes and preferences can be reflected in the automatic operation function. In other words, it is possible to set even the timing of the occurrence of the effect in the front button effect in the state where the automatic operation function is set and the effect change (the timing when it is assumed that the button operation has been performed).

As described above, by setting the automatic operation function, even if the player does not actually operate the front button effect, when the dialogue effect is executed, 1.5 seconds after the operation valid period starts, " A dialogue image with a speech balloon” is automatically displayed, and when the meter effect is executed, 0.2 seconds after the start of the operation valid period, the display of “The meter is filling up” is automatically treated as a series of 0.2 second intervals. During the enemy annihilation effect, after 0.2 seconds from the start of the effective period of operation, the message "The number of remaining enemies is decreasing" is automatically displayed as continuous hits at intervals of 0.1 seconds. After 1.5 seconds from the start of the validity period, ``a large white character written as intense heat'' (or ``a letter written as confirmed'') will be automatically displayed, but this automatic operation timing {automatic The timing of occurrence of effect or change of effect in front button effect in the state in which the operation function is set (timing at which button operation is assumed to have occurred)} is referred to as the normal setting state of the automatic operation function. From the normal setting state of this automatic operation function, the automatic operation timing in the front button production to which the automatic operation function can be applied {The timing of the production generation and production change in the front button production in the state where the automatic operation function is set (the button operation is The state in which the timing assumed to have occurred)} is changed is the automatic operation timing change state of the automatic operation function. It should be noted that the automatic operation timing change can be arbitrarily set for each table button effect to which the automatic operation function can be applied. Specifically, it is as follows.

In a situation where there is neither a reservation corresponding to the first special design nor a reservation corresponding to the second special design, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed after the fluctuation of the first special design or the second special design has stopped. , the variable standby state. When the performance button P381 is single-pressed in this variable standby state, two item screens of "automatic operation function ON" and "automatic operation function OFF" are displayed as described above. When the cursor is moved to the "automatic operation function ON" item screen on this item screen and the up operation of the cross key is performed, an automatic operation timing setting item screen as shown in FIG. 46 is displayed. More specifically, as a setting item screen for the automatic operation timing, a four-item screen of "speech occurrence timing", "meter accumulation start timing", "enemy annihilation start timing", and "blackout occurrence timing" is displayed. When the 4-item screen is displayed, the up, down, left, and right operation of the cross key is performed to move the cursor to one of the item screens and the effect button P381 is pressed once, the table button corresponding to that item is displayed A dedicated screen for setting the occurrence timing (occurrence timing when the automatic operation function is set) is displayed. In addition, the "dialogue timing" corresponds to the dialogue production, the "meter accumulation start timing" corresponds to the meter production, the "enemy annihilation start timing" corresponds to the enemy annihilation production, and the "blackout occurrence timing" corresponds to the blackout production.

As shown in FIG. 47, on the dedicated screen for setting the generation timing of "timing to generate lines", a screen with three items, "first", "middle", and "last", is displayed. When the cursor is placed on any item screen and the effect button P381 is pressed once, the occurrence timing corresponding to that item screen is set. Here, "first" is the timing immediately after the start of the valid operation period (timing 0 seconds after the start of the valid operation period), and "midway" is the timing 1.5 seconds after the start of the valid operation period. , "Last" is the end timing of the valid operation period (timing three seconds after the start of the valid operation period). The same applies to the occurrence timing setting screen for "timing of occurrence of darkening", and it is possible to select from three item screens of "first", "middle", and "last". On the dedicated screen for setting the generation timing of "Meter Accumulation Start Timing", three items, "First", "Middle 1", and "Middle 2" are displayed. When the cursor is placed on the screen and the production button P381 is pressed once, the generation timing corresponding to the item screen is set. Here, "first" is the timing immediately after the start of the valid operation period (timing 0 seconds after the start of the valid operation period), and "middle 1" is the timing 1.5 seconds after the start of the valid operation period. and "midway 2" is the timing after 3 seconds from the start of the valid operation period. On the screen dedicated to setting the occurrence timing of "Enemy annihilation start timing", three items screen of "First", "Middle 1", and "Middle 2" are displayed. When the cursor is placed on the screen and the production button P381 is pressed once, the generation timing corresponding to the item screen is set. Here, "first" is the timing immediately after the start of the valid operation period (timing 0 seconds after the start of the valid operation period), and "midway 1" is the timing 2.5 seconds after the start of the valid operation period. and "midway 2" is the timing five seconds after the start of the valid operation period.

As a modification, this automatic operation timing change may be uniformly set. Can be set in increments of 0.5 seconds from immediately after the start (0 seconds after the start of the valid period) to 2 seconds after the start of the valid operation period (0 seconds, 0.5 seconds, 1 second after the start of the valid operation period) , 1.5 seconds later, or 2 seconds later).

By configuring in this way, the player can set the automatic operation timing for each of a plurality of types of front button effects at any timing, so that the player can set the timing according to his own tastes and preferences. It is possible to enjoy the production occurrence of.

Note that, in the front button effect, an operation prompting effect suggesting that the operation prompting image will be displayed soon may be executed immediately before the operation prompting image is displayed. Specifically, by displaying a silhouette image representing the silhouette of the button image or lever image in advance just before displaying the button image or lever image, the button image or lever image appears after that (that is, the operation The promotion image is displayed). When displaying the button image and the lever image, it is not always necessary to execute such an operation prompting effect, and the button image and the lever image may be displayed immediately without going through the operation prompting effect. Here, with respect to this operation-promoting stimulating effect, a plurality of types of display modes may be provided. The operation-promoting effect with a red effect (the operation-promoting effect in which the silhouette of the button image or lever image is displayed in a thin red light) is better than the operation-promoting effect that is displayed as if it is You may comprise so that a big-hit expectation may be high. In addition, as another modification, multiple types of button images and lever images are provided (for example, if it is a button image, a blue button image and a red button image are provided, and the red button image is more expected than the blue button image. For example, a red dialogue effect is more likely to be executed than a blue dialogue effect), and an operation prompting effect with a red effect is more likely to be executed than a blue effect. An image (for example, a red button image) may be easily formed. In addition to the above, it may be configured such that the long-time (for example, 4 seconds) operation-promoting stimulus effect is higher than the short-time (for example, 2-seconds) operation-promoting stimulus effect. A specific button image (e.g., red button image) is more likely to appear in a long-time (e.g., 4 seconds) operation-promoting effect than a short-time (e.g., 2-second) operation-promoting effect. may In addition, when configured to have multiple types of display modes for the operation prompting effect, the second half of the variable display (specific timing after the reach state is established) is more likely than the first half of the variable display (predetermined timing before the reach state is formed). ) may be configured to make it easier to execute the highly anticipated operation prompting effect, or the operation prompting effect is not executed in the first half of the variable display (predetermined timing before the ready-to-win state is formed). Alternatively, it may be configured such that the operation prompting effect can be executed only in the latter half of the variable display (specific timing after formation of the ready-to-reach state). In addition, as a further modified example, it is possible to execute a dialogue effect even during the execution of one or more times of variable display (prefetch variable display) before the hold that is the target of the prefetch effect is digested and (display button image possible), and during the execution of the look-ahead variable display, the operation prompting effect is executed more than during the execution of the variable display (the variable display) when the hold that is the target of this look-ahead effect is completed. It may be possible to reduce the possibility that the look-ahead fluctuation display is being executed, and the expectation is higher than during the execution of the fluctuation display (the fluctuation display) when this look-ahead target operation retention ball is digested. The possibility that the operation-promoting inciting effect will be executed may be reduced. As another modification, in the first half of the variable display (predetermined timing before the ready-to-reach state is formed), the operation promotion prompt effect is not executed (or the low-expectation operation promotion prompt effect is not executed. ), and in the second half of the variable display (specific timing after the reach state is established), execute the operation promotion stimulation production (or rather than the low-expectation operation promotion stimulation production, In the case of executing the effect), the longer the period between the predetermined timing before the reach state formation, which is the first half of the variable display, and the specific timing after the reach state formation, which is the latter half of the change display, is longer (for example, 60 seconds It may be configured so that the expectation of a big hit is high, and the button image at a specific timing after the ready-to-win state is formed, which is the latter half of the variable display, tends to be an image with a high expectation ( For example, it may be configured so that it is likely to be a red button image instead of a blue button image).

《Decorative designs and simple designs》
The decorative pattern P801 is a pattern displayed in a larger size than the simple pattern P802. The combination of the stop symbols of the decorative symbol P801 consists of three symbols, which are stopped one by one in principle after the variable display. The combination of the stop symbols of the simple symbol P802 is also composed of three symbols, but the three symbols are stopped at the same time after the variable display. As the combination of the stop symbols of the simple symbols P802, the same combination as the combination of the stop symbols of the decorative symbols P801 is displayed.

During execution of the development effect, the decorative pattern P801 may be displayed in a small size (an alternative pattern may be displayed) at least part of the period, or the decorative pattern P801 may be hidden (alternative patterns may also be displayed). may be configured not to be displayed), but in such a situation, the simple pattern P802 is always displayed in a variable manner. This simple pattern P802 is displayed in a small size on the upper right side of the effect display device P80, and while the first special pattern or the second special pattern is fluctuating, the display is changed, and the first special pattern or the second special pattern is stopped. During this period, stop display is performed, and like the decorative pattern P801, three patterns are variably displayed and stopped. By providing this simple pattern P802, the situation where you want to make the decorative pattern P801 smaller or hide it (for example, when executing a development production, when performing a production with a movable accessory and hiding the center of the production display device P80 etc.), it is possible to notify that it is in the process of changing (in other words, that the result of success or failure has not been determined). In other words, it can be said that this simple design P802 is a design for security of display (for compensating the display state of the decorative design P801). It should be noted that, when the simple design P802 is variably displayed, it is preferable to always continue variably displayed from the start of the variation of the first special design or the second special design until the stop display is performed. (For example, when performing a pseudo continuous effect, temporarily stopping a special decorative pattern P801 that displays characters such as "NEXT"), the simple pattern P802 is temporarily stopped on the way. (Therefore, the simple symbol P802 does not have a special symbol for displaying characters such as "NEXT", and the simple symbol P802 only performs a fixed stop), Furthermore, in order to prevent the misrecognition of a big hit in the case of a losing variation, and to prevent the fact that it is a big hit in advance in the case of a big winning variation, the player is allowed to perform both the losing variation and the big winning variation. (For example, if the types of simple symbols P802 are “1” to “7”, “123” → “234” → “345” → “456 ”→“567”→“671”→“712”→“123”→ . . .).

Also, when the variation is started from the state where the decorative symbols P801 and the simple symbols P802 are fixed and stopped, the symbol combination that is the starting point (the first symbol combination immediately after the start of the variation) advances by one from the symbol combination at the time of the fixed stop. However, if the simple symbol P802 starts to fluctuate from the fixed stop situation, the symbol combination that is the starting point will be a predetermined symbol combination regardless of the combination at the time of the fixed stop. For example, in a situation where both the number combinations related to the decorative design P801 and the simple design P802 are fixed and stopped at "243", when the decorative design P801 and the simple design P802 start to fluctuate, the design that becomes the starting point of the decorative design P801 The combination is "354", but the symbol combination that is the starting point of the simple symbol P802 is fixed at "123", and both the number combinations related to the decorative symbol P801 and the simple symbol P802 are fixed and stopped at "333". , when the decorative pattern P801 and the simple pattern P802 start to fluctuate, the pattern combination as the starting point of the decorative pattern P801 is "444", but the pattern combination as the starting point of the simple pattern P802 is fixed at "123". In addition to this, the simple design P802 has the following characteristics, and can be clearly differentiated from the decorative design P801 in role. Specifically, it is as follows.

The display area of the decorative symbol P801, which is easily recognized by the player, is larger than the display area of the simple symbol P802 for display collateral (for compensating the display state of the decorative symbol P801). This is a situation in which the decorative pattern P801 and the simple pattern P802 are fixed and stopped, the decorative pattern P801 is immediately after forming the ready-to-win state (the ready-to-reach state in a state where it has not developed into the development effect), and the simple pattern P802 is displayed in a variable display. This configuration is preferable not only in the middle situation, but also in a situation where the decorative pattern P801 is a small pattern and the simple pattern P802 is in a variable display, such as during development production. be.

The display position of the decorative pattern P801 is either in the first production mode (for example, normal mode or stage A in normal mode) or in the second production mode (for example, rush mode described later or stage B in normal mode). By setting different display positions accordingly, it is possible to realize diversity of effects in the decorative pattern P801 according to the effect mode. On the other hand, the simple pattern P802 only needs to play a role of compensating the display state of the decorative pattern P801, so regardless of whether it is the first production mode or the second production mode, the same display position does not require extra development. It is preferable to forgo the design. Details of the effect mode in the third embodiment will be described later.

The display mode of the decorative pattern P801 depends on whether it is the first production mode (for example, normal mode or stage A in normal mode) or the second production mode (for example, rush mode or stage B in normal mode). By using different display modes, it is possible to achieve a variety of effects in the decorative pattern P801 according to the effect mode. For example, in the first production mode, the decorative pattern P801 is composed only of the decorative patterns P801 of numbers (decorative patterns P801 such as “1”, “2”, . The decorative pattern P801 is configured by combining the pattern P801 and the decorative pattern P801 of the ally character ("1" + "character a", "2" + "character b", ..., "7" + "character g ” P801). On the other hand, the simple pattern P802 only has to play the role of compensating the display state of the decorative pattern P801. It is preferable to configure the simple pattern P802 only with the decorative pattern P801 of , so that unnecessary development and design can be avoided.

The display area of the decorative pattern P801 is changed (moved, made into a small pattern) according to the changing situation (for example, whether it is before the development effect, whether it is during the development effect, etc.). Diversity can be given to the performance of the pattern P801. On the other hand, the simple pattern P802 only needs to play the role of compensating for the display state of the decorative pattern P801. It is preferable to forgo.

The decorative pattern P801 is variable depending on the fluctuation situation (for example, at the start of fluctuation, in the middle of fluctuation, just before the fluctuation ends, etc.). , the performance of the decorative pattern P801 can be diversified. On the other hand, since the simple pattern P802 only needs to play a role of compensating the display state of the decorative pattern P801, the variable speed of the simple pattern P802 is not made variable, or the number of variable stages is reduced (for example, only low speed and high speed It is preferable to avoid unnecessary development and design by doing so. As for the direction of variation, the decorative pattern P801 allows variation not only from top to bottom but also from bottom to top (allows variation in multiple directions). It is preferable to only vary from . In addition, the decorative pattern P801 is a variation from top to bottom in the first production mode, but in the second production mode, it rotates on the spot and is switched in order. Alternatively, the simple symbol P802 may be changed only from top to bottom in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

The decorative symbol P801 is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped during fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) before it is fixed (stopped at the timing when the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops). Temporary stop with slight fluctuation) is performed, and at that time, a specific pattern that is a decorative pattern P801 other than numbers (for example, a decoration with the word "super" that foreshadows development to a developmental effect) By temporarily stopping the pattern P801), the effect of the decorative pattern P801 and other effects can be associated with each other. On the other hand, since the simple pattern P802 only needs to play a role of compensating the display state of the decorative pattern P801, the simple pattern P802 is not temporarily stopped, and the specific pattern is not temporarily stopped. It is preferable to forgo the

The decorative pattern P801 overlaps the display area of other notice effects (for example, dialogue effects, meter effects, etc.), that is, is superimposed. Such a superimposed display is permitted in order to perform a powerful effect by using the area on the effect display device P80 as much as possible. , the display area of the simple pattern P802 is desirably designed so as not to overlap (not to be superimposed) with the display area of the other notice effects. However, regarding the relationship with the special notice effect that inevitably overlaps (for example, a black effect displayed on the entire effect display device P80, a character object drop effect, etc.), the display priority of the simple pattern P802 (Simple symbol P802 is preferably set to be displayed in the front layer rather than the special notice effect). In addition, a right hitting notification image (different from the image displayed during the special game, a right hitting notification image dedicated to the high base state displayed during the high base state, but may be an image common to the image during the special game) , It may be the right-handed notification P832 described above). Since it is desirable to always be visible to the player, the display area of the simple pattern P802 and the display area of the right-handed notification image do not overlap ( It is desirable to design it so that it is not superimposed. However, when the display area of the decorative pattern P801 is moved or enlarged, the display area of the decorative pattern P801 and the display area of the right-handed notification image may be overlapped (superimposed). Preferably, the display priority of the decorative pattern P801 is set lower than the display priority of the right-handed notification image (the decorative pattern P801 is set to be displayed in the rear layer rather than the right-handed notification image). be.

During the special game, only one decoration pattern P801 may be displayed instead of a combination display. For example, when the special game is executed after "777" is fixed and stopped, "7" is displayed during the special game, and when the special game is executed after "222" is fixed and stopped, "2" is displayed during the special game. As a result, it is possible to recognize which decorative pattern P801 has resulted in a big hit during the special game. As a modified example, only decorative patterns P801 corresponding to a high-advantage jackpot (for example, "333", "555", "777" indicating a jackpot of 7R or more or a jackpot of 10R) are displayed during a special game. may be displayed. In this way, the display area for displaying one decorative pattern P801 displayed during the special game includes the round display area, the right-handed display area, the prize ball acquisition display area, and the accumulated prize balls, which are the other display areas during the special game. It is desirable to configure such that it does not overlap with the number display area, that is, it is not superimposed (however, it may be superimposed with the highlighted display, in which case the highlighted display has a higher display priority). Further, the simple symbol P802 is preferably hidden during the special game (because the variable display is not performed during the special game), but it may be displayed during the special game.

In the decorative pattern P801, in addition to performing fluctuations (for example, moving from top to bottom), at the start of fluctuation, immediately after temporary stop, after formation of the ready-to-reach state, during temporary stop, etc., display with predetermined actions may be performed (the operations in each situation may also be referred to as a variation start operation, a temporary stop operation, a reach state formation operation, and a swing operation). For example, when it becomes non-reach (when the decorative pattern P801 and the simple pattern P802 are displayed as "624" at the time of fixed stop), at the start of the fluctuation, all of the left pattern, middle pattern, and right pattern in the decorative pattern P801 After performing an operation that expands, it starts to fluctuate, and after that, when the left pattern temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing operation, and after "6" temporarily stops, it continues the shaking operation. , After that, when the right pattern temporarily stops, after performing a bouncing action, the swinging action continues after "4" temporarily stops, and then when the middle pattern temporarily stops, it bounces. After performing the action, "2" temporarily stops and performs a little shaking action, and then, at the fixed stop timing, all the actions of the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern are finished. In this case, the simple pattern P802 does not perform any action. Also, when the ready-to-win state is formed and the development effect does not develop (when the decorative pattern P801 and the simple pattern P802 are displayed as "212" at the time of fixed stop), the left pattern in the decorative pattern P801 is displayed at the start of the fluctuation. , All of the middle and right symbols start to expand and then start to change, and then when the left symbol temporarily stops, after performing a bouncing operation, "2" temporarily stops After that, continue the swinging motion, then when the right pattern temporarily stops, perform a bouncing motion, then continue the swinging motion after “2” temporarily stops, and then be a reach In order to notify, the left and right patterns rotate and continue the shaking motion again, and then when the middle pattern temporarily stops, after performing a bouncing action, "1" is temporarily It stops and shakes for a little while, and then, at the fixed stop timing, all the operations of the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern are finished (the middle pattern does not rotate). In this case, the simple pattern P802 does not perform any action. Also, when developing into a development effect (when the decorative pattern P801 and the simple pattern P802 are displayed as "232" at the time of fixed stop), at the start of the fluctuation, the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern in the decorative pattern P801 After performing an operation that expands everything, it starts to fluctuate, and then when the left pattern temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing operation, and after "2" temporarily stops, the shaking operation continues. After that, when the right pattern temporarily stops, after performing a bouncing action, the swinging action is continued after "2" temporarily stops, and then the left pattern to notify that it is a reach. After that, the right design rotates and continues to shake again. After that, the middle design fluctuates while the left and right designs are swinging (At this time, the middle design expands. In the state, it fluctuates from top to bottom, and the left and right patterns that did not overlap or had a low overlap rate are overlapping or the overlapping rate is high), and then development production In order to execute, the background changes from the normal background to the reach background, and when it is notified in the development production that it is a result of the deviation, the reach background shifts to the normal background, and after the transition, the left pattern, middle pattern, right The pattern continues the shaking motion for a predetermined time, and then, at the fixed stop timing, all the motions of the left pattern, the middle pattern and the right pattern are finished (the middle pattern neither bounces nor rotates). In this case, the simple pattern P802 does not perform any action. By configuring in this way, the decorative pattern P801 can be produced in a variety of ways. is configured so as not to perform any particular operation, so that unnecessary development and design can be avoided. In addition, among the decorative symbols P801, a specific symbol (for example, a medium symbol "7") may be configured so that the probability of not performing a predetermined action or performing a predetermined action is lower than that of other symbols. This predetermined motion may be, for example, the above-described temporary stop motion (jumping motion) (especially for the middle symbol "7" after the ready-to-win state is formed). By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the rarity of actions in a specific pattern. The decorative pattern P801 is formed by combining the decorative pattern P801 of the number and the decorative pattern P801 of the ally character (“1”+“character a”, “2”+“character b”, . . . , “7 ”+“character g” P801), regarding the shaking action of the decorative pattern P801, both the number decorative pattern P801 and the friendly character decorative pattern P801 perform a shaking motion, but the swinging For example, if it swings up and down, the distance width between the state where the decorative pattern P801 during the swinging motion is displayed at the top and the state where it is displayed at the bottom) is different. A dynamic shaking motion may be realized, and in such a configuration, the swinging width of the decorative pattern P801 of the number is made smaller than the swinging width of the decorative pattern P801 of the ally character, or the decorative pattern of the number is made smaller. P801 may be configured so that only the ornamental pattern P801 of the ally character performs a swinging motion without performing the swinging motion.

Here, in the third embodiment, an effect using the decorative pattern P801 is performed, and an effect different from the pseudo-continuous effect can be executed. For at least one pattern (for example, the right pattern) among the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern in the decorative pattern P801, temporary {For other symbols (for example, left and middle symbols) that are fixed in the stopped state, from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol to the stop display, depending on the fluctuation situation The fluctuation speed fluctuates while changing to low speed, medium speed, high speed, super high speed, etc., or temporarily stops (that is, as an example, while the left and middle patterns are fluctuating, the right pattern Temporary stop has been continued since the start)}. Such variation of the decorative pattern P801 is called fixed special variation. If a fixed special variation is performed, the expectation of a big hit in the reserve will be higher than if the fixed special variation is not performed, or the variation with a fixed special variation will be a big hit variation. It is configured. In addition, when the fixed special variation is performed, it is preferable that the simple symbol P802 always continues the variable display from the start of the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol to the stop display (the variation speed is It is preferable not to make it variable, or to reduce the number of stages to make it variable, and to make a fixed stop when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed). In this fixed special variation, since the decorative pattern P801 is fixed (temporarily stopped) from the start of the variation, it is difficult for the player to know whether it is fluctuating or not. By doing so, the player can check the status of the variable display. In addition, a skilled player (a player who knows the existence and role of the fixed special variation) can perceive in advance that the fixed (temporarily stopped) decorative pattern P801 will be fixed and stopped. is fixed (temporary stop) at "7", if the right pattern and left pattern form a reach state with "7", the effect is that the big hit can be detected in advance. .

In the third embodiment, there are a plurality of types of production modes, and it is determined which type of production can be executed for each production mode. If you specifically explain the contents of the effects executed in the effect mode and the effect mode, for example, as a plurality of types of effect modes, a "normal mode" and a "rush mode" are set, and variations in the game state and special symbols One of a plurality of types of performance modes is set alternatively according to the number of times of display and the like, and a variable performance is executed according to the set performance mode. Basically, when the game state is the normal state (low base state), the "normal mode" is set, and when the game state is the time saving state (high base state), the "rush mode" is set. When one of the production modes is set, a background image dedicated to the production mode (a background displayed on the back of the decorative pattern 61) is displayed on the screen as a production (variable production) that suggests that the production mode is being stayed. image) is displayed, and BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 83 . Since the background image and the BGM are set differently for each effect mode in this way, the player can recognize which effect mode the player is currently staying in from the type of the background image or the BGM. ing. Specifically, "Normal Mode" has four stages: "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-Ahead Stage". , transition from "Stage A" to "Stage B", transition from "Stage B" to "Stage C", transition from "Stage C" to "Stage A", If you win the execution (shift), move from the stage you are currently staying to the "read-ahead stage". , the second row is displayed, and if it is off, the second row is displayed in the "look-ahead stage", and the next change returns to the stage before the "look-ahead stage" transition). The BGM (stage BGM) is different for each of "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "look-ahead stage" (also different from the stage BGM of "rush mode"). The stage BGM is interrupted (finished) triggered by the fluctuation stop (fixed stop) of the reach deviation (the deviation that does not form the reach state, for example, "351"), and the stage is triggered by the next fluctuation start The BGM starts from the beginning, and in "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-Ahead Stage", the stage BGM will not be interrupted even if the non-reach fluctuation stops (definite stop). ), and the stage BGM is output continuously after the next variation (the "rush mode" is similarly configured to output continuously).

Here, the pseudo continuous effect can be executed in any of the "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "prefetch stage". (When a predetermined pseudo-continuous symbol (for example, a symbol of the characters "NEXT") is variably displayed as a middle symbol near a predetermined temporary stop position and then temporarily stopped, the stage BGM is not output. (interruption), the stage BGM is started from the beginning with the re-change display (re-change after the temporary stop), or it switches to a specific BGM different from before the re-change display. After that, when developing into an advanced production in "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Foreseeing Stage", the background image of each stage (the stage you stayed in) will switch to the background image of the advanced production. (At the same time, it switches to the BGM dedicated to the development effect), the stage BGM is not output during the execution of the development effect, and the effect indicating the failure is displayed in the development effect, so that the variation display in which the development effect is executed It will switch to the background image of each stage again (the background image of the stage that was displayed before the development stage), but in that situation, even if the background image of the stage is displayed until the next change display starts. , the stage BGM is not output, nor is the BGM dedicated to the development effect (a specific BGM that is silent or different from the BGM dedicated to the stage BGM and the BGM dedicated to the development effect is output). Therefore, the stage BGM is not interrupted (does not end) even if the non-reach fluctuation stops (determined stop), and the stage BGM is output continuously to the next fluctuation "Stage B", "Stage C”, even if it is a “look-ahead stage” (even if it is not “stage A”), if it is lost via the development production, the stage BGM will be played before the variable stop (fixed stop) is interrupted, and the stage BGM is started from the beginning with the start of the next fluctuation.

It should be noted that the pseudo continuous effect is not executed in the "rush mode". Here, a special effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous effect will be executed (for example, it is a continuation line notice, and the execution of the subsequent pseudo-continuous effect is confirmed. It is suggested that a pseudo-continuous effect (re-fluctuation display) will be performed thereafter, but this special effect is performed in "Stage A" and " It is displayed only in "Stage C", and is not displayed in "Stage B" and "Look-Ahead Stage". In other words, by preparing both stages in which the possibility of pseudo-continuous effects being executed can be detected in advance and stages in which the possibility cannot be detected, and by repeating stage transitions between these stages, effects that keep the player from getting bored are realized. is doing. In "stage A", a special effect with character A as a motif is executed, but in "stage C", a special effect with character B as a motif is executed. In addition, it is a different effect from the special effect, and a pseudo-continuous confirmation effect that confirms that the pseudo-continuous effect will be executed after just occurring (for example, when the character C appears, the line "Continue confirmed!" A display effect) is also provided, and furthermore, it is a different effect from the special effect and the pseudo-continuous fixed effect, and the development fixed effect ( For example, an effect is also provided in which the line "Development confirmed!" is always displayed whenever the character D appears. This pseudo continuous fixed effect and development fixed effect can be executed in any of "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "prefetching stage". In this way, when the pseudo-continuous effect is performed and when the pseudo-continuous effect is not performed, one or more of the special effect, the pseudo-continuous fixed effect, and the development fixed effect are displayed in combination, so that the execution expectation of the pseudo-continuous effect, It is possible to diversify the degree of development expectations for the development production. It should be noted that during a single variable display, all of the special effect, the pseudo-consecutive fixed effect, and the development fixed effect may be executed. ) may include a pattern in which a special effect is executed, a pattern in which a pseudo continuous fixed effect is executed, and a pattern in which a development fixed effect is executed. In a pattern in which a special performance is executed in the first or second time of ), after the special performance is executed during the re-variation display, the pseudo-continuous fixed performance may be further executed during the re-variation display.

《Playability of “small win V” based on normal patterns》
The gaming machines in the present embodiment and the second embodiment (including the application example) have a game characteristic mainly composed of special symbols in the low base state, and mainly composed of both special symbols and normal symbols in the high base state. However, in the third embodiment, in both the low base state and the high base state, the game is based on normal symbols, so that only the result of the lottery performed by the gaming machine is expected. Focusing on the action mode of the normal electric accessory P770 instead of the playability (rather than the passive playability), it is possible to expect a big hit in the action mode or visually increase the expectation for the big win. becomes. Specifically, it is as follows.

Although the details will be described later, the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment is a pachinko game machine that adopts the "minor win V" similarly to the present embodiment. The pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment does not have the second special symbol, but has only the first special symbol. The probability of winning a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol lottery related to the first special symbol is 100%, and "retention related to the first special symbol occurs" and "normal symbol lottery, The normal electric accessory P770 provided in the 1 start winning prize port P711 is opened, and the game ball enters, that is, indirectly means acquisition of the right to execute the big hit game (including the small win V). Yes (substantially a big hit). In addition, in the third embodiment, one reservation related to the first special symbol is provided, but four may be provided. In addition, as a modification, it is not necessary to provide a reservation (reservation function) related to the first special symbol (in this case, winning the normal symbol lottery and opening the normal electric accessory P770 provided in the first start winning opening P711 As a state, the winning lottery is performed by entering the game ball, but since the reservation function is not installed, when the winning lottery is performed again, the normal symbol lottery is won again, and it is provided in the first start winning opening P711. It is necessary to set the normal electric accessory P770 to the open state and to enter the game ball again).

Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment has a normal period in which it is difficult to enter the first start winning opening P711 related to the acquisition of the right of the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, and the first A special period in which it is easy to enter the first start winning hole P711 related to the acquisition of the special symbol lottery right of the special symbol is generated. By configuring in this way, the number of necessary winning holes is reduced by creating a state in which the ease of entry of the first starting winning hole P711 is different without requiring the second starting winning hole P721. , it is possible to make it appear as if the probability variation function is operating in the small win V.

In the following, an embodiment that constitutes the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment that is more interesting by changing the ease of entering the first special symbol into the special symbol lottery with respect to a special period will be described. do.

FIG. 48 is a diagram conceptually showing an example of a board configuration (arrangement of winning devices) that can be employed in the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment. In the upper center of the game area P501 of the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment, an opening is formed so that the performance display device P80 can be visually recognized, and the frame member of the center decoration unit (not shown) is formed in the opening. It is attached and constitutes a partition inside the game area P501. A specific ball entrance P910 is attached to the lower part of the effect display device, and a distribution device P900 for distributing game balls that have entered the specific ball entrance P910 to either an operation hole P741 or an out hole P790 (not shown) is provided. It is Also, in the upper left part of the game area P501, there is a first start winning opening P711 (the first starting winning opening P711 is a starting winning opening for acquiring the right related to the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol) and normal A large winning opening P751 is arranged in the lower left part of the game area P501, where the electric accessory P770 is arranged. That is, in the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment, there is no need to switch from left-handed to right-handed, or from right-handed to left-handed, and the game proceeds only with left-handed.

The pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment is a pachinko game machine that adopts the "small win V" as in the present embodiment, and the major difference from the present embodiment in terms of game performance (game performance) is the second The big difference is that it does not have a special symbol and the probability of becoming a "small hit" or "big hit" in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is 100%.

In addition, the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment also performs a specific game (high base state) by activating the electric chew support function (electric support function) after various big hits (including small win V) as in the present embodiment. However, as a condition for ending the specific game (high base state) in the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment, "the fluctuation display based on the special symbol lottery of the specified number of times of the first special symbol has ended. ”, or “execution of a big win game (small win V)”. In addition, the specified number of times is set to one (it is configured so that the high base state can be terminated even when the first special symbol is displayed once in a variable manner). Although not described in detail, other design values (probabilities of big hits, number of winning balls in various winning slots, etc.) are not limited to those described in this embodiment, but are appropriately set in accordance with the nature of the game. .

Next, a description will be given of the procedure and progress of the game in the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment. First, in the low base state, the player operates the handle P204 to shoot a game ball toward the left game area (left area P501L) of the effect display device P80. A game ball launched to the left region P501L can enter the specific ball entrance P910, and when it enters the specific ball entrance P910, the distribution device P900 operates the operation opening P741 or the unillustrated out opening P790. be distributed to either In the third embodiment, one first route toward the working port P741 and nine routes toward the out port P790 are provided in the sorting device P900. When the game ball is distributed to the first route and enters (passes through) the operation port P741, a normal symbol lottery is executed. In the third embodiment, the probability of "win" in the normal symbol lottery is set to 1/1 (100%), for example, in both the low base state and the high base state. However, if it becomes a "hit" in the normal symbol lottery in the low base state, the normal symbol fluctuation display period related to one normal symbol lottery is 120 seconds on average, and one normal symbol lottery (hit) The operation period of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is selected to be 5 seconds at 10% and 0.01 second at 90%. The reason why the average of the variable display period of the normal symbols related to one normal symbol lottery is 120 seconds is that during this time, the operation period of the normal electric accessory P770 related to one normal symbol lottery (hit) is 5 seconds. or 0.01 second (in other words, suggesting the degree of expectation of 5 seconds) is executed by the effect display device P80. In addition, in both the low base state and the high base state, as the condition for terminating the operation of the normal electric accessory 770, "elapse of the opening time of the specified time" or "winning of one game ball" is determined. Here, when 5 seconds is selected as the operating period of the normal electric role, it becomes easy to enter the ball into the normal electric role P770. By entering the ball, acquire the right related to the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol (if 0.05 seconds is selected as the operating period of the normal electric role P770, the ball to the normal electric role P770 is very difficult, the right to the special symbol lottery for the first special symbol cannot be substantially acquired). Since the probability of "small win" or "big hit" in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is 100%, if the right related to the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is acquired, it is a specification of the small win V. Therefore, it is virtually always a big hit.

After the big win (small win V) from the low base state, the game always shifts to the high base state (as a modification, it may shift to the high base state at 50% and the low base state at 50%). Even in the high base state, as in the low base state, the ball is made to enter the specific ball entrance P910, and the ball is aimed to enter (pass through) the operation opening P741 via the sorting device P900, but in the high base state In the case of "hit" in the normal design lottery, the fluctuation display period of the normal design related to one normal design lottery is 1 second on average, and the normal electric accessories related to one normal design lottery (hit) Since the operating period of P770 is selected to be 100% and 5 seconds, in the high base state, unlike the low base state, the ball entering (passing) the operating port P741 always passes through the normal electric accessory P770. Since it is easy to enter the ball, by entering (passing) the ball into the operation port P741, the player substantially acquires the right related to the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, and the special symbol of the first special symbol. Since there is a 100% probability of getting a "small win" or a "big win" in the lottery, it is practically always a big win. The reason why the average of the fluctuation display period of the normal symbols related to one normal symbol lottery is 1 second is that the operation period of the normal electric accessory P770 related to one normal symbol lottery (hit) is always 5 seconds. Therefore, the operation period of the normal electric accessory P770 related to one normal symbol lottery (hit) is 5 seconds or 0.01 seconds (suggesting the expectation of 5 seconds). This is because there is no need to execute it on the display device P80, so that the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 can be immediately started. It should be noted that even after the big hit (small win V) from the high base state, the state always shifts to the high base state. If you do not win a big hit or a small hit by the end of the fluctuation display based on the special symbol lottery of the specified number of times (one time in the third embodiment) in the high base state of the first special symbol (the fluctuation display remains as it is) when finished). That is, since the high base state is maintained until the fluctuation display based on the special symbol lottery of the specified number of times (in the third embodiment, once) of the first special symbol in the high base state is completed, before this situation is completed, It is possible to create a game of making the ball enter (pass through) the operation opening P741 from the distributed role P900.

Supplementally, when 5 seconds is selected as the operating period of the normal electric role product P770, "Aim for electric chew!" is displayed, and when the small winning game is won, "Aim for the attacker!" is displayed on the performance display device P80 before and after the small winning game is started. In addition, as a modified example, there may be no big win and only a small win (probability of "small win" in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is 100%). Further, as a modification, after a big hit (small hit V) from the high base state, it may be configured to shift to the high base state at 80% and to shift at 20% to the low base state. In this case, the specified number of times of the first special symbol that ends the high base state may be set to 99 times instead of 1 time. There is no problem if it is installed. In addition, when configuring, since the specified number of times of the first special symbol is very large, the possibility of ending the high base state at the specified number of times of the first special symbol is low, so the specified number of times of the first special symbol A big hit (small win V) that shifts to a low base state of 20% instead of the game property of entering (passing) the ball from the distribution accessory P900 to the operation port P741 before the end of the variable display based on the special symbol lottery. It becomes a playability that becomes important whether to avoid.

[Fourth embodiment]
By installing the above-mentioned "relief function", the pachinko game machines P (including underlying technology) of the present embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment can further expand the range of games. Become. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a fourth embodiment, and only differences from the base technology and the present embodiment will be described in detail below, and descriptions of common points will be omitted or simplified. Among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine P of the fourth embodiment, elements identical or corresponding to elements described in the base technology or the present embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The pachinko game machine P of the fourth embodiment employs the above-described "second special symbol priority digestion control" and "ST (number of cut probability variable)". The gaming machine shifts to a high-probability high-base state after the end of the special game in the low-probability low-base state, and the state is up to 100 rotations (special symbol lottery related to the first special symbol and second special symbol This will continue until the total number of times of the special symbol lottery (total number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches 100 times. In addition, after 100 rotations, it shifts to the low probability high base state, but by hitting the jackpot within 100 rotations, after the execution of the special game related to the jackpot ) is reset 100 times. In addition, in the low probability high base state, since the electric chew support function is not operating, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the special figure 1 start port and enters the ball, so that the first special symbol The game progresses by lottery (and fluctuation), and in the high-probability high-base state, the electric chew support function is operating, so the player shoots the game ball aiming at the special figure 2 start port and makes it enter. By doing so, the game proceeds with the winning lottery (and variation) related to the second special symbol. Supplementally, when the first special symbol is fluctuating, the second special symbol does not fluctuate (wait for the winning lottery and the start of fluctuation even if there is a hold related to the second special symbol), and the second When the special symbol is fluctuating, the first special symbol does not fluctuate. In addition, as a modification, by adopting "V probability change", it may be configured so that it is possible to shift not only to the high-probability high base state but also to the low-probability high base state after the end of the special game. More specifically, if a ball is entered into the "specific area P750" during execution of the special game, the state is shifted to the high-probability high base state, and if the ball is not entered, the state is shifted to the low-probability high base state. In this case, in the special game that is executed when the result of the winning lottery related to the first special symbol becomes a big hit, the special game that makes it easy to enter the specific area P750 (inhibition member blocking the specific area P750 A special game that drives for a long time to a position that does not prevent entry, or a first guide position that guides the game ball outside the specific area 750P and a second guide position that guides the game ball to the specific area P750 A special game in which the displaceable guide member is at the second guide position) and a special game in which it is difficult to enter the ball (because the obstruction member blocking the specific area P750 does not drive or drives only for a very short time, it is difficult to enter the ball) special game) is 50:50, and in the special game that is executed when the result of the winning lottery related to the second special symbol becomes a big hit, (1) Entering the specific area P750 is easy It is preferable that the ratio of the special game jackpot and the jackpot that is difficult to enter is 80:20, or (2) only the special game that is easy to enter the specific area P750 is provided.

As described above, the trigger for entering the high base state in the pachinko game machine P of the fourth embodiment is the jackpot (special game), but in addition to that, a "relief function" is provided, and after the special game ends In addition, there is a high base state entry opportunity. Specifically, after the high-probability high base state ends (after 100 rotations have passed since the end of the special game), and after 599 rotations have passed (the next fluctuation of 699th rotation after the end of the special game) That is, at the 700th rotation after the end of the special game, it enters the high base state (in other words, when the number of fluctuation display times after the end of the special game reaches 700 times, it enters the high base state, which is a "relief function"). However, hereinafter, the number of variable display times (in the above example, 700 times) that enter the high base state may be simply referred to as the "start number" in some cases). However, the high base state in this "relief function" is not given until the high probability state, that is, the state shifts to the low probability high base state. In addition, for the low probability high base state that enters from the 700th rotation, up to 100 rotations (the total number of special symbol lotteries related to the first special symbol and the special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol lottery) 2 until the total number of fluctuation display times of special symbols) reaches 100 times), that is, continues from the 700th to 799th rotation after the end of the special game (in other words, a high base that is a "relief function" The number of variable displays during which the state continues is 100 times, and hereinafter, the number of variable displays during which the high base state continues (100 times in the above example) may be simply referred to as the "continuation number"). From the next variation (from the 800th rotation after the end of the special game), it will shift to the low probability low base state (in other words, if the number of times the variation display reaches 100 times after reaching the specified number of times It can be said that the high base state that is the "relief function" ends and shifts to the low base state. (also referred to as "end count"). Naturally, in the low probability high base state which is this "relief function", the electric chew support function is operating, so the player can shoot the game ball aiming at the special figure 2 start opening and enter the ball. So, the game will proceed with the winning lottery (and fluctuation) related to the second special symbol, and in the low-probability low-base state that shifts after that, the electric chew support function is not operating, so the special figure 1 By shooting a game ball aiming at the starting hole and making it enter, the game proceeds with a winning lottery (and variation) related to the first special symbol. It should be noted that what is described as "○○○ turn" in the following description is the number of turns calculated after the end of the special game.

FIG. 49 shows an effect mode (details of effect displayed by the effect display device P80) regarding the state immediately before and immediately after the "relief function" occurs. In addition, in FIG. 49, in FIG. 49(a), which is the 699th rotation, which is the state immediately before the "relief function" occurs, there is at least one hold related to the first special symbol (or the second special There is one or more reservations related to the design).

FIG. 49(a) shows a situation in which the fluctuation stops at the 699th rotation (one time before the start number of times to enter the high base state (“relief function” occurs)). It should be noted that the symbol fixing time has not yet passed (just after the fluctuation is finished). In the 699th rotation, the first special symbol has finished changing and stopped, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In this situation, before reaching the 699th rotation (for example, from the 697th rotation, from the 698th rotation, etc.), the background of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability low base state is displayed, and the decoration pattern A background of mountains is displayed behind the . Triggered by this fluctuation stop (exactly, triggered by the elapse of the pattern fixing time after the fluctuation stop), the low-probability low-base state shifts to the low-probability high-base state.

FIG. 49(b) shows the state at which the fluctuation of the 700th rotation (the number of start times of entering the high base state (the "relief function" occurs)) has started and the situation during the fluctuation. It is a situation in which the first special symbol has started to fluctuate as the 700th rotation by canceling the suspension of the first special symbol from the situation of FIG. 49(a). More precisely, it is a situation in which the 700th rotation, which is a new variation of the first special symbol, has started after the 699th rotation of the symbol fixing time has elapsed. Here, at the start of the variation (or just before the start of the variation), a small letter "Right-handed" (notice A of splitting) is displayed on the upper right of the screen. After that (or at the same timing), the background of the mountain, which is the background of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low-probability low-base state, is hidden, and the transition to the low-probability high-base state is made instead. A stage change effect indicating is generated. This stage change effect is a stage change background in which the screen immediately darkens from the background of the mountains that had been displayed up to that point, and white letters of "STAGE CHANGE" are displayed on a black background. Substantially at the same time that the background for the stage change is displayed, the sound "SEVEN RUSH rushes in!" is output from the speaker 83. This "SEVEN RUSH" is the name of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability high base state. In addition, almost simultaneously with the display of the background for the stage change, a large character of "Right-hand shot" (beating division notification B) is displayed. As a modification, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has passed since the background for stage change was displayed, or after the background for stage change is hidden (in other words, after the background for stage change is hidden (in other words, the Substantially at the same time as the background corresponding to "SEVEN RUSH" shown in c) starts to be displayed, the speaker 83 outputs a voice saying "SEVEN RUSH rush!" It may be displayed in a large size. As a modification, the characters "SEVEN RUSH rush!" It is desirable to display it after the background is hidden.

FIG. 49(c) shows the situation during fluctuation at the 700th rotation. The background for the 700th stage change is hidden, and instead, the sky background corresponding to the low-probability high base state of "SEVEN RUSH" is displayed. At this time, the large characters "Right shot" may be hidden, but it is desirable that they are displayed continuously from the background for the stage change (or until the fluctuation stops at the 700th rotation , or it is desirable that the display continues until the 701st rotation starts). It should be noted that the small "Right-handed" characters are always displayed during the low-probability-high base state, unlike the large "Right-handed" characters.

FIG. 49(d) shows a situation in which the variation stops at the 799th rotation (the number of times the high base state (“relief function”) ends). It should be noted that the symbol fixation time has not yet passed (it is the timing immediately after the variation is finished). As described above, the 700th rotation was a variation of the first special symbol, but since the 701st rotation to the 798th rotation (not shown) is already a high base state (low probability high base state), the second special It is a variation of the pattern. However, there is no problem even if all or part of the 701st to 798th rotations are fluctuations of the first special symbols. Then, the 799th rotation is also a variation of the second special symbol. Therefore, FIG. 49(d) shows that the second special symbol has finished changing as the 799th rotation. At this time, the characters "SEVEN RUSH finished..." may be displayed. In addition, in FIG. 49, in FIG. 49 (d), which is the 799th rotation immediately before the end of the "relief function", there is at least one hold related to the second special symbol (or one or more holds exist). From the 700th rotation to the 799th rotation, the background of the sky, which is the background of "SEVEN RUSH", is displayed. In addition, in this situation where the symbol fixing time has not yet passed, the low probability high base state is maintained.

FIG. 49(e) shows the situation where the fluctuation at the 800th rotation has started and the situation during the fluctuation. From FIG. 49(d), the suspension of the second special symbol is digested, so that the second special symbol has started to fluctuate as the 800th rotation. More precisely, it is a situation in which the 800th rotation, which is a new variation of the second special symbol, has started after the 799th rotation of the symbol fixing time has elapsed. Here, the small letters of "Right shot" (beating division notification A) displayed at the upper right of the screen at the start of the variation (or immediately before the start of the variation) are no longer displayed. After that (or at the same timing), the sky background, which is the background of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low-probability high-base state, is hidden, and the transition to the low-probability low-base state is made instead. A stage change effect indicating is generated. This stage effect is the same effect (background) as the 700th rotation stage effect (background for stage change). As a modified example, a stage effect (background) different from the stage effect (stage change background) of the 700th rotation may be used. Also good. After that, the background for the stage change disappears, and instead the mountain background corresponding to the low probability low base state is displayed. As a modification, the background of the sea may be used instead of the background of the mountains (the background may be different from the background before the "relief function" occurs). It may be designed to be the background in some cases (it may be configured so that it may or may not be different from the background before the occurrence of the "relief function"). In addition, in order to clarify that the background of the mountains (or the background of the sea), which is the background corresponding to the low probability low base state at this time, is not the "relief function", the high base state ("relief function") It is desirable to be configured so that it is always ended within 100 rotations, which is the number of continuous rotations, and switched to the background of a different production mode (production stage) (for example, grassland background, space background, etc.).

By configuring as described above, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the "relief function" has occurred, and the change of the base state and the change of the production mode (production stage) due to it can be performed smoothly. As a result, the player can perceive the switching of the base state without a sense of incongruity in terms of presentation. In addition, due to the switching of the base state, the type of start opening that the player aims for will be different (because it will switch from the special figure 1 start opening to the special figure 2 start opening). The splitting notification A is displayed immediately and continuously, and the splitting notification B is conspicuously displayed accompanying the stage change, so that the splitting is appropriately and emphasized when the base state is switched. (Aiming for the special figure 2 start opening) can be notified, and even in the subsequent high base state, it is possible to inform the player that it is continuously divided (aiming for the special figure 2 start opening). Appropriate split notification is realized.

In FIG. 49, the description is based on the assumption that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is held at the timing of switching the base state (the timing at which the "relief function" occurs and the timing at which the "relief function" ends). did. Next, in FIG. 50, at the timing of switching the base state (the timing at which the "relief function" occurs and the timing at which the "relief function" ends), there is no suspension related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. explain.

FIG. 50 shows an effect mode (details of effect displayed by the effect display device P80) regarding the state immediately before and immediately after the occurrence of the "relief function". In addition, in FIG. 50, in FIG. 50(a), which is the 699th rotation, which is the state immediately before the "relief function" occurs, at least there is no suspension related to the first special symbol (suspension related to the second special symbol does not exist).

FIG. 50(a) shows a situation where the fluctuation at the 699th rotation has stopped. It should be noted that the symbol fixation time has not yet passed (it is the timing immediately after the variation is finished). In the 699th rotation, the first special symbol has finished changing and stopped, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In this situation, before reaching the 699th rotation (for example, from the 697th rotation, from the 698th rotation, etc.), the background of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability low base state is displayed, and the decorative pattern A background of mountains is displayed behind the . Triggered by this fluctuation stop (more precisely, triggered by the elapse of the pattern fixing time after the fluctuation stop), the low-probability low-base state is shifted to the low-probability high-base state.

FIG. 50(b) shows a situation in which the variation of the 699th rotation has ended (the design fixation time has also passed), and the first special design and the decorative design are maintaining the stop display. As described above, since there is no reservation related to the first special symbol (there is also no reservation related to the second special symbol), this situation continues. In this situation, a small letter "Right shot" (notice A for splitting the shot) is displayed on the upper right of the screen. The display start timing of the small character "Right-handed" is immediately after the fluctuation of the 699th rotation is completed and the symbol fixing time has elapsed. Note that the base state at this time has already been switched to the high base state, which is the low-probability high base state. However, the background of the mountains is continuously displayed as the background of the production mode (production stage).

FIG. 50(c) shows the situation where the fluctuation of the 700th rotation has started. From the situation of FIG. 50(b), it is a situation in which the second special symbol has started to fluctuate because there is a ball entering the special figure 2 starting port. By starting the change, the background of the mountain, which is the background of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low-probability low-base state, will be hidden, and instead, the stage change will indicate that it will shift to the low-probability high-base state. A performance occurs. This stage change effect is a stage change background in which the screen immediately darkens from the background of the mountains that had been displayed up to that point, and white letters of "STAGE CHANGE" are displayed on a black background. Substantially at the same time that the background for the stage change is displayed, the sound "SEVEN RUSH rushes in!" is output from the speaker 83. This "SEVEN RUSH" is the name of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability high base state. In addition, almost simultaneously with the display of the background for the stage change, a large character of "Right-hand shot" (beating division notification B) is displayed. As a modification, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the background for stage change was displayed, or after the background for stage change is hidden (in other words, after the background for stage change is hidden (in other words, the Substantially at the same time as the display of the background corresponding to "SEVEN RUSH" shown in d) starts, the speaker 83 outputs a voice saying "SEVEN RUSH rush!" It may be displayed in a large size. As a modification, the characters "SEVEN RUSH rush!" It is desirable to display it after the background is hidden.

FIG. 50(d) shows the situation during fluctuation at the 700th rotation. The background for the 700th stage change is hidden, and instead, the sky background corresponding to the low-probability high base state of "SEVEN RUSH" is displayed. At this time, the large characters "Right shot" may be hidden, but it is desirable that they are displayed continuously from the background for the stage change (or until the fluctuation stops at the 700th rotation , or it is desirable that the display continues until the 701st rotation starts). It should be noted that the small "Right-handed" characters are always displayed during the low-probability-high base state, unlike the large "Right-handed" characters.

FIG. 50(e) shows a situation where the fluctuation of the 799th rotation has stopped. It should be noted that the symbol fixing time has not yet passed (just after the fluctuation is finished). As described above, the 700th rotation was a variation of the first special symbol, but since the 701st rotation to the 798th rotation (not shown) is already a high base state (low probability high base state), the second special It is a variation of the design. However, there is no problem even if all or part of the 701st to 798th rotations are fluctuations of the first special symbols. Then, the 799th rotation is also a variation of the second special symbol. Therefore, FIG. 50(e) shows that the second special symbol has finished changing as the 799th rotation. At this time, the characters "SEVEN RUSH finished..." may be displayed. In addition, in FIG. 50, in FIG. 50 (e), which is the 799th rotation immediately before the end of the "relief function", there is no suspension related to at least the second special symbol (there is no suspension related to the first special symbol) ). From the 700th rotation to the 799th rotation, the background of the sky, which is the background of "SEVEN RUSH", is displayed. In addition, in this situation where the symbol fixing time has not yet passed, the low probability high base state is maintained.

FIG. 50(f) shows a situation in which the variation of the 799th rotation has ended (the design fixation time has also passed), and the second special design and the decorative design are maintaining the stop display. As described above, since there is no reservation related to the second special symbol (there is also no reservation related to the first special symbol), this situation continues. In this situation, the small character "Right-handed" (beating division notification A), which had been displayed in the high base state, is not displayed at the upper right of the screen. The display end (non-display) timing of the small character "Right-handed" is immediately after the fluctuation of the 799th rotation is finished and the symbol fixing time has passed. Note that the base state at this time has already been switched to the low base state, which is the low-probability low base state. However, the sky background is continuously displayed as the background in the production mode (production stage).

FIG. 50(g) shows the situation when the fluctuation at the 800th rotation has started and the situation during the fluctuation. From the situation of FIG. 50(f), it is a situation in which the first special symbol has started to fluctuate due to the ball entering the first starting hole. By starting the fluctuation, it is a situation where the fluctuation of the first special symbol has started as the 800th rotation. More precisely, it is a situation in which the 800th rotation, which is a new variation of the first special symbol, has started after the symbol fixing time of the 799th rotation has passed. In this situation, the small character "Right shot" (beating split report A) that had already been displayed on the upper right of the screen is not displayed. After that (or at the same timing), the sky background, which is the background of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low-probability high-base state, is hidden, and the transition to the low-probability low-base state is made instead. A stage change effect indicating is generated. This stage effect is the same effect (background) as the 700th rotation stage effect (background for stage change). As a modified example, a stage effect (background) different from the stage effect (stage change background) of the 700th rotation may be used. Also good. After that, the background for the stage change disappears, and instead the mountain background corresponding to the low probability low base state is displayed. As a modified example, the background of the sea may be used instead of the background of the mountains (the background may be different from the background before the "relief function" occurs). It may be designed to be the background in some cases (it may be configured so that it may or may not be different from the background before the occurrence of the "relief function"). In addition, the background of the mountains (or the background of the sea), which is the background corresponding to the low probability low base state at this time, must be completed within 100 rotations in order to clarify that it is not a "relief function". , it is desirable to switch to a background of a different production mode (production stage) (for example, a grassland background, a space background, etc.).

As a modification of the pachinko game machine P of the fourth embodiment, the timing at which the "relief function" ends is not after the 799th rotation of the symbol fixed time has elapsed, but at the start of the symbol fixed time (or at the time when fluctuation stops). It may be right before the start of the fixed design time). That is, at the start of the fixed pattern time of the 799th rotation (or at the time of stoppage of fluctuation and immediately before the start of the fixed pattern time), the low-probability high base state may be changed to the low-probability low base state. In such a configuration, when the fixed pattern time starts (or when the fluctuation stops and immediately before the fixed pattern time starts), the small characters of "Right shot" (notice of splitting A) are hidden and the pattern is fixed. During the time, it is desirable that the small letters of "Right shot" (Break split notification A) are not displayed.

In the pachinko game machine P of the fourth embodiment, as described above, the state shifts to the high-probability high-base state, which is the high-base state, even after the special game is finished. Since this high-probability high-base state continues for 100 spins, being in the "high-base state of 100 spins" is a high-base state of the "relief function" even after the special game is finished. (In addition, as a modification, (1) the high base state (high probability high base state) after the special game is completed 100 times and the high base state (low probability high base state) of the "relief function" (2) The high base state (high probability high base state) after the end of the special game is set to 200 spins instead of 100 and the high base state (low probability high base state) of the "relief function". state) may be set to 100 rotations).

In the high base state after the end of the special game, the variation pattern table referred to in the final variation of the high base state (eg 100th rotation) and the variation before the final variation of the high base state (eg 1st rotation to 99 rotations second), and in the high base state of the "relief function", the fluctuation pattern table referenced in the final fluctuation of the high base state (for example, the 799th rotation) and the high base state The fluctuation pattern table referred to in fluctuations before the final fluctuation (for example, from the 700th rotation to the 798th rotation) is configured to be the same. The variation pattern table referred to in the high base state (for example, the 700th to 799th rotation) of the "relief function" is (1) referred to in the final variation of the high base state after the end of the special game (for example, the 100th rotation). It may be a variation pattern table different from the variation pattern table referred to in the variation before the final variation (for example, the 1st rotation to the 99th rotation), and (2) high base after the end of the special game It may be the same as the variation pattern referred to in the variation before the final variation of the state (for example, from the 1st rotation to the 99th rotation). In addition, about the variation pattern demonstrated here, it is a variation pattern in a 2nd special design.

Here, the variation pattern table referred to in the final variation of the high base state after the end of the special game (for example, the 100th rotation) is "variation pattern table A", and the variation before the final variation of the high base state after the end of the special game. (For example, from the 1st rotation to the 99th rotation), the variation pattern table is referred to as "variation pattern table B", and the variation pattern table referred to in the high base state of the "relief function" (for example, the 700th rotation to the 799th rotation) is " Assuming that it is “variation pattern table C”, regarding “variation pattern table A”, if the number of reservations related to the second special symbol at the start of variation is a predetermined number (for example, 4), 4 If it decreases from 1 to 3), and if the number of reservations related to the second special symbol at the start of the fluctuation is a specific number (for example, 1, it will be reduced from 1 to 0 due to the holding digestion associated with the start of the fluctuation) When the fluctuation pattern selection tendency is different between the case) and the "variation pattern table B" and the "variation pattern table C", when the number of reservations related to the second special symbol at the start of the fluctuation is a predetermined number (For example, if there are 4, and it decreases from 4 to 3 in the pending digestion accompanying the start of the fluctuation), and if the number of reservations related to the second special symbol at the start of the fluctuation is a specific number (for example, 1 , the case where the number decreases from 1 to 0 due to the retention digestion accompanying the start of the fluctuation), the selection tendency of the fluctuation pattern is the same. The variation pattern table is simply shown in FIG. 51, but in FIG. 51(b) shows a case where "fluctuation pattern table B" and "fluctuation pattern table C" are set to the same fluctuation pattern table. In addition, about the variation pattern demonstrated here, it is a variation pattern in a 2nd special design. Also, when referring to the "fluctuation pattern table A", that is, in the final fluctuation of the high base state after the end of the special game (for example, the 100th rotation), the aforementioned "result display effect" is executed. However, even in the same final variation of the high base state, it is preferable not to execute the "result display effect" in the final variation of the high base state of the "relief function" (for example, the 799th rotation).

In addition, as a modification, all high base states after the end of the special game (for example, 100 rotations) refer to the "variation pattern table B", and all high base states of the "relief function" (for example, 100 rotations) are referred to as "variation Pattern table C" may be referred to, and the pattern fixing time may be set to a long time only for the final variation of the high base state after the end of the special game (for example, the 100th rotation). Specifically, only the final fluctuation of the high base state after the end of the special game (for example, the 100th rotation) only the pattern fixing time is 10 seconds, and the fluctuation of the other high base state (final fluctuation of the high base state after the special game is completed) Other than that, all variations of the high base state of the "relief function" set the symbol fixation time to 0.5 seconds. By configuring in this manner, the number of variation pattern tables can be reduced, and the "result display effect" can be executed in the pattern fixing time of 10 seconds while reducing the development load.

In the pachinko game machine P of the fourth embodiment, the look-ahead effect can be executed both in the low base state and in the high base state. However, in the low base state, the look-ahead effect can be executed for the hold related to the first special symbol, but the look-ahead effect is not executed for the hold related to the second special symbol, and in the high base state, A look-ahead effect can be executed for the hold related to the second special symbol, but the read-ahead effect is not executed for the hold related to the first special symbol.

Here, in a part of the situation where the "relief function" occurs (before and after the occurrence of the "relief function"), execution of the look-ahead effect is restricted. This is because, before the occurrence of the "relief function", the game is in a low base state centering on the game with the first special symbol (lottery for success or failure or fluctuation), but after the occurrence of the "relief function", the game with the second special symbol. Switching to a high base state based on (whether lottery or fluctuation), that is, the special symbol that can execute the look-ahead effect switches from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, so if a "relief function" occurs If the suspension related to the first special symbol that occurred before is not digested before the occurrence of the "relief function", the pre-reading effect for the suspension related to the first special symbol is executed even after the occurrence of the "relief function". This is because a catastrophic event occurs. In order to prevent this, from 5 fluctuations before the occurrence of the "relief function", even in the low base state, it is configured not to execute the look-ahead effect for the hold related to the first special symbol. More specifically, for 5 fluctuations from the 695th rotation to the 699th rotation, it is configured not to execute the look-ahead effect for the hold related to the first special symbol. Supplementally, during the variation of the 695th rotation, during the variation of the 696th rotation, during the variation of the 697th rotation, during the variation of the 698th rotation, and during the variation of the 699th rotation, the hold related to the first special symbol occurred only does not execute the look-ahead effect for the 695th rotation (for example, the 694th variation). good. Specifically, when a new hold related to the third first special symbol occurs in the variation of the 694th rotation and a prefetch effect is performed for the new hold, the new hold is digested and 3 In the 695th rotation change from the first hold to the second hold, the new hold is digested and the 696th change from the second hold to the first hold, the new hold The look-ahead effect for is executed. In other words, it suffices to execute the look-ahead effect until a predetermined number of times, which is the number of variable displays smaller than the start number, is reached, and not to perform the look-ahead effect from the predetermined number of times until the start number of times is reached. It can be said that an appropriate number of times can be set for . It should be noted that the "fluctuation" described in this paragraph is the fluctuation of the first special symbol.

Then, for one variation immediately after the occurrence of the "relief function", even in the high base state, it is configured not to execute the look-ahead effect for the hold related to the second special symbol. More specifically, for the 700th rotation, the look-ahead effect for the hold related to the second special symbol is not executed, that is, the look-ahead effect is performed for the hold related to the second special symbol that occurred during the 700th rotation. don't run Although it is configured to be able to execute a look-ahead effect for the hold related to the second special symbol that occurred during the fluctuation from the 701st to the 799th rotation, as a modification, a part before the end of the "relief function" In the period (for example, from the 796th to the 799th rotation, or from the 790th to the 799th rotation, etc.), the look-ahead effect is not executed for the hold related to the second special symbol that occurred during the fluctuation. can be In addition, instead of the high base state of the "relief function", in the high base state after the end of the special game, the look-ahead effect may be executed from the first variation, that is, one variation in the high base state after the end of the special game. It is also possible to make it possible to execute a look-ahead effect with respect to the hold related to the second special symbol that has occurred during the change of the eye. In addition, when comparing the prefetch effect in the high base state after the end of the special game and the prefetch effect in the high base state of the "relief function", even if it has one or more of the following features (A) to (F) good.
(A) In the high base state after the end of the special game, the look-ahead effect is more likely to be executed than in the high base state of the “relief function”.
(B) The number of types of look-ahead effects is smaller in the high base state after the end of the special game than in the high base state of the “relief function”.
(C) In the high base state after the end of the special game, the expectation of a big hit is higher when the look-ahead effect is executed than in the high base state of the "relief function".
(D) In the high base state after the end of the special game, it is more difficult to execute the look-ahead effect than in the high base state of the “relief function”.
(E) The high base state after the end of the special game has more kinds of look-ahead effects than the high base state of the “relief function”.
(F) In the high base state after the end of the special game, the expectation of a big hit when the look-ahead effect is executed is lower than in the high base state of the “relief function”.

In the pachinko game machine P in the fourth embodiment, the above-mentioned "normal pattern probability change" is not adopted, and the probability of operating the normal electric accessory P770 (the probability of winning the normal pattern) is low. It is common to both the state and the high base state, and its probability is set to 2/3. As a modification, it may be set to 1/1 (probability of winning with certainty). In addition, the above-mentioned "short-time normal pattern" and "open extension of normal electric accessories" are adopted.

FIG. 52 shows success/failure, symbols, and variation patterns regarding the normal symbol lottery for each of the low base state and the high base state (including both the high base state after the end of the special game and the high base state of the "relief function").

FIG. 52(a) shows success/failure, symbols, and variation patterns relating to the normal symbol lottery in the low base state. The hit probability of normal symbols in the low base state is set to 2/3 as described above. In addition, there are three types of normal symbols in the low base state, and specifically, there are three kinds of winning symbols 1, winning symbols 2, and losing symbols. In addition, the probability of hitting is 1/3 respectively (when the normal pattern is 2/3, the winning pattern is 1/2 and the winning pattern is 2, and the normal pattern is 1/3. In some cases, it will be a misaligned pattern). The opening pattern of the normal electric role product P770 in the case of the winning pattern 1 in the low base state is one opening for 0.05 seconds, and the normal electric role in the case of the winning pattern 2 in the low base state. The release pattern of the object P770 is also one release for 0.05 seconds. In addition, the number of types of variation patterns of normal symbols in the low base state is greater than the number of variation patterns of normal symbols in the high base state described later (in other words, the number of types of variable display time of normal symbols in the low base state is , more than the number of types of variable display time of normal symbols in the high base state) 18 types, specifically, 18 types of variable patterns 1 to 18 with different variable times, and each variable time is 1 second to 18 seconds (different in 1 second increments). The winning probability is 1/18 for each (there is no difference in the selection probability between winning symbols and losing symbols).

FIG. 52(b) shows success/failure, symbols, and variation patterns relating to the normal symbol lottery in the high base state. The winning probability of normal symbols in the high base state is set to 2/3 as described above. Also, the normal symbol types in the high base state are the same as those in the low base state. In addition, the probability of hitting is 1/3 respectively (when the normal pattern is 2/3, the winning pattern is 1/2 and the winning pattern is 2, and the normal pattern is 1/3. In some cases, it will be a misaligned pattern). In the case of the winning symbol 1 in the high base state, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory P770 is 1.8 seconds open three times (0.6 seconds closed between openings), and the winning symbol 2 The opening pattern of the normal electric accessary P770 in the case of is two times of 2.9 seconds opening (there is a 1 second closing between openings). In addition, the number of types of variation patterns of normal symbols in the high base state is two types, specifically, two types of variation patterns 19 to 20 with different variation times, and each variation time is 0.5. 1 second and 0.2 seconds. Incidentally, the winning probability is 3/4 for the variation pattern 19 and 1/4 for the variation pattern 20 (there is no difference in the selection probability between winning symbols and losing symbols).

In this way, both the high base state after the end of the special game and the high base state of the "relief function" are the same success/failure, symbols, and fluctuation patterns related to the normal symbol lottery, so that the high base state after the end of the special game is dedicated. There is no need to develop the success or failure of the normal symbol lottery, the pattern, the variation pattern, and the high base state of the "relief function". It is not necessary to have a normal pattern hit probability for each of the base state and the high base state. In addition, by preparing a large number of variation patterns in the low base state where the normal symbols are likely to stop at the winning symbols (in the fourth embodiment, the winning symbols stop at 2/3), the normal symbols in the low base state are improved. It is possible to give randomness to the stop timing (opening timing of the normal electric accessory P770) and make it difficult to enter the special figure 2 start opening (targeting) in the low base state (in other words, low base It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts that try to change the second special symbol that is not the main subject in the state).

Here, in the pachinko game machine P in the fourth embodiment, the time of the special game end demonstration (jackpot end demo) when the special game is executed is set to 30 seconds. Since the base state during execution of the special game is the low base state, when the normal symbols fluctuate, a maximum fluctuation time of 18 seconds can be selected. However, since the special game end demo (jackpot end demo) continues for 30 seconds, even if the player stops shooting game balls after the final round game immediately before the special game end demo (jackpot end demo) is completed, this By setting such a time value, even if there is a ball entering the normal pattern activation port P741 just before the player stops shooting the game ball and the normal pattern starts to change, the special game end demonstration ( Since the fluctuation of the normal symbols ends before the end of the jackpot end demo), the player can start the game after the special game end demo (jackpot end demo) ends and shifts to the high base state after the end of the special game. When there is a ball entering the normal pattern operation port P741 by launching the ball, the normal pattern fluctuation (0.1 second or 0.2 second fluctuation) in the high base state can be started immediately. can.

Also, as shown in FIG. 51, in the high base state after the end of the special game, when the number of reservations related to the second special symbol at the start of the fluctuation is a predetermined number (2 to 4) (for example, 4) , When decreasing from 4 to 3 due to pending digestion accompanying the start of variation), the shortest variation time of the second special symbol is 2 seconds, and the number of reservations related to the second special symbol at the start of variation is a predetermined number (1) , the shortest variation time of the second special symbol is 15 seconds (when it is 1 and decreases from 1 to 0 due to pending digestion accompanying the start of variation). Therefore, in the first 4 fluctuations in the high base state after the end of the special game, the second special symbol in the case where there is no entry into the special figure 2 start port (in the case where the normal electric accessory 770 cannot be entered without opening) The total time of the shortest variation time is "the shortest variation time of the second special symbol when it decreases from 4 to 3 due to pending digestion + the second special symbol when it decreases from 3 to 2 due to pending digestion The shortest variation time + the shortest variation time of the second special symbol when it decreases from 2 to 1 due to pending digestion + the shortest variation time of the second special symbol when it decreases from 1 to 0 due to pending digestion”. It is 21 seconds which is "2 seconds + 2 seconds + 2 seconds + 15 seconds", and this time is longer than 18 seconds which is the longest fluctuation time of normal symbols in the low base state. Therefore, even if the player stops shooting game balls just before the end of the special game end demo (jackpot end demo), by setting such a time value, just before the player stops shooting game balls Even if the normal pattern starts to fluctuate due to the ball entering the normal pattern operation port P741, the second special in the high base state after the special game end demo (jackpot end demo) ends Since the variation of the normal symbol ends before the 4 variations of the symbol (the situation where 4 holds related to the 2nd special symbol have occurred after the special game ends), the special game end demo (jackpot end demo) ) is completed and after the transition to the high base state after the end of the special game, the player shoots the game ball and enters the normal pattern operation port P741, the reservation related to the second special symbol All (4) are digested and all (4 times) 2nd special symbol fluctuations (variation of 0.1 seconds or 0.2 seconds) in the high base state by the end of the fluctuation Since it can be started immediately, the suspension related to the second special symbol is all (four) digested and the variation of all (four times) the second special symbol is completed. can be generated.

[Fifth embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment, the pachinko game machine P equipped with the "rescue function" has been described, but the pachinko game machine P equipped with the "rescue function" is not limited to such a mode. Therefore, the pachinko game machine P equipped with a "relief function" different from the fourth embodiment is set as the fifth embodiment. ), and omit or simplify the explanation of the common points. Among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine P of the fifth embodiment, elements identical or corresponding to elements described in the base technology or the present embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals.

Unlike the pachinko game machine P in the fourth embodiment, the pachinko game machine P in the fifth embodiment employs the aforementioned "parallel control (parallel digestion)". Therefore, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed at the same time. However, during the variation in which the result of the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit, the result of the lottery of the second special symbol is not a big hit, and the maximum variation of the result of the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit. In the middle, the lottery result of the first special symbol will not be a big hit. Moreover, the pachinko game machine P in the fifth embodiment is configured so that a small win is won with a high probability (for example, 1/2) as a result of the lottery for the second special symbol.

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of the layout relationship of the winning devices and the like in the game area of the pachinko game machine P in the fifth embodiment.

Approximately in the center of the game area P501 of the pachinko game machine P of the fifth embodiment, an opening is formed so that the performance display device P80 can be visually recognized, and the frame member of the center decoration unit (not shown) is formed in the opening. It is attached and constitutes a partition inside the game area P501.

Below the effect display device P80, there is provided a first start winning hole P711A into which game balls flowing down the left side game area (left side area P501L) of the effect display device P80 enter, and further below it is not shown. An out port P790 is provided. In addition, a general prize winning opening P731 is arranged in the lower area of the left side area P501L of the effect display device P80. That is, when a game ball is launched into the game area on the left side of the effect display device P80, the ball enters the first starting prize winning port P711A or the general winning prize port P731, so that winning can be expected. there is On the other hand, in the game area (right area P501R) on the right side of the effect display device P80, as shown in FIG. 712, a large winning opening P751 is arranged, and a game ball launched toward the game area on the right side of the effect display device P80 can win (Note that the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are , Also referred to as special figure 1 starter and special figure 2 starter, respectively). As a modification, the normal electric accessory P770 may be attached to the first start winning opening P711A without the first starting winning opening P711B. Such a first start winning opening P711B may be arranged.

Here, the first start winning opening P711A and the first starting winning opening P711B are starting winning openings for acquiring the right related to the special symbol lottery of the first special symbols, and the second starting winning opening P721 is the first 2 It is a start winning opening for acquiring the right related to the special symbol lottery of special symbols. That is, in the pachinko game machine P of the fifth embodiment, even if the game ball is shot toward either the left area P501L or the right area P501R of the game area P501, the first start winning opening P711A and the first starting winning opening P711B is configured to be able to acquire the right of the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, but unless it is in a high base state, it is difficult to enter the second start winning opening P711B, so a special game is executed, If the "relief function" does not occur, the game based on the entry of the ball into the first start winning hole P711B cannot substantially progress (or progress is difficult). In addition, the second start winning opening P712 is arranged in the right game area (right side area P501R) like the first starting winning opening P711B, but unlike the first starting winning opening P711B, the normal electric accessary P770 is provided. Therefore, even in the high base state or the low base state, if the game ball is shot toward the right game area (right area P501R), it is possible to enter the game ball.

Moreover, the pachinko game machine P of the fifth embodiment has the following features.
(A) It has "hit" and "lose" as the result of lottery for the first special symbol.
(B) It has "hit", "minor hit", and "lose" as the result of lottery for the second special symbol.
(C) The jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/300, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/50, and the small win probability in the low and high probability states is 1/1.2.
(D) "Parallel control (parallel digestion)" is adopted.
(E) In the low-probability low base state, low-probability high-base state, and high-probability high base state, the game progresses mainly with the first special symbol. The variation time is relatively shorter than the second special symbol (the average variation time of the first special symbol is 20 seconds on average in the low probability low base state, and 3 on average in the low probability high base state and high probability high base state seconds, but the average duration of the second special symbol averages 10 minutes for the low-probability low base, low-probability high-base, and high-probability high-base conditions).
(F) In the high probability low base state, the game progresses mainly with the second special symbol, so in this game state, the second special symbol has a relatively shorter fluctuation time than the first special symbol ( The average fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 2 seconds on average in the high probability low base state, but the average time of the first special symbol is 5 minutes on average in the high probability low base state).
(G) As a jackpot pattern related to the first special pattern, the “10R probability variable jackpot A” that triggers the transition to the high probability low base state that is definite until the next time is 10%, and to the high probability high base state that is definite until the next time. 60% of the "3R probability variable jackpot B" that triggers the transition to 100 rotations, and 30% of the "3R normal jackpot" that triggers the transition to the low-probability high base state of 100 rotations.
(H) As a big hit pattern related to the second special pattern, the “10R probability variable jackpot A” that triggers the transition to the high probability low base state that is definite until the next time is 35%, and to the high probability high base state that is definite until the next time. 35% of the "3R probability variable jackpot B" that triggers the transition to 35%, and 30% of the "3R normal jackpot" that triggers the transition to the low-probability high base state of 100 rotations.
(I) When the second special symbol stops with a small winning symbol, the big winning opening P751 is opened for 1.5 seconds, and two game balls can enter on average (30 game balls can be paid out). be.

By providing the above features, in the high probability low base state, the second special pattern that wins a "small hit" with a high probability has a high variation efficiency, so a game centered on the second special pattern can frequently generate small wins, and the opening of the big winning hole P751 (small winning game) based on the winning of the small wins can frequently generate opportunities to acquire game balls, so while waiting for the winning of the next big win. Also, the number of game balls can be increased by a small hit. Such a spec is called a "small hit rush". On the other hand, in the low-probability low-base state, low-probability high-base state, and high-probability high-base state, the variation efficiency of the second special pattern that wins a "small hit" with a high probability is low, so a small win can be achieved in a short time. It cannot be made to occur frequently, and the game based on the first special symbol instead of the second special symbol is progressed. In other words, the pachinko gaming machine P in the fifth embodiment has a game property aiming to shift to a high-probability low-base state with a special game related to the first special game as a trigger in a game mainly composed of the first special symbol. .

The number of "relief functions" when the "relief function" is installed in the pachinko game machine P in the fifth embodiment (the number of times of the low probability high base state), and the production mode when the "relief function" occurs The transition of (production stage) will be described below.

Unlike the pachinko game machine P in the fourth embodiment, the pachinko game machine P in the fifth embodiment is configured to generate a "relief function" at the start of fluctuation (the pachinko game machine P in the fourth embodiment). is configured so that a “relief function” occurs when the fluctuation stops (when the symbol fixed time elapses). Specifically, the pachinko game machine P in the fifth embodiment has a low probability high base state that shifts after the end of the special game related to the 500th rotation ("3R normal jackpot"). At the start of the next change in the situation where the state shifts to the low probability low base state and the low probability low base state has passed 399 rotations), the "relief function" occurs and the low probability low base state changes to the low probability high base state. Transition. It should be noted that what is described as "○○○ turn" in the following description is the number of turns calculated after the end of the special game (after the end of the special game related to "3R normal jackpot"). back.

FIG. 54 shows an effect mode (details of effect displayed on the effect display device P80) relating to the state immediately before and immediately after the "relief function" occurs. In FIG. 54, unlike the pachinko game machine P in the fourth embodiment, the "relief function" occurs at the start of the fluctuation of the 500th rotation. Whether or not there is a hold related to the first special symbol or a hold related to the second special symbol in the situation where the eyes are stopped does not change the performance mode when the "relief function" occurs.

FIG. 54(a) shows a situation where the fluctuation of the first special symbol, which is the fluctuation of the 499th rotation, has stopped. It should be noted that the pattern fixing time has already passed. In this situation, before reaching the 499th rotation (for example, from the 497th rotation, from the 498th rotation, etc.), the background of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability low base state is displayed, and the decoration pattern A background of mountains is displayed behind the .

FIG. 54(b) shows the situation where the variation of the first special symbol, which is the variation of the 500th rotation, has started. It is a situation in which the first special symbol has started to fluctuate as the 500th rotation by canceling the suspension of the first special symbol from the situation of FIG. 54(a). By starting the fluctuation, a "relief function" occurs, and from the start of this fluctuation, the state shifts to the low-probability high base state. Here, at the start of the fluctuation (or just before the start of the fluctuation), a very small "→" sign (beating notification C) indicating an arrow is displayed in the upper right of the screen (it is displayed smaller than the blowing division notification A, which will be described later). , displayed in an inconspicuous manner). After that (or at the same timing), the situation where the "relief function" has occurred, that is, the situation has shifted to the low-probability high-base state, but the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low-probability low-base state ) is displayed.

FIG. 54(c) shows the situation where the variation of the first special symbol, which is the variation of the 501st rotation, has started. After the first special symbol, which has been fluctuating from the situation in FIG. By starting the change, a stage change effect is generated that suggests switching to a sky background, which is the background corresponding to the low-probability high base state of "SEVEN RUSH", which will be described later. This stage change effect is a stage change background in which the screen immediately darkens from the background of the mountains that had been displayed up to that point, and white letters of "STAGE CHANGE" are displayed on a black background. Substantially at the same time that the background for the stage change is displayed, the sound "SEVEN RUSH rushes in!" is output from the speaker 83. This "SEVEN RUSH" is the name of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability high base state. Also, almost at the same time that the background for this stage change is displayed, the "→" symbol (throwing division notification C) indicating an arrow at the upper right of the screen disappears, and instead, the "Right shot" is displayed at the upper right of the screen. The characters (notice A for separate striking) are displayed in small size. Further, substantially at the same time, the characters "Please hit right" (notice B of separate hitting) are displayed in a large size. As a modification, after a predetermined time has passed since the background for stage change was displayed (for example, after 2 seconds), or after the background for stage change is hidden (in other words, after "SEVEN RUSH" Substantially at the same time that the corresponding background starts to be displayed, the speaker 83 may output a voice saying "SEVEN RUSH rush!" As a modification, the characters "SEVEN RUSH rush!" It is desirable to display it after the background is hidden. Incidentally, when the variation of the 501st rotation is the variation of the second special symbol, the stage change effect and the separate notices A and B are not displayed, and the background of the mountain and the separate notice C are continuously displayed.

FIG. 54(d) shows the situation during the 501st rotation. The background for the stage change of the 501st rotation is hidden, and instead, the sky background corresponding to the low-probability high base state of "SEVEN RUSH" is displayed. At this time, the large letters of "Right shot" may be hidden, but it is desirable that they are displayed continuously from the background for the stage change (or until the fluctuation stops at the 501st rotation , or it is desirable that the display continues until the 502nd rotation starts). It should be noted that the small "Right-handed" characters are always displayed during the low-probability-high base state, unlike the large "Right-handed" characters.

In addition, the timing at which the "relief function" ends is the time when the fluctuation of the specified number of times (details will be described later "first number" or "second number") (when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate or the second special symbol It does not matter whether it is at the start of the fluctuation), and it has already transitioned to the low probability low base state during the fluctuation (because the base state changes at the start of the fluctuation, it will already be in the low base state during the fluctuation) Therefore, the sky background corresponding to the low-probability high base state of "SEVEN RUSH" is displayed as the production mode (production stage). However, the characters "Right-handed" (throwing split report A) on the upper right of the screen are not displayed at the start of the variation. At this time, the characters "SEVEN RUSH finished..." may be displayed. If the next fluctuation of the specified number of fluctuations is the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the sky background, which is the background of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability high base state, is hidden when the fluctuation starts. , and instead, a stage change effect is generated that indicates a transition to a low-probability low-base state (in other words, if the next variation of the specified number of variations is the variation of the second special symbol, the background of the sky continues to be displayed, and no stage change effect occurs). This stage effect is the same effect (background) as the 501st rotation stage effect (background for stage change). As a modified example, a production (background) different from the stage production (background for stage change) of the 501st rotation may be used. Also good. After that, the background for the stage change disappears, and instead the mountain background corresponding to the low probability low base state is displayed. As a modified example, the background of the sea may be used instead of the background of the mountains (the background may be different from the background before the "relief function" occurs). It may be designed to be the background in some cases (it may be configured so that it may or may not be different from the background before the occurrence of the "relief function"). In addition, the background of the mountains (or the background of the sea), which is the background corresponding to the low probability low base state at this time, must be completed within 100 rotations in order to clarify that it is not a "relief function". , it is desirable to switch to a background of a different production mode (production stage) (for example, a grassland background, a space background, etc.).

FIG. 55 shows an effect mode (details of effect displayed by the effect display device P80) regarding the state immediately before and immediately after the occurrence of the "relief function". Note that in FIG. 55, unlike the pachinko game machine P in the fourth embodiment, the "relief function" occurs at the start of fluctuation at the 500th rotation. Whether or not there is a hold related to the first special symbol or a hold related to the second special symbol in the situation where the eyes are stopped does not change the performance mode when the "relief function" occurs.

FIG. 55, like FIG. 54, shows the effect mode (details of effect displayed on the effect display device P80) regarding the state immediately before and immediately after the "relief function" occurs. However, in FIG. 55, unlike FIG. 54, the fluctuation of the 500th rotation is the fluctuation of the second special symbol.

FIG. 55(a) shows a situation where the variation of the first special symbol, which is the variation of the 499th rotation, has stopped. It should be noted that the pattern fixing time has already passed. In this situation, before reaching the 499th rotation (for example, from the 497th rotation, from the 498th rotation, etc.), the background of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability low base state is displayed, and the decoration pattern A background of mountains is displayed behind the . However, regarding FIG. 55(a), it may be during fluctuation (during fluctuation of the first special symbol) instead of the situation where the fluctuation is stopped.

FIG. 55(b) shows the situation where the variation of the second special symbol, which is the variation of the 500th rotation, has started. It is a situation in which the change in the second special symbol has started as the 501st rotation by canceling the suspension of the second special symbol from the situation in FIG. 55(a). By starting the fluctuation, a "relief function" occurs, and from the start of this fluctuation, the state shifts to the low-probability high base state. Here, at the start of the fluctuation (or just before the start of the fluctuation), a very small "→" sign (beating notification C) indicating an arrow is displayed in the upper right of the screen (it is displayed smaller than the blowing division notification A, which will be described later). , displayed in an inconspicuous manner). After that (or at the same timing), the situation where the "relief function" has occurred, that is, the situation has shifted to the low-probability high-base state, but the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low-probability low-base state ) is displayed. In addition, as described above, when the first special symbol is stopped from changing at the 499th rotation, the second special symbol in FIG. ), but when the first special symbol is fluctuating in the 499th rotation, the second special symbol in FIG. 55(b) is fluctuating in parallel (fluctuating simultaneously with the first special symbol). In addition, in FIG. 55(b), the variable display of the decorative design corresponding to the variation of the second special design is not performed (only the decorative design corresponding to the first special design is displayed variably and stopped), As a modification, the decorative design corresponding to the second special design may also be configured to be variably displayed and stop-displayed. In such a configuration, for example, it may be configured to be displayed in a small size at the bottom left of the effect display device P80. Also good.

FIG. 55(c) shows the situation where the variation of the first special symbol, which is the variation of the 501st rotation, has started. When the second special symbol that has been fluctuating from the situation in FIG. 55(b) is still fluctuating, the holding of the first special pattern is digested, and the first special pattern has started to fluctuate as the 501st rotation. situation. By starting the change, a stage change effect is generated that suggests switching to a sky background, which is the background corresponding to the low-probability high base state of "SEVEN RUSH", which will be described later. This stage change effect is a stage change background in which the screen immediately darkens from the background of the mountains that had been displayed up to that point, and white letters of "STAGE CHANGE" are displayed on a black background. Substantially at the same time that the background for the stage change is displayed, the sound "SEVEN RUSH rushes in!" is output from the speaker 83. This "SEVEN RUSH" is the name of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability high base state. Also, almost at the same time that the background for this stage change is displayed, the "→" symbol (throwing division notification C) indicating an arrow at the upper right of the screen disappears, and instead, the "Right shot" is displayed at the upper right of the screen. The characters (notice A for separate striking) are displayed in small size. Further, substantially at the same time, the characters "Please hit right" (notice B of separate hitting) are displayed in a large size. As a modification, after a predetermined time has passed since the background for stage change was displayed (for example, after 2 seconds), or after the background for stage change is hidden (in other words, after "SEVEN RUSH" Substantially at the same time that the corresponding background starts to be displayed, the speaker 83 may output a voice saying "SEVEN RUSH rush!" As a modification, the characters "SEVEN RUSH rush!" It is desirable to display it after the background is hidden. Regarding the stage change effect and the display of the separate notices A and B (non-display of the separate notice C) due to the first special symbol starting to fluctuate as described above, the second special symbol is in the process of stopping the fluctuation. is performed even during a change. Incidentally, when the variation of the 501st rotation is the variation of the second special symbol, the stage change effect and the separate notices A and B are not displayed, and the background of the mountain and the separate notice C are continuously displayed.

FIG. 55(d) shows the situation during the 501st rotation. The background for the 501st stage change is hidden, and instead, the sky background corresponding to the low-probability high base state of "SEVEN RUSH" is displayed. At this time, the large letters of "Right shot" may be hidden, but it is desirable that they are displayed continuously from the background for the stage change (or until the fluctuation stops at the 501st rotation , or it is desirable that the display continues until the 502nd rotation starts). It should be noted that the small "Right-handed" characters are always displayed during the low-probability-high base state, unlike the large "Right-handed" characters. It should be noted that the timing at which the "relief function" ends and the display mode of the effect (transition of the effect) are the same as those described above, and are omitted here.

In the pachinko game machine P of the fifth embodiment, as described above, the state shifts to the low-probability high-base state, which is the high-base state, even after the end of the special game. This low probability high base state continues for 100 rotations. In the high base state after the end of the special game, the variation pattern table referred to in the final variation of the high base state (eg 100th rotation) and the variation before the final variation of the high base state (eg 1st rotation to 99 rotations second), and in the high base state of the "relief function", the fluctuation pattern table referred to in the final fluctuation in the high base state and the table before the final fluctuation in the high base state The variation pattern table referred to by variation is configured to be the same. In addition, the fluctuation pattern table referred to in the high base state of the "relief function" is (1) the fluctuation pattern table referred to in the final fluctuation of the high base state after the end of the special game (for example, the 100th rotation). It may be a variation pattern table different from the variation pattern table referred to in the variation of (for example, the 1st to 99th rotation), and (2) the variation before the final variation of the high base state after the special game ( For example, it may be the same as the variation pattern referred to in the 1st to 99th rotations).

Here, the variation pattern table referred to in the final variation of the high base state after the end of the special game (for example, the 100th rotation) is "variation pattern table A", and the variation before the final variation of the high base state after the end of the special game. If the variation pattern table referred to in (for example, the 1st rotation to the 99th rotation) is referred to as "variation pattern table B" and the variation pattern table referred to in the high base state of the "relief function" is referred to as "variation pattern table C", then "variation Regarding the pattern table A", when the number of reservations related to the second special symbol at the start of the fluctuation is a predetermined number (for example, 4, and when the number decreases from 4 to 3 due to the holding digestion accompanying the start of the fluctuation) , When the number of reservations related to the second special symbol at the start of the fluctuation is a specific number (for example, 1, and when it decreases from 1 to 0 due to the holding digestion accompanying the start of the fluctuation) and the selection tendency of the fluctuation pattern are configured to be different, and for "variation pattern table B" and "variation pattern table C", if the number of reservations related to the second special symbol at the start of variation is a predetermined number (for example, 4, and at the start of variation When the number of reservations related to the second special symbol at the start of the fluctuation is a specific number (for example, 1, and 1 in the reservation digestion accompanying the start of the fluctuation) decrease from 0 to 0), the selection tendency of the variation pattern is the same. Details of the fluctuation pattern table are shown in FIG. 55, but in FIG. (b) shows the case where "fluctuation pattern table B" and "fluctuation pattern table C" are set in the same fluctuation pattern table. When referring to the "variation pattern table A", that is, in the final variation of the high base state after the end of the special game (for example, the 100th rotation), the aforementioned "result display effect" is executed. However, it is preferable not to execute the "result display effect" in the final change of the high base state of the "relief function" even if it is the same final change of the high base state.

In addition, as a modified example, the high base state after the end of the special game (for example, 100 rotations) refers to the "variation pattern table B", and the high base state of the "relief function" refers to the "variation pattern table C". It is also possible to configure such that only the final variation of the high base state after the end of the special game (for example, the 100th rotation) has a long symbol fixation time. Specifically, only the final fluctuation of the high base state after the end of the special game (for example, the 100th rotation) only the pattern fixing time is 10 seconds, and the fluctuation of the other high base state (final fluctuation of the high base state after the special game is completed) Other than that, all variations of the high base state of the "relief function" set the symbol fixation time to 0.5 seconds. By configuring in this manner, the number of variation pattern tables can be reduced, and the "result display effect" can be executed in the pattern fixing time of 10 seconds while reducing the development load.

By configuring as described above, in the pachinko game machine P that adopts "parallel control (parallel digestion)" and the "relief function" occurs at the start of fluctuation, the player is notified that the "relief function" has occurred. In addition, the change of the base state and the change of the production mode (production stage) can be smoothly performed, so that the player can recognize the change of the base state without discomfort in the production. can be done. Also, due to the switching of the base state, the type of starting opening aimed at by the player will be different (because the first starting winning opening P711A will switch to the first starting winning opening P711B). , Regardless of whether the symbol that triggers the switching of the base state is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the separate notification C is displayed at the same time as the switching of the base state, but is displayed inconspicuously, and thereafter. At the start of the variation of the first special symbol (at the start of variation of the symbol corresponding to the progress of the game that is the subject of the high base state), the split notice A is displayed immediately and continuously, and the split notice B is displayed. By displaying it conspicuously accompanying the stage change, it is possible to notify the appropriate and emphasized hitting (aiming for the special figure 2 start opening) when the base state switches, while in the subsequent high base state Since it is possible to notify the player of the continuous hitting (to aim for the special figure 2 start opening), it is possible to realize appropriate hitting information for the player.

In addition, the number of times of the "relief function" in the pachinko gaming machine P in the fifth embodiment is the first number of times only for the variation of the first special symbol, and the number of times of the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol. and a second number for the total. Specifically, 300 times is set as the first number of times, and 759 times is set as the second number of times. The pachinko game machine P in the fifth embodiment adopts "parallel control (parallel digestion)", and the first start-up related to the normal electric role product P770 is placed in the game area (right area P501R) on the right side of the effect display device P80. Since both the winning opening P711B and the second starting winning opening 712 are arranged, there is a possibility that the ball will enter both starting winning openings if the first starting winning opening P711B is hit to the right in the high base state. There is also a possibility that the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate at the same time during the high base state of the "relief function". Then, even though it is desirable that the high base state is digested by the fluctuation of the first special symbol, which is the main component of the progress of the game in the high base state, the fluctuation of the second special symbol interrupts. If this happens, the number of fluctuations in the high base state (300 times in the fifth embodiment) relating to the first special symbol cannot be executed as expected (original assumption). Therefore, as described above, by setting not only the first number of times but also the second number of times, the variation of the first special symbol of the first number of times can be secured almost certainly.

It should be noted that while the "relief function" is occurring, a notification effect may be executed to notify the remaining number of times of the "relief function". ” is configured to be displayed. This notification effect basically targets the first number of times (for example, if the remaining number of times of the first number is 120, "120 remaining times" is displayed), but the number of remaining times of the second number is 300. If it becomes less than the number of times, the second number of times may also be targeted. For example, the remaining number of times of the first number is 290 times (the remaining number of times becomes 290 times by performing the variation of the first special symbol 10 times after the occurrence of the "relief function"), and the number of the second number of times The remaining number of times is 100 times (for example, after the occurrence of the "relief function", the variation of the first special symbol is 10 times and the variation of the second special symbol is 649 times, and the remaining number of times becomes 100 times). In one case, the first special symbol has changed only 10 times, and it should be displayed as "290 remaining times", but since the remaining number of times of the second number is 100 times, "100 times remaining" ” will be displayed. That is, if the remaining number of times of the second number exceeds the remaining number of times of the first number, the remaining number of times of the second number becomes the target of notification of the notification effect, in that case, until then, only the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol Although it was subject to subtraction in the notification effect (each time the first special symbol is changed once, the display of "remaining ○○○ times" is subtracted by 1), but after that, only the first special symbol Instead, the number of fluctuations in the second special symbol is also subject to subtraction in the notification effect (each time the first special symbol or second special symbol is changed once, the display of "remaining ○○○ times" is subtracted by 1 be done).

[Sixth embodiment]
As the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment to the fifth embodiment, the pachinko game machine P having various game properties has been described. The sixth embodiment is an example of further devising the above and incorporating the "relief function" into a new game feature. omission or simplification of the description of Among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment, elements identical or corresponding to elements described in the base technology or the present embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals.

[6th-1 Example]
The pachinko game machine P in the 6-1 embodiment adopts the above-mentioned "small hit V" spec. The pachinko game machine P of the 6-1 embodiment has the following features.
(A) It has "hit", "minor hit", and "loss" as the result of the lottery for the first special symbol.
(B) It has "hit", "minor hit", and "lose" as the result of lottery for the second special symbol.
(C) The probability of a big win is 1/300 (not provided with a high probability state), the probability of a small win is 1/50 for the first special symbol and 1/10 for the second special symbol, and the probability of the first special symbol is 1/50. The number of reservations is four, and the number of reservations for the second special symbol is four.
(D) "Second special symbol (special figure 2) priority digestion control" is adopted.
(E) Both the small winning game with the first special symbol and the small winning game with the second special symbol are small winning games that are easy to win V in the specific area (there is no small winning game that makes it difficult to win V) ). In other words, when a ball is entered into the big winning device P750 during execution of a small winning game, the ball entering the specific area becomes almost certain, and this triggers a big winning game (also called a small winning V big winning or a small winning V big winning game). ) is executed.
(F) has a low base state and a high base state;
(G) After the small hit V jackpot of the first special symbol executed by winning the small win of the first special symbol in the low base state (after the special game), it shifts to the low base state again, but the high base state It is executed by winning the small win of the first special pattern in the base state after the small win V big win of the first special pattern (after the special game) or by winning the small win of the second special pattern. After the small hit V big hit of the second special symbol (after the special game), it shifts to the high base state of 15 rotations (at least, the high base state is maintained until the second special symbol fluctuates 15 times).
(H) After the jackpot game with the first special symbol executed by winning the jackpot with the first special symbol in the low base state (after the special game), the transition to the high base state of one rotation (at least, the first The high base state is maintained until the 2 special symbols fluctuate once), but after the first special symbol jackpot game executed by winning the first special symbol jackpot in the high base state (special game After) or after the second special symbol jackpot game (after the special game) executed by winning the second special symbol jackpot, it shifts to a high base state of 15 rotations (at least, the second special symbol is 15 The high base state is maintained until the frequency changes).
(I) A first special symbol jackpot (special game) executed by winning a first special symbol jackpot and a first special symbol small win executed by winning a first special symbol jackpot The V jackpot (special game) is a 3R special game, and by winning the second special pattern jackpot (special game) and the second special pattern jackpot executed by winning the second special pattern jackpot. The small hit V big hit (special game) of the second special symbol to be executed is a 10R special game.
(J) Equipped with a "relief function", which occurs after the end of the special game (after the small win V big win or after the big win game) when the fluctuation stops at the 600th rotation (when the symbol fixed time has elapsed), and up to the 700th rotation The high base state continues (as a modification, the "relief function" may occur when 600 rotations have passed since the high base state after the end of the special game).

By having the above characteristics, during the execution of the small winning game of the first special symbol executed by winning the small winning of the first special symbol in the low base state, (1) the ball is entered into the specific area. (2) You can't get 3R worth of balls by not letting the ball enter the specific area, but you can get closer to the "relief function" (small win V big win) Then, the execution of the special game resets the occurrence condition of the "relief function". If the ball is not entered into the area, it will not be reset, so the player can select to approach the "relief function"). In addition, as a modified example, by entering a ball into a specific area during execution of the small winning game of the first special symbol executed by winning the small winning of the first special symbol in the low base state, the high base state You may comprise so that it may acquire once. In addition, as a further modification, during execution of the first special symbol small winning game executed by winning the first special symbol small winning in the low base state, a large winning device is provided to the player. Aiming at P750 (aiming at a specific area) to notify that the game ball is fired is not executed (to leave it to the player's discretion), and the second special symbol is displayed in the high base state. During execution of the second special pattern small winning game executed by winning the small winning, the player is instructed to shoot a game ball aiming at the big winning device P750 (aiming at a specific area). It may be configured to execute an effect for informing of prompting.

[6-2 Example]
The pachinko game machine P in the 6-2nd embodiment adopts the above-mentioned "small win V" specifications. The pachinko game machine P of the 6-1 embodiment has the following features.
(A) It has "hit" and "lose" as the result of lottery for the first special symbol.
(B) It has "hit", "minor hit", and "lose" as the result of lottery for the second special symbol.
(C) The probability of a big hit is 1/300 (not provided with a high probability state), the probability of a small hit is 1/3, the number of reserved first special symbols is 4, and the reserved second special symbol. The number is four.
(D) "Second special symbol (special figure 2) priority digestion control" is adopted.
(E) A small winning game is a small winning game in which V winning is likely to occur in a specific area (there is no small winning game that makes V winning difficult). In other words, when a ball is entered into the big winning device P750 during execution of a small winning game, the ball entering the specific area becomes almost certain, and this triggers a big winning game (also called a small winning V big winning or a small winning V big winning game). ) is executed.
(F) It has a low base state and a high base state, the normal pattern winning probability is 1/1, the normal pattern holding number is 4, and the normal electric role corresponding to the normal pattern winning pattern Release pattern of the object P770 (operation pattern corresponding to one operation of the normal electric role product P770 triggered by the normal pattern stopping with a winning pattern, that is, "one operation of the normal electric role product P770" = ``Performing one set of opening patterns that open one or more normal electric accessories P770'') is an opening pattern of 0.01 seconds x 1 time in the low base state, and 1.5 in the high base state. It is an opening pattern of opening per second x 3 times, but in any opening pattern, the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is forcibly terminated by entering one ball into the normal electric accessory P770 (for example, 1.5 If one ball is detected during the second opening of 1.5 seconds in the opening of seconds × 3, the remaining time of the second opening, which is the subsequent opening, is forcibly terminated and the third opening is not released).
(G) After the jackpot game of the first special symbol executed by winning the jackpot of the first special symbol in the low base state (after the special game), the state shifts to the high base state, and the second special symbol is 1. The high base state is maintained until the second special symbol fluctuates once, or until the normal electric role P770 operates twice (as a modification, until the second special symbol fluctuates once, or the normal electric role P770 operates twice It may be configured so that the high base state is maintained until it operates twice, or until the first special pattern fluctuates 10 times, or until the first special pattern and the second special pattern fluctuate a total of 10 times) .
(H) After the second special symbol jackpot game (after the special game) executed by winning the second special symbol jackpot in the low base state, winning the second special symbol jackpot in the low base state After the small hit V big hit (after the special game) of the second special symbol executed by doing, it shifts to a high base state, until the second special symbol fluctuates once, or the normal electric accessory P770 reaches 10000 The high base state is maintained until it operates twice (as a modification, until the second special symbol fluctuates once, or until the normal electric accessory P770 operates 10000 times, or until the first special symbol operates 10 times The high base state may be maintained until it fluctuates, or until the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate a total of 10 times).
(I) After the jackpot game with the first special symbol executed by winning the jackpot with the first special symbol in the high base state (after the special game), the jackpot with the second special symbol is won in the high base state. After the second special symbol big hit game (after the special game) executed by , after the second special symbol small hit V big hit executed by winning the second special symbol small hit in the high base state ( After the special game), it shifts to a high base state, and the high base state is maintained until the second special symbol fluctuates 99 times, or until the normal electric accessory P770 operates 10000 times (as a modification, the second Until the 2 special symbols fluctuate 99 times, or until the normal electric accessory P770 operates 10000 times, or until the first special symbol fluctuates 99 times, or the total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol It may be configured so that the high base state is maintained until it fluctuates 99 times). However, when the big win game or the small V big win in the high base state continues three times, it is forced to shift to the low base state after the third big win game or the small V big win is completed (the third big win game Alternatively, in a situation where four reserved numbers of the second special symbols are accumulated before the execution of the small win V big win, after shifting to the low base state, the big win game or small win is made again within the four reserves. V jackpot may be won).

With the above characteristics, it is possible to limit the number of variable second special symbols in the high base state after the first hit (jackpot game or small hit V jackpot related to the first special pattern in the low base state). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the continuous game after the first hit, and in the big win game in the high base state after the first hit or the small win V jackpot, the condition for ending the high base state after that is set to the high base after the first hit. By relaxing the end condition of the state, it is possible to improve the continuous property, so that a well-balanced game can be realized. More specifically, after the first hit, the high base state ends when the normal electric role P770 operates twice. Since the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 ends, after the first hit, if the high base state starts from the situation where the second special design is not held, the second special Only the variation of the second special symbol due to the first ball entering the normal electric role P770 from the first, and the variation related to the suspension of the second special symbol due to the ball entering the ordinary electric role P770 during the fluctuation). It is configured in such a way that it cannot On the other hand, after the second special symbol jackpot game (after the special game) executed by winning the second special symbol jackpot in the low base state, the second special symbol jackpot is won in the low base state. After the small hit V big hit (after the special game) of the second special symbol executed by , the high base state ends when the normal electric role product P770 operates 10000 times. It is possible to cause suspension of four second special symbols during the fluctuation due to the ball entering the normal electric role P770 (however, even if the second special symbol fluctuates once, the high base state will be This allows for a total of 5 variations of the second special symbol, 4 variations of the 4 reserved portions to be consumed after the end of the high base state). After the first special symbol jackpot game (after the special game) executed by winning the first special symbol jackpot in the high base state, the second special symbol jackpot is won in the high base state. After the second special symbol jackpot game (after the special game) executed in the high base state, after the second special symbol small hit V jackpot (special After the game), the high base state is maintained until the second special symbol changes 99 times, or until the normal electric accessory P770 operates 10000 times, and the probability of a small win is 1/3. A small hit V big hit can be obtained with a fairly high probability during the state.

[6th-3 embodiment]
The pachinko game machine P in the 6-3rd embodiment adopts the above-mentioned "small hit V" spec. The pachinko game machine P of the 6-3rd embodiment has the following features.
(A) It has "hit" and "lose" as the result of lottery for the first special symbol.
(B) It has "hit", "minor hit", and "lose" as the result of lottery for the second special symbol.
(C) the probability of a big hit is 1/300 (not provided with a high probability state), the probability of a small hit is 1/1 (approximately 1/1), and the number of reserved first special symbols is 4; The number of reserved second special symbols is four.
(D) "Second special symbol (special figure 2) priority digestion control" is adopted.
(E) A small winning game is a small winning game in which V winning is likely to occur in a specific area (there is no small winning game that makes V winning difficult). In other words, when a ball is entered into the big winning device P750 during execution of a small winning game, the ball entering the specific area becomes almost certain, and this triggers a big winning game (also called a small winning V big winning or a small winning V big winning game). ) is executed.
(F) It has a low base state and a high base state, the probability of winning a normal symbol is 1/1, the number of reserved normal symbols is 4, and the winning symbols of the normal symbols are the winning symbols A and the winning symbols. The pattern B (selection ratio is 3:1), and the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory P770 corresponding to the winning pattern A and the winning pattern B in the low base state is 0.01 second open × 1 time open pattern, and the opening pattern of the normal electric role product P770 corresponding to the winning symbol A in the high base state is an opening pattern of 0.01 seconds x 1 time, and the normal electric role corresponding to the winning symbol B in the high base state. The release pattern of the object P770 is an open pattern of 1.5 seconds x 3 times. If one ball is detected during the second 1.5 second opening in 1.5 seconds x 3 openings, the remaining time of the second opening, which is the subsequent opening, is forcibly terminated. and the third opening is not performed).
(G) Winning the jackpot with the second special symbol after the jackpot game with the first special symbol executed by winning the jackpot with the first special symbol in the low base state or the high base state (after the special game). After the second special symbol jackpot game (after the special game) executed by , after the second special symbol small hit V jackpot (after the special game) executed by winning the second special symbol jackpot , the high base state is maintained until the second special symbol fluctuates once, or until the normal electric accessory P770 operates four times (as a modification, the second special symbol is 1 until the normal electric accessory P770 operates 4 times, or until the first special symbol fluctuates 10 times, or until the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate a total of 10 times. It may be configured to maintain the high base state).

By having the above-mentioned features, while the normal electric accessory P770 operates four times (in other words, while the normal pattern wins four times), it is possible to realize the game property of whether or not the winning symbol B can be won. (By winning the winning symbol B, it is possible to enter the ball into the normal electric accessory P770, one second special symbol is reserved, and the second special symbol is almost a small hit. Therefore, winning the winning symbol B is almost simultaneous with obtaining the small win V big win). In addition, even if the winning symbol B is won once, if the number of opening times of the normal electric accessory P770 still remains after that, the winning symbol B may be won further, and if the winning symbol B is further won. , the holding of the second special symbol will occur further, so that a small hit V big hit will be obtained a plurality of times in succession.

[6th-4th embodiment]
The pachinko game machine P in the 6-4th embodiment adopts the above-mentioned "small hit V" spec. The pachinko game machine P of the 6-4th embodiment has the following features.
(A) It has "hit" and "lose" as the result of lottery for the first special symbol.
(B) It has "hit", "minor hit", and "lose" as the result of lottery for the second special symbol.
(C) The probability of a big hit is 1/300 (not provided with a high probability state), the probability of a small hit is 1/3, the number of reserved first special symbols is 4, and the reserved second special symbol. The number is four.
(D) "Second special symbol (special figure 2) priority digestion control" is adopted.
(E) A small winning game is a small winning game in which V winning is likely to occur in a specific area (there is no small winning game that makes V winning difficult). In other words, when a ball is entered into the big winning device P750 during execution of a small winning game, the ball entering the specific area becomes almost certain, and this triggers a big winning game (also called a small winning V big winning or a small winning V big winning game). ) is executed.
(F) It has a low base state and a high base state, the normal pattern winning probability is 1/1, the normal pattern holding number is 4, and the normal electric role corresponding to the normal pattern winning pattern Release pattern of the object P770 (operation pattern corresponding to one operation of the normal electric role product P770 triggered by the normal pattern stopping with a winning pattern, that is, "one operation of the normal electric role product P770" = ``Performing one set of opening patterns that open one or more normal electric accessories P770'') is an opening pattern of 0.01 seconds x 1 time in the low base state, and 1.5 in the high base state. It is an opening pattern of opening per second x 3 times, but in any opening pattern, the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is forcibly terminated by entering one ball into the normal electric accessory P770 (for example, 1.5 If one ball is detected during the second opening of 1.5 seconds in the opening of seconds × 3, the remaining time of the second opening, which is the subsequent opening, is forcibly terminated and the third opening is not released).
(G) Winning the jackpot with the second special symbol after the jackpot game with the first special symbol executed by winning the jackpot with the first special symbol in the low base state or the high base state (after the special game). After the second special symbol jackpot game (after the special game) executed by , after the second special symbol small hit V jackpot (after the special game) executed by winning the second special symbol jackpot , the high base state is maintained until the second special symbol fluctuates once, or until the normal electric accessory P770 operates N times (as a modification, the second special symbol is 1 until the normal electric accessory P770 operates N times, or until the first special symbol fluctuates 10 times, or until the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate a total of 10 times. It may be configured to maintain the high base state). Here, N=1, 2, 3, or 4, and is configured to differ according to the type of special game (type of big hit pattern or small hit pattern).

By having the above characteristics, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation of occurrence of the second special symbol for the small hit according to the type of the big hit pattern or the type of the small hit pattern. In other words, it is possible to vary the expected degree of acquisition of the small win V big win and the expected value of the number of acquired small win V big wins according to the type of the big win pattern or the type of the small win pattern. As a modification, the high base state is maintained until the second special symbol changes 99 times or the normal electric accessory P770 operates 10000 times (or the second special symbol is Until it fluctuates 99 times, or until the normal electric accessory P770 operates 10000 times, or until the first special pattern fluctuates 99 times, or the first special pattern and the second special pattern fluctuate a total of 99 times. It may have a special game (big hit pattern or small hit pattern) such that the high base state is maintained until.

In addition, as a modified example, if there is a big hit pattern or a small hit pattern that is "one change of the second special symbol or 12 times of operation of the normal electric accessory P770" as the end condition of the high base state, the second special Design fluctuation is set to 300 seconds, and an effect prompting the player to stop shooting the game ball every time the normal electric accessory P770 is operated three times (in other words, the normal electric accessory P770 A production prompting not to let the game ball enter) is executed. By doing this, one of the time-saving termination conditions by entering the ball into the normal electric accessory P770 in a situation where the number of reserved normal symbols is 4 is wasted. It is possible to prevent counting up. More specifically, even if the ball is entered into the normal electric accessory P770 in a situation where there are four reserved normal symbols, the number of reserved normal symbols is already four, so it does not increase, it is simply a high base state. is approaching the end of the game, which is disadvantageous to the player. However, with the above configuration, it is possible to prevent such disadvantage.

[6th-5th embodiment]
The pachinko game machine P in the 6th-5th embodiment adopts the above-mentioned "small hit V" spec. The pachinko game machine P of the 6-5th embodiment has the following features.
(A) It has "hit" and "lose" as the result of lottery for the first special symbol.
(B) It has "hit", "minor hit", and "lose" as the result of lottery for the second special symbol.
(C) the probability of a big hit is 1/300 (not provided with a high probability state), the probability of a small hit is 1/5 (the small prize pattern A is 1/6, and the small prize pattern B is 1/30); The reserved number of the first special symbol is four, and the reserved number of the second special symbol is four.
(D) "Second special symbol (special figure 2) priority digestion control" is adopted.
(E) The small winning game is a small winning game A that is easy to win in a specific area (a small winning game corresponding to the small winning pattern A), and a small winning game B that makes it difficult to win a V prize (corresponding to the small winning pattern B It has a small hit game). In other words, if a ball is entered into the big winning device P750 during the execution of the small winning game A, the ball entering the specific area becomes almost certain, and this triggers a big winning game (also known as a small winning V big winning or a small winning V big winning game). ) is executed, but even if the ball is entered into the big winning device P750 during execution of the small winning game B, the ball does not enter the specific area, and the big winning game triggered by that (small winning V big winning or small winning V jackpot game) is not executed.
(F) It has a low base state and a high base state, the normal pattern winning probability is 1/1, the normal pattern holding number is 4, and the normal electric role corresponding to the normal pattern winning pattern Release pattern of the object P770 (operation pattern corresponding to one operation of the normal electric role product P770 triggered by the normal pattern stopping with a winning pattern, that is, "one operation of the normal electric role product P770" = ``Performing one set of opening patterns that open one or more normal electric accessories P770'') is an opening pattern of 0.01 seconds x 1 time in the low base state, and 1.5 in the high base state. It is an opening pattern of opening per second x 3 times, but in any opening pattern, the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is forcibly terminated by entering one ball into the normal electric accessory P770 (for example, 1.5 If one ball is detected during the second opening of 1.5 seconds in the opening of seconds × 3, the remaining time of the second opening, which is the subsequent opening, is forcibly terminated and the third opening is not released).
(G) After the jackpot game of the first special symbol executed by winning the jackpot of the first special symbol in the low base state (after the special game), the transition to the high base state occurs, and the second special symbol fluctuates. is performed once or until the small winning pattern A or the small winning pattern B is won five times, the high base state is maintained.
(H) After the second special symbol jackpot game (after the special game) executed by winning the second special symbol jackpot in the low base state, winning the second special symbol jackpot in the low base state After the small hit V big hit (after the special game) of the second special pattern executed by doing, the state shifts to a high base state, and the variation of the second special pattern is performed 5 times, or the small hit pattern A or the small hit. The high base state is maintained until the symbol B is won five times.
(I) After the jackpot game with the first special symbol executed by winning the jackpot with the first special symbol in the high base state (after the special game), the jackpot with the second special symbol is won in the high base state. After the second special symbol big hit game (after the special game) executed by , after the second special symbol small hit V big hit executed by winning the second special symbol small hit in the high base state ( After the special game), it shifts to the high base state, shifts to the high base state, and until the variation of the second special pattern is performed 99 times or the small winning pattern A or the small winning pattern B is won once, A high base state is maintained.

By having the above-mentioned characteristics, the first hit (big hit game related to the first special symbol in the low base state) is used as a trigger to shift to the high base state once, while the big hit game or the small hit in the high base state. Triggered by the V big win, the state is shifted to the high base state 99 times, and the big win game related to the second special symbol in the low base state or the small win V big win (the second remaining when the high base state shifts to the low base state) It is possible to create a game property such as shifting to a high base state five times by using a jackpot or a small win to be won by holding a special symbol as a trigger, that is, a high base state with a plurality of degrees of expectation for consecutive games. In addition, when the high base state of 99 times is granted, 1/6 of the small winning pattern A will be elected with a fairly high probability within 99 times, so "99 high base state → small winning pattern A Small hit V big hit → 99 times high base state → small win V big hit related to small win pattern A → …” It seems that the expectation is very high, but the small win V is difficult. Since the (substantially impossible) small winning pattern B is provided and the high base state ends when the small winning pattern is won, the extreme continuous property is suppressed, and the small winning pattern B is reached before the small winning pattern B It is possible to realize the playability of how many times the winning symbol A is won. Also, in the case of the high base state of 5 times, even if the small winning pattern is won once (small winning pattern B is won once) so that the high base state of 5 times can be executed reliably are configured not to terminate the high base state.

[6th-6th embodiment]
The pachinko game machine P in the 6th-6th embodiment has the same board configuration as in FIG. 53, and adopts the specification of "small winning rush". However, unlike the pachinko game machine P of the fifth embodiment, the purpose is not to increase the number of balls to be output by frequently generating small wins. Since it is opened only for 0.01 seconds, it is very difficult to enter a game ball. The pachinko game machine P of the 6-6th embodiment has the following features.
(A) It has "hit" and "lose" as the result of lottery for the first special symbol.
(B) It has "hit", "minor hit", and "lose" as the result of lottery for the second special symbol.
(C) The jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/300, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/50, and the small win probability in the low and high probability states is 1/1.2.
(D) "Parallel control (parallel digestion)" is adopted, and "V probability variation" is adopted ("10R probability variation jackpot A" and "10R probability variation jackpot B" described later are easy to enter the specific area It is a jackpot pattern, and "10R normal jackpot" is a jackpot pattern in which it is difficult to enter a specific area and is virtually impossible).
(E) In the low-probability low base state, low-probability high-base state, and high-probability high base state, the game progresses mainly with the first special symbol. The variation time is relatively shorter than the second special symbol (the average variation time of the first special symbol is 20 seconds on average in the low probability low base state, and 3 on average in the low probability high base state and high probability high base state seconds, but the average duration of the second special symbol averages 10 minutes for the low-probability low base, low-probability high-base, and high-probability high-base conditions).
(F) In the high probability low base state, the game progresses mainly with the second special symbol, so in this game state, the second special symbol has a relatively shorter fluctuation time than the first special symbol ( The average fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 2 seconds on average in the high probability low base state, but the average time of the first special symbol is 5 minutes on average in the high probability low base state).
(G) As a jackpot pattern related to the first special pattern, the transition to the low probability high base state of 100 rotations with a 40% “10R probability variable jackpot A” that triggers the transition to the high probability low base state that is a probability variation until the next time. The trigger "10R normal jackpot" is selected at 60%.
(H) As a jackpot pattern related to the second special pattern, the “10R probability variable jackpot A” that triggers the transition to the high probability low base state that is probability variation until the next time is 40%, and to the high probability high base state that is probability variation until the next time. "10R probability variable jackpot B" which is the transition trigger is selected at 60%.

By having the above-mentioned features, when it shifts to the high probability low base state after the first hit (jackpot game related to the first special symbol in the low base state), the game progresses mainly with the second special symbol, When the result of the lottery of the 2 special symbols is a big win, all of them are "probability variable big wins", so that the execution of the special game is guaranteed at least two more times. Specifically, when the second special symbol wins the "10R probability variable jackpot A", it shifts to the high probability low base state again, and the execution of the special game two more times is guaranteed again, to "10R probability variable jackpot B". By shifting to a high probability high base state by winning, it switches to the game progress mainly based on the first special symbol. Furthermore, after switching to the game progress based on the first special pattern by shifting to the high probability high base state, the first special pattern wins the "10R probability variable jackpot A", again high probability low base It is a novel game property that the transition to the state and the execution of the special game two more times are guaranteed again.

[6th-7th embodiment]
The pachinko game machine P in the 6th to 7th embodiments has a board configuration similar to that of FIG. However, unlike the pachinko game machine P of the fifth embodiment, the purpose is not to increase the number of balls to be output by frequently generating small wins. Since it is opened only for 0.01 seconds, it is very difficult to enter a game ball. The pachinko game machine P of the 6-6th embodiment has the following features.
(A) It has "hit" and "lose" as the result of lottery for the first special symbol.
(B) It has "hit", "minor hit", and "lose" as the result of lottery for the second special symbol.
(C) The jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/300, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/50, and the small win probability in the low and high probability states is 1/1.2.
(D) "Parallel control (parallel digestion)" is adopted, and "V probability variation" is adopted ("10R probability variation jackpot" described later is a jackpot pattern that makes it easy to enter a specific area, and "10R normal "Big hit" is a big hit pattern that makes it difficult to enter a specific area and is virtually impossible).
(E) In the low-probability low base state, low-probability high-base state, and high-probability high base state, the game progresses mainly with the first special symbol. The variation time is relatively shorter than the second special symbol (the average variation time of the first special symbol is 20 seconds on average in the low probability low base state, and 3 on average in the low probability high base state and high probability high base state seconds, but the average duration of the second special symbol averages 10 minutes for the low-probability low base, low-probability high-base, and high-probability high-base conditions).
(F) In the high probability low base state, the game progresses mainly with the second special symbol, so in this game state, the second special symbol has a relatively shorter fluctuation time than the first special symbol ( The average fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 2 seconds on average in the high probability low base state, but the average time of the first special symbol is 5 minutes on average in the high probability low base state).
(G) As the jackpot symbol related to the first special symbol, the "10R probability variable jackpot" is selected at 100%, which is the trigger for the transition to the high probability high base state that is variable probability until the next time, but the high base state has passed 50 times. Then it shifts to the low base state and switches to the high probability low base state.
(H) As a jackpot design related to the second special design, the “10R probability variation jackpot” is 50%, which is the opportunity to shift to the high probability high base state that is the probability variation until the next time, and the transition to the low probability high base state of 100 rotations. "10R normal jackpot" is selected at 50%.

By having the above characteristics, the first hit (jackpot game related to the first special symbol in the low base state) always shifts to a high probability state, so that the execution of the special game again is guaranteed, and 50 times In the high-probability high-base state, the game progresses mainly with the first special pattern, so that if a big win (with the first special pattern) is achieved within 50 times, the game property of shifting to the high-probability state again can be created.

[Seventh embodiment]
As the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment to the sixth embodiment, the pachinko game machine P having various game characteristics has been described, but for the purpose of further improving the game characteristics, special games and high base state game characteristics and effects A seventh embodiment is an example in which the contents are further devised, and only differences from the underlying technology and the present embodiment will be described in detail below, and descriptions of common points will be omitted or simplified. Among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, elements identical or corresponding to elements described in the base technology or the present embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The pachinko game machine P in the seventh embodiment employs the aforementioned "small win V" specifications. In addition, in the approximate center of the game area P501 of the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, an opening is formed so that the performance display device P80 can be visually recognized. A member is attached to form a partition inside the game area P501.

Below the effect display device P80, there is provided a first start winning hole P711 into which game balls flowing down the left side game area (left region P501L) of the effect display device P80 enter, and further below it is not shown. An out port P790 is provided. In addition, a general prize winning opening P731 is arranged in the lower area of the left side area P501L of the effect display device P80. That is, when a game ball is launched into the game area on the left side of the effect display device P80, the ball enters the first start winning hole P711 or the general winning hole P731, and it can be expected that a winning will occur. there is On the other hand, in the game area (right area P501R) on the right side of the effect display device P80, as shown in FIG. A game ball that is arranged and fired toward the game area on the right side of the effect display device P80 can win (Note that the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening are respectively the special figure 1 start It is also called mouth and special figure 2 start mouth). It should be noted that, as a modification, without the second start winning opening P721, another first starting winning opening different from the first starting winning opening P711 is provided. You may attach thing P770.

Here, the first start winning opening P711 is a starting winning opening for acquiring the right related to the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, and the second starting winning opening P721 is the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. It is the start winning entrance to acquire the rights related to. That is, in the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, in the low base state, the game ball is shot toward the left side area of the game area P501, and the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is made through the first start winning opening P711. It is a game property that acquires the right, and in the high base state, the game ball is shot toward the right side area of the game area P501, and the right of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol through the second start winning opening P721. It is a playability that acquires

Inside the big winning opening P751, a first distribution member P900A and a second distribution member P900B are provided. It is guided to one of the division members P900B. In addition, when guided to the second distribution member P900B via the first distribution member P900A, when guided without passing through the first distribution member P900A (that is, to the big winning opening P751 and when the entering game ball is guided directly to the second distribution member P900B). The game ball guided to the first distribution member P900A is distributed to one of the five ball entrances. Of these, when the ball enters the entrance with a circle drawn around it, it is guided to the second distribution member P900B, and when the ball enters the other entrance, it penetrates the game board P5 back and forth. Through holes (not shown) formed by the After passing the out-ball sensor P792 (shot ball number sensor) provided at the lower part of the front frame for the purpose, it is discharged out of the game machine. The game ball guided to the second distribution member P900B is distributed to one of the four ball entrances. Of these, when the ball enters a specific area P760, which is a ball entrance with a circle drawn around it, a big win game (also called a small win V big win or a small win V big win game) is executed with that as a trigger. If the ball enters the entrance other than the entrance, it flows down to the rear surface side of the game board P5 through a through hole (not shown) formed through the front and back of the game board P5, and the collection channel at the bottom of the front frame P2 ( The balls are collected in the played ball passage), and discharged out of the gaming machine after passing the out-ball sensor P792 (fired ball number sensor) provided at the lower part of the front frame for detecting the total number of fired game balls.

Moreover, the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment has the following features.
(A) It has "hit", "minor hit", and "loss" as the result of the lottery for the first special symbol.
(B) It has "hit", "minor hit", and "lose" as the result of lottery for the second special symbol.
(C) The probability of a big hit is 1/300 (not provided with a high probability state), the probability of a small hit is 1/3 for the first special symbol and 1/2 for the second special symbol, and the probability of the first special symbol is 1/3. The number of reservations is four, and the number of reservations for the second special symbol is two. As a modified example, the small hit probability of the first special symbol may be set to 1/2, and the reserved number of the second special symbol may be set to one.
(D) "Second special symbol (special figure 2) priority digestion control" is adopted.
(E) The small winning game of the first special symbol is small winning game A (opening time of large winning opening P751 0.2 seconds × 1 time), small winning game B (opening time of large winning opening P751 0.2 seconds × 1 time). 5 seconds × 2 times), small winning game C (opening time of the big winning opening P751 is 1.5 seconds × 1 time) are executed at a rate of 60%, 30%, and 10%, respectively. As for the small winning game with special symbols, one type of small winning game C (opening time of the big winning opening P751 is 1.5 seconds×1 time) is executed at a rate of 100%. As a modification, the second special symbol small winning game is small winning game A (opening time of large winning opening P751 is 0.2 seconds × 1 time), small winning game B (opening time of large winning opening P751 is 0 .5 seconds × 2 times), small winning game C (opening time of the big winning opening P751 is 1.5 seconds × 1 time) are executed at a rate of 35%, 35%, and 30%, respectively. may be configured. As described above, by entering the ball into the big winning device P750 during execution of the small winning game and then entering the specific area P760, a big winning game (also called a small winning V big win or a small winning V big winning game) is triggered. ) is executed.
(F) has a low base state and a high base state; The high base state continues 99 times, but if a small win or big win is won in the high base state and the small win V big win game or big win game is executed four times in succession (for example, "in the high base state When the small win is won and the small win V big win game is executed (if the event continues four times), after the fourth small win V big win game or after the big win game, it always shifts to a low base state (so-called " time-saving limiter”). As a modified example, the time-saving limiter is not applied, and when the small winning V big winning game or the big winning game is never executed in the high base state continuing 99 times, the transition to the low base state or the transition to the low base state A small winning V big winning game or a big winning game that serves as a trigger may be provided, and when such a small winning V big winning game or big winning game is executed, a shift to a low base state may be made.
(G) After the small hit V jackpot of the first special symbol executed by winning the small hit of the first special symbol in the low base state (after the special game), it shifts to the high base state at 25% ( 75% to the low base state), and after the first special symbol jackpot (after special game) executed by winning the first special symbol jackpot in the low base state, 50% to the high base state. (50% to low base state). In any of the small winning games A to C, the ratio of shifting to the high base state after the small winning V big winning game does not change (any small winning game shifts to the high base state at 25%).
(H) After the small win V jackpot of the second special symbol executed by winning the small win of the second special symbol in the low base state (after the special game), the transition is made to the high base state at 100%, After the second special symbol jackpot (after special game) executed by winning the second special symbol jackpot in the low base state, the state shifts to the high base state at 100%. In any of the small winning games A to C, the ratio of shifting to the high base state after the small winning V big winning game does not change (all small winning games shift to the high base state at 100%).
(I) After the small win V jackpot of the first special symbol executed by winning the small win of the first special symbol in the high base state (after the special game), the transition is made to the high base state at 100%, After the first special symbol jackpot (after the special game) executed by winning the first special symbol jackpot in the high base state, the state shifts to the high base state at 100%. In any of the small winning games A to C, the ratio of shifting to the high base state after the small winning V big winning game does not change (all small winning games shift to the high base state at 100%). In addition, after reaching the time-saving limiter (after the 4th consecutive small hit V jackpot in the high base state or after the jackpot), regardless of the type of small hit game (type of small hit V jackpot game) and the type of jackpot game, Always transition to the low base state.
(J) After the small win V jackpot of the second special symbol executed by winning the small win of the second special symbol in the high base state (after the special game), it shifts to the high base state at 100%, After the second special symbol jackpot (after the special game) executed by winning the second special symbol jackpot in the high base state, the state is shifted to the high base state at 100%. In any of the small winning games A to C, the ratio of shifting to the high base state after the small winning V big winning game does not change (all small winning games shift to the high base state at 100%). In addition, after reaching the time-saving limiter (after the 4th consecutive small hit V jackpot in the high base state or after the jackpot), regardless of the type of small hit game (type of small hit V jackpot game) and the type of jackpot game, Always transition to the low base state.
(K) The second special symbol jackpot (special game) executed by winning the second special symbol jackpot is a 10R special game, and the first special symbol jackpot executed by winning the first special symbol jackpot To win a special pattern jackpot (special game), a first special pattern jackpot V jackpot (special game) executed by winning a first special pattern jackpot, and a second special pattern jackpot. The small hit V big hit (special game) of the second special symbol executed in is a 4R special game.
(L) When the small winning game A and the small winning game B are executed, the large winning opening P751 is opened and the game ball enters, the game ball is guided to the first distribution member P900A, and the small winning When the game C is executed, when the big winning hole P751 is opened and the game ball enters, it is configured to be guided to the second distribution member P900B. More specifically, a first guideway leading to the first distribution member P900A and a second guideway leading to the second distribution member P900B are provided inside the big winning opening P751, and a small winning game is provided. The first guideway is open and the second guideway is closed for 3 seconds after the small winning start demonstration is finished, and after the small winning start demonstration of the small winning game is finished. Starting from 3 seconds later, the first guideway is closed and the second guideway is opened for 5 seconds, and the small winning game A and the small winning game B are immediately after the end of the small winning start demonstration. Since the big winning opening P751 opens at 2nd, the game ball enters the state in which the first guideway is opened and the second guideway is closed, and the first guideway passes through the first guideway. Guided by the distribution member P900A, the small winning game C opens the big winning opening P751 3 seconds after the end of the small winning start demonstration, so the first guideway is blocked and the second guideway is opened. In this state, a game ball enters and is guided to the second distribution member P900B via the second guide path.

FIG. 57 shows an effect mode when a small winning game is executed and the big winning opening P751 is opened. In FIG. 57(a-1), the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops in a stop mode corresponding to the small win, the small win game starts, the big winning hole P751 opens, and the big winning hole P751. It is a situation in which a game ball has entered inside. A very small "→" sign indicating an arrow is displayed on the upper right of the screen, and informs that the current game situation should be to the right (during a small winning game). Then, an effect (first distribution member P900A or second distribution member P900A or second distribution As an effect indicating that the game ball is staying in the member P900B, the characters "Challenging to break through the crew" are displayed. The effect in this situation is referred to as a "big prize entrance ball effect".

In FIG. 57(a-2), the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops in the stop mode corresponding to the small win, the small win game starts, and the big winning hole P751 opens, but the big winning hole This is a situation in which the game ball did not enter the P751. A very small "→" sign indicating an arrow is displayed on the upper right of the screen, and informs that the current game situation should be to the right (during a small winning game). Then, as an effect indicating to the player that the game ball did not enter the big winning hole P751, the characters "Unfortunately..." are displayed. The effect in this situation is referred to as a "non-ball-entering big winning slot effect".

FIG. 57(b-1) is a situation following FIG. 57(a-1), and is a situation in which the game ball finally enters the specific area. A very small "→" sign indicating an arrow is displayed on the upper right of the screen, and the current game situation is a situation where the player should hit right (situation transitioning from small win game to small win V big win game). is reported. Then, the letter "V" is displayed to the player as an effect indicating that the game ball has entered the specific area. An effect in this situation is called a “specific area entry effect”.

FIG. 57(b-1) is a situation following FIG. 57(a-1), and is a situation in which the game ball finally enters the specific area. A very small "→" sign indicating an arrow is displayed on the upper right of the screen, and the current game situation is a situation where the current game situation should be hit to the right (during a small winning game, more strictly speaking, a small winning V It is notified that it is a situation of transitioning to the inside). Then, the letter "V" is displayed to the player as an effect indicating that the game ball has entered the specific area. The effect in this situation is referred to as "specific area non-entering effect".

FIG. 57(b-2) is a situation following FIG. 57(a-1), and is a situation in which the game ball did not finally enter the specific area. A very small "→" sign indicating an arrow is displayed on the upper right of the screen, and informs that the current game situation should be to the right (during a small winning game). Then, as an effect indicating to the player that the game ball did not enter the specific area, the characters "Unfortunately..." are displayed. This character is displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 57(b-2).

By constructing in this way, it is possible to execute a sharp performance in the process from winning the small win to winning the small win V big win game, and in the first process until the small win V big win game is acquired. In the presence or absence of entry into a certain big winning hole P751 and the presence or absence of entry into the specific area which is the second process, by making a common effect in the case of failure (in the case where the ball does not enter), a small hit V This makes it easy to visually understand that a big hit game has not been obtained, and also contributes to the reduction of the performance capacity.

In the seventh embodiment, setting values in a plurality of stages are provided so that the probability of a big hit can be set to any one of a plurality of types. There are two types of setting values, "1" and "6". When the setting value is "1", the probability of a big hit is 1/300 as described above, and when the setting value is "6", the probability of a big hit. is 1/150. In addition, the small hit probability does not change even if the set value is different.

FIG. 58 only shows that the ball has not entered by providing a plurality of types of the above-described “large winning hole non-ball-entering effect” and “specific area non-ball-entering effect” other than the mode shown in FIG. In addition, it also serves as a setting suggestion that suggests to the player whether the set value is "1" or "6".

FIG. 58(a-1) shows the same “big prize opening non-ball-entering effect” and “specified area non-ball-entering effect” as shown in FIG. When this mode (referred to as mode A) is displayed, it does not serve as a setting suggestion.

FIG. 58(a-2) shows a "big prize opening non-ball-entering effect" and a "specified area non-ball-entering effect" in which the characters "Sorry!" are displayed. When this mode (referred to as mode B) is displayed, it suggests that the set value is likely to be "6".

FIG. 58(a-3) shows a "big prize opening non-ball-entering effect" and a "specified area non-ball-entering effect" in which the characters "Sorry!!!" are displayed. When this aspect (referred to as aspect C) is displayed, it suggests that the set value is likely to be "6".

FIG. 58(a-4) shows a "big prize opening non-ball-entering effect" and a "specified area non-ball-entering effect" in which the characters "Sorry!!!!!!!" are displayed. When this aspect (referred to as aspect D) is displayed, it is suggested that the set value is definite.

These effects may be displayed both when the ball does not enter the big winning hole P751 and when the ball does not enter the specific area, or only one of them may be displayed.

In addition, when the set value is "1", the appearance ratios of mode A, mode B, mode C, and mode D are 90/100, 8/100, 2/100, and 0/100, respectively. When the value is "1", the appearance ratios of Aspect A, Aspect B, Aspect C, and Aspect D are 82/100, 10/100, 7/100, and 1/100, respectively. This rate of appearance is applied to both the "special area non-ball-entering effect" and the "specific area non-ball-entering effect", but as a modified example, the "specific area non-ball-entering effect" When the setting value is "6", the appearance rate of mode B, mode C, and mode D may be higher than that of "non-ball-entering performance". Further, as a further modified example, when the number of fluctuations in the low base state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), and the set value is "6", the appearance rate of mode C and mode D is increased. may be configured. Further, as a further modification, when the setting value of the small winning game C is "6" than the small winning game A or the small winning game B, the appearance rate of the mode B, the mode C, and the mode D becomes higher. may be configured as follows.

In this way, by suggesting the set value in the winning of the small win that triggers the big win game (small win V big win game), it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the game ball during the small win game (whether or not the ball enters). In addition, setting suggestion can be surely given at the time of winning a small prize by enabling setting suggestions in both the ``particular area non-ball entering performance'' and the ``large winning hole non-ball entering performance''.

Figure 59 is when reaching the time-saving limiter (during the 4th consecutive small hit V big hit in the high base state or during the big hit) and after reaching the time-saving limiter (after the 4th consecutive small hit V big hit or after the big hit in the high base state) ) shows the mode of production in the situation. After the time-saving limiter, the state always shifts to the low base state. By winning a small hit, the game property is switched to aim at shifting to a high base state. In addition, the second special symbol has a higher winning rate of the small winning game C than the first special symbol, and therefore the small winning V big winning game is easy to be executed, so the second special symbol is the main part of the game. means that there is a high possibility of Renso (high possibility of reaching the time-saving limiter).

FIG. 59(a) is an effect during execution of the jackpot end demonstration at the time of reaching the time-saving limiter (during the fourth consecutive small hit V jackpot or jackpot in the high base state). A very small '→' sign indicating an arrow is displayed on the upper right of the screen to notify that the current game situation should be right-handed (small win V big win game or big win game in progress). In addition, the text "Four sets completed!" is displayed as an effect to inform that the time saving limiter has been reached and the state will shift to the low base state.

FIG. 59 (b-1) is a big hit in a situation where one or more reserves related to the second special symbol remain when the time saving limiter is reached (during the fourth consecutive small hit V big hit or big hit in the high base state) This is an effect during execution of the end demonstration, and is an effect following FIG. 59(a). As described above, the second special symbol has a higher winning rate of the small winning game C than the first special symbol, and therefore the small winning V big winning game is likely to be executed. By executing the small win V big win game or the big win game in the hold, it can be expected to shift to the high base state again immediately after the shift to the low base state. Therefore, on the screen, after the small winning V big winning game or the big winning game currently being executed is finished, the hold related to the second special symbol is digested, and the possibility of moving to the high base state again immediately after moving to the low base state. The characters "next pullback challenge" are displayed, which is a production that suggests that there is a In FIG. 59 (b-2), the small winning V big winning game or the big winning game ends (the big winning end demo ends), and the state shifts to a low base state, and the remaining second special symbol is canceled. , and shows a situation where the second special symbol is fluctuating, and the variable display of the decorative symbols and simple symbols corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In addition, in FIG. 59(b-1), a very small "→" sign indicating an arrow is displayed on the upper right of the screen, and the current game situation indicates that the current game situation should be hit to the right (small win V during big win game or big win) is in play).

FIG. 59 (b-2) is when the time saving limiter is reached (during the fourth consecutive small hit V big hit or big hit in the high base state)

FIG. 59 (c-1) is a jackpot end demonstration in a situation where there is no hold related to the second special symbol when the time saving limiter is reached (during the fourth consecutive small hit V jackpot or jackpot in the high base state) This is an effect during the execution of , and is an effect following FIG. 59(a). Since the reservation related to the second special symbol does not remain, the reservation related to the second special symbol is digested after the end of the small winning V big winning game or the big winning game currently being executed, and immediately after the transition to the low base state again. There is no transition to the high base state. Therefore, the effect shown in FIG. 59(b-1) is not displayed, and a black background is displayed. FIG. 59(c-2) shows a situation where a small win V big win game or a big win game ends (a big win end demo ends), shifts to a low base state, and changes stop ( Decorative patterns and simple patterns are stopped and displayed with a combination of "357"). In addition, since there is no hold related to the second special symbol immediately after shifting to the low base state, in order to encourage the switching of the base state and the occurrence of the hold related to the first special symbol, "Let's hit left Display the characters "ne".

By configuring in this way, by varying the performance of the jackpot end demonstration depending on whether or not the second special symbol is held, an appropriate performance is executed according to the situation without making the player feel uncomfortable. can do.

In addition, when the time-saving limiter is reached (during the fourth consecutive small hit V jackpot in the high base state or during the jackpot), the jackpot end demonstration time is 20 seconds, but before reaching the time-saving limiter (continuous 1 in the high base state) The duration of the jackpot end demonstration is set to 5 seconds. By doing this, it is possible to smoothly progress the continuous state before reaching the time-saving limiter, and when reaching the time-saving limiter, it is possible to secure sufficient time to display "next pullback challenge".

As a modified example, when the time-saving limiter is reached (during the fourth consecutive small hit V big hit or big hit in the high base state), one or more reservations related to the second special symbol remain, and the winning lottery result of the reservation is a big hit. If it is scheduled to be, the characters "Big hit?" In addition, as a further modification, if the small winning V big winning game or the big winning game is never executed in the high base state that continues 99 times, if the hold related to the second special symbol remains in the 99th rotation, FIG. 59 ( b-1) and FIG. 59(b-2) are executed, and if the hold related to the second special symbol does not remain in the 99th rotation, the results of FIGS. 59(c-1) and 59(c-2) are executed. It may be configured to perform a production.

Here, in the seventh embodiment, there are three types of small winning games: small winning game A, small winning game B, and small winning game C. Any kind of small win during the variation of the special pattern (before stopping), for example, before the execution of the super ready-to-win effect or before the combination of decoration patterns (for example, "357" etc.) indicating the small win winning is displayed. It is configured to be able to execute a special performance that suggests to the player whether the game is scheduled to be executed. However, the player can set whether or not to execute this special effect (for example, when the upper button of the cross key is pressed and held for 2 seconds or more during fluctuation or while the fluctuation is stopped, the special effect can be executed. , and by pressing and holding the lower button of the cross key for two seconds or more, it is possible to set the state in which special effects can be executed). As a modification, the player can set the execution probability of the special effect instead of whether to execute the special effect (for example, during fluctuation or while the fluctuation is stopped, each time the up button of the cross key is pressed once, the special effect The execution probability may be increased by 10%, and the execution probability of the special effect may be decreased by 10% each time the lower button of the cross key is pressed.

More specifically, while the small winning game A is scheduled to be executed, a crescent moon mark is displayed on the screen while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is varying (before stopping). In addition, while the small winning game B is scheduled to be executed, a half-moon mark is displayed on the screen while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is varying (before stopping). In addition, while the small winning game C is scheduled to be executed, a full moon mark is displayed on the screen while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is varying (before stopping). Furthermore, a small winning game C is scheduled to be executed, a small winning V big winning game is executed by entering a specific area during the execution of the small winning game C, and a high base state after the execution of the small winning V big winning game is completed. , a full moon mark with a rabbit silhouette is displayed on the screen while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is varying (before stopping). Note that this special effect is preferably configured to be executable only in the low base state, but may also be configured to be executable in the high base state.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not a small winning game in which the ball is likely to enter the large winning opening P751 is scheduled to be executed when the small winning is won, and further whether the ball enters the specific area to shift to the high base state. In addition to being able to know in advance whether or not such advance notification is to be made, by allowing the player to select whether or not to execute such advance notification, the playability will be expanded more than ever.

FIG. 60 shows the time series of effects from the variable display of the first special symbol at the time of winning a small win to the execution of the small win game through the stop display in the low base state and the high base state. be.

FIG. 60(a-1) shows a situation in which the first special symbol is changing in the low base state, and the decorative and simple symbols are changing on the screen corresponding to the change of the first special symbol. After that, in FIG. 60(a-2), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a small winning symbol, and a combination of decorative symbols and a combination of simple symbols (for example, "357") corresponding thereto are displayed on the screen. This is a situation in which the display is stopped. After that, in FIG. 60(a-3), the characters "Aim at the attacker!" are displayed to prompt the player to shoot the game ball toward the big winning hole P751. In addition, a very small "→" sign indicating an arrow is displayed on the upper right of the screen to notify that the current game situation should be to the right (during a small winning game). After that, in FIG. 60(a-4) after the game ball enters the big winning hole P751, the player receives the first distribution member P900A and the first distribution member P900A in the same manner as in FIG. Effect to incite whether the ball finally enters the specific area via the second distribution member P900B (effect indicating that the game ball is staying in the first distribution member P900A or the second distribution member P900B) , the text "Croon breakthrough challenge" is displayed. In addition, a very small "→" sign indicating an arrow is displayed on the upper right of the screen to notify that the current game situation should be to the right (during a small winning game).

FIG. 60(b-1) shows a situation in which the first special symbol is fluctuating in the high base state. Do not show). This is because, in the high base state, it is easy for a ball to enter the second start winning hole P721 and it is easy to win a small hit with respect to the second special pattern, so winning a small hit or a big hit with a decorative pattern is easy. This is because there is little need for directing the game, and giving priority to smooth game progress is more suitable for a continuous game state in which special games are continuously executed. In addition, a very small "→" sign indicating an arrow is displayed on the upper right of the screen to notify that the current game situation is to hit to the right (during a high base state). After that, in FIG. 60(b-2), the first special symbol is stopped as a small winning symbol, and the corresponding simple symbol combination (for example, "357") is stopped and displayed on the screen. situation. In addition, a very small "→" sign indicating an arrow is displayed on the upper right of the screen to notify that the current game situation is to hit to the right (during a high base state). After that, in FIG. 60(b-3), the characters "Aim for the attacker!" It is notified that it is in a situation to hit right (in a small winning game and in a high base state). This is because, if the player is in a high base state, it is presumed that the player has already hit the right hand before winning the jackpot. This is because giving priority to the smooth progress of the game is more suitable for the continuous game state in which the special game is continuously executed. After that, in FIG. 60 (b-4) after the game ball enters the big winning hole P751, the character "Challenging to break through the crew" is not displayed, and the arrow "→" is displayed at the upper right of the screen. The symbol is displayed in a very small size, and informs that the current game situation should be a right-handed game (during a small winning game and a high base state). This is because, in the high base state, the subject of the game is the second special symbol, so it is rare that the small winning game related to the first special symbol is executed in the high base state, so the second special symbol. In order to prevent it from being misidentified as a small hit game related to, the characters "Challenging to break through the croon" are used to prevent it from being directed.

FIG. 61(a-1) shows a situation in which the second special symbol is changing in the low base state, and the screen shows a simple pattern being changed corresponding to the change of the second special pattern (the decorative pattern is Do not show). This is because it is difficult to enter the second start winning hole P721 in the low base state and the main part of the game is the first special symbol, so it is rare that the second special symbol fluctuates in the low base state. Since it is an event, in order to prevent it from being misidentified as the variable display of the first special pattern, the decoration pattern is not directed to win a small hit or a big hit. However, as described above, after reaching the time-saving limiter (during or after the fourth small hit V big hit in the high base state or after the big hit), if the remaining second special symbol has been held, Decorative patterns are also displayed (varied). After that, in FIG. 61(a-2), the second special symbol is stopped as a small winning symbol, and the corresponding simple symbol combination (for example, "357") is stopped and displayed on the screen. situation. After that, in FIG. 61(a-3), the characters "Aim at the attacker!" are displayed to prompt the player to shoot the game ball toward the big winning hole P751. In addition, a very small "→" sign indicating an arrow is displayed on the upper right of the screen to notify that the current game situation should be to the right (during a small winning game). After that, in FIG. 61 (a-4) after the game ball has entered the big winning hole P751, the first distribution member P900A and the first distribution member P900A are provided to the player as in FIG. 57 (a-1). Effect to incite whether the ball finally enters the specific area via the second distribution member P900B (effect indicating that the game ball is staying in the first distribution member P900A or the second distribution member P900B) , the text "Croon Breakthrough Challenge" is displayed. In addition, a very small "→" sign indicating an arrow is displayed on the upper right of the screen to notify that the current game situation should be to the right (during a small winning game).

FIG. 61(b-1) shows a situation in which the second special symbol is fluctuating in the high base state. Do not show). This is because, in the high base state, it is easy for a ball to enter the second start winning hole P721 and it is easy to win a small hit with respect to the second special pattern, so winning a small hit or a big hit with a decorative pattern is easy. This is because there is little need for directing the game, and giving priority to smooth game progress is more suitable for a continuous game state in which special games are continuously executed. In addition, a very small "→" sign indicating an arrow is displayed on the upper right of the screen to notify that the current game situation is to hit to the right (during a high base state). After that, in FIG. 61(b-2), the second special symbol is stopped as a small winning symbol, and the corresponding simple symbol combination (for example, "357") is stopped and displayed on the screen. situation. In addition, a very small "→" sign indicating an arrow is displayed on the upper right of the screen to notify that the current game situation is to hit to the right (during a high base state). After that, in FIG. 61(b-3), the characters "Aim at the attacker!" are displayed to prompt the player to shoot the game ball toward the big winning hole P751. As a result, in the small winning game related to the second special symbol, which is the main part of the game in the high base state, by urging the player to surely enter the ball into the big winning hole P751, it is possible to prevent the continuous state from being prolonged. are preventing. After that, in FIG. 61 (b-4) after the game ball enters the big winning hole P751, the character "Challenging to break through the crew" is not displayed, and the arrow "→" is displayed at the upper right of the screen. The symbol is displayed in a very small size, and informs that the current game situation should be a right-handed game (during a small winning game and a high base state). This is because, in the high-base state, giving priority to smooth game progress is more suitable for the continuous game state in which the special game is continuously executed (especially, the second special symbol is the small winning game C is easy to execute, there is a high possibility that the ball will enter a specific area, and a smoother game progress can be expected). As a modified example, in order to realize a smoother progress of the game, in the situation of FIG. 61(b-3), the characters "Aim for the attacker!" may not be displayed. In addition, regardless of whether the low base state or high base state, and regardless of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, when the small winning game C is executed, the text "Aim for the attacker!" is always displayed. When the small winning game A or the small winning game B is executed, the small winning game A or the small winning game A or the small winning game executed by the winning or losing lottery result of the first special symbol becomes a small winning in the low base state. In the case of the game B, and in the case of the small winning game A or the small winning game B which is executed when the result of the lottery of the second special symbol becomes a small winning in the high base state, "Aim for the attacker!" While configured to display the characters, in the case of a small winning game A or a small winning game B that is executed when the result of the lottery of the first special symbol becomes a small win in the high base state, and the low base In the case of the small winning game A or the small winning game B which is executed when the result of the lottery of the second special symbol becomes a small winning in the state, the character "Aim at the attacker!" is configured not to be displayed. may

[Eighth embodiment]
As the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment to the seventh embodiment, the pachinko game machine P having various game characteristics has been described. An example of the eighth embodiment, in which the contents are further devised, will be described in detail only with respect to the underlying technology and the differences from the present embodiment, and the description of the common points will be omitted or simplified. Among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment, elements identical or corresponding to elements described in the base technology or the present embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals.

(board configuration)
First, the configuration of the board configuration (configuration of the game area) of the pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment will be described.

The pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment can be implemented with substantially the same board configuration as the premised pachinko game machine shown in FIG. Since the pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment employs the game characteristics (specs) described later, it is configured to include a specific area P760 inside the large winning opening (attacker) P751. It should be noted that as long as it is a change that does not change the game characteristics disclosed below (or a change that is only minor), a different board configuration may be adopted as appropriate.

(spec)
Next, the game performance (specifications) of the pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment will be described. In addition, in this explanation, regarding the "settings" (setting values) that affect the ball output performance, only the specifications related to "Setting 1" will be explained, but various numerical values related to other setting values are set as appropriate. is.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the eighth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, the probability of the winning lottery is 1/200 (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol), the small winning probability is 20/200 (the second special symbol). pattern only) is set. In addition, the number of prize balls is 4 balls for the first start prize opening (first start opening) P711, 3 balls for the second start prize opening (second start opening) P721, 3 balls for the left general prize opening P731L, and 3 balls for the right general prize opening. There are 2 winning openings P731R and 15 big winning openings (attackers) P751.

In addition, the pachinko machine P of the eighth embodiment employs ball entry order digestion control in which the ball entered first is preferentially digested, and both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are reserved. If it exists, priority is given to the suspension that occurred first, and the variable display is performed (regardless of whether the suspension is related to the first special symbol or the suspension related to the second special symbol, the suspension is digested in the order of occurrence). In addition, in the pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment, only the second special symbol is configured to have a "small hit" as a special symbol lottery result, but the first special symbol may be configured to have a "small hit". is also possible. It should be noted that, if the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine P of the eighth embodiment are not lost, not only the entering ball order digestion control but also the first special symbol priority digestion control may be applied as a modification, or the second special symbol priority digestion control may be applied. 2 Special symbol priority digestion control may be applied. In addition, in the external information output process, when outputting information (referred to as a high base signal) corresponding to the operating state (base state) of the electric chew support function as a signal related to the game state, when the high base state ends and the low base Even if it shifts to the state, if there is a hold related to the second special symbol, the output of the high base signal may be continued until all the holds related to the second special symbol are digested. In addition, in such a configuration, when the high base state is shifted to the low base state, there are two reserves related to the first special symbol and four reserves related to the second special symbol. , The order of digestion is "holding related to the second special design → holding related to the second special design → holding related to the first special design → holding related to the first special design → holding related to the second special design → second special design In the case of "suspension related to", (1) the output of the high base signal may be continued until all of these are digested, or (2) once the first special symbol is used after the suspension related to the second special symbol is digested. In the case where the suspension is digested, even if the suspension related to the second special symbol still remains, the output of the high base signal may be interrupted after the suspension related to the second special symbol is digested.

The pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment employs a game feature (spec) called "small win V" explained as the underlying technology, and in addition to the "big win" in the special symbol lottery, A "small win" is obtained in a special pattern lottery, and a game ball passes through a specific area P760 inside a big winning opening P751 (also referred to as an incoming ball) during a small win game to be executed thereafter. is activated and the jackpot game is executed. In the eighth embodiment, when a small winning game develops into a big winning game, a series of special game states from the start of the small winning game to the end of the big winning game are set to "small winning V" or "small winning development big winning". etc.

The types of jackpots (including small wins V) in the special game state in the pachinko gaming machine P of the eighth embodiment are 3R jackpots (first special symbol jackpots, second special symbol jackpots V) and 10R jackpots (second A special pattern big win and a second special pattern small win V) are provided. In addition, the pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment does not have a probability variation function for a specific game that is an advantageous normal game state, and after various big hits (including small win V), an electric chew support function (electric support) A specific game (high base state) is executed by activating the function.

In the pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, when a small hit is won in the winning lottery related to the second special symbol, the small winning symbols A to E are selected as the symbol lottery of the second special symbol. You will be elected to either. That is, when a small hit is won in the winning lottery related to the second special symbol, the stop mode of the second special symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol A (for example, 8 LEDs in the second special symbol display device P52 1, 2, 7, and 8 of them are lit and the others are turned off), a stop mode corresponding to the small hit symbol B (for example, out of the eight LEDs in the second special symbol display device P52 2nd, 3rd, 6th, 7th, 8th stop mode in which the others are turned off), stop mode corresponding to the small hit symbol C (for example, out of the eight LEDs in the second special symbol display device P52 3rd, 5th, and 7th are lit and the others are turned off), a stop mode corresponding to the small hit symbol D (for example, 1, 2, 8 out of the 8 LEDs in the second special symbol display device P52, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th stop mode in which the others are turned off), a stop mode corresponding to the small hit symbol E (for example, out of eight LEDs in the second special symbol display device P52 One of the stop modes in which the first one is lit and the others are not lit is stopped. When winning a small prize, the small prize symbols A to E are allocated to 10%, 30%, 30%, 15% and 15%.

Here, the small winning games executed by stopping the small winning symbols A to D (referred to as small winning games A to D) are the "V easy winning small winning games" as described above. A small winning game (referred to as a small winning game E) executed by stopping the small winning symbol E is a "small winning game in which V winning is difficult" as described above. In addition, the small hit V big hit game (referred to as small hit V big hit game A) when the ball enters the specific area in the small hit game A is a 3R big hit, and when the ball enters the specific area in the small hit game B The small hit V big hit game (referred to as the small hit V big hit game B) is 10R, and the small hit V big hit game (referred to as the small hit V big hit game C) when the ball enters the specific area in the small hit game C. is 3R, and the small-hit V big-hit game (referred to as the small-hit V-big-hit game D) when the ball enters the specific area in the small-hit game D is 10R. Although the small winning game E is a small winning game in which V winning is difficult, if the ball enters a specific area (the big winning in this case is called a small winning V big winning game E), it becomes a 3R big winning. Jackpot game (3R jackpot which is jackpot game A corresponding to jackpot pattern A in the first special pattern, 10R jackpot which is jackpot game B corresponding to jackpot pattern B in the second special pattern) and small hit V jackpot games A to D However, after the big win game which is the small win V big win game E is ended, the state may be changed to the low base state instead of the high base state. , jackpot games (3R jackpot, which is a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot pattern A in the first special pattern, 10R jackpot, which is a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot pattern B in the second special pattern) and small hit V jackpot games A to E It may be constructed such that the high base state is always entered after the end of a certain jackpot game.

FIG. 63 shows the game flow in the pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment. Here, the "normal mode" is a low base state, and the game progresses mainly with the first special symbol. "ST mode", "battle mode", "invincible battle mode", and "super invincible battle mode" are in a high base state (however, it occurs on hold during the high base state and immediately after the high base state ends, the low base state (Including symbol variation corresponding to the hold related to the second special symbol to be digested), and the game progresses mainly with the second special symbol. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the eighth embodiment, the condition for shifting from the high base state to the low base state is a prescribed number of symbol fluctuations (the second special symbol fluctuates 7 times or 255 times). Fluctuation, or 10 times of the first special symbol) and winning of a specified number of small hits (for example, small hit game A is executed once or 255 times, or small hit game B is executed once Or 255 times execution, or small winning game C is executed once, or small winning game D is executed once, or small winning game E is executed once or 7 times or 255 times) It's becoming

By hitting the jackpot with the first special symbol in the normal mode (Fig. 63(a)), after the jackpot game A is finished, the mode shifts to ST mode (Fig. 63(b)). Termination condition a, which is the termination condition of the high base state in the ST mode, is the following (a1) to (a9). It should be noted that the high base state does not end by satisfying all of (a1) to (a9), but the high base state ends by satisfying any one of (a1) to (a9).
(a1) The number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (the number of times that the loss fluctuation continues) is 7 times (a2) The number of executions of the small hit game A (the number of winnings of the small hit pattern A) is 1 time (a3) The small hit game B (a4) The number of executions of the small winning game C (the number of winnings of the small winning pattern A) is 1 (a5) The number of executions of the small winning game D (small winning The number of times winning symbol A) is 1 time (a6) The number of times the small winning game E is executed (the number of times winning the small winning symbol A) is 7 times, and the high base state is maintained for the 1st to 6th times (a7) 1st special The number of fluctuations in the pattern (the number of consecutive fluctuations of loss) is 10 times (a8) The big win game (either of the big win games A or B) is executed, but after the big win game or the small win V big win game is in a high base state (a9) The small winning V big winning game (any of the small winning V big winning games A to E) is executed, however, after the big winning game or the small winning V big winning game is completed, the transition to the high base state is made again.

In addition, when (a1) is satisfied, the end timing of the high base state is the timing at which the seventh symbol variation of the second special symbol is completed (the symbol stop timing, the timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time), When (a2) is satisfied, it is the timing when the pattern variation at which the small winning pattern A stops is finished (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the fixed design time), and when (a3) is satisfied, the small It is the timing (symbol stop timing, the timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time) when the symbol variation for stopping the winning symbol B is completed, and when (a4) is satisfied, the symbol variation for stopping the small winning symbol C is completed. Timing (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the fixed design time), and when (a5) is satisfied, the timing when the design variation at which the small hit design D stops (symbol stop timing, immediately before the start of the fixed design time) timing), and when (a6) is satisfied, it is the timing when the symbol variation at which the seventh small winning symbol E stops (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time), and (a7 ) is satisfied, it is the timing when the 10th symbol variation of the first special symbol is completed (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixing time), and when (a8) is satisfied, the jackpot symbol. It is the timing (symbol stop timing, the timing just before the start of the symbol fixed time) when the symbol variation in which A or B stops is completed. Here, in the case where (a9) is satisfied, the high base state is ended at the timing when the pattern variation in which the small winning patterns A to D are already stopped (the timing of the pattern stop, the timing just before the start of the fixed pattern time). Therefore, we omit it. From the above, in the ST mode, in any of the small winning games A to D, the high base state has ended at the start of the small winning game. In addition, the base state is the low base state when the opening/closing member P761 (valve member) is switched to the flow path leading to the specific area side. In addition, in the small hit game E, until reaching the specified number of times 7 times, the situation where the ball can be entered into the specific area (the large winning opening P751 is opened and the opening and closing member P761 (valve member) is guided to the specific area side The base state is a high base state in the situation where the flow path is switched to a flowing path), and after reaching the specified number of times of 7 times, the state where the ball can enter the specific area (the big winning hole P751 is open and the opening and closing member P761 ( The base state in the situation where the valve member) is switched to a flow path that guides to the specific area side is a low base state, but the small hit game E is a “small hit game that makes it difficult to win a V prize”, and is designed Since it is almost impossible to enter the specific area during execution of the small winning game E, there is no need to consider the base state in the small winning game E.

The ST mode is basically a high base state that continues until (a1) to (a9) are satisfied, but it occurs pending during this high base state, and immediately after the high base state ends, the state changes to a low base state. It is supplemented that the ST mode also applies during the symbol variation corresponding to the hold related to the second special symbol that is digested. Specifically, when (a1) is satisfied, if there are four reservations related to the second special symbol, ST mode even if the transition to the low base state is performed until all the four reservations are digested becomes. This is because, as will be described later, the mode that shifts to the second special symbol jackpot game or the small hit V jackpot game that is executed after being elected in the low base state is the high base state corresponding to the end condition a. Since it is common to the mode of shifting to the opportunity of the big win game related to the second special symbol and the small win V big win game executed by winning in , the suspension occurs during the high base state corresponding to the end condition a and the high base This is because it is preferable to set the same presentation mode as the high base state before the end even during the pattern fluctuation corresponding to the hold related to the second special pattern digested in the low base state immediately after the state is terminated. Therefore, if there is a hold related to the second special symbol that occurs in the high base state corresponding to the end condition a and is digested in the low base state immediately after the high base state ends, that hold is dealt with. After all the pattern fluctuations to be performed are executed as deviation fluctuations, the mode shifts to the normal mode (FIG. 63(d)). In addition, the symbol variation corresponding to the suspension related to the second special symbol, which occurs during the high base state corresponding to the end condition a and is digested in the low base state immediately after the high base state ends, is as described above. It may be produced as a rough change.

By making a big hit (including a small hit V big hit) in the first special pattern or the second special pattern in the ST mode (Fig. 63 (c)), after the big hit game (including a small hit V big hit game) is completed, the game shifts to the battle mode. (FIG. 63(e)), or transition to super invincible battle mode (FIG. 63(g)).

Specifically, when any of the small winning V big winning games A, B, C, and E is executed in the ST mode, the mode shifts to the battle mode, and the big winning game A or the big winning game B is executed in the ST mode, or , When the small win V big win game D is executed, the game shifts to a super invincible battle mode.

End conditions b, which are conditions for ending the high base state in the battle mode, are (b1) to (b9) below. It should be noted that the high base state does not end by satisfying all of (b1) to (b9), but the high base state ends by satisfying any one of (b1) to (b9).
(b1) The number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (the number of times that the loss fluctuation continues) is 255 times (b2) The number of executions of the small hit game A (the number of winnings of the small hit pattern A) is 1 time (b3) The small hit game B (b4) The number of executions of the small winning game C (the number of winnings of the small winning pattern A) is 1 time (b5) The number of executions of the small winning game D (small winning The number of winning times of symbol A) is 1 time (b6) The number of execution times of small winning game E (the number of winning times of small winning symbol A) is 1 time 10 times (b8) big hit game (either big hit game A or B) is executed, however, after the big win game or small win V big win game is over, it shifts to the high base state again (b9) small win V big win game (small Any of the winning V big winning games A to E) is executed, however, after the big winning game or the small winning V big winning game is completed, the high base state is shifted again.

In addition, when (b1) is satisfied, the end timing of the high base state is the timing at which the 255th symbol variation of the second special symbol is completed (the symbol stop timing, the timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time), When (b2) is satisfied, it is the timing when the pattern variation at which the small winning pattern A stops is finished (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the fixed design time), and when (b3) is satisfied, the small It is the timing (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixing time) when the symbol variation for stopping the winning symbol B is completed, and when (b4) is satisfied, the symbol variation for stopping the small winning symbol C is completed. Timing (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the fixed design time), and when (b5) is satisfied, the timing when the design variation at which the small winning design D stops (symbol stop timing, immediately before the start of the fixed design time) timing), and when (b6) is satisfied, it is the timing when the pattern variation at which the small winning pattern E stops is completed (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the design fixed time), and (b7) is satisfied. In this case, it is the timing at which the 10th symbol variation of the first special symbol is finished (the timing of symbol stop, the timing just before the start of the symbol fixing time), and when (b8) is satisfied, the jackpot symbol A or B. is the timing (symbol stop timing, timing just before the start of the symbol fixed time) when the symbol variation to stop is finished. Here, when (b9) is satisfied, the high base state is ended at the timing (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixing time) when the symbol variation in which the small winning symbols A to E are already stopped is completed. Therefore, we omit it. From the above, in the battle mode, in any of the small winning games A to E, the high base state has ended at the start of the small winning game, so the situation where it is possible to enter the specific area (the large winning opening P751 is open In addition, the base state is the low base state when the opening/closing member P761 (valve member) is switched to the flow path leading to the specific area side.

The battle mode is basically a high base state that continues until (b1) to (b9) are satisfied, but a pending occurrence occurs during this high base state, and immediately after the high base state ends, the state changes to a low base state. It is supplemented that the ST mode also applies during the symbol variation corresponding to the hold related to the second special symbol that is digested. Specifically, when (b1) is satisfied, if there are four reservations related to the second special symbol (in addition, the small hit is won first, or the small hit V big hit game is executed first (Because of this, it is almost impossible), and if there are 4 reservations related to the second special symbol when (b6) is satisfied, it is a low base until all 4 reservations are digested. Even if you shift to the state, it will be in battle mode. This is because, as will be described later, the mode that shifts to the second special symbol jackpot game or the small hit V jackpot game that is executed after being elected in the low base state is the high base state corresponding to the end condition b. Because it is common to the mode that shifts to the trigger of the big win game related to the second special symbol and the small win V big win game executed by winning in , the suspension occurs during the high base state corresponding to the end condition b and the high base This is because it is preferable to set the same presentation mode as the high base state before the end even during the pattern fluctuation corresponding to the hold related to the second special pattern digested in the low base state immediately after the state is terminated. Therefore, if there is a hold related to the second special symbol that occurs in the high base state corresponding to the end condition b and is digested in the low base state immediately after the high base state ends, that hold is dealt with. After all the pattern fluctuations to be performed are executed as deviation fluctuations, the game shifts to the normal mode (Fig. 63(i)). It should be noted that the symbol variation corresponding to the second special symbol that is suspended during the high base state corresponding to the end condition b and is digested in the low base state immediately after the high base state ends is as described above. It may be produced as a rough change.

Also, the termination condition c, which is the termination condition of the high base state in the super invincible battle mode, is the following (c1) to (c9). It should be noted that the high base state does not end by satisfying all of (c1) to (c9), but the high base state ends by satisfying any one of (c1) to (c9).
(c1) The number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (the number of times that the loss fluctuation continues) is 255 times (c2) The number of executions of the small winning game A (the number of winnings of the small winning symbol A) is 255 times, about the 1st to 254th times Maintains a high base state (c3) The number of executions of the small winning game B (the number of winnings of the small winning pattern A) is 255 times, and maintains the high base state for the 1st to 254th times (c4) Execution of the small winning game C The number of times (the number of winning times of the small winning pattern A) is 1 time (c5) The number of times the small winning game D is executed (the number of winning times of the small winning pattern A) is 1 time (c6) The number of times the small winning game E is executed (the small winning pattern A Winning number of times) is 255 times, and the high base state is maintained for the 1st to 254th times (c7) The number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (the number of consecutive fluctuations) is 10 times (c8) Big hit game (jackpot game A , B) is executed, however, after the end of the big win game or the small win V big win game, it shifts again to the high base state (c9) small win V big win game (any of the small win V big win games A to E) However, after the big win game or the small win V big win game is over, it shifts to the high base state again.

In addition, when (c1) is satisfied, the end timing of the high base state is the timing at which the 255th symbol variation of the second special symbol is completed (the symbol stop timing, the timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time). When (c2) is satisfied, it is the timing (symbol stop timing, timing just before the start of the symbol fixing time) when the 255th small winning symbol A stops the symbol variation, and when (c3) is satisfied. is the timing at which the 255th small-hit design B stops the design variation (design stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the design fixed time), and when (c4) is satisfied, the small-hit design C stops. It is the timing when the symbol variation ends (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time), and when (c5) is satisfied, the timing when the symbol variation where the small winning symbol D stops (symbol stop timing , the timing just before the start of the fixed design time), and when (c6) is satisfied, the timing at which the 255th small hit design E stops the design variation (the timing of the stop of the design, the timing just before the start of the fixed design time) ), and when (c7) is satisfied, it is the timing (symbol stop timing, timing just before the start of the symbol fixed time) when the 10th symbol variation of the first special symbol is completed, and (c8) is satisfied. In the case, it is the timing (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time) when the symbol variation for stopping the big hit symbol A or B is completed. When (c9) is satisfied, from the above, in the super invincible battle mode, in both of the small winning games C and D, since the high base state has ended at the start of the small winning game, to the specific area The base state in a state in which a ball can be entered (a state in which the large winning opening P751 is open and the opening/closing member P761 (valve member) is switched to a flow path leading to a specific area) is a low base state. On the other hand, in the small winning games A, B, and E, until the specified number of times 255 is reached, the state where the ball can be entered into the specific area (the large winning opening P751 is opened and the opening/closing member P761 (valve member) is specified The base state is a high base state in the state where the flow path is switched to the area side), and after reaching the specified number of times 255, the state where the ball can be entered into the specific area (the large winning opening P751 is open and The base state in the state where the opening/closing member P761 (valve member) is switched to the flow path that guides to the specific area side) is a low base state (small hit game E is a "small hit game that makes V winning difficult", It is not necessary to consider the base state in the small winning game E since it is almost impossible to enter the specific area during the execution of the small winning game E from the design point of view).

The super invincible battle mode is basically a high base state that continues until (c1) to (c9) are satisfied, but a pending occurrence occurs during this high base state and a low base state immediately after the high base state ends. It should be supplemented that during the symbol variation corresponding to the hold related to the second special symbol digested in the state corresponds to the battle mode. Specifically, when (c1) is satisfied, if there are four reservations related to the second special symbol (in addition, the small hit is won first, or the small hit V big hit game is executed first ), and when (c4) and (c5) are satisfied and the game ball is not entered into the specific area, there are four reservations related to the second special symbol. In this case, it is preferable to enter the battle mode by transitioning to the low base state until all the four holds are consumed. In FIG. 63, it is not possible to shift to the normal mode by proceeding the game normally (the player continues hitting to the right so as not to lose the opportunity to enter the specific area). Since it cannot happen, the transition (route) from super invincible battle mode to normal mode is omitted.

When any of the small win V big win games A, B, C, and E is executed in the battle mode (Fig. 63(f)), the mode shifts again to the battle mode (Fig. 63(e)), and the big win game A in the battle mode. Alternatively, when the jackpot game B is executed, or the small hit V jackpot game D is executed (FIG. 63(f)), the game shifts to the super invincible battle mode (FIG. 63(g)). Also, when any one of the small win V big win games A, B, C, and E is executed in the battle mode (FIG. 63(f)), the mode shifts to the battle mode again (FIG. 63(e)), and the big win is won in the battle mode. When the game A or the jackpot game B is executed, or the small hit V jackpot game D is executed (FIG. 63(f)), the game shifts to the super invincible battle mode (FIG. 63(g)). Also, in the super-invincible battle mode, when the big-hit game A or the big-hit game B is executed, or any of the small-hit V big-hit games A, B, D, and E is executed (FIG. 63(h)), After moving to the invincible battle mode again (FIG. 63(g)) and executing the small win V big win game C (FIG. 63(h)), the game moves to the battle mode (FIG. 63(e)).

Further, the pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment is equipped with a "relief function". Specifically, after the end of the special game (after the small win V big win or after the big win game), when the fluctuation of the 600th rotation stops (when the symbol fixed time elapses), a “relief function” occurs (as a modification, a special A "relief function" may occur when 600 rotations have passed since the end of the high base state after the end of the game), so that the normal mode shifts to the invincible battle mode (FIG. 63(j)).

The end condition d, which is the condition for ending the high base state in the invincible battle mode, is (d1) to (d9) below. It should be noted that the high base state does not end by satisfying all of (d1) to (d9), but the high base state ends by satisfying any one of (d1) to (d9).
(d1) The number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (the number of times that the loss fluctuation continues) is 255 times (d2) The number of executions of the small hit game A (the number of winnings of the small hit pattern A) is 1 time (d3) The small hit game B The number of executions (number of winnings of small winning pattern A) is 1 time (d4) The number of executions of small winning game C (number of winnings of small winning pattern A) is 1 time (d5) The number of executions of small winning game D (small winning The number of times winning symbol A) is 1 time (d6) The number of times the small winning game E is executed (number of winning times of small winning symbol A) is 255 times, and the high base state is maintained for the 1st to 254th times (d7) First special The number of fluctuations in the pattern (the number of consecutive fluctuations of loss) is 10 times (d8) The big win game (either of the big win games A or B) is executed, but after the big win game or the small win V big win game is in a high base state (d9) Small win V big win game (any of small win V big win games A to E) is executed.

In addition, when (d1) is satisfied, the end timing of the high base state is the timing at which the 255th symbol variation of the second special symbol is completed (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time). When (d2) is satisfied, it is the timing when the design variation at which the small winning design A stops (design stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the design fixed time), and when (d3) is satisfied, the small It is the timing (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixation time) at which the symbol variation at which the winning symbol B stops ends, and when (d4) is satisfied, the symbol variation at which the small winning symbol C stops ends. Timing (symbol stop timing, timing just before the start of the fixed design time), and when (d5) is satisfied, the timing at which the design variation at which the small winning design D stops (symbol stop timing, immediately before the start of the fixed design time) timing), and when (d6) is satisfied, it is the timing when the 255th small winning symbol E stops the symbol variation (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time), and (d7 ) is satisfied, it is the timing at which the 10th symbol variation of the first special symbol is completed (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time), and when (d8) is satisfied, the jackpot symbol. It is the timing (symbol stop timing, the timing just before the start of the symbol fixed time) when the symbol variation in which A or B stops is completed. Here, when (d9) is satisfied, the high base state is terminated at the timing (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixing time) when the symbol variation in which the small winning symbols A to D are already stopped is completed. Therefore, we omit it. From the above, in the invincible battle mode, in any of the small winning games A to D, the high base state has ended at the start of the small winning game. The base state is the low base state when the valve is opened and the opening/closing member P761 (valve member) is switched to a flow-down path leading to the specific area side. In the small hit game E, until the specified number of times 255 is reached, a situation where the ball can be entered into the specific area (the large winning opening P751 is opened and the opening/closing member P761 (valve member) is guided to the specific area side The base state is a high base state in the situation where the flow path has been switched to a flowing path), and after reaching the specified number of 255 times, the state where the ball can enter the specific area (the big winning hole P751 is open and the opening and closing member P761 ( The base state in the situation where the valve member) is switched to a flow path that guides to the specific area side is a low base state, but the small hit game E is a “small hit game that makes it difficult to win a V prize”, and is designed Since it is almost impossible to enter the specific area during execution of the small winning game E, there is no need to consider the base state in the small winning game E.

The invincible battle mode is basically a high base state that continues until (d1) to (d9) are satisfied. It should be supplemented that it corresponds to the battle mode during the symbol variation corresponding to the hold related to the second special symbol that is digested in . Specifically, when (d1) is satisfied, if there are four reservations related to the second special symbol (in addition, the small hit is won first, or the small hit V big hit game is executed first (d4) and (d5) are satisfied and the game ball is not entered into the specific area, there are four reservations related to the second special symbol In this case, it is preferable to enter the battle mode by transitioning to the low base state until all the four holds are consumed. In FIG. 63, it is not possible to shift to the normal mode by proceeding the game normally (the player continues hitting to the right so as not to lose the opportunity to enter the specific area). Since it cannot happen, the transition (route) from invincible battle mode to normal mode is omitted.

FIG. 64 shows the end condition of the high base state set after the end of the jackpot game. It should be noted that the termination condition c when the "relief function" is activated is omitted in FIG.

In FIG. 64 (a-1) and (a-2), regarding the end condition of the high base state that shifts after the end of the big win game (part of the end conditions a to d described above), the game state immediately before the start of the big win (in other words If so, it shows what end condition is set according to the game state at the start of the big win variation) and the big win game type (whether it is a big win pattern A or B).

FIG. 64(a-1) shows that when the big winning game A or B is executed by starting the fluctuation in the low base state and then stopping at the big winning pattern A or B, the big winning game A or B ends. After the big win game A ends, the end condition a is set (shift to ST mode), and after the big win game ends, the end condition c is set (super invincible battle). mode).

FIG. 64(a-2) shows that when the big winning game A or B is executed by starting the fluctuation in the high base state and stopping at the big winning pattern A or B, the big winning game A or B ends. It shows the end condition of the high base state that shifts later, and after the big win game A ends, the end condition c is set (transition to the super invincible battle mode), and the end condition c is set even after the big win game ends (super transition to invincible battle mode).

In FIG. 64 (b-1) and (b-2), regarding the end conditions of the high base state that shifts after the end of the small win V big win game (part of the end conditions a to d described above), the entry into the specific area Depending on the game state (in other words, the game state at the start of the small winning game) and the small winning game type (any of the small winning symbols A to E) just before the ball (just before the V winning), what end condition is set.

In FIG. 64 (b-1), after starting fluctuation in the low base state or high base state, any one of the small winning symbols A to E stops, and any one of the small winning games A to E in the low base state. is executed, and when a ball enters a specific area during execution of the small winning games A to E (in FIG. 64, it is expressed as “small winning game A → big winning game”, etc., but this is (synonymous with jackpot game A, etc.), and after finishing the small win V jackpot game A, the end condition b is set (shifted to battle mode), and the small win V jackpot is set. After the end of the game B, the end condition b is set (transition to the battle mode), after the end of the small win V big win game C the end condition b is set (transition to the battle mode), and after the end of the small win V big win game D indicates that end condition c is set (transition to super invincible battle mode). It should be noted that the small winning game E is "a small winning game that makes it difficult to win a V prize", and it is almost impossible to enter a specific area during the execution of the small winning game E from the design point of view, so the small winning V big winning Although the base state after the end of game E is not shown in FIG. 64 ("-"), end condition b or end condition c may be set.

In FIG. 64 (b-2), after starting fluctuation in the low base state or high base state, any one of the small winning symbols A to E stops, and any one of the small winning games A to E in the high base state. is executed, and when a ball enters a specific area during execution of the small winning games A to E (in FIG. 64, it is expressed as “small winning game A → big winning game”, etc., but this is (synonymous with jackpot game A, etc.), and after finishing the small win V jackpot game A, the end condition b is set (shifted to battle mode), and the small win V jackpot is set. It indicates that the end condition b is set after the game B ends (the game shifts to the battle mode). In addition, as described above, the small winning game C and the small winning game D are not in the high base state during execution of the small winning game, so in FIG. Further, the small winning game E is "a small winning game that makes it difficult to win a V prize", and it is almost impossible to enter the specific area during the execution of the small winning game E from the design point of view, so the small winning V big winning Although the base state after the end of game E is not shown in FIG. 64 ("-"), end condition b or end condition c may be set.

The pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment is configured as described above, so that even if the high base state is the same, the completion conditions of the high base state are made different, thereby realizing various game properties. can be done. Specifically, the small winning game D is always in a low base state when entering a specific area regardless of the base state at the time of winning the small winning symbol D (at the start of fluctuation), and after that, the end condition of the high base state The end condition c is set as In addition, in the small winning games A and B, even if the base state at the time of winning the small winning symbols A and B (at the start of fluctuation) is a high base state, when the ball enters a specific area, it always becomes a low base state and a high base state. In the case of the base state (fluctuation of the first small hit symbol A. B winning when the end conditions a, b, d are set, or the 255th small win symbol A when the end condition c is set , B because the fluctuation of winning B is shifted to a low base state when the fluctuation stops), and if the ball is in a low base state when entering a specific area, the end condition b is set as the end condition for the high base state after that. If the ball is in the high base state when the ball enters the specific area, then the end condition c is set as the end condition of the high base state. Furthermore, the small winning game D is always in a low base state when the ball enters the specific area regardless of the base state at the time of winning the small winning pattern D (at the start of fluctuation), and after that, the high base state is ended. b is set. Since these small winning games A to D are easy to win V prizes, the player can almost win the small winning V big winning. In addition, a small win game E (win of a small win pattern E) that makes it difficult to win a V prize in a high base state, that is, a small win that makes it almost impossible for a player to win a small win V big win. With the game as a trigger, when the high base state is maintained and when it shifts to the low base state (change in the seventh small winning symbol E winning when the end condition a is set, or when the end condition b is set For the fluctuation of the 1st small winning symbol E winning at the time of , or the fluctuation of the 255th small winning symbol E winning when the end conditions c and d are set, the fluctuation is stopped and the state is shifted to the low base state. ) can be realized.

More specifically, in the "ST mode", while the second special symbol fluctuates seven times, by stopping the jackpot pattern or the small hit pattern (small hit patterns A to D), the big hit game or the small hit It is possible to realize the game property of whether or not the V jackpot game can be obtained. In the "battle mode", it is possible to almost certainly win a big hit pattern or a small hit pattern (small hit patterns A to E) before the second special pattern changes 255 times. Whether or not to win the big winning pattern or the small winning patterns A to D (the small winning patterns corresponding to the small winning game in which V is easy to win) before winning the small winning pattern corresponding to the small winning game in which it is difficult to win It is possible to realize the playability. In addition, in the "invincible battle mode", until the second special pattern fluctuates 255 times or until the small winning pattern E is elected 255 times, the big winning pattern or the small winning pattern (small winning patterns A to D) will almost certainly Since it is possible to win a prize, it is possible to realize a game property that a big win game or a small win V big win game can be obtained almost certainly. Furthermore, when the small winning pattern D is won in the "ST mode", the "battle mode", or the "invincible battle mode", and then the small winning V big winning game D is executed, after the small winning V big winning game D is completed, " Move to Super Invincible Battle Mode. In this "super invincible battle mode", until the second special pattern fluctuates 255 times or until the small winning pattern E is elected 255 times, the jackpot pattern or small winning pattern (small winning patterns A to D) will almost certainly Since the game can be won, it is possible to realize the game property that the big win game or the small win V big win game can be obtained almost certainly, and the big win games A and B are executed and the small win pattern A is won. In the execution of the small winning V big winning game A, the execution of the small winning V big winning game B by winning the small winning pattern B, and the execution of the small winning V big winning game D by winning the small winning pattern D, then again. It is possible to realize the game property of shifting to the "super invincible battle mode" (in other words, unless the small hit V jackpot game C is executed by winning the small hit pattern C, the number of fluctuations and the small Except for the number of times the winning symbol E is won, it is possible to realize the game property that the "super invincible battle mode" loops).

FIG. 65 shows an example of an effect in ST mode. In FIG. 65(a), the variable display of decorative patterns and simple patterns corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern is made, and a very small "→" sign indicating an arrow is displayed on the upper right of the screen. It is notified that the game situation of is a situation to hit to the right (during high base state). In addition, by displaying "Find the treasure within 7 spins!" I am reporting. Next, in FIG. 65(b), the decorative symbols and simple symbols corresponding to the stopped display of the variation of the second special symbol won in any of the small winning symbols A to C are displayed. Both simple symbols are displayed as "666". One treasure box is displayed (not shown) at the timing (during fluctuation) before "666" is stopped and displayed, and then "Treasure found! Battle mode GET!" Any one of A to C has been won, and the small winning V big winning game is executed by making the ball enter the specific area in the small winning game to be executed after this, and the battle mode is performed after the small winning V big winning game is finished. It suggests or informs the player that it will shift to Next, in FIG. 65(c), the decorative symbols and simple symbols corresponding to the stop display of the variation of the second special symbol that wins either the small winning symbol D or the big winning symbol B are stopped and displayed. Both the symbol and the simple symbol are displayed as "777". By displaying 5 treasure chests (not shown) at the timing (during fluctuation) before "777" stops displaying, and then displaying "Treasure super large amount found! Super invincible battle mode GET!" , either the small winning symbol D or the big winning symbol B is won, and the small winning V big winning game is executed by making the ball enter the specific area in the small winning game executed after this, and the small winning V big winning game is executed. The player is suggested or notified to shift to the super-invincible battle mode after the end of or to shift to the super-invincible battle mode after the jackpot game ends. Next, in FIG. 65(d), the decorative symbols and the simple symbols are stopped corresponding to the stop display of the second special symbol on the 7th rotation in the ST mode. is displayed. A mouse is displayed (not shown) at a timing (during fluctuation) before "323" is stopped and displayed, and then a message "No treasure found...return to normal mode..." is displayed. Thus, the player is suggested or informed that the big winning symbol B or the small winning symbols A to D were not won during the ST mode and that the player should return to the normal mode.

It should be noted that the ST mode shifts after the execution of the big hit game A executed when the winning lottery of the first special symbol in the low base state becomes a big hit, so immediately after the shift to the ST mode, the reservation related to the first special symbol exists (remains), but in order to be able to smoothly move to the game centered on the second special symbol, the winning lottery related to the holding related to the existing first special symbol is lost. , it is desirable to set the variation time to be extremely short (eg, uniform deviation variation is 1 second, average deviation variation is 2 seconds, etc.).

FIG. 66 shows an example of effects in the battle mode. In FIG. 66(a), the variable display of decorative patterns and simple patterns corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern is made, and a very small "→" sign indicating an arrow is displayed on the upper right of the screen. is informing that the game situation should be to the right (during the high base state). In addition, by displaying "Continue until you encounter an enemy!" In addition, it suggests or informs the player that the game does not shift to the normal mode until the small winning symbol E is won. Next, in FIG. 66(b), the decorative symbols and simple symbols corresponding to the stopped display of the variation of the second special symbol won in any of the small winning symbols A to C are displayed, and the decorative symbols and Both simple symbols are displayed as "666". At the timing (during fluctuation) before "666" is stopped and displayed, a victory effect is displayed in which the ally character counterattacks and wins while being attacked by the enemy character in the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character. (not shown), and then display "Defeat! Continuing battle mode!" A small winning V big winning game is executed by making the player enter the ball, and the player is suggested or notified to shift to a battle mode after finishing the small winning V big winning game. Next, in FIG. 66(c), the decorative symbols and simple symbols are stopped and displayed in response to the stopped display of the variation of the second special symbol in which either the small winning symbol D or the big winning symbol B is won. Both the symbol and the simple symbol are displayed as "777". At the timing (during fluctuation) before "777" is stopped and displayed, a victory effect is displayed in which the enemy character overwhelms and wins in the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character ( (not shown), and then display "Complete victory! Super invincible battle mode GET!" A small winning V big winning game is executed by making the ball enter the specific area, and after the small winning V big winning game is completed, the mode is shifted to the super-invincible battle mode, or after the big winning game is completed, the mode is shifted to the super-invincible battle mode. is suggested or notified to the player. Next, in FIG. 66(d), the decorative symbols and simple symbols are displayed in a stopped state corresponding to the stopped display of the variation of the second special symbol that won the small winning symbol E. ” is displayed. At a timing (while fluctuating) before "323" is stopped and displayed, a defeat effect is displayed in which the friendly character is attacked by the enemy character and defeated in the battle effect between the friendly character and the enemy character (not shown). After that, by displaying "defeat...return to normal mode...", the player has won the small winning pattern E, and the player is suggested to shift to the normal mode after this. I am reporting.

In addition, the battle mode is performed after the execution of the jackpot game A, which is executed when the winning lottery for the first special symbol in the high base state becomes a big hit, or after the execution of the second special symbol in the low base state or the high base state. After the execution of the big win game B executed when the lottery becomes a big win, or during the small win game executed when the win/loss lottery of the second special symbol in the low base state or high base state becomes a small win. Since the transition is made after the execution of the small winning V big winning games A, B, and C executed by entering a ball in the specific area is completed, and since the battle mode is entered via the ST mode, the order of entering the ball is processed. In the pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment that employs control, there is no hold related to the first special symbol at the time of shifting to the battle mode (the player intentionally hits left). (Unless you enter the ball into the first start winning opening P711). Therefore, in order to call attention to smoothly progressing the game centered on the second special symbol in the battle mode (more specifically, despite the situation that should be hit to the right, the first start by hitting to the left If the ball enters the winning hole P711, the progress of the battle mode will be delayed due to the long-time fluctuation display of the first special symbol. (You will be careful not to repeat the game as you proceed), the loss fluctuation of the first special symbol during the battle mode has a very long fluctuation time (example: loss fluctuation is uniformly 300 seconds, loss fluctuation is preferably 90 seconds on average). At that time, instead of not producing a special production, for example, in the case of a 300-second deviation fluctuation, the first 270 seconds are a special production dedicated to long-term fluctuation that does not appear in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (for example, a friend character It is preferable to always execute the production of the ally character looking for the enemy character in the remaining 30 seconds (the production in which the enemy character is not found) without fail or with a high probability (for example, 75%). is. This presentation of the ally character searching for the enemy character is also executed during the second special symbol variation display in the battle mode, and the presentation of the ally character searching for the enemy character when the second special symbol is not changed. may be executed with a low probability (eg, 20%). In addition, the effect in which the ally character searches for the enemy character suggests or informs the player that if the enemy character is not found, the player loses, and if the enemy character is found, it suggests to the player that it is a big win or a small win. or notified. In addition, for example, in the case of a deviation fluctuation of 300 seconds, during the above-mentioned special effect, the remaining time display (for example, "remaining 270 A display in which the number of seconds is gradually subtracted from "seconds") may be displayed. It should be noted that during the battle mode, by operating the effect button P381 or the cross key P383, the player may have a specification that allows the player to arbitrarily select a song to be reproduced. , during the variation of the first special symbol and during the variation of the second special symbol, other than the "effect in which the friend character searches for the enemy character" and the "battle effect". Therefore, during the special effect, it is always possible to select a song, and although it fluctuates for a long time, it is devised so as not to bore the player. The variation time of the second special symbol during the battle mode is 120 seconds at the longest, and during the 120 seconds, either the "effect for the friendly character to search for the enemy character" or the "battle effect" is always executed. , only the first 20 seconds during which these effects are not executed is a period during which music can be selected.

FIG. 67 shows an example of an effect in the super invincible battle mode. In FIG. 67(a), the variable display of decorative patterns and simple patterns corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern is made, and the symbol "→" indicating an arrow is displayed very small at the upper right of the screen. It is notified that the game situation of is a situation to hit to the right (during high base state). In addition, by displaying the message "Continue until encountering an enemy! Furthermore, there is no loss!" ∼D), and suggests or informs the player that even if the small winning symbol E is won, the game does not shift to the normal mode. Next, in FIG. 67(b), the decorative symbols and the simple symbols are displayed in a stopped state corresponding to the stopped display of the variation of the second special symbol that won the small winning symbol C. ” is displayed. At the timing (during fluctuation) before "666" is stopped and displayed, a draw effect is created in which the friendly character counterattacks and draws while receiving an attack from the enemy character in the battle production between the friendly character and the enemy character. (not shown), and then display "Draw! Next time, battle mode!" In this way, the small winning V big winning game is executed, and the player is suggested or notified to shift to the battle mode after finishing the small winning V big winning game. Next, in FIG. 67(c), the decorative symbols and simple symbols corresponding to the stopped display of the variation of the second special symbol won in either the small winning symbols A, B, D or the big winning symbol B are stopped. "777" is displayed for both the decorative pattern and the simple pattern. At the timing (during fluctuation) before "777" is stopped and displayed, a victory effect is displayed in which the enemy character overwhelms and wins in the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character ( (not shown), after that, by displaying "Complete victory! Continuation of super invincible battle mode!" A small winning V big winning game is executed by causing a ball to enter a specific area in a winning game, and a shift to a super invincible battle mode after finishing the small winning V big winning game, or a super invincible battle mode after finishing the big winning game. It suggests or informs the player that it will shift to Next, in FIG. 67(d), the decorative symbols and the simple symbols are displayed in a stopped state corresponding to the stop display of the variation of the second special symbol that won the small winning symbol E. ” is displayed. In this case, there is no particular battle effect, and the effect is the same as when the lottery is lost (no effect). there is This suggests or informs the player that the player has lost or that the small winning symbol E has been won, and that the super invincible battle mode will continue after this.

FIG. 67 shows an example of an effect in the super invincible battle mode. In FIG. 67(a), the variable display of decorative patterns and simple patterns corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern is made, and the symbol "→" indicating an arrow is displayed very small at the upper right of the screen. It is notified that the game situation of is a situation to hit to the right (during high base state). In addition, by displaying the message "Continue until encountering an enemy! Furthermore, there is no loss!" ∼D), and suggests or informs the player that even if the small winning symbol E is won, the game does not shift to the normal mode. Next, in FIG. 67(b), the decorative symbols and the simple symbols are displayed in a stopped state corresponding to the stopped display of the variation of the second special symbol that won the small winning symbol C. ” is displayed. At the timing (during fluctuation) before "666" is stopped and displayed, a draw effect is created in which the friendly character counterattacks and draws while receiving an attack from the enemy character in the battle production between the friendly character and the enemy character. (not shown), and then display "Draw! Next time, battle mode!" In this way, the small winning V big winning game is executed, and the player is suggested or notified to shift to the battle mode after finishing the small winning V big winning game. Next, in FIG. 67(c), the decorative symbols and simple symbols corresponding to the stopped display of the variation of the second special symbol won in either the small winning symbols A, B, D or the big winning symbol B are stopped. "777" is displayed for both the decorative pattern and the simple pattern. At the timing (during fluctuation) before "777" is stopped and displayed, a victory effect is displayed in which the enemy character overwhelms and wins in the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character ( (not shown), after that, by displaying "Complete victory! Continuation of super invincible battle mode!" A small winning V big winning game is executed by causing a ball to enter a specific area in a winning game, and a shift to a super invincible battle mode after finishing the small winning V big winning game, or a super invincible battle mode after finishing the big winning game. It suggests or informs the player that it will shift to Next, in FIG. 67(d), the decorative symbols and the simple symbols are displayed in a stopped state corresponding to the stop display of the variation of the second special symbol that won the small winning symbol E. ” is displayed. In this case, there is no particular battle effect, and the effect is the same as when the lottery is lost (no effect). there is This suggests or informs the player that the player has lost or that the small winning symbol E has been won, and that the super invincible battle mode will continue after this.

FIG. 68 shows an example of an effect in the invincible battle mode. In FIG. 68(a), the variable display of decorative patterns and simple patterns corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern is made, and the symbol "→" indicating an arrow is displayed in a very small size on the upper right of the screen. is informing that the game situation should be to the right (during the high base state). In addition, by displaying the message "Continue until encountering an enemy! Furthermore, there is no loss!" ∼D), and suggests or informs the player that even if the small winning symbol E is won, the game does not shift to the normal mode. Next, in FIG. 68(b), the decorative symbols and simple symbols corresponding to the stopped display of the variation of the second special symbol won in one of the small winning symbols A to C are displayed, and the decorative symbols and Both simple symbols are displayed as "666". At the timing (during fluctuation) before "666" is stopped and displayed, a victory effect is displayed in which the ally character counterattacks and wins while being attacked by the enemy character in the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character. (not shown), and then display "Destroy! Next time, battle mode!" By making the ball enter the area, the small winning V big winning game is executed, and the player is suggested or notified to shift to the battle mode after finishing the small winning V big winning game. Next, in FIG. 68(c), the decorative symbols and simple symbols are stopped and displayed in response to the stopped display of the variation of the second special symbol in which either the small winning symbol D or the big winning symbol B is won. Both the symbol and the simple symbol are displayed as "777". At the timing (during fluctuation) before "777" is stopped and displayed, a victory effect is displayed in which the enemy character overwhelms and wins in the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character ( (not shown), and then display "Complete victory! Next time, super invincible battle mode!" The small winning V big winning game is executed by making the ball enter the specific area with the small winning V big winning game, and after the small winning V big winning game is completed, the transition is made to the super invincible battle mode, or after the big winning game is completed, the transition is made to the super invincible battle mode. This is suggested or notified to the player. Next, in FIG. 68(d), the decorative symbols and simple symbols are displayed in a stopped state corresponding to the stop display of the second special symbol won in the small winning symbol E. Both the decorative and simple symbols are "461 ” is displayed. In this case, there is no particular battle effect, and the effect is the same as when the lottery is lost (no effect). there is This suggests or informs the player that the player has lost or that the small winning symbol E has been won, and that the invincible battle mode will continue thereafter.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment, the hit fluctuation time of normal symbols in the high base state (including the fixed symbol time) is 2 seconds, and the normal electric accessory P770 is opened once for 3 seconds. (In addition, it will be closed forcibly by entering one ball). Furthermore, normally, regardless of whether it is in the low base state or the high base state, the design fixing time of the first special design and the second special design does not depend on the design type (whether it is a big winning design, a small winning design, or a winning design). It is set to 0.5 seconds uniformly, but in some situations, the design fixing time is a long time of 7 seconds. This partial situation is (1) If the 10th rotation of the first special symbol in ST mode, battle mode, invincible battle mode, or super invincible battle mode is a change, (2) the second special symbol in ST mode If the 7th rotation of the 7th rotation is a variation that the small hit symbol E is stopped and displayed, (3) if the 255th rotation of the second special symbol in the battle mode is a variation, (4) the second in the battle mode If the variation of the special symbol is a variation in which the small winning symbol E is stopped and displayed, (5) the 255th rotation of the second special symbol in the invincible battle mode/super invincible battle mode is lost or the small winning symbol E is stopped and displayed. If it is a variation, then it is. By configuring in this way, the fluctuation of the opportunity to shift from the high base state to the low base state (exactly speaking, the opportunity to shift from the high base state to the low base state other than winning a small winning game that is easy to win V ), the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol does not start until 7 seconds have passed since the transition to the low base state, that is, the second special symbol is the second special symbol for 7 seconds after the transition to the low base state The hold related to is not digested, and since it is already in a low base state during the design fixed time, which is 7 seconds, the hold related to the second special design is held up to the maximum number of holds (4). Even in the case of transition from the base state to the low base state, in the low base state, there is no event that one hold related to the second special symbol is digested and one new one is generated accordingly (for example, Even if the winning pattern of the normal pattern stops in the high base state immediately before the start of the pattern fixing time and the normal electric accessory P770 opens for 3 seconds, during the opening of the 3 seconds, it is in the low base state during the pattern fixing time. Therefore, even if the ball is entered into the normal electric accessory P770, the number of reservations related to the second special symbol is still the upper limit, so in the low base state, one reservation related to the second special symbol is digested and its An event such as one new occurrence does not occur).

[Ninth embodiment]
As the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment to the eighth embodiment, the pachinko game machine P having various game characteristics has been described. A ninth embodiment is an example of a ninth embodiment in which the contents are further devised. Hereinafter, only differences from the base technology and the present embodiment will be described in detail, and descriptions of common points will be omitted or simplified. Among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine P of the ninth embodiment, elements identical or corresponding to elements described in the base technology or the present embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals.

[9th-1 embodiment]
The pachinko game machine P in the 9-1 embodiment adopts the above-mentioned "small hit V" spec. The pachinko game machine P of the 9-1 embodiment has the following features.
(A) It has "hit" and "lose" as the result of lottery for the first special symbol.
(B) It has "hit", "minor hit", and "lose" as the result of lottery for the second special symbol.
(C) The probability of a big hit is 1/300 (not provided with a high probability state), the probability of a small hit is 299/300, the number of reserved first special symbols is 4, and the reserved second special symbol. The number is 1.
(D) "Second special symbol (special figure 2) priority digestion control" is adopted.
(E) A small winning game is a small winning game in which V winning is likely to occur in a specific area (there is no small winning game that makes V winning difficult). In other words, when a ball is entered into the big winning device P750 during execution of a small winning game, the ball entering the specific area becomes almost certain, and this triggers a big winning game (also called a small winning V big winning or a small winning V big winning game). ) is executed. Incidentally, the number of prize balls of the big winning device P750 is 10 balls, and the specified number (count) is 10 balls.
(F) As the types of jackpot games executed in the jackpot related to the first special symbol, there are jackpot game A and jackpot game B, and the ratio is 51:49. As the types of jackpot games executed in the jackpot related to the second special symbol, there are jackpot game C and jackpot game D, and the ratio is 50:50. As the type of the small-hit V big-hit game executed in the wake of the small-hit related to the second special symbol, a small-hit V big-hit game A (executed when a ball enters a specific area during the execution of the small-hit game A ) and a small win V big win game B (executed when a ball enters a specific area during execution of the small win game B), and the ratio is 50:50. Incidentally, the jackpot games A and B are 5R jackpot games, the jackpot games C and D are 10R jackpot games, and the small jackpot V jackpot games A and V jackpot games B are 10R jackpot games.
(G) has a low base state and a high base state; The big winning game A, the big winning game B, and the small winning V big winning game A shift to the high base state after the big winning game is finished. The big winning game B, the big winning game D, and the small winning V big winning game B shift to the low base state after the big winning game is finished. The high base state continues until the first special symbol fluctuates 10 times, or until the second special symbol fluctuates 255 times, or until the small win A or B is won once (small win V big win game A or small win V big win game B is executed and the ball does not enter the specific area, or shifts to a low base state before the start of the small win game A or small win game B).

FIG. 69 shows the game flow in the pachinko game machine P of the 9-1 embodiment. The "battle mode" is a mode corresponding to a high base state in which the first special symbol becomes a big hit in the low base state and the game shifts after the big win game A is executed. Immediately after the shift to the battle mode, the second special symbol is not changed, and the second special symbol is not held. Here, the normal electric accessory P770, which has become easy to enter, is opened to allow the ball to enter the second start winning opening P721, thereby starting the variation of the second special symbol (referred to as the variation). By entering the ball into the 2-start winning hole P721, one hold related to the second special symbol occurs (referred to as hold 1).

In the battle mode, if the variation is the variation that triggers the execution of the small winning game A and the hold 1 is also the suspension that triggers the execution of the small winning game A, or the variation is the trigger for executing the small winning game B If it is a change and the reservation 1 is a reservation that triggers the execution of the small winning game A, the small winning type of the holding 1 is pre-readed and determined during the small winning game executed during the fluctuation or after the fluctuation is stopped. (preliminary judgment), and based on the result of the look-ahead judgment (preliminary judgment result), during the execution of the small winning V big winning game A or the small winning V big winning game B that is executed after the change has stopped, the ally character An effect of winning the enemy character is displayed, and after execution of the small win V big win game A executed after the reservation 1 is completed, it is suggested or notified that the high base state will be resumed, that is, that the battle mode will continue. (FIGS. 69(a) and (b)).

In the battle mode, if the variation is the variation that triggers the execution of the small winning game B and the suspension 1 is also the suspension that triggers the execution of the small winning game B, it is executed during the variation or after the variation is stopped. Pre-reading judgment (pre-judgment) of the small-hit type of reservation 1 is performed during the small-hit game, and small-hit V big-hit game B is executed after the fluctuation stops based on the result of the pre-reading judgment (preliminary judgment result). During the execution of , an effect is displayed in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character, and after execution of the small win V big win game B executed after the suspension 1 is completed, the game shifts to a low base state, that is, the battle mode ends. Then, it is suggested or notified that the normal mode is a low base state and there is no hold related to the second special symbol (FIGS. 69(c) and (d)).

In the battle mode, when the variation is the variation that triggers the execution of the small winning game A and the suspension 1 is the suspension that triggers the execution of the small winning game B, it is executed during the variation or after the variation is stopped. Pre-reading judgment (pre-judgment) of the small-hit type of reservation 1 is performed during the small-hit game, and small-hit V big-hit game B is executed after the fluctuation stops based on the result of the pre-reading judgment (preliminary judgment result). During the execution of , an effect is displayed in which the ally character draws with the enemy character, and in the high base state in which Suspension 1 is being digested (fluctuating), the normal electric accessory P770 that has become easier to enter the ball is released. Thus, it is suggested or notified that a new second special symbol hold can be caused by making the ball enter the second start winning hole P721 again (FIG. 69(e)). After that, when the newly occurring hold related to the second special symbol is the hold that triggers the execution of the small winning game A, during the execution of the small winning V big winning game B executed after the holding 1 is completed, An effect in which the ally character wins over the enemy character is displayed, and after execution of the small win V big win game A which is executed after the suspension related to the newly generated second special symbol is digested, the system shifts to the high base state again, that is, , the continuation of the battle mode is suggested or notified (FIGS. 69(f) and (g)). On the other hand, when the newly generated hold related to the second special symbol is the hold that triggers the execution of the small winning game B, during the execution of the small winning V big winning game B executed after the holding 1 is completed, An effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is displayed, and after execution of the small win V big win game B which is executed after the suspension related to the newly generated second special symbol is digested, the system shifts to a low base state, that is, It is suggested or notified that the battle mode is over and the normal mode is in a low base state and there is no hold related to the second special symbol (FIGS. 69(h) and (i)).

By configuring as described above, the pachinko game machine P in the 9-1 embodiment can realize various effects according to the combination of the fluctuation in the high base state and the hold 1 (combination of small hit types) At the same time, it is possible to give a feeling of winning a ball (small win V big win game for two times) associated with the performance. In addition, the small-hit V big-hit game executed after the end of the variation is called "previous small-hit V-big-hit game", and the small-hit V-big-hit game executed after holding 1 is consumed is called "later small-hit V big-hit game". may be called.

FIG. 70 shows an example of the effect corresponding to the route of battle victory in the battle mode (the variation is the variation that triggers the execution of the small winning game A, and the suspension 1 is also the suspension that triggers the execution of the small winning game A. Production example) is shown.

First, the variable display of the decorative symbols and the simple symbols corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is made, and a very small "→" sign indicating an arrow is displayed on the upper right of the screen, and the current game situation is displayed on the right. It notifies that it is in a situation to hit (during high base state). In addition, an instruction display of "Charge!" is made, prompting to cause a hold related to the second special symbol. Here, the round image at the bottom right of the screen shows whether or not the change is executed (if it is blacked out, it indicates that the change is being executed), and the right one is A circle image indicates the presence or absence of suspension 1 (whether suspension or not) (filled in black indicates that suspension 1 has occurred) (FIG. 70(a)).

After that, the display of "charge complete!" indicating that the reservation 1 has occurred is made by the occurrence of the reservation 1, and the change is stopped after that, corresponding to the stop display of the change of the second special symbol. A decorative pattern and a simple pattern are stopped and displayed, and both the decorative pattern and the simple pattern are displayed as "6V6". After that, an instruction display "Aim for V!!!", which is an instruction display for instructing to shoot a game ball aiming at (the specific area of) the big winning hole P751, is displayed, and further, a small hit is achieved by entering the specific area. A message "preparing for battle bonus" indicating that the V jackpot game is to be executed is displayed (FIG. 70(b)).

After that, when a ball enters a specific area during execution of a small winning game, "battle bonus" indicating that a small winning V big winning game is executed is displayed, and the first round is started. At this point, the player wins or loses the battle (whether the small winning V big winning game scheduled to be executed by digesting the reservation 1 is the small winning V big winning game A or the small winning V big winning game B). Unknown. In addition, the role of the production performed during the execution of the small win V big win game (what kind of production should be displayed to give an advantage to the player) is indicated by "If you win, you win! Furthermore, continue the battle mode! is displayed (FIG. 70(c)).

After that, by progressing to the fifth round, it is notified that the battle has been won, and at the same time, the small winning V big winning game scheduled to be executed due to the completion of the reservation 1 is the small winning V big winning game A. , win bonus!" is displayed (FIG. 70(d)).

After that, when execution of the preceding small-win V big-hit game is completed, the system shifts to a high-base state, and when the reservation 1 is consumed, a small-win V big-hit game A is scheduled to be executed as a subsequent small-hit V big-hit game. A message "Waiting for winning bonus..." is displayed (Fig. 70(e)).

After that, the stop display of the decorative design and the simple design corresponding to the stop display of the change of the second special design is made by stopping the fluctuation accompanying the digestion of the reservation 1, and both the decorative design and the simple design are "3V3". is displayed. After that, an instruction display "Aim for V!!!", which is an instruction display for instructing to shoot a game ball aiming at (the specific area of) the big winning hole P751, is displayed, and further, a small hit is achieved by entering the specific area. A message "Preparing for a winning bonus!" is displayed to indicate that the V jackpot game A will be executed (FIG. 70(f)).

After that, by entering a ball in a specific area during execution of a small winning game, a display of ``victory bonus'' indicating that a small winning V big winning game A is executed is made, and the first round is started. In addition, after the end of the small win V big win game A, a display of "Continue battle mode after bonus" is displayed to indicate that the state will shift to the high base state again, that is, that the battle mode will continue (FIG. 70(g)). . After that, during the jackpot end demonstration of the small win V big win game A, after the small win V big win game A ends, the state shifts to the high base state again, that is, "Continue battle mode!!!" indicating that the battle mode continues. is displayed (FIG. 70(h)).

FIG. 71 is an example of production corresponding to the route of battle defeat in the battle mode (the variation is the variation that triggers the execution of the small winning game B and the suspension 1 is also the suspension that triggers the execution of the small winning game B. Production example) is shown. Note that FIGS. 71(a) to (c) are the same as FIGS. 70(a) to (c), so description thereof will be omitted.

After FIG. 71(c), by proceeding to the 5th round, it is notified that the battle has been defeated, and at the same time, the small winning V big winning game scheduled to be executed due to the digestion of the reservation 1 is the small winning V big winning game B. A message "next time, defeat bonus" is displayed (FIG. 71(d)).

After that, when execution of the preceding small-win V big-hit game is completed, the system shifts to a high-base state, and by canceling the reservation 1, a small-win V-big-hit game B is scheduled to be executed as a subsequent small-hit V big-hit game. A message "Waiting for defeat bonus..." is displayed (Fig. 71(e)).

After that, the stop display of the decorative design and the simple design corresponding to the stop display of the change of the second special design is made by stopping the fluctuation accompanying the digestion of the reservation 1, and both the decorative design and the simple design are "4V4". is displayed. After that, an instruction display "Aim for V", which is an instruction display for instructing to shoot a game ball aiming at (the specific area of) the big winning hole P751, and furthermore, by entering the specific area, a small hit V jackpot game is played. A message "Preparing for defeat bonus" is displayed to indicate that B will be executed (FIG. 71(f)).

After that, a ``defeat bonus'' indicating that a small win V big win game B is executed is displayed by entering a ball in a specific area during execution of the small win game, and the first round is started. In addition, after the end of the small win V big win game B, the system shifts to the low base state, that is, the message "After the bonus, normal mode..." is displayed to indicate that the battle mode ends and shifts to the normal mode. (FIG. 71(g)). After that, during the jackpot end demonstration of the small win V big win game B, after the small win V big win game B ends, the state shifts to a low base state. End... to normal mode" is displayed (Fig. 71(h)).

FIG. 72 is a production example corresponding to the route of the battle draw in the battle mode (the route of the final battle) (the variation is the variation that triggers the execution of the small winning game A, and the suspension 1 is the execution trigger of the small winning game B Shows an example of production in the case of a pending hold). Note that FIG. 72(a) is the same as FIG. 70(c) following FIGS. 70(a) to 70(b), so description thereof will be omitted.

After FIG. 72(b), by proceeding to the 5th round, it is reported that the battle was a draw, and at the same time Suspension 1 is digested in a high base state (suspended in a high base state 1), that is, the previous small hit V big hit game is the small hit V big hit game A, and the later small hit V big hit game is the small hit V. A display of "next time, final battle mode" indicating that it is a jackpot game B is made (FIG. 72(b)).

After that, during the big win end demonstration of the previous small win V big win game, the hold 1 is digested in the high base state (the second special symbol corresponding to the hold 1 is changed in the high base state). In other words, the previous small win V big win game is the small win V big win game A, and the later small win V big win game is the small win V big win game B. !” is displayed (FIG. 72(c)).

After that, the previous small win V big win game is completed, the state shifts to a high base state, and the reservation 1 is eliminated, so that an instruction display of "Charge again!" It prompts to cause a hold (Fig. 72(d)).

After that, a new hold related to the second special symbol occurs, so that the message "Charge complete!" A decorative pattern and a simple pattern corresponding to the display are stopped, and both the decorative pattern and the simple pattern are displayed as "6V6". After that, an instruction display "Aim for V!!!", which is an instruction display for instructing to shoot a game ball aiming at (the specific area of) the big winning hole P751, is displayed, and further, a small hit is achieved by entering the specific area. A message "preparing for the final battle bonus" indicating that the V jackpot game is to be executed is displayed (Fig. 72(e)).

After that, by entering a ball in a specific area during execution of a small winning game, a display of 'final battle bonus' indicating execution of a small winning V big winning game is made, and the first round is started. At this point, whether the player wins or loses the battle (by digesting the hold related to the new second special symbol, the small winning V big winning game scheduled to be executed is the small winning V big winning game A or the small winning V big winning) It is unknown whether it is game B). In addition, the role of the production performed during the execution of the small win V big win game (what kind of production should be displayed to give an advantage to the player) is indicated by "If you win, you win! Furthermore, continue the battle mode! is displayed (FIG. 72(f)).

After that, when the small winning V big winning game scheduled to be executed by the digestion of the hold related to the new second special symbol is the small winning V big winning game A, the fact that the battle is won is notified by proceeding to the fifth round. At the same time, a display of ``next win bonus! (FIG. 72(g-1)). On the other hand, if the minor winning V big winning game scheduled to be executed due to the digestion of the hold related to the new second special symbol is the small winning V big winning game B, it is reported that the battle has been defeated by proceeding to the 5th round. At the same time, a display of "next time, defeat bonus" indicating that the small winning V big winning game scheduled to be executed due to the digestion of the hold related to the new second special symbol is the small winning V big winning game B ( Figure 72 (g-2))

[9th-2 Example]
The pachinko game machine P in the 9-2 embodiment adopts the above-mentioned "small hit V" spec. The pachinko game machine P of the 9-2 embodiment has the following features.
(A) It has "hit" and "lose" as the result of lottery for the first special symbol.
(B) It has "hit", "minor hit", and "lose" as the result of lottery for the second special symbol.
(C) The probability of a big hit is 1/300 (not provided with a high probability state), the probability of a small hit is 299/300, the number of reserved first special symbols is 4, and the reserved second special symbol. The number is four.
(D) "Second special symbol (special figure 2) priority digestion control" is adopted.
(E) A small winning game is a small winning game in which V winning is likely to occur in a specific area (there is no small winning game that makes V winning difficult). In other words, when a ball is entered into the big winning device P750 during execution of a small winning game, the ball entering the specific area becomes almost certain, and this triggers a big winning game (also called a small winning V big winning or a small winning V big winning game). ) is executed. Incidentally, the number of prize balls of the big winning device P750 is 10 balls, and the specified number (count) is 10 balls.
(F) As the types of jackpot games executed in the jackpot related to the first special symbol, there are jackpot game A and jackpot game B, and the ratio is 51:49. As the types of the jackpot games executed in the jackpot related to the second special symbol, there are jackpot games C and jackpot games D, and the ratio is 25:75. As the type of the small-hit V big-hit game executed in the wake of the small-hit related to the second special symbol, the small-hit V big-hit game A (executed when there is a ball entering the specific area during the execution of the small-hit game A ) and a small win V big win game B (executed when a ball enters a specific area during execution of the small win game B), and the ratio is 25:75. Incidentally, the jackpot games A and B are 5R jackpot games, the jackpot games C and D are 5R jackpot games, and the small jackpot V jackpot game A and the jackpot V jackpot game B are 5R jackpot games.
(G) has a low base state and a high base state; The big winning game A, the big winning game B, and the small winning V big winning game A shift to the high base state after the big winning game is finished. The big winning game B, the big winning game D, and the small winning V big winning game B shift to the low base state after the big winning game is finished. The high base state continues until the first special symbol fluctuates ten times or until the second special symbol fluctuates once.

FIG. 73 shows the first half of the production example in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 9-2 embodiment, and FIG. 74 shows the second half of the production example in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 9-2 embodiment (FIG. 73 (h) continuation) is shown.

First, after the execution of the jackpot game A, which is executed when the winning lottery of the first special symbol in the low base state becomes a big hit, the state is shifted to the high base state, after which the second special symbol is variably displayed and the second special symbol is displayed. 2 In a situation where no hold related to the special design has occurred, the simple design is displayed in a variable display corresponding to the variable display of the second special design (decorative design is not displayed), and an arrow is displayed in the upper right of the screen. is displayed in a very small size, indicating that the current game situation should be a right-hand shot (during a high base state). In addition, an instruction display of "Charge!!!" is made, prompting to cause a hold related to the second special symbol. Here, among the round images at the bottom of the screen, the leftmost round image indicates whether or not the change (current change) is being executed (filled in black indicates that the change is being executed) box), and the other round images indicate whether or not the suspension related to the second special symbol occurs (whether or not the suspension occurs) (if it is blacked out, it indicates that the suspension has occurred). It should be noted that here, the variation is the variation that triggers the execution of the small winning game B, but the player is not suggested or informed of this at this time (FIG. 73(a)).

After that, when four holds related to the second special symbol occur, a message "Charging completed!" A simple symbol stop display corresponding to the symbol fluctuation stop display is performed, and "6V6" is displayed. Then, after the end of the variation, a message "Waiting for super bonus" is displayed to indicate that the small win V big win game will be executed. Here, the four retentions are referred to as retention 1, retention 2, retention 3, retention 4 in descending order of digestion. In this case, the reservations 1, 2, and 4 are the reservations that trigger the execution of the small winning game B, and the reservations 3 are the reservations that trigger the execution of the small winning game A. is not suggested or notified (FIG. 73(b)).

After that, after the variation is finished, a small winning game is executed, and an instruction display "Aim for V!!!" is displayed to instruct to shoot a game ball aiming at (the specific area of) the big winning opening P751. Further, a message "Preparing for a super bonus!" is displayed to indicate that a small win V big win game will be executed by entering a specific area (FIG. 73(c)).

After that, a small winning V big winning game is executed by entering a specific area, "super bonus" is displayed during the big winning start demonstration, and an image to the effect that 45 stars have been acquired is displayed. One star means one round, that is, it suggests or informs the player that 45 unit games are scheduled to be executed (Fig. 73(d)). In order to realize this notification mode, pre-reading judgment (pre-judgment) of the small hit type of holding 1 to 4 is performed during the fluctuation or during the small hit game executed after the fluctuation stops, and the result of the pre-reading judgment ( The notification mode is determined based on the result of prior judgment). In this production example, first, 5 rounds of the small winning V big winning game executed with the change as a trigger, 5 rounds of the small winning V big winning game executed with the digestion of Hold 1, and the digestion of Hold 2 are executed. 5 rounds of the small win V big win game to be executed as a trigger, and 5 rounds of the small win V big win game to be executed with the completion of the suspension 3, and 20 rounds are scheduled to be executed so far. It means that Then, since the small winning V big winning game executed with the completion of the hold 3 as a trigger is the small winning V big winning game A that triggers the transition to the high base state, after the small winning V big winning game A is finished, the game is executed again. Holds can be stored up to a maximum number. Therefore, 4 new reserves are accumulated during the digestion of the reserve 4 that is digested after the end of the small win V big win game A, so that the small win V big win game executed with the digestion of the reserve 4 as a trigger is 5. 4 rounds worth of small winning V big winning games executed with the consumption of 4 rounds worth of newly accumulated reserves is "5 rounds x 4 = 20 rounds worth", and the ball enters a specific area. Since there are parts that depend on the player's game progress, such as the presence or absence of hold occurrence, provisional values However, since it is clear at this point that a total of 45 rounds are scheduled to be executed, an image indicating that 45 stars have been obtained can be displayed. In addition, as a modification, an image for obtaining stars may be executed during variation or during a small winning game. Furthermore, instead of displaying an image to the effect that 45 stars have been obtained as in this production example, an image to the effect that 30 stars have been obtained is displayed, and then new changes and new small An image indicating that 15 coins have been acquired during the winning game or the new small winning V big winning game may be displayed. In other words, the number of rounds to be executed may be divided into a plurality of timings instead of all the number of rounds to be executed in one notification.

After that, the small winning V big winning game progresses. The number of stars obtained is always displayed, and the number of prize balls obtained during the small win V big win game is also cumulatively displayed (FIG. 73(e)). And, since the first small-hit V big-hit game was the small-hit V-big-hit game B, when the small-hit V big-hit game ends, the state shifts to the low base state. Then, by digesting hold 1 among hold 1 to 4, hold 2 before hold 1 digested becomes hold 1, hold 3 before hold 1 digested becomes hold 1, hold 4 before hold 1 digested Shift to Hold 3. In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol accompanying the digestion of hold 1 is performed (FIG. 73(f)). After that, the fluctuation is stopped, so that the simple symbol is stopped and displayed corresponding to the stopped display of the fluctuation of the second special symbol, and is displayed as "3V3". After that, a small winning game is executed, and an instruction display "Aim for V!!!", which is an instruction display for instructing to shoot a game ball aiming at (the specific area of) the big winning hole P751, is displayed in a small size (Fig. 73 ( g)). After that, the second small-hit V big-hit game starts (FIG. 73(h)).

After that, as before, execution of the second small-hit V big-hit game ends, and further execution of the third small-hit V big-hit game starts and ends (FIG. 74(i)). After that, in the same way as before, the holding digestion that triggers the fourth small winning V big winning game, and the execution of the fourth small winning V big winning game start and end (Fig. 74 (j), (k) , (l), (m)). Since the fourth small winning V big winning game is the small winning V big winning game A, the state shifts to the high base state after the small winning V big winning game ends. Therefore, it is possible to accumulate the hold related to the second special symbol to the upper limit again, and in order to suggest or notify that effect, a telop image of "Charge!" Circle images corresponding to the presence/absence of execution and the presence/absence of suspension 1 to 4 are also displayed again (FIG. 74(n)).

After that, when four holds relating to the second special symbol occur, a small message "Charging complete!" A stop display of simple symbols corresponding to the stop display of the variation of the special symbols is performed, and "6V6" is displayed (FIG. 74(o)). With regard to the reservations 1 to 4 reserved this time, the reservations 1, 3, and 4 are reservations that trigger the execution of the small winning game B, and the reservations 2 are reservations that trigger the execution of the small winning game A (reservation 2 In the digestion of the suspension 3 that is digested after the execution of the small win V big win game executed with the digestion as a trigger, only one suspension is accumulated, and three suspensions can be newly generated, “5 rounds x 3” will be additionally executed), during the 5th small win V jackpot game jackpot start demonstration, an image will be displayed indicating that 15 additional stars have been obtained, and the The number of stars in the image is updated from 45 to 60 (Fig. 74(p)).

By configuring as described above, the pachinko gaming machine P in the 9-1 embodiment is scheduled to execute a small winning V big winning game of the number exceeding the upper limit number (4 pieces) of holding related to the second special symbol It is possible to suggest or inform the player in advance that it is being done, and it is not known how long the round will continue (not knowing how many times the small win V big win game will be executed, all the reservations related to the second special symbol The small winning V big winning game continues until becomes the small winning V big winning game B).

[Tenth embodiment]
As the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment to the ninth embodiment, the pachinko game machine P having various game characteristics has been described. An example of a tenth embodiment in which the contents are further devised will be described below in detail only with respect to the underlying technology and the differences from the present embodiment, and descriptions of common points will be omitted or simplified. Among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine P of the tenth embodiment, elements identical or corresponding to elements described in the base technology or the present embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The pachinko game machine P in the tenth embodiment has a board configuration similar to that of FIG. 53, and adopts the specification of "small win rush". The pachinko game machine P of the tenth embodiment has the following features.
(A) "Hit" and "Loss" are included as the result of the lottery for the first special symbol.
(B) It has "hit", "minor hit", and "loss" as the result of lottery for the second special symbol.
(C) The jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/300, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/50, and the small win probability in the low and high probability states is 1/1.2.
(D) "Parallel control (parallel digestion)" is adopted.
(E) In the low-probability low base state, low-probability high-base state, and high-probability high base state, the game progresses mainly with the first special symbol. The variation time is relatively shorter than the second special symbol (the average variation time of the first special symbol is 20 seconds on average in the low probability low base state, and 3 on average in the low probability high base state and high probability high base state seconds, but the average duration of the second special symbol averages 10 minutes for the low-probability low base, low-probability high-base, and high-probability high-base conditions).
(F) In the high probability low base state, the game progresses mainly with the second special symbol, so in this game state, the second special symbol has a relatively shorter fluctuation time than the first special symbol ( The average fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 2 seconds on average in the high probability low base state, but the average time of the first special symbol is 5 minutes on average in the high probability low base state).
(G) As the jackpot pattern related to the first special pattern, the jackpot pattern A (10R probability variable jackpot), which triggers the transition to the high-probability low base state, is selected at 30%, and the probability-variable high hit pattern is selected until the next time. The jackpot pattern B (5R probability variable jackpot) that triggers the transition to the high-probability base state is selected at 30%, and the jackpot pattern C (5R normal jackpot) that triggers the transition to the low-probability high-base state of 100 spins is selected at 40%. is selected by
(H) As a jackpot pattern related to the second special pattern, it is a variable probability until the next time, and if it is won in the high probability low base state, it will be an opportunity to shift to the high probability low base state, and it will be won in the high probability high base state. In the case, the jackpot pattern D (10R probability variable jackpot) that triggers the transition to the high probability high base state is 60%, and the jackpot pattern E (10R normal jackpot) that triggers the transition to the low probability high base state of 100 rotations is 40%. is selected by

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine P in the tenth embodiment, when the jackpot pattern D is elected as the second special pattern (when the variation of the second special pattern with the jackpot pattern D starts), according to the base state. The feature is that the base state to be shifted after the execution of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol D is completed is different. Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine P in the tenth embodiment, according to the base state when the jackpot pattern D is won as the second special pattern (when the second special pattern in which the jackpot pattern D is won starts to change), The time between rounds (the closing time of the big winning opening P751 between round games) during execution of the big winning game corresponding to the big winning pattern D is configured to be different. Specifically, FIG. 75(a) shows the time between rounds of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot symbol D is won in the high-probability low base state, and is set to 1.5 seconds. On the other hand, FIG. 75(b) shows the time between rounds of the big win game executed when the big win symbol D is won in the high probability high base state, and is set to 3.5 seconds. In both of FIGS. 75(a) and (b), the opening time of the big winning opening P751 is 30 seconds in all rounds.

By configuring as described above, even if the same jackpot symbol is won, the progress (progress speed) of the special game to be executed thereafter can be varied. With the pachinko game machine P of the tenth embodiment, by continuing to win the jackpot pattern D in a high-probability low-base state, the progress of the jackpot game can be hastened, and a game with a sense of speed is realized. At the same time, by continuing to win the jackpot pattern D in a high-probability high-base state, it is possible to delay the progress of the jackpot and to realize a gentle game, so that a sharp game is realized. can be realized.

The high-probability low-base state is a small-hit rush state, and the cycle of ``fluctuation of the second special symbol->small-hit win->small-hit game->fluctuation of the second special symbol--- is repeated. , so that there is no sense of incongruity even if the big win game is sandwiched, "the time from the start of the second special symbol small win variation in the high probability low base state to the opening of the big winning opening P751 in the small win game" is set to a high probability low It is preferable to make it approximately the same as the time between rounds (1.5 seconds) of the big win game executed when the big win symbol D is won in the base state.

In addition, as a modification, the time between rounds of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot pattern D is won in the low base state (for example, low probability low base state) is set to 3.5 seconds, and the high base state (for example, , low-probability high-base state, or high-probability high-base state). , the progress of the jackpot game during the consecutive villas can be accelerated to realize the game property in which a large amount of game balls can be obtained in a short period of time.

As another modification, the time between rounds of the big hit game executed when the jackpot pattern D is won in the low base state (for example, low probability low base state) is set to 1.5 seconds, and the high base state (for example, , low-probability high-base state, or high-probability high-base state). , the progress of the jackpot game during the series of villas can be slowed down to realize the game property that allows the player to enjoy the series of villas for a long time.

[11th embodiment]
As the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment to the tenth embodiment, the pachinko game machine P having various game characteristics has been described. An eleventh embodiment will be described as an example in which the contents are further devised, and only differences from the base technology and the present embodiment will be described in detail below, and descriptions of common points will be omitted or simplified. Among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment, elements identical or corresponding to elements described in the base technology or the present embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals.

(board configuration)
First, the configuration of the board configuration (configuration of the game area) of the pachinko game machine P of the eleventh embodiment will be described.

The pachinko game machine P of the eleventh embodiment can be implemented with substantially the same board configuration as the premised pachinko game machine shown in FIG. Since the pachinko game machine P of the eleventh embodiment adopts the game characteristics (specs) described later, it is configured to include a specific area P760 inside the big winning opening (attacker) P751. It should be noted that as long as it is a change that does not change the game characteristics disclosed below (or a change that is only minor), a different board configuration may be adopted as appropriate.

(spec)
Next, the game performance (specifications) of the pachinko game machine P of the eleventh embodiment will be described. In addition, in this explanation, regarding the "settings" (setting values) that affect the ball output performance, only the specifications related to "Setting 1" will be explained, but various numerical values related to other setting values are set as appropriate. is.

As shown in FIG. 76, the pachinko gaming machine P of the 11th embodiment has a winning probability of a winning lottery of 1/300 (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) and a small winning probability of 35/100 (the second special symbol). pattern only) is set. In addition, the number of prize balls is 3 balls for the first start prize opening (first start opening) P711, 1 ball for the second start prize opening (second start opening) P721, 3 balls for the left general prize opening P731L, and 3 balls for the right general prize opening. The winning opening P731R is set to 1 ball, and the big winning opening (attacker) P751 is set to 15 balls.

In addition, the pachinko machine P of the eleventh embodiment adopts ball entry order digestion control in which the ball entered first is preferentially digested, and both the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be held. If it exists, priority is given to the suspension that occurred first, and the variable display is performed (regardless of whether the suspension is related to the first special symbol or the suspension related to the second special symbol, the suspension is digested in the order of occurrence). In addition, in the pachinko game machine P of the eleventh embodiment, only the second special symbol is configured to have a "small hit" as a special symbol lottery result, but the first special symbol may be configured to have a "small hit". is also possible. It should be noted that if the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine P of the eleventh embodiment are not lost, not only the entry order digestion control but also the first special symbol preferential digestion control may be applied as a modification, or the second special symbol priority digestion control may be applied. 2 Special symbol priority digestion control may be applied. In addition, in the external information output process, when outputting information (referred to as a high base signal) corresponding to the operating state (base state) of the electric chew support function as a signal related to the game state, when the high base state ends and the low base Even if it shifts to the state, if there is a hold related to the second special symbol, the output of the high base signal may be continued until all the holds related to the second special symbol are digested. In addition, in such a configuration, when the high base state is shifted to the low base state, there are two reserves related to the first special symbol and four reserves related to the second special symbol. , The order of digestion is "holding related to the second special design → holding related to the second special design → holding related to the first special design → holding related to the first special design → holding related to the second special design → second special design In the case of "suspension related to", (1) the output of the high base signal may be continued until all of these are digested, or (2) once the first special symbol is used after the suspension related to the second special symbol is digested. In the case where the suspension is digested, even if the suspension related to the second special symbol still remains, the output of the high base signal may be interrupted after the suspension related to the second special symbol is digested.

The pachinko game machine P of the eleventh embodiment employs a game feature (spec) called "small win V" described as the underlying technology, and in addition to the "big win" in the special symbol lottery, A "small win" is obtained in a special symbol lottery, and a game ball passes through a specific area P760 inside a large winning opening P751 (also referred to as an incoming ball) during a small win game to be executed thereafter. is operated and the jackpot game is executed. In the eleventh embodiment, when a small winning game develops into a big winning game, a series of special game states from the start of the small winning game to the end of the big winning game are set to "small winning V" or "small winning development big winning". etc.

The types of jackpots (including small wins V) in the special game state in the pachinko gaming machine P of the eleventh embodiment are 4R jackpots (first special symbol jackpot, second special symbol jackpot, second special symbol jackpot V ) is provided. In addition, the pachinko game machine P of the eleventh embodiment does not have a probability variation function for a specific game that is an advantageous normal game state, and after various big hits (including small win V), an electric chew support function (electric support) A specific game (high base state) is executed by activating the function.

In the pachinko game machine P of the eleventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, when a small win is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the small winning symbols A and B are selected as the symbol lottery for the second special symbol. You will be elected to either. That is, when a small hit is won in the winning lottery related to the second special symbol, the stop mode of the second special symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol A (for example, 8 LEDs in the second special symbol display device P52 1, 2, 7, and 8 of them are lit and the others are turned off), a stop mode corresponding to the small hit symbol B (for example, out of the eight LEDs in the second special symbol display device P52 2nd, 3rd, 6th, 7th, and 8th lights are turned on and the other lights are turned off). When winning a small prize, the small prize patterns A and B are allocated to 25% and 75%.

Here, the small winning games executed by stopping the small winning symbols A and B (referred to as small winning games A and B) are the "V easy winning small winning games" as described above. , It is not a "small hit game in which V winning is difficult" as described above. In addition, the small hit V big hit game (referred to as small hit V big hit game A) when the ball enters the specific area in the small hit game A is a 4R big hit, and when the ball enters the specific area in the small hit game B The small hit V big hit game (referred to as the small hit V big hit game B) is also 4R. Jackpot game (4R jackpot which is jackpot game A corresponding to jackpot pattern A in the first special pattern, 4R jackpot which is jackpot game B corresponding to jackpot pattern B in the second special pattern) and small hit V jackpot games A and B After the end of the jackpot game, the state shifts to a high base state.

FIG. 77 shows the game flow in the pachinko game machine P of the 11th embodiment. Here, the "normal mode" is a low base state, and the game progresses mainly with the first special symbols. "Challenge Mode", "Battle Mode", and "Renso Mode" are high base state (however, a second special mode that occurs during the high base state and is digested in the low base state immediately after the high base state ends) (Including pattern variations corresponding to the holding related to the pattern), and the game progresses mainly with the second special pattern. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko game machine P of the eleventh embodiment, the condition for shifting from the high base state to the low base state is a prescribed number of symbol fluctuations (the second special symbol fluctuates 7 times or 255 times). Either variation, or the first special symbol is 10 times variation) and the normal electric role P770 operation of the specified number of times (for example, the normal electric role P770 operates once or 255 times).

In the eleventh embodiment, the winning probability of normal symbols is 1/1 in both the low base state and the high base state, the number of reserved normal symbols is 4, and the normal electric accessory corresponding to the winning symbols of the normal symbols. Opening pattern of P770 (operation pattern corresponding to one operation of the normal electric role product P770 triggered by the normal pattern stopping with a winning pattern, that is, "one operation of the normal electric role product P770" = " Execute one set of open patterns that open one or more ordinary electric accessories P770”) is an open pattern of 0.01 seconds open × 1 time in the low base state, and 1.5 seconds in the high base state It is an open pattern x 3 times, but in any open pattern, the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is forcibly terminated by entering two balls into the normal electric accessory P770 (for example, 1.5 seconds If the second ball entry is detected during the second 1.5 second opening in the ×3 opening, the remaining time of the second opening, which is the subsequent opening, is forcibly terminated and the third opening is not released).

By hitting the jackpot with the first special symbol in the normal mode (Fig. 77(a)), after the jackpot game A ends, the game shifts to the challenge mode (Fig. 77(b)). End condition a, which is the condition for ending the high base state in the challenge mode, is the following (a1) to (a5). It should be noted that the high base state does not end by satisfying all of (a1) to (a5), but the high base state ends by satisfying any one of (a1) to (a5).
(a1) The number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (the number of times that the loss fluctuation continues) is 10 times (a2) The number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (the number of times that the loss fluctuation continues) is 1 time (a3) Normal electric accessory P770 is activated once (1.5 second open x 3 times open pattern is executed once, and the open pattern is forced even in the middle by detecting the second ball entry in the open pattern once. It is counted that one operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is completed after the end), however, the high base state ends at the start of the first operation (at the start of opening the normal electric accessory P770) (a4) big hit The game (either of the jackpot games A and B) is executed, but after the jackpot game or the jackpot game or the jackpot V jackpot game ends, the state shifts again to the high base state (a5). B) is executed, however, after the big win game or the small win V big win game is completed, the high base state is re-entered.

It should be noted that the end timing of the high base state in the challenge mode is, in the case where (a1) is satisfied, the timing at which the 10th symbol variation of the first special symbol ends (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time). When (a2) is satisfied, it is the timing when the first symbol variation of the second special symbol ends (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time), and when (a3) is satisfied , when the normal electric role P770 starts to operate for the first time (when the normal electric role P770 starts to be opened), and when (a4) is satisfied, the big hit symbol A or B stops. It is the end timing (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time), and when (a5) is satisfied, the timing when the symbol variation that stops the small hit symbol A or B ends (symbol stop timing, symbol timing just before the start of the fixed time).

The challenge mode is basically a high base state that continues until (a1) to (a5) are satisfied, but since the normal mode in which the game progresses mainly with the first special symbol shifts to the challenge mode, Basically, immediately after the shift to the challenge mode (immediately after the end of the jackpot game from the normal mode), there is no hold of the second special symbol (the number is 0), and in order to cause the hold of the second special symbol, normally It is necessary to operate the electric accessory P770. However, in the challenge mode, since the high base state ends at the start of the first operation of the normal electric role, after the first operation of the normal electric role starts, the game ball enters the second start winning opening P721. is already in the low base state at the timing when the ball enters the ball and the suspension of the second special symbol occurs, and the low base state is already present at the start of variation of the second special symbol corresponding to the suspension. In addition, by entering two balls into the normal electric role product P770, one operation of the normal electric role product P770 is completed, so that up to two second special symbol reservations can occur. During the variation of the second special symbol that is digested immediately after the suspension of the second special symbol occurs due to the first entry and starts to fluctuate, one suspension of the second special symbol can occur (challenge mode Then, since the high base state ends at the start of the first operation of the normal electric role, the normal electric role P770 will not operate anymore, so the second special symbol will not be held any more) . The challenge mode also applies during the symbol variation corresponding to the hold related to the second special symbol digested in the low base state. Then, after all the symbol variations corresponding to the hold related to the second special symbol digested in the low base state are executed as loss variations, the game shifts to the normal mode (FIG. 77(e)). It should be noted that the symbol variation corresponding to the suspension of the second special symbol corresponding to the end condition a (symbol variation corresponding to the suspension of the second special symbol digested in the low base state) is the collective variation as described above. It can be performed as

By hitting a big hit (including a small V big hit) in the first special pattern or the second special pattern in the challenge mode (Fig. 77 (c)), after the big win game (including a small V big win game) is completed, the game shifts to the battle mode. (FIG. 77(d)), or shift to the multi-family mode (FIG. 77(f)).

Specifically, when the small winning V big winning game B is executed in the challenge mode, the process shifts to the battle mode, and the big winning game B is executed in the challenge mode, or the small winning V big winning game A is executed. , to switch to Renso mode.

The end condition b, which is the condition for ending the high base state in the battle mode, is the following (b1) to (b5). It should be noted that the high base state does not end by satisfying all of (b1) to (b5), but the high base state ends by satisfying any one of (b1) to (b5).
(b1) The number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (the number of times that the loss fluctuation continues) is 10 times (b2) The number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (the number of times that the loss fluctuation continues) is 1 time (b3) Normal electric accessory P770 is operated 255 times (1.5 second open x 3 times open pattern is executed 255 times, and the open pattern is forced even in the middle by detecting the second ball entry in the open pattern once. It is counted that one operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is completed after finishing), however, the high base state ends at the start of the 255th operation (at the start of opening of the normal electric accessory P770) (b4) big hit The game (either of the jackpot games A and B) is executed, however, after the jackpot game or the small hit V jackpot game ends, the state shifts again to the high base state (b5). B) is executed, however, after the big win game or the small win V big win game is completed, the high base state is re-entered.

It should be noted that the end timing of the high base state in the battle mode is, when (b1) is satisfied, the timing at which the 10th symbol variation of the first special symbol is completed (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time). When (b2) is satisfied, it is the timing when the 255th symbol variation of the second special symbol ends (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time), and when (b3) is satisfied , at the start of the 255th operation of the normal electric role P770 (at the start of opening of the normal electric role P770), and when (b4) is satisfied, the symbol variation in which the big hit symbol A or B stops It is the end timing (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time), and when (b5) is satisfied, the timing when the symbol variation in which the small hit symbol A or B stops (symbol stop timing, symbol timing immediately before the start of the fixed time).

The battle mode is basically a high base state that continues until (b1) to (b5) are satisfied. It is supplemented that the battle mode also applies during the symbol variation corresponding to the hold related to the second special symbol that is digested. Specifically, when (b1) is satisfied, if there are four reservations related to the second special symbol (in addition, the small hit is won first, or the small hit V big hit game is executed first (This is almost impossible because of the fact that it is not possible to do so), even if you move to a low base state, you will be in battle mode until all four of the reservations are consumed. However, in terms of production, the production during the fluctuation of the second special design in the high base state and the production during the fluctuation of the second special design after the end of the high base state (in the low base state) are the contents of the production are configured to be different. Although the details will be described later, the effect during fluctuation of the second special symbol in the high base state executes the effect (holding charge effect) that urges the player to accumulate the hold of the second special symbol, and ends the high base state. The production during the fluctuation of the second special symbol later (in the low base state) is produced as a summary fluctuation as described above (the result of the lottery for this fluctuation display, and one or more that will start the fluctuation after the next time It is a dramatic variable display that notifies all winning lottery results including pre-determination information on hold with 1 variable display, specifically, a plurality of second special symbols that are digested in a low base state. Based on the pre-determination information related to the hold of, in the fluctuation related to the hold of the second special pattern that is first digested in the low base state, the variation display related to the hold of the second special design that is first digested in the low base state , and one or a plurality of reserved preliminary judgment information that will start to change from the next time onwards, all of the success or failure lottery results are notified by a variable display of 1). If there is a hold related to the second special symbol that occurs during the high base state corresponding to the end condition b and is digested in the low base state immediately after the high base state ends, the design corresponding to the hold. After all the fluctuations are executed as deviation fluctuations, the normal mode is entered (FIG. 77(j)).

In the battle mode, by hitting the big hit (including the small hit V big hit) in the first special pattern or the second special pattern (Fig. 77 (g)), after the big hit game (including the small hit V big hit game), the battle mode is entered. (FIG. 77(i)), or shifts to the continuous mode (FIG. 77(h)).

Specifically, when the big win games A and B or the small win V big win games A and B are executed in the high base state in the battle mode, the mode is shifted to the continuous mode, and in the low base state in the battle mode. When the small winning V big winning game B is executed, it shifts to the battle mode, and when the big winning game B is executed in the battle mode or the small winning V big winning game A is executed, it shifts to the continuous mode.

The end condition c, which is the end condition of the high base state in the continuous mode, is the following (c1) to (c6). It should be noted that the high base state does not end by satisfying all of (c1) to (c6), but the high base state ends by satisfying any one of (c1) to (c6).
(c1) The number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (the number of times the variation continues) is 10 times (c2) The number of variations of the second special symbol (the number of times the variation continues) is 255 times (c3) Normal electric accessory P770 is operated 255 times (1.5 second open x 3 times open pattern is executed 255 times, and the open pattern is forced even in the middle by detecting the second ball entry in the open pattern once. It is counted that one operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is completed after finishing), however, the high base state ends at the start of the 255th operation (at the start of opening of the normal electric accessory P770) (c4) jackpot The game (either of the jackpot games A and B) is executed, but after the jackpot game or the jackpot V jackpot game ends, the state shifts again to the high base state (c5). B) is executed, however, after the end of the big win game or the small win V big win game, the state shifts again to the high base state (c6). When the game is executed three times in a row (when the event "a small win is won in a high base state and a small win V big win game is executed" occurs three times in a row), more specifically, a high base state When the jackpot games A and B and the small jackpot V jackpot games A and B which are executed by the win/fail lottery and variable display are performed three times in succession (not three times each, but when one of them is three times in succession) , After the third big win game A, B or small win V big win game is over, it is forced to shift to a low base state (in addition, the big win game or small win V big win game is executed in the high base state in the battle mode). When the mode is shifted to the consecutive villa mode, the big win game or small win V big win game in the high base state in the battle mode is counted as the first big win game or small win V big win game in the high base state. When the big win game or the small win V big win game is executed twice in a row mode, the state shifts to the low base state after the big win game or the small win V big win game is finished.)

In addition, when (c1) is satisfied, the end timing of the high base state in the continuous mode is the timing when the 10th symbol change of the first special symbol ends (the timing of the symbol stop, the timing just before the start of the symbol fixed time) ), and when (c2) is satisfied, it is the timing when the 255th symbol variation of the second special symbol ends (symbol stop timing, timing just before the start of the symbol fixed time), and (c3) is satisfied. In the case, when the normal electric role P770 starts to operate for the 255th time (when the normal electric role P770 starts to open), and (c4) is satisfied, the big hit symbol A or B stops. is the timing at which (symbol stop timing, timing immediately before the start of the symbol fixed time) is completed, and when (c5) is satisfied, the timing at which the symbol variation at which the small hit symbol A or B stops (symbol stop timing, Timing just before the start of the design fixed time). Also, when (c6) is satisfied, as described above, it is after the third (third consecutive) big win game A, B or small win V big win game in the high base state.

Renso mode is basically a high base state that continues until (c1) to (c6) are satisfied, but it occurs pending during this high base state, and immediately after the high base state ends, a low base state is entered. It should be supplemented that it corresponds to the battle mode during the symbol variation corresponding to the hold related to the second special symbol that is digested in . Specifically, (c6) is satisfied, that is, when the third big win game A, B or small win V big win game is executed in the high base state (FIG. 77(k)), then the low base state and a battle mode in a low base state (in detail, a battle mode in which the second special pattern that occurred during Renso mode is digested in a low base state, that is, It shifts to the battle mode in which the above-described collective change is performed without performing the above-described pending charge effect (FIG. 77(i)). After all the pattern fluctuations corresponding to the hold related to the second special pattern digested in the battle mode in the low base state are executed as loss fluctuations, it will shift to the normal mode (Fig. 77 (j)). , When the small winning V big winning game B is executed in the battle mode in the low base state, the battle mode is shifted to the battle mode, and the big winning game B is executed in the battle mode in the low base state, or the small winning V When the jackpot game A is executed, the mode shifts to the continuous mode. In the eleventh embodiment, the probability of a small hit in the second special symbol is as high as 35/100. Since it is almost impossible to satisfy (c2) and (c3) by preventing loss of the ball opportunity), the transition from the consecutive villa mode to the normal mode without going through the jackpot game is shown in FIG. I will also add that I have not.

Further, the pachinko game machine P of the eleventh embodiment is equipped with a "relief function". Specifically, after the end of the special game (after the small win V big win or after the big win game), when the fluctuation of the 900th rotation stops (when the symbol fixed time elapses), a “relief function” occurs (as a modification, a special The "relief function" may occur when 900 rotations have passed since the high base state after the end of the game), so that the normal mode is shifted to the continuous mode (Fig. 77(l)).

FIG. 78 shows the end condition of the high base state set after the end of the jackpot game. It should be noted that the termination condition when the "relief function" is activated is omitted in FIG.

In FIG. 78 (a-1) and (a-2), regarding the end conditions of the high base state that shifts after the end of the jackpot game (part of the end conditions a to c described above), the game state at the start of the jackpot fluctuation It shows what end condition is set according to the jackpot game type (whether it is jackpot pattern A or B).

FIG. 78(a-1) shows that when the big winning game A or B is executed by starting the variation in the low base state and then stopping at the big winning pattern A or B, the big winning game A or B ends. After the jackpot game A ends, the end condition a is set (shift to the challenge mode), and after the big win game ends, the end condition c is set (continuous mode). ).

In FIG. 78(a-2), when the big winning game A or B is executed by starting the fluctuation in the high base state and stopping at the big winning pattern A or B, the big winning game A or B ends. It shows the end condition of the high base state that shifts later, and after the big win game A ends, the end condition c is set (transition to the consecutive game mode), and the end condition c is set even after the big win game ends (consecutive game mode). mode). However, as described above, after the third (third consecutive time) big win games A, B or small win V big win game in the high base state, the game is forced to shift to the low base state.

In FIG. 78 (b-1) and (b-2), regarding the end condition of the high base state that shifts after the end of the small win V big win game (part of the end conditions a to c described above), at the start of the small win game It shows what end condition is set according to the game state and the small winning game type (which one of the small winning symbols A and B).

FIG. 78(b-1) shows that when the variation is started in the low base state and then stopped at the small winning pattern A or B and the small winning V big winning game A or B is executed, the small winning V big winning game is executed. It shows the end condition of the high base state that shifts after the game A or B is completed, and after the end of the small win V big win game A, the end condition c is set (shifted to consecutive mode), and the small win V big win game is set. After the end, the end condition b is set (shift to battle mode).

FIG. 78(b-2) shows that when the variation is started in the high base state and then stopped at the small winning pattern A or B and the small winning V big winning game A or B is executed, the small winning V big winning game is executed. It shows the end condition of the high base state that shifts after the game A or B is completed, and after the end of the small win V big win game A, the end condition c is set (shifted to consecutive mode), and the small win V big win game is set. It indicates that the end condition c is set even after the end (the mode is shifted to the consecutive villa mode). However, as described above, after the third (third consecutive time) big win games A, B or small win V big win game in the high base state, the game is forced to shift to the low base state.

The pachinko game machine P of the eleventh embodiment is configured as described above, so that even if the high base state is the same, the completion conditions of the high base state are made different, thereby realizing various game properties. can be done. Specifically, after the jackpot game related to the first special symbol in the low base state, the game is shifted to the challenge mode, and then the battle mode or the consecutive villa mode is realized. Even in a high base state, the probability of shifting to Renso mode is not extremely increased, but if it is shifted to battle mode, the first rotation of the first second special symbol is at least in a high base state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability of shifting to Renso mode than in Challenge mode, and in Renso mode, until the number of consecutive big wins in the high base state reaches a predetermined number, the next big win is virtually promised. Thus, even if the Renso mode ends, it is possible to shift to the battle mode again and aim to enter the Renso mode again.

FIG. 79 shows an example of an effect in normal mode. More specifically, it shows an example of the effect screen before and after the "relief function" occurs. FIG. 79(a) shows variable display of decorative symbols (P801) and simple symbols (P801) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol. and the number 0 on the right side are displayed. The number on the left side indicates the number of reserved first special symbols, and the number on the right side indicates the number of reserved second special symbols. In addition, at the bottom of the screen, there are provided a display area of a suspended object (P811) corresponding to the suspension of the first special symbol and a display area of the variable object display (P813) corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol. In the eleventh embodiment, when the display area of the variable object display is displayed with a black circle (●) other than a white circle (○), it indicates that the variable display is in progress, and is displayed with a white circle (○). If it is, it means that it is not being displayed (change is stopped), and if the display area of the pending object display is other than a white circle (○) such as a black circle (●), there is a pending object (Holding exists), and when it is displayed with a white circle (○), it indicates that there is no pending object (Holding does not exist). Regarding the reserved objects, in order from the left, the reserved object corresponding to the first reservation of the first special design, the reserved object corresponding to the second reservation of the first special design, and the first special design. A reserved object corresponding to the second reservation, and a reserved object corresponding to the fourth reservation of the first special symbol. In addition, on the right side of the screen, the number of times display (also referred to as "specific information") indicating how many fluctuations the current fluctuation display is after the end of the special game (after the small win V big win or after the big win game) is displayed. Here, it is displayed as "895th rotation" indicating that it is the 895th rotation. It should be noted that the number of times is the cumulative value of the number of times of variation of the first special symbol and the number of times of variation of the second special symbol. In addition, considering that the "relief function" occurs after the 900th rotation, this display of the number of times also indicates that there are five rotations remaining until the "relief function" occurs. It should be noted that, as a modification, for this display of the number of times, after the end of the special game (after the small hit V jackpot or after the jackpot game) up to the 800th rotation, special While displaying a number corresponding to the number of fluctuations calculated from the end of the game (after the small win V big win or after the big win game), after the 800th rotation, such as "remaining 99 times" or "remaining 17 times", " It may be configured to display a number corresponding to the remaining number of times until the "relief function" occurs. By configuring in this way, by changing the display mode of the remaining number of times until the occurrence of the "relief function", it is possible to suggest that the "relief function" is approaching not only by the number of times but also by the display mode. ) becomes possible.

FIG. 79(b) shows a situation where the holding of the first special symbol occurs up to the 4th during the variation of the 895th variation of the first special symbol, and then the variation stops due to a loss. Next, FIG. 79(c) shows a situation where the new first special symbol has started to change, and the display of the number of times has changed from "895th rotation" to "896th rotation". Next, FIG. 79(d) shows a situation where the holding of the first special symbol occurs up to the fourth one during the variation of the first special symbol of the 896th variation, and then the variation stops due to a loss.

Next, FIG. 79(e-1) shows a situation where a new first special symbol has started to change, and the display of the number of times has changed from "896th rotation" to "897th rotation". In this situation, among the remaining three reservations, the third reservation is digested, so that the fluctuation of the first special symbol of the 900th rotation is started and the fluctuation is stopped at a loss, so that the "relief function ” will occur, but if these three holds include a hit hold (a hold where the result of the lottery will be a “jackpot”), a big hit will occur before the “relief function” occurs. At this time, the occurrence of the “rescue function” has not been confirmed. Here, in FIG. 79 (e-1), all of the remaining three reservations are scheduled to lose the lottery result, and the variation pattern A described in FIG. Therefore, a relief function preliminary effect (also referred to as a "specific effect") is executed to suggest or notify the occurrence of a "rescue function" such as "three more times!". In this way, there is a hold that triggers the occurrence of the "relief function", and all of the holds and the holds that are digested before it (including current fluctuations) will be lost in the lottery results. In addition, on the condition that the variation pattern A described in FIG. 81 and the like is a suspension that is scheduled to be executed, the relief function preliminary effect can be executed. At the 898th rotation, which is the next variation in FIG. 79(e-1), "Two more times!" Furthermore, in the 900th rotation, which is the next variation, the relieving function advance effect is not executed, but "0 times left!" may be displayed.

Also, FIG. 79(e-2) shows a situation where the new first special symbol has started to change from FIG. 79(d), similarly to FIG. The 896th spin” is switched to the “897th spin”, but the first hold among the remaining three holds is a hit hold, so the relief function pre-production is not executed (“Remaining 3 times !” is not displayed). Of the remaining three holds, the first hold is a loss hold (a hold that the lottery result will be "lost"), and the variation pattern E described in FIG. 81 etc. is scheduled to be executed. Even if there is a certain hold, the relief function pre-rendering is similarly not executed. The reason for this is that even though it is a loss hold, it is a hold that corresponds to a change in which a high-expectation production (development production C) is executed, so it is suggested in advance that a "relief function" will occur. When the informing relief function preliminary performance is executed, even if the development performance C is executed by canceling the suspension of the failure, the player will first perceive that the development performance C is a failure. This is because the game may become less interesting because it is stored away. However, this lost hold is digested and the change related to the lost hold ends and a new change starts, and after that all the holds scheduled to be digested are scheduled to be lost in the lottery result, and FIG. If the change pattern A described in Etc. Preliminary effects (for example, display of "One remaining time!") may be executed. As a modification, among the remaining three reservations, the first reservation is a lost reservation (a reservation that the lottery result will be "lost"), and the variation pattern E described in FIG. 81 etc. In the case of a hold that is scheduled to be executed, this hold to be canceled is digested, the change related to the hold to be canceled is completed, and a new change starts, after which all the holds scheduled to be consumed are lost in the lottery results. Even if it is a hold that is scheduled and that the variation pattern A described in FIG. display, etc.) may be configured not to be executed.

After three rotations from FIG. 79(e−1), as shown in FIG. 79(f), the variation of the first special symbol in the 900th rotation is started. Next, as shown in FIG. 79(g), when the variation at the 900th rotation stops, the "relief function" occurs, indicating that the mode will shift to the "Renso mode!" is displayed in the center of the screen, along with the characters "Right shot!" It is notified that the game situation of is a situation to hit to the right (during high base state).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to perceive in advance that the "relief function" will be determined. Conversely, it is also possible to perceive that there is a possibility that a high-expectation performance will occur (the existence of fluctuations other than non-reach fluctuations) before the "relief function" occurs.

In addition, the relief function preliminary effect is displayed for only one second immediately after the start of the fluctuation, and is configured to always end during the fluctuation (in other words, it is more than the shortest time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the low base state. , the execution time of the relief function pre-rendering is shorter). Therefore, the relief function preliminary effect is not executed (displayed continuously) during the symbol fixing time. As another modification, when the suspension that causes the 900th rotation to start changing by being digested (the suspension that triggers the occurrence of the "relief function") occurs, relief is performed immediately after the occurrence. It may be configured to perform function pre-rendering. For example, the third hold occurs during the variation of the 897th rotation, the change is the variation pattern A described in FIG. 81, etc.), and if the change pattern A described with reference to FIG. may be configured.

80 and 81 show examples of effects in the normal mode. More specifically, FIG. 80 shows the display mode of the suspended object corresponding to the suspension of the first special symbol and the variable object corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol in the eleventh embodiment, and the expected jackpot in each display mode. FIG. 81 shows an example of the variation pattern and effect pattern of the first special symbol in the eleventh embodiment and an example of the degree of expectation for a big hit in each variation pattern (each effect pattern). In addition, the display mode of the suspended object and the variable object can adopt a common display mode. It may change to a different display mode (this is the pending change described above. Here, for the sake of convenience, the change of the variable object is also referred to as pending change. and the change of the variable object may be collectively referred to as "variable right indication change"). In addition, pending objects that are being changed are moved to the left when the change is completed and the pending object is newly digested (e.g. the fourth pending object becomes the third object). , the first suspended object is moved to the variable object, etc.). When the change is held, the change may be made during the change, or may be made after the movement display. In addition, when the hold change occurs, other display objects (for example, mini characters, effect displays on the screen, etc.) are displayed, and other display objects interfere with the hold object and change the hold object (for example, the mini character turns into a stone). to change the retained object, or change the retained object after being wrapped in a golden effect display) may be performed. Further, the variation pattern A in FIG. 81 may be configured so that the variation time determined by the holding number of the first special symbol at the start of the variation of the first special symbol can be different. When the number of holds is 3, the change time is 4 seconds (this change is called the change M), and when the number of holds at the start of the change is 1, the change time is 13 seconds (this change is called the change N). In this case, (1) regardless of whether the variation is M or N, the change rendering can be executed for the retained object remaining during the variation, but it is either variation M or variation N. Depending on the type, the display mode of the change effect differs (in the case of change M, the holding object changes after being wrapped in a golden effect display, and in the case of change N, the mini character throws a stone. (2) In the case where the variation N is being executed and the remaining variation time is 4 seconds or more, the trigger suspension occurs. The change effect A is not executed either, but the pending change can be executed when the trigger pending occurs (a pending object other than the initial group described later can be displayed from the beginning when the pending trigger occurs). Further, even in such a configuration, it may be configured such that pending change (or change of the variable object) can be executed after the next change is started. It should be noted that hereinafter, both the reserved object and the variable object may be collectively referred to as "variable rights representation".

As shown in FIG. 80, the display modes of variable rights representations are divided into an initial group, a first group, and a second group. The initial group has only a round and black display mode, which is the initial display mode, ie, the initial display mode in which no variable rights display change is performed. The first group includes four types of display modes: round and blue, round and green, round and red, and round and rainbow. The relationship of the degree of expectation for a big hit in each display mode in the first group is blue<green<red<rainbow. In addition, the variable right display change of each display mode in the first group can change from blue to any of green, red, and rainbow colors, and can change from green to either red or rainbow colors, It can change from red to iridescent and never from iridescent. In addition, the round and black display mode of the initial group can be changed to any display mode of the first group. The display mode does not change. Further, none of the display modes of the first group changes to any of the display modes of the second group, which will be described later. It never changes. As a modification, none of the display modes of the second group changes to any of the display modes of the first group, while changing from blue of the first group to blue, green, red, and rainbow of the second group. Changeable in color, green in the first group can change to green, red and rainbow in the second group, red in the first group can change to red and rainbow in the second group, rainbow in the first group Colors may be non-changeable to any of the second group. This first group of variable rights representations is displayed both as a pending object and as the variable object.

The second group includes four types of display modes: rectangle and blue, rectangle and green, rectangle and red, and rectangle and rainbow. In addition, characters are attached to each display mode, and the characters "SP reach A", "SP reach B", "SP reach C", and "Full rotation" are attached, respectively. These suggest or notify the contents of the effect to be executed with the variation corresponding to this variable rights display (for example, when a variable rights display in a rectangular and green display mode is displayed, the variable rights display Super Reach B is performed in the corresponding variation). In addition, "SP reach A" indicates the development effect A described above, "SP reach B" indicates the development effect B described above, "SP reach C" indicates the development effect C described above, and full rotation is the full rotation reach described above. (full rotation effect) is shown. In addition, the round and black display mode of the initial group can be changed to any display mode of the second group. The display mode does not change. In addition, the variable right display change of each display mode in the second group cannot occur (that is, when the display mode of the initial group, which is round and black, changes to any of the display modes of the second group, no more changes occur). never).

As shown in FIG. 81, the variation patterns and production patterns of the first special symbols in the normal mode are provided with variation patterns A to L and production patterns A to L. The variation pattern A corresponds to the production pattern A, and is a deviation variation in which reach is not formed (non-reach variation). Variation patterns B to K correspond to performance patterns B to K, and are big hit variation or loss variation in which reach is formed (then shifts to either normal reach or development performance A to C). It should be noted that the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed one or more times. The variation pattern L corresponds to the performance pattern L, and is a big hit variation in which the pseudo-continuous performance is always executed three times, and after the ready-to-win is formed, the game shifts to the full-rotation performance.

Here, the correspondence relationship between the variable right display and the variable pattern (effect pattern) will be described. The black variable right display of the initial group can be displayed as a variable right display corresponding to the variable patterns A to L (effect patterns A to L). Also, the correspondence relationship between variable right indications and variable patterns (effect patterns) will be described. The variable right display in each display mode of the first group can be displayed as a variable right display corresponding to the variable patterns B to L (effect patterns B to L). Also, the blue variable right display of the second group can be displayed as a variable right display corresponding to the variable patterns C, F, and I (effect patterns C, F, and I). Also, the green variable right display of the second group can be displayed as a variable right display corresponding to the variable patterns D, G, J (effect patterns D, G, J). Further, the red variable right display of the second group can be displayed as a variable right display corresponding to the variable patterns E, H, K (production patterns E, H, K). Also, the rainbow-colored variable right display of the second group can be displayed as a variable right display corresponding to the variable pattern L (effect pattern L).

It should be noted that the variation patterns C to K (production patterns C to K) are configured to develop into development productions in the "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "pre-reading stage" as described above. , the background image of each stage (the stage you stayed in) is switched to the background image of the development production (with that, it switches to the BGM dedicated to the development production), and the stage BGM is not output while the development production is being executed, and the development By displaying an effect that indicates a failure in the production, the background image of each stage (the background image of the stage that was displayed before the development of the development production) is switched again within the variable display in which the development production is executed. In that situation, even if the background image of the stage is displayed, the stage BGM will not be output until the next variable display starts, and the BGM dedicated to the development effect will not be output (it is silent, or it is also called the stage BGM). A specific BGM that is different from the BGM dedicated to development effects is output). Here, even if an effect indicating a failure is displayed in the development effect, after switching to the background image of each stage (the background image of the stage that was displayed before the development effect was developed), the next change does not start, An effect is executed in which the displayed variable right display (in this case, the variable object) changes to the rainbow color of the first group. You may perform a production with a sense of purpose. In that case, during the fluctuations in the fluctuation patterns C to K (the production patterns C to K), the fluctuation rights display (here, the relevant fluctuation object) is displayed before the development production is displayed, but it fluctuates during the display of the development production. The right display (here, the variable object) may be hidden, and after the development effect display, the variable right display (here, the variable object) may be displayed again. In that case, only a part of the variable rights representation may be hidden. For example, if the variable rights representation (here, the variable object) before the display of the development effect is the black variable rights representation of the initial group If it is hidden and the variable rights display (here, the variable object) before the display of the development effect is another variable rights display, the variable rights display may be continuously displayed even during the display of the development effect.

Further, as a modified example, in the case where the variable right display is displayed even during the display of the development effect, for example, in the variation pattern (effect pattern) that develops to the development effect A, the first group is displayed before the development of the development effect A. If the blue variable right display of is displayed, it will be switched to the blue variable right display of the second group when the display of development effect A starts, while the green variable right display of the first group will be displayed before the development of development effect A. When the variable right display is displayed, it may be configured not to switch to the blue variable right display of the second group with the start of the display of the development effect A as a trigger. Further, as a further modified example, while the variable rights display is displayed when the development effect A or the development effect B is being displayed, the variable rights display is not displayed when the development effect C or the full rotation effect is being displayed. may be configured.

By configuring in this way, in the case of a variable rights display change (variable rights display mode) with a low degree of expectation, further changes in variable rights display are performed with the development of a specific production as an opportunity to fuel expectations and develop. While suggesting or notifying the future, in the case of a high-expectation variable rights indication change (variable rights indication mode), by maintaining the high expectation (fluctuation rights indication mode) You can keep your hopes up.

FIG. 82 shows an example of an effect in normal mode. More specifically, FIG. 82 shows an example of variable right display changes in a special look-ahead effect.

FIGS. 82(a-1) to (a-4) show a situation in which a special prefetch effect (a "restricted effect" described later, also referred to as a "restricted state" or a "prefetch aborted state") is not executed. ing. FIG. 82(a-1) shows a situation where the first special symbol is fluctuating and there are three reserved first special symbols. This third hold is a trigger hold, and when the hold occurred, it did not win the special prefetch effect execution lottery, but instead won the normal prefetch effect execution lottery such as the variable right display change ( (This is a situation in which the change of the floating rights indication has not been executed at the time of pending occurrence, but the change of the floating rights indication is scheduled to be executed upon the movement display of the floating rights indication thereafter.). FIG. 82(a-2) is the next variation of FIG. 82(a-1), in which the variable rights representation change is executed for the variable rights representation corresponding to the second hold, and the blue display mode of the first group , and a background change (change to the above-mentioned look-ahead stage), which is a background look-ahead effect in which a band background (20% of expectation for a big hit) is displayed at the top of the screen, is executed. It shows the situation where FIG. 82(a-3) is the next variation of FIG. 82(a-2), in which the variable right representation change is executed for the variable right representation corresponding to the first hold, and the first group is displayed in green. In addition, the background change (change to the above-mentioned look-ahead stage), which is a background look-ahead effect, is displayed in the upper part of the screen with a band background (50% expected to hit the big hit) that says "Entering the heat zone". It shows the situation where FIG. 82(a-4) is the next variation of FIG. 82(a-3), and the trigger suspension is digested so that the variable right display change (here, the change of the variable object) is executed by the trigger change. , The display mode has changed to the green color of the first group, and the background change of the band background (50% expectation of jackpot) is continuously executed at the top of the screen with "Entering the intense heat zone". showing.

FIGS. 82(b-1) to (b-4) show a situation in which a special look-ahead effect is being executed. FIG. 82(b-1) shows a situation where the first special symbol is fluctuating and three reserves of the first special symbol exist. This third hold is a trigger hold, and when the hold occurs, you have won a special prefetch effect execution lottery. . This special character will continue to be displayed until the trigger transition. FIG. 82(b-2) is after 3 changes in FIG. !” to indicate the changing situation. It should be noted that the characters "read ahead open!" are displayed for two seconds immediately after the start of the trigger fluctuation, and then disappear. FIG. 82(b-3) shows a situation in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed in which the decorative symbols temporarily stop 15 seconds after the start of the trigger fluctuation and then fluctuate again. During this pseudo-continuous effect, the variable right display change (here, the change of the variable object) is executed, and the display mode changes to the blue display mode of the first group. ” (big hit expectation 20%) indicates that the background change is being performed. In addition, in order to indicate that this is the first pseudo-continuation effect, "pseudo-continuation x 1" is also displayed at the lower right of the screen. FIG. 82(b-4) shows a situation in which a pseudo-continuous effect (second time) is executed in which the decorative symbols temporarily stop again after 30 seconds from the start of the trigger fluctuation and then fluctuate again. During this pseudo continuous effect, the variable right display change (here, the change of the variable object) is executed, and the display mode changes to the green display mode of the first group. It shows a situation in which a background change is displayed in which a strip background (50% of expectations for a big hit) is displayed. In addition, in order to indicate that it is the first pseudo-continuation effect, "pseudo-continuation x 2" is also displayed at the lower right of the screen. In this way, an unprecedented effect is achieved by limiting the look-ahead effect such as the change of the variable right display and the background change, and executing the same or similar effect multiple times during the pseudo-continuous effect in the subsequent trigger change. Running.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize an unconventional yet novel presentation, such as prohibiting prefetching even though prefetching is in progress and executing a prefetching-like presentation in spite of the relevant fluctuation (trigger fluctuation).

FIG. 83 shows an example of an effect in normal mode. More specifically, FIG. 83 shows an example of a role special performance using a performance role.

FIG. 83(a) shows a situation where the first special symbol is fluctuating and two reserves of the first special symbol exist. This second hold is a trigger hold, and when the hold occurs, it wins the execution lottery for the special performance effect described later (when the hold occurs, the special performance effect is not executed, but the variable right display Triggered by the moving display of , a special effect of the role is scheduled to be executed). In addition, on the upper left of the screen and on the front side of the screen, there is arranged a performance accessory A formed with the characters "strong" overlapping a part of the display area of the screen. The situation in which this production accessory A is positioned at the upper left of the screen is in the initial position (up position), and the situation in which it is positioned in the left center of the screen as shown in FIG. This is the lowered operating position (lowered position). In addition, on the upper right side of the screen and on the front side of the screen, there is arranged a performance accessory B formed with the characters "fight" overlapping a part of the display area of the screen. The situation in which this production accessory B is positioned in the upper right of the screen is in the initial position (up position), and the situation in which it is positioned in the right center of the screen as shown in FIG. This is the lowered operating position (lowered position). When the performance accessories A and B are present at the initial positions, they are illuminated in white.

FIG. 83(b-1) is the next variation of FIG. 83(a), and the trigger variation is executed when the trigger suspension is digested by moving only the production accessory A from the initial position to the operating position. shows a situation in which it is suggested or notified in advance that a dialogue production using the production accessory A (expectation for a big hit of 5%) is scheduled to be executed. That is, the character special effect is executed as the look-ahead effect. The production accessory A is lit and emits blue light, and the production accessory B is lit and emitted white. FIG. 83(b-2) is the next variation of FIG. 83(b-1), and shows a situation in which the dialogue production using the production accessory A (big hit expectation of 5%) is actually executed. The performance accessory A flashes and emits blue light, and the performance accessory B lights and emits white light.

FIG. 83(c-1) is the next variation of FIG. 83(a), and is executed by canceling the trigger suspension by moving both the production accessories A and B from the initial positions to the operating positions. This shows a situation in which it is suggested or notified in advance that an effect production (expectation for big hit 70%) using production accessories A and B is scheduled to be executed due to a trigger change. That is, the character special effect is executed as the look-ahead effect. The production accessory A is lit and emitted in red, and the production accessory B is also lit and emitted in red. FIG. 83(c-2) is the next variation of FIG. 83(c-1), showing a situation in which the effect production (big hit expectation of 70%) using production accessories A and B is actually executed. there is The production accessory A flashes red light, and the production accessory B flashes red light.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to visually estimate in advance which of the production accessory's movable patterns is provided in a specification in which a plurality of production accessory's movable patterns are provided according to the degree of expectation of a big hit.

In addition, as a modification, instead of executing a special role performance as a look-ahead effect, the production role A or / and the production role B execute the special role production during the fluctuation currently being executed, and the fluctuation At the timing after that, production using production accessory A and/or production accessory B (suggested or notified by role special production) corresponding to the previously executed accessory special production (dialogue production or effect production) may be configured to be executed. In addition, when only the production accessory A moves from the initial position to the operating position, the effect production using the production accessories A and B is executed with an expectation of 85% for executing the dialogue production using the production accessory A. When the degree of expectation to perform becomes 15% and both of the performance accessories A and B move from the initial position to the operating position, the degree of expectation to execute the dialogue production using the performance accessory A is 30% and the performance accessory A , B may be set to 70%.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in the high base state (challenge mode). First, a simple symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed (stopped display), and a very small "→" sign indicating an arrow is displayed on the upper right of the screen, indicating that the current gaming situation is to hit right. (during high base state). In addition, an instruction display of "Charge!" is made, prompting to cause a hold related to the second special symbol (Fig. 84(a)).

After that, the game ball enters the normal pattern operation port P741, the normal pattern changes and stops at the winning pattern, so that the normal electric accessory P770 is activated. In order to inform the player that the normal electric accessory P770 is operating, a message "opening..." is displayed at the lower right of the screen. In the challenge mode, the high base state ends when the normal electric accessory P770 starts operating for the first time. It is hidden (FIG. 84(b)).

After that, one game ball (first ball) enters the normal electric accessory P770, and one hold of the second special symbol occurs. Variation of the design is started. With the start of this change, "Challenge 1 stock" is displayed, and it is reported that the first right of the lottery for the second special symbol in the challenge mode has been acquired (Fig. 84(c)).

After that, one game ball (second ball) enters the normal electric role product P770, and one hold of the second special symbol occurs. Along with this pending occurrence, "Challenge 2 stock" is displayed, and it is reported that the second right of the lottery for the second special symbol in the challenge mode has been acquired. At the same time, since the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 ends when the second game ball enters, the display of "opening..." is also hidden (Fig. 84(d)).

After that, since the variation of the second special symbol currently being executed is variation in which the small winning symbol B is stopped, "333" which is a combination of the decorative symbol and the simple symbol corresponding to the small winning symbol B is stopped and displayed. . At the same time, in order to inform the player that the small winning symbol B will stop, a message "Challenge 1 succeeded!" is also displayed (Fig. 84(e)). In addition, if both the variation of the second special symbol currently being executed and the holding of one existing second special symbol are loss variation (retention of loss), the variation of the second special symbol currently being executed is "343", which is a combination of decorative symbols and simple symbols corresponding to the lost symbols, is stopped and displayed, and "Challenge 1 failed..." is displayed to notify the player that the lost symbols will stop. "343", which is a combination of the decorative symbols and the simple symbols corresponding to the missing symbols, is stop-displayed, and "Challenge 2 failed..." is displayed to inform the player that the missing symbols will stop. Furthermore, in order to notify the player of the shift to the normal mode, a message "Return to normal mode..." is displayed (Fig. 84(h)).

After that (after FIG. 84(e)), a small winning game B is executed, and an instruction display "Aim for V!" Display (FIG. 84(f)).

After that, the game ball enters the specific area of the big winning hole P751, so that the small win V big win game B is executed. After the small winning V big winning game B is executed, the number of game balls acquired in the big winning end demonstration after the 4th round, which is the final round, is displayed, and after the small winning V big winning game B is completed, a battle is performed. In order to notify the player of the shift to the mode, a message "Next battle mode!" is displayed (Fig. 84(g)).

In addition, when the small-hit symbol A is stopped instead of the small-hit symbol B, "777", which is a combination of the decorative symbols and the simple symbols corresponding to the small-hit symbol A, is stopped and displayed. At the same time, in order to notify the player that the small winning pattern A will stop, the display of "challenge 1 success!" "Aim for V!", which is an instruction display instructing to shoot a game ball aiming at (a specific area of) P751, is displayed. ``600 GET!'', which is the number of game balls obtained in the jackpot end demonstration after the 4th round, which is the final round, is displayed after the winning V big winning game A is executed, and after the small winning V big winning game A is finished, the continuous game is performed. In order to notify the player of the transition to the mode, a message "Next time, Renso mode!" is displayed (not shown).

FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in the high base state (battle mode) (example of an effect related to transition to the battle mode). First, a simple symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed (stopped display), and a very small "→" sign indicating an arrow is displayed on the upper right of the screen, indicating that the current gaming situation is to hit right. (during high base state). In addition, an instruction display of "Charge!" is made, prompting to cause a hold related to the second special symbol. Also, unlike the challenge mode, a second special symbol reserved object is displayed at the bottom of the screen. A white circle (O) indicates that a pending event has not occurred, and a black circle (●) indicates that a suspended event has already occurred (FIG. 85(a)).

After that, the game ball enters the normal pattern operation port P741, the normal pattern changes and stops at the winning pattern, so that the normal electric accessory P770 is activated. Unlike the challenge mode, the high base state does not end with one operation of the normal electric role P770, so the "opening... ” is not displayed. After that, there is a normal electric accessory P770, and one second special symbol is held. Triggered by the fact that four special symbols have been reserved, a message "Charging complete!" is displayed to inform the player that four second special symbols have been reserved (FIG. 85(b)). ). It should be noted that the variation of the second special symbol is a loss variation, and the case of a small hit variation will be described later.

After that, the first of the four reserved second special symbols is digested, and the effect of the above-mentioned summary variation is executed by the variation of the second special symbol accompanying the digestion. Since this variation is a variation in which the small winning symbol B is stopped, "battle win" is displayed to inform the player that the small winning symbol B is stopped (Fig. 85(c)). After that, "333", which is a combination of decorative symbols and simple symbols corresponding to the small winning symbol B, is stopped and displayed (FIG. 85(d-1)). After that, a small winning game B is executed, and an instruction display "Aim for V!", which is an instruction display for instructing to shoot a game ball aiming at (the specific area of) the big winning hole P751, is displayed, and then the big winning hole P751. Small win V big win game B is executed by game balls entering the specific area of , and "600 GET!" In order to inform the player that the battle mode will be entered after the small win V big win game A is completed, a message "next time, battle mode!" is displayed (not shown). In addition, when the small-hit symbol A is stopped instead of the small-hit symbol B, "777", which is a combination of the decorative symbols and the simple symbols corresponding to the small-hit symbol A, is stopped and displayed. At the same time, in order to inform the player that the small winning pattern A will stop, a message "Battle win!" "Aim for the V!", which is an instruction display for instructing to aim and shoot the game ball, is displayed, and after that, the small win V big win game A is executed by the game ball entering a specific area of the big winning hole P751. , which is the number of game balls obtained in the jackpot end demonstration after the fourth round, which is the final round, is displayed, and after the small win V jackpot game A is finished, the game shifts to the continuous mode. In order to notify the user, a message "Next time, Renso mode!" is displayed (not shown).

In addition, it is not the first variation related to the holding of the second special symbol for four, but the variation related to the third holding, which is the variation related to the holding that is digested after that, is the variation in which the small winning pattern B stops. In the case of , the effect contents of the summary variation are different. Specifically, the first reserved four second special symbols are digested, and with the variation of the second special symbols associated with the digestion, the production of the above-described summary variation is executed. This variation is a variation in which winning symbols are stopped, but since the variation related to the third suspension is a variation in which the small winning symbol B is stopped, a display of "Battle Victory" is displayed to inform the player of this fact. is performed (FIG. 85(c)). After that, "246", which is a combination of simple symbols corresponding to the lost symbols, is stopped and displayed (FIG. 85 (d-2-1)). After that, in the second change related to suspension, the simple symbol is stopped at "246" and the display of "Battle Victory!" is continuously displayed (not shown). After that, the display of ``Battle win!'' is continuously displayed even in the variation related to the third hold, and ``333'', which is a combination of the decorative pattern and the simple pattern corresponding to the small winning pattern B, is stopped and displayed (FIG. 85). (d-2-2)). In this way, the three variations are collectively shown as one effect, and then the small winning game B is executed, and the instruction display instructs to shoot the game ball aiming at (the specific area of) the big winning opening P751. A certain "Aim for V!" is displayed, and after that, a game ball enters a specific area of the big winning hole P751, so that a small win V big win game B is executed, and after the 4th round, which is the final round, is completed. "600 GET!", which is the number of game balls acquired in the jackpot end demonstration, is displayed, and "Next time, battle mode!" A display is made (not shown). In addition, when the small-hit symbol A instead of the small-hit symbol B is stopped, "777", which is a combination of the decorative symbols and the simple symbols corresponding to the small-hit symbol A, is stopped and displayed. At the same time, in order to inform the player that the small winning pattern A will stop, a message "Battle win!" "Aim for the V!", which is an instruction display for instructing to aim and shoot the game ball, is displayed, and after that, the small win V big win game A is executed by the game ball entering a specific area of the big winning hole P751. , which is the number of game balls acquired in the jackpot end demonstration after the fourth round, which is the final round, is displayed, and after the small win V jackpot game A is finished, the game is shifted to the continuous mode. In order to notify the user, a message "Next time, Renso mode!" is displayed (not shown).

In addition, when all the holdings of the second special symbols for four are losing holdings, the production contents of the summary variation are different. Specifically, the first reserved four second special symbols are digested, and with the variation of the second special symbols associated with the digestion, the production of the above-described summary variation is executed. Since this change is a change in which the winning symbols are stopped, and the rest of the hold is also a losing hold, a message "battle defeat..." is displayed to inform the player of this fact, and then corresponds to the losing symbols. "343", which is a combination of simple symbols drawn, is stopped and displayed (FIG. 85(e)). After that, in the changes related to the second to fourth suspensions, the simple symbol is stopped at "246" and the display of "battle lost..." is continuously displayed (not shown). In this way, four fluctuations are collectively displayed as one performance.

FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an example of the high-base state (battle mode) effect (example of effect regarding the transition to the consecutive villa mode). Since FIGS. 86(a) and 86(b) are the same as FIGS. 85(a) and 85(b), their description is omitted.

After FIG. 86(b), the first of the four reserved second special symbols is digested, and with the variation of the second special symbol associated with the digestion, the production of the above-described summary variation is executed. This variation is a variation in which winning symbols are stopped, but since the variation related to the second suspension is a variation in which the small winning symbol A is stopped, a display of "battle win" is displayed to inform the player of this fact. After that, "246", which is a combination of simple symbols corresponding to the lost symbols, is stopped and displayed (not shown). After that, the display of "Battle Victory!" is continuously displayed until the change related to the second hold, and "777", which is a combination of the decorative pattern and the simple pattern corresponding to the small winning pattern A, is stopped and displayed (Fig. 86). (c-1)). In this way, the two fluctuations are collectively shown as one effect, and thereafter, the small winning game A is executed, and the instruction display instructs to shoot the game ball aiming at (the specific area of) the big winning hole P751. A certain "Aim for V!" "600 GET!", which is the number of game balls acquired in the jackpot end demonstration, is displayed, and "next time, Renso mode!" is displayed (FIG. 86(c-2), partly not shown).

Here, if the current variation of the second special symbol in FIG. -2) is the content of the production. Specifically, after the start of the battle mode, there is a normal electric role P770 ball, and one hold of the second special symbol occurs, and immediately after that, the small hit variation of the second special symbol accompanying the digestion of the hold occurs. Triggered by the occurrence of four suspensions of the second special symbol during the change, the display of "Ultimate mystery!" is displayed instead of "Charging complete!". This display suggests or informs the player that the current variation is a small winning variation. Since this small-hit variation is a small-hit variation that starts to fluctuate in the high-base state, after the small-hit V big-hit, the mode shifts to the continuous mode. Specifically, a small-hit game A or a small-hit game B is executed, and an instruction display "Aim for V!" After that, the small winning V big winning game A or the small winning V big winning game B is executed by the game ball entering the specific area of the big winning opening P751, and the big winning ends after the 4th round, which is the final round, ends. "600 GET!", which is the number of game balls acquired in the demonstration, is displayed, and "next time, Renso mode!" is displayed (not shown).

Further, the current variation of the second special symbol in FIG. 86(b) is a small-hit variation (fluctuation in which the small-hit symbol A or the small-hit symbol B stops), and four second special symbols are reserved. If all the fluctuations related to are small hit fluctuations (variation in which the small hit pattern A or the small hit pattern B stops), the production contents are as shown in FIG. 86 (e-1) (e-2). Specifically, after the start of the battle mode, there is a normal electric role P770 ball, and one hold of the second special symbol occurs, and immediately after that, the small hit variation of the second special symbol accompanying the digestion of the hold occurs. Triggered by the occurrence of four suspensions of the second special symbols during the change, the display of "Ultimate mystery!×2!!!" is displayed instead of the display of "Complete charge!". This display suggests or informs the player that the current variation is a small winning variation and that all the variations related to holding the four second special symbols are small winning variations. In this case, the small winning V big winning game executed after the current fluctuation ends (first small winning V big winning game in high base state), the small winning V big winning game executed after the fluctuation related to the first holding (Second small winning V big winning game in high base state), small winning V big winning game (third small winning V big winning game in high base state) executed after the end of variation related to second holding Since the event ``a small win is won in a high base state and a small win V big win game is executed in a high base state'' occurs three times in a row, the game is forcibly shifted to a battle mode in a low base state, and immediately thereafter. A small win V big win game that is executed after the end of the fluctuation related to the third reserve is executed to shift to the high base state of the consecutive villa mode or battle mode, and immediately after that the four are consumed. A small winning V big winning game (first small winning V big winning game in the high base state) executed after the end of the fluctuation related to the holding of the number is executed to shift to the continuous mode, and after that, the high base state. The continuous mode continues until the small win V big win game is executed twice. That is, the current variation of the second special symbol in FIG. 86(b) is a small-hit variation (fluctuation in which the small-hit symbol A or the small-hit symbol B stops), and four second special symbols are reserved. If all the fluctuations related to are small hit fluctuations (variation in which the small hit pattern A or the small hit pattern B stops), the transition from the battle mode to the continuous mode will be confirmed twice, so that In order to inform the player of this, the message "Ultimate Mystery! x2!!!" is displayed.

Here, the variation for performing the pending charge performance during the battle mode is uniformly 30 seconds in the case of the losing variation, but it is configured to be either 5 seconds or 20 seconds in the case of the minor winning variation. Of these, only when the variation of the small hit is 20 seconds, it is possible to display the aforementioned "ultimate secret!" or "ultimate secret! x2!!!". In addition, when the minor hit variation is 5 seconds, an immediate hit effect (for example, a short-time hit effect in which "V" is displayed immediately after the start of the variation) is executed, and "Charging complete!" is displayed. Neither "ultimate secrets!" nor "ultimate secrets!×2!!!" are displayed.

FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the high base state (Renso mode). More precisely, it is a diagram showing an example of an effect of the continuous villa mode shifted by executing the small winning V big winning game A in the low base state. First, the simple symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is fluctuating, and a very small "→" sign indicating an arrow is displayed on the upper right of the screen, indicating that the current gaming situation should be right-handed (high base state). medium). In addition, "600 GET!", which is the number of prize balls obtained in the previous small-win V big-win game, is continuously displayed. Note that no decoration pattern is displayed in the Renso mode (Fig. 87(a)). This variation is a losing variation, and when the variation stops, "357", which is a combination of simple symbols corresponding to the losing symbols, is stopped and displayed (FIG. 87(b)). In addition, in the continuous mode, the variation time of the second special symbol is uniformly 2 seconds regardless of whether it is a small winning variation or a losing variation. In the next variation, a small winning variation is started, and when the variation stops, "357", which is a combination of simple symbols corresponding to the small winning symbols, is stopped and displayed (FIGS. 87(c) and 87(d)). After that, unlike the battle mode and the challenge mode, the instruction display "Aim for V", which is an instruction display to instruct to shoot the game ball aiming at (the specific area of) the big winning hole P751, is displayed in a small size (Fig. 87 (e )). Since a plurality of small winning V big winning games are made to appear as one big winning game in the continuous mode, decorative patterns are hidden and the display of ``Aim for V'' is made inconspicuous as much as possible.

After that, the small win V big win game is executed once again, and "1800 GET!", which is obtained by adding the number of 4R prize balls for two times from the initially displayed "600 GET!", is continuously displayed (Fig. 87 ( f)). At this time, since the event "a small win is won in a high base state and a small win V big win game is executed" occurs twice in succession, when the next small win V big win game is executed, "high base A small win is won in a state and a small win V big win game is executed" event continues three times, so after the third small win V big win game is completed, the battle mode is shifted to a low base state battle mode. This battle mode is in a low base state, and the second special symbol cannot be held during this battle mode. It is necessary to cause four holdings of 2 special symbols. Therefore, when the small win fluctuates in the high base state after the event "a small win is won in the high base state and the small win V big win game is executed" occurs twice in a row, the holding of the second special symbol is less than four. In some cases, the message "Jackpot imminent! Charge up!" is displayed to urge the player to save the reserve of the second special symbol (Fig. 87(h)). In addition, when the number of reserved second special symbols becomes four, the display of "Big hit is imminent! Charge up!" is not displayed. In addition, at the time of loss variation in the high base state after the event "a small win is won in the high base state and the small win V big win game is executed" occurs twice in succession, the holding of the second special symbol is less than four. Even in such a case, the message "Jump is imminent! Charge up!" is not displayed (Fig. 87(g)). As a modified example, when the small win fluctuates in the high base state after the event "a small win is won in the high base state and the small win V big win game is executed" occurs twice in a row, the second special symbol is held 3 times. If there are two reserved second special symbols, a display is made to prompt the player to accumulate the reserved second special symbols, and if there are two reserved second special symbols, the player is prompted to In order to prompt the player to accumulate the reserve of the second special symbol, the message "Jackpot imminent! Absolutely charge!!!" is displayed, and if the reserve of the second special symbol is 0 or 1, In order to prompt the player to save the reserve of the special symbols, a message "Big hit is imminent! Absolutely charge up!!!" may be displayed, and furthermore, a warning sound may be output.

As a further modification, after the event "a small win is won in a high base state and a small win V big win game is executed" occurs twice in a row, the small win variation in the high base state is the second variation at the start of the variation. If the number of reserved special symbols is small (for example, if the number of reserved second special symbols is one), the fluctuation time is set to 20 seconds, and if the number of reserved second special symbols at the start of the fluctuation is large (for example, the second special In the case of holding four symbols), the variation time may be set to 2 seconds. In addition, a demonstration of the start of a small winning game of a small winning game that is executed after the small winning fluctuation in the high base state after the event "a small winning is won in a high base state and a small winning V big winning game is executed" occurs twice in succession. The time is defined as the small win of the small win game executed after the end of the small win variation in the high base state before the event ``a small win is won in the high base state and the small win V big win game is executed'' occurs twice in a row. It may be longer than the start demonstration time (it is desirable to maintain the high base state until V wins during the small win game executed after the end of the small win fluctuation that started to fluctuate in the high base state).

[Twelfth embodiment]
As the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment to the eleventh embodiment, the pachinko game machine P having various game characteristics has been described. A twelfth embodiment is an example in which the content is further devised. Hereinafter, only the differences from the base technology and the present embodiment will be described in detail, and the description of the common points will be omitted or simplified. Among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine P of the twelfth embodiment, elements identical or corresponding to elements described in the base technology or the present embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The pachinko game machine P in the twelfth embodiment employs the aforementioned "small win V" specifications. The pachinko game machine P of the 12th embodiment has the following features.
(A) It has "hit" and "lose" as the result of lottery for the first special symbol.
(B) It has "hit", "minor hit", and "lose" as the result of lottery for the second special symbol.
(C) The probability of a big hit is 1/200 (not provided with a high probability state), the probability of a small hit (only the second special symbol) is 199/200, and the number of reserved first special symbols is four. , the number of reserved second special symbols is four.
(D) "Second special symbol (special figure 2) priority digestion control" is adopted.
(E) A jackpot game A (jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot pattern A) is provided as the jackpot game with the first special symbol, and jackpot games B-1 to B-3 (jackpot games) are provided as the jackpot game with the second special symbol. A jackpot game corresponding to the patterns B-1 to B-3) is provided, and as a second special pattern small winning game, small winning games A to C (small winning games corresponding to the small winning patterns A to C) are provided. All of them are small winning games that are easy to win V in a specific area (there is no small winning game that makes it difficult to win V). In other words, when the ball is entered into the big winning device P750 during execution of the small winning game, the ball entering the specific area becomes almost definite. The jackpot games executed by winning V are called small hit V jackpot games A to C) are executed. The selectivity of each pattern is shown in FIGS. 88(a) and 88(b).
(F) It has a low base state and a high base state, and has high base states A to C as high base state types. In the low base state, the normal pattern hit probability is 1/1, and when the normal pattern stops at the hit pattern, 1/1 is 0.01 as an operation pattern corresponding to one operation of the normal electric accessory P770. The opening pattern is 1 second x 1 opening. In the high base state A, the winning probability of the normal symbol is 1/1, and when the normal symbol stops at the winning symbol, 5/6 is 0.5/6 as an operation pattern corresponding to one operation of the normal electric accessory P770. The opening pattern is 01 seconds x 1 time, and 1/6 is 5 seconds x 1 time. In the high base state B, the winning probability of the normal symbol is 1/1, and when the normal symbol stops at the winning symbol, 29/30 is 0.29/30 as an operation pattern corresponding to one operation of the normal electric accessory P770. The opening pattern is 01 seconds x 1 time, and 1/30 is 5 seconds x 1 time. In the high base state C, the normal pattern hit probability is 1/1, and when the normal pattern stops at the hit pattern, 1/1 is 5 seconds as an operation pattern corresponding to one operation of the normal electric accessory P770. × 1 time open pattern. In any open pattern, the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is forcibly terminated by one ball entering the normal electric accessory P770.
(G) Tables A and B are provided as second special symbol variation pattern tables in the high base state. Table A selects only 0.1 second as the variation time of the second special symbol. In table B, only 60 seconds is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol.
(H) In the high base state A, the first special symbol fluctuates five times in the high base state A that refers to the table A that moves after the execution of the jackpot game A executed by starting the fluctuation in the low base state and then stopping the fluctuation. Alternatively, the second special symbol fluctuates once, or the normal electric accessory P770 ends when it operates five times (FIG. 88(c)).
(I) After the execution of the jackpot game A executed by starting the fluctuation in the high base state and then stopping the fluctuation, or after starting the fluctuation in the low base state and the high base state and then stopping the fluctuation. The small win is executed by winning V during the small win game executed after the execution of the big win game B-1 is completed, or after the fluctuation is started in the low base state and the high base state and then the fluctuation is stopped. In the high base state B referring to the table A that is shifted after the execution of the V jackpot game A is completed, the first special symbol fluctuates five times, or the second special symbol fluctuates once, or the normal electric role P770. operates 50 times (FIG. 88(c)).
(J) After the execution of the jackpot game B-2 executed by starting the fluctuation in the low base state and the high base state and then stopping the fluctuation, or starting the fluctuation in the low base state and the high base state and then fluctuating The high base state B referring to the table A that moves after the execution of the small win V big win game B that is executed by winning V during the small win game that is executed after stopping is the first special symbol of 5. It ends when it fluctuates twice, or when the second special symbol fluctuates twice, or when the normal electric accessory P770 operates 50 times (FIG. 88(c)).
(K) After the execution of the jackpot game B-3 executed by starting the fluctuation in the low base state and the high base state and then stopping the fluctuation, or starting the fluctuation in the low base state and the high base state and then fluctuating The high base state C referring to the table B that moves after the execution of the small winning V big winning game C executed by winning V during the small winning game executed by stopping is the first special symbol 5 It ends when it fluctuates once, or when the second special symbol fluctuates once, or when the normal electric accessory P770 operates 50 times (FIG. 88(c)).
(L) When the high base state is maintained even after the small hit change that started to fluctuate in the high base state, that is, the first fluctuation of the second special symbol in the high base state B in the above (J) is a small hit. In the case of fluctuation (the second fluctuation of the second special symbol is also in the high base state B, so the high base state is maintained even after the small hit fluctuation of one fluctuation is completed), even during the small hit game. While maintaining the high base state until V winning, when the transition to the low base state after the small hit fluctuation that started fluctuation in the high base state is completed, that is, the high base state other than the above (J) When the 1st variation of the 2 special symbols is a small hit variation (the 2nd variation of the 2nd special symbol is a low base state, so it is in a low base state after the small hit variation of 1 variation is completed), the small hit When a player wins V during a game, the player is already in a low base state.
(M) If the base state at the time of V winning during the execution of the small winning game is the high base state, exceptionally, the normal electric motor that becomes the high base state end condition in the high base state of (I) to (K) The number of operations of the accessory P770 becomes 10000 times.

By having the above characteristics, in the above (H) high base state, it takes 1/6 of 5 seconds × 1 time until the normal electric accessory P770 operates 5 times and the high base state ends. It is possible to realize the game property of whether or not to win the open pattern. When the 1/6 5 seconds × 1 time open pattern is won and the game ball is entered into the normal electric accessory P770, the second special symbol is held and immediately after that, the hold is digested. Since the variation time is 0.1 second, one variation of the second special symbol ends immediately, so the high base state also ends immediately. Since a big win or a small win is always won in the second special pattern, a high base state after the end of the big win game is determined according to the big win pattern type or the small win pattern type when the variation of the second special pattern is stopped. Also, in the high base state of (I) above, whether the open pattern of 1/30 5 seconds x 1 time is won until the normal electric accessory P770 operates 50 times and the high base state ends. Some kind of playability can be realized. When the 1/30 5 seconds × 1 time open pattern is won and the game ball is entered into the normal electric accessory P770, the second special symbol is held and immediately after that, the hold is digested. Since the variation time is 0.1 second, one variation of the second special symbol ends immediately, so the high base state also ends immediately. Since a big win or a small win is always won in the second special pattern, a high base state after the end of the big win game is determined according to the big win pattern type or the small win pattern type when the variation of the second special pattern is stopped. Also, in the above (J) high base state, whether the open pattern of 1/30 5 seconds x 1 time is won until the normal electric accessory P770 operates 50 times and the high base state ends Some kind of playability can be realized. When the 1/30 5 seconds × 1 time open pattern is won and the game ball is entered into the normal electric accessory P770, the second special symbol is held and immediately after that, the hold is digested. Since the variation time is 0.1 seconds, one variation of the second special symbol ends immediately. Base state never ends. Therefore, since the V winning during the small winning game executed after the stop of the fluctuation of the second special symbol becomes the V winning in the high base state, as described above, the above (I) to ( Since the number of operations of the normal electric accessory P770, which is the condition for ending the high base state in the high base state of K), is 10000 times, winning of the open pattern of 5 seconds x 1 time is almost certain. In addition, in the above (K) high base state, not only is it possible to win the open pattern of 5 seconds x 1 time at 1/1, but also to enter the game ball into the normal electric accessory P770 by winning the open pattern. In this case, the suspension of the second special symbol occurs and immediately after that suspension is digested, and the fluctuation time is 60 seconds, so multiple times (up to four, which is the upper limit of the second special symbol suspension) Since it is possible to win the opening pattern of 5 seconds×1 time, it is possible to realize a game property that allows execution of the small winning V big winning game a plurality of times.

[Thirteenth embodiment]
As the pachinko machine P of the present embodiment to the twelfth embodiment, the pachinko machine P having various playability has been explained, but for the purpose of further improving the playability, the sound volume adjustment function has been further devised. A twelfth embodiment is taken as an example, and only differences from the base technology and this embodiment will be described in detail below, and descriptions of common points will be omitted or simplified. Among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine P of the thirteenth embodiment, elements identical or corresponding to elements described in the base technology or the present embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals.

As shown in FIG. 89(a), the pachinko game machine P in the thirteenth embodiment can display a volume adjustment screen in the center of the screen while the fluctuation is stopped or fluctuated. The volume adjustment screen is displayed when the player operates the down button of the cross key P383 while the fluctuation is stopped or fluctuated. In addition, if there is no operation after the volume adjustment screen is displayed, or if a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the last operation of the cross key after the volume adjustment screen was displayed The volume adjustment screen is automatically hidden.

As the volume adjustment specification in the thirteenth embodiment, the volume level for each of the three audio types can be adjusted. The volume level of the character's speaking voice and chattering voice) can be adjusted separately. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 89(b), the volume adjustment screen in the thirteenth embodiment allows the player to adjust the volume level in 10 steps (10% to 100%) for each of the three audio types of BGM, SE, and VOICE. %) are provided for volume memory display that can be arbitrarily set. The player can select an item whose volume level is to be adjusted by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key P383, and can adjust the volume level by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key P383. In addition, although the details will be described later, there are also three other items called "emphasis mode" that can set a predetermined volume level combination for emphasizing one of the three audio types of BGM, SE, and VOICE. are provided.

FIG. 89(b) shows the volume adjustment screen when BGM is selected as the volume level adjustment item (blacked out items are selected items). In FIG. 89(b), the BGM volume level is set to 10 (100%), the SE volume level is set to 6 (60%), and the VOICE volume level is set to 3 (30%). In this state, each time the left button of the cross key P383 is operated, the volume level of the BGM is decreased by 1 (10%) from 10 (100%). It should be noted that the initial setting of the volume level after power-on is BGM volume level 5 (50%), SE volume level 5 (50%), VOICE volume level 5 (50%). Keep

FIG. 89(c) shows the volume adjustment screen in a situation where SE is selected as the volume level adjustment item (items painted in black are selected items). In FIG. 89(c), the BGM volume level is set to 5 (50%), the SE volume level is set to 8 (80%), and the VOICE volume level is set to 5 (50%). Each time the left button of the cross key P383 is operated in this state, the volume level of the SE is reduced by 1 (10%) from 8 (80%), and in this state the right button of the cross key P383 is operated once. Each time, the SE volume level increases by 1 (10%) from 8 (80%).

FIG. 89(d) shows volume adjustment in a situation where the lower button of the cross key P383 is operated twice from the state of FIG. The screen is shown (items that are blacked out are selected items). When this "BGM emphasis mode" is selected, the BGM volume level is reduced to 10 regardless of the combination of the BGM volume level, the SE volume level, and the VOICE volume level set before the "BGM emphasis mode" is selected. (100%), SE volume level is set to 3 (30%), and VOICE volume level is set to 3 (30%).

FIG. 89(e) shows volume adjustment in a situation where "SE emphasis mode", which is one of the "emphasis modes", is selected by operating the down button of the cross key P383 once from the state of FIG. The screen is shown (items that are blacked out are selected items). When this "SE emphasis mode" is selected, the BGM volume level is reduced to 3 regardless of the combination of the BGM volume level, the SE volume level, and the VOICE volume level set before the "SE emphasis mode" is selected. (30%), the SE volume level is set to 10 (100%), and the VOICE volume level is set to 3 (30%).

FIG. 89(f) shows volume adjustment in a situation where the lower button of the cross key P383 is operated once from the state of FIG. The screen is shown (items that are blacked out are selected items). When the "VOICE emphasis mode" is selected, the BGM volume level is reduced to 3 regardless of the combination of the BGM volume level, the SE volume level, and the VOICE volume level set before the "VOICE emphasis mode" is selected. (30%), the SE volume level is set to 3 (30%), and the VOICE volume level is set to 10 (100%).

In this way, by selecting each "emphasis mode", the player does not need to select the BGM volume level, the SE volume level, and the VOICE volume level, and the BGM volume level according to his or her taste can be selected. , SE volume level, and VOICE volume level combination can be collectively determined. In addition, if you select "Reset to initial settings", which is the lowest item on the volume adjustment screen, the volume level of BGM, which is the initial setting of the volume level after turning on the power, is 5 (50%), and the volume level of SE is A combination of 5 (50%) and the VOICE volume level of 5 (50%) is set. In addition, when each "emphasis mode" is selected, operating the up button of the four-way controller P383 one or more times to select BGM, SE, VOICE, etc. as the volume level adjustment items, the "emphasis mode" is selected. The previously set combination of BGM volume level, SE volume level, and VOICE volume level is restored. (c) is restored).

With this configuration, it is possible to realize sound output that matches the tastes and preferences of the player in a more flexible manner than ever before.

[14th embodiment]
<Top view of upper spherical plate P341 in the present embodiment>
FIG. 90 is a top view of the spherical dish unit in this embodiment. Since the upper ball plate P341, the effect button P381, the lever P382, and the cross key P383 in FIG. 90 are the same as those described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

A ball lending button (also called a ball lending switch, a lending button, or a lending switch) in FIG. 90 is a button operated by a player to borrow a game ball from a lending unit. When operated, 125 balls, which are game balls worth 500 yen, are lent to the upper ball tray P341 through a nozzle extending from the lent unit.

The return button in FIG. 90 (also referred to as a return switch, checkout button, or checkout switch) is a button for storing unused cash out of the cash put into the lending unit in a storage medium such as an IC card. , After inserting 10,000 yen into the lending unit, when the ball lending button is operated once, 500 yen is lent, and when the return button is operated once, data for 9,500 yen is stored in the IC card. be done.

The segment display device in FIG. 90 is a display device for displaying the balance of cash deposited in the lending unit by three 7-segment display devices (eight segments when DP points are combined). If 10,000 yen is inserted, "100" is displayed on the segment display machine, and if the ball lending button is operated once in that situation, "95" is displayed on the segment display machine, and the return button is pressed in that situation. When operated once, "00" is displayed on the segment display.

The upper ball tray passage in FIG. 90 is a passage for storing game balls rented from the renting unit, and communicates with the shooting passage.

<Performance of ball lending button and return button>
The ball lending button and the return button are spring-type push buttons, and when the operation part of the ball lending button or the return button is pressed, the elastic energy of the spring is stored, and the ball lending button or the return button is operated. When the parts are separated, the elastic energy of the spring is released. In addition, since the ball lending button and the return button have a stopper part formed in the operation part, the ball lending button and the return button are operated by the stopper part even if the operation part of the ball lending button and the return button continues to be pressed. Since the pressing position of the portion does not move (stops at the maximum pressing position), excessive force is not applied to the spring, and the spring is prevented from being plastically deformed.

In addition, when the operation parts of the ball lending button and the return button are pressed and pushed a certain amount, the optical sensor provided in the ball lending button and the return button is shielded between the light emitting part and the light receiving part. It is possible to detect the operation of the ball lending button or the return button by entering the part. After that, if the operating part continues to be pressed down, the operating part abuts against the stopper part and cannot be pressed down, but the shielding part remains interposed between the light projecting part and the light receiving part of the optical sensor.

Here, the game ball to be shot by the shooting device P242 is stipulated in the technical standards related to the pachinko game machine so that the size (diameter) is 11 mm and the mass is 5.4 grams or more and 5.7 grams or less. It is

In addition, game medals used in a reel-type game machine are not specified in particular, but the size (diameter) is 25 mm, the mass is 5.0 grams or more and 6.0 grams or less, the thickness is 1.6 mm, and the size is 1.6 mm. There are many products on the market that have a (diameter) of 30 mm, a mass of 7.5 to 8.5 grams, and a thickness of 1.7 mm.

Currently, there are many pachinko game halls that have both pachinko machines and reel-type machines using game medals with a size (diameter) of 25 mm. You can enjoy both the machine and the reel-type game machine. In other words, the player may temporarily play the pachinko gaming machine while possessing game medals, or may temporarily play the reel-type gaming machine while possessing game balls. Note that the number of stores where the reel-type gaming machine using game medals with a size (diameter) of 30 mm is smaller than that of the reel-type gaming machine using game medals with a size (diameter) of 25 mm.

It is often seen that players place their mobile terminals, game balls, or game medals on the upper ball tray P341 of the pachinko game machine.

In such a scene, considering the possibility that various objects may be placed on the upper spherical plate P341, it is necessary to define the pressing energy of various buttons so as to prevent malfunction of the various buttons.

FIG. 91 is a diagram when a game medal or a game ball is placed on the operation part of the ball lending button. In FIG. 91, the energy due to the mass of the game medal or the game ball itself is shown on the ball lending button, and the time when the game medal or the game ball is dropped from above is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 91, when the game medal is 5 grams, the energy related to the operating portion of the ball lending button is 0.049 N (5 grams×gravitational acceleration 9.80665 m/S). In addition, when the game ball weighs 5.5 grams, the energy related to the operation portion of the ball lending button is 0.054 N (5.5 grams (mass of game ball) x gravitational acceleration 9.80665 m/S).

In this case, the spring constant of the ball lending button is made larger than 0.054 N, which is the energy pressed by the game ball, so that even if the game medals and game balls are placed on the ball lending button, the ball lending button It is possible to prevent it from being pushed to a position where it is pressed and the pressing of the ball lending button is detected. The reason for using 0.054N as a standard is that the mass of the game ball is larger than the mass of the game medal having a size of 25 mm.

Not limited to the above configuration, when the mass of the game medal is used as a reference, the spring constant of the ball lending button is set to be larger than 0.049 N, which is the energy pressed by the game medal, so that the game medal Even if it is placed on the button, it is possible to prevent the ball lending button from being pushed to the position where the depression of the ball lending button is detected.

In addition, since game medals with a size (diameter) of 25 mm may weigh 6.0 grams, the energy related to the operation part of the ball lending button is 0.059 N (6 grams x gravitational acceleration 9.80665 m/S). There is At this time, the load applied to the operation part of the ball lending button that can move to the detection position where the operation of the ball lending button becomes effective is made larger than 0.059 N (specifically, for example, 0.059 N). 06N), even if a game medal of 6.0 grams is placed on the operation part of the ball lending button, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball lending button to become effective. Note that 0.06N is just an example, and the above effects can be obtained with any load of 0.06N or more.

FIG. 92 is a diagram of when game medals or game balls are placed on the operation part of the ball lending button as in FIG. is tilted to . In FIG. 92, the energy due to the mass of the game medal or the game ball itself is shown on the ball lending button, and the time when the game medal or the game ball is dropped from above is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the game medal is 5 grams, the energy related to the operating portion of the ball lending button is 0.049 cos θN (5 grams×gravitational acceleration 9.80665 m/S×cos θ). In addition, when the game ball weighs 5.5 grams, the energy associated with the operation portion of the ball lending button is 0.054 cos θN (5.5 grams x gravitational acceleration 9.80665 m/S x cos θ).

In this case, the spring constant of the ball lending button is set to be larger than 0.054 cos θN, which is the energy pressed by the game ball, so that even if the game medals and game balls are placed on the ball lending button, the ball lending button does not move. It is possible to prevent it from being pushed to a position where it is pressed and the pressing of the ball lending button is detected. The reason for using 0.054 cos θN as a reference is that the mass of game balls is greater than the mass of game medals having a size of 25 mm.

Not limited to the above configuration, when the mass of the game medal is used as a reference, the spring constant of the ball lending button is set to be larger than 0.054 cos θN, which is the energy pressed by the game medal, so that the game medal Even if it is placed on the button, it is possible to prevent the ball lending button from being pushed to the position where the depression of the ball lending button is detected.

In addition, since a game medal with a size (diameter) of 25 mm may be 6.0 grams, the energy related to the operation part of the ball lending button is 0.059 cos θN (6 grams x gravitational acceleration 9.80665 m/S x cos θ). may become. At this time, the load applied to the operation part of the ball lending button that can move to the detection position where the operation of the ball lending button is effective is made larger than 0.059 cos θN (specifically, for example, 0.059 cos θN). 06 cos θN), even if a game medal of 6.0 g is placed on the operating portion of the ball lending button, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball lending button to become effective. Note that 0.06 cos θN is just an example, and the above effects can be obtained with any load value equal to or greater than 0.06 cos θN.

91 and 92 explained the ball lending button, but when the ball lending button and the return button are composed of the same parts (the color of the operation part may be different), The ball lending button can be replaced with a return button.

In addition, the ball lending button and the return button are composed of different parts (for example, when springs with different spring constants are used), and the load on the operation part of either the ball lending button or the return button is small. In such a case, a spring with a spring constant greater than 0.054 N or 0.054 cos θN shown in FIGS. 91 and 92 is used for the button with the smaller load. In this way, by making the spring constants of the ball lending button and the return button different, it is possible to change the operation feeling of the ball lending button and the return button, so that the player can erroneously operate the ball lending button and the return button. It is possible to reduce the act of doing

In particular, by making the load on the operation part of the ball lending button larger than the load on the operating part of the return button, the player accidentally operates the ball lending button when trying to operate the return button. Also, since the ball lending button has a larger load, it is harder to be pushed than the return button, and it is possible to make it difficult to push even the sensor part that detects the operation of the ball lending button. In other words, the ball lending button is harder to press than the return button, and even if the player who tried to operate the return button accidentally operates the ball lending button, it is difficult for the operation of the ball lending button to be detected. can do.

With this configuration, it becomes easier to prevent the game ball from being rented out by erroneously operating the ball lending button. Especially in non-equivalent exchange shops, the value of rented game balls decreases when they are exchanged for prizes. has become an important matter.

In addition, the pressing amount (also called stroke) from when the operation part of the ball lending button and the return button is pressed until the shielding part first enters between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the optical sensor is called the ball lending button. A mode in which the return button is made different is conceivable. Even in this mode, it is possible to change the operation feeling of the ball lending button and the return button, and it is possible to reduce the act of the player's erroneous operation of the ball lending button and the return button.

In particular, by making the stroke until sensor detection of the ball lending button longer than the stroke until sensor detection of the return button, the player may accidentally operate the ball lending button when trying to operate the return button. Also, since the ball lending button has a longer stroke, it is harder to detect than the return button, and it is possible to make it difficult to push even the sensor unit that detects the operation of the ball lending button. In other words, the ball lending button is harder to press than the return button, and even if the player who tried to operate the return button accidentally operates the ball lending button, it is difficult for the operation of the ball lending button to be detected. can do.

With this configuration, it becomes easier to prevent the game ball from being rented out by erroneously operating the ball lending button. Especially in non-equivalent exchange shops, the value of rented game balls decreases when they are exchanged for prizes. has become an important matter.

Also, it is conceivable that the areas of the operation portions of the ball lending button and the return button are different. Even in this mode, it is possible to change the operation feeling of the ball lending button and the return button, and it is possible to reduce the act of the player's erroneous operation of the ball lending button and the return button.

Further, as shown in FIG. 91, by setting the protrusion height of the ball lending button and the return button from the upper surface of the upper ball tray P341 to 5.0 mm, the ball lending button and the returning button are thicker than the game medal thickness of 1.6 mm. The height of the button protruding from the upper surface of the upper ball plate P341 is higher. With this configuration, even if the game medal on the upper surface of the upper ball tray P341 slides and collides with the ball lending button or the return button, the game medal rides on the operation part of the ball lending button or the return button. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the erroneous operation of the ball lending button and the return button.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 93, when the operation part of the ball lending button and the return button is not horizontal but has a spherical convex shape (when it has an R part as shown in FIG. 93), the operation part side By constructing the height up to the vertical part where the part is vertical to be higher than the thickness of the game medal, the game medal on the upper surface of the upper ball tray P341 slides and presses the ball lend button or the return button. Even if the game medal collides with the button, it is difficult for the game medal to get on the operation part of the ball lending button or the return button, and the act of erroneously operating the ball lending button and the return button can be reduced.

Further, when the cross key P383 is provided on the upper surface of the upper ball tray P341 as shown in FIG. It is conceivable to configure so that the protrusion height of is higher. By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult to erroneously operate the ball lending button or the return button when the cross key P383 is operated, and the act of erroneously operating the ball lending button and the return button is reduced. can be done.

Furthermore, when the cross key P383 is pushed down to abut on the stopper part constituting the cross key P383 and the cross key P383 is pushed in to the maximum amount, the projection height from the upper surface of the upper spherical plate P341 to the operation part of the cross key P383 is , the ball lending button, and the return button are configured to be higher than the projecting height, it becomes difficult to operate the ball lending button or the returning button when the cross key P383 is operated, and the ball lending button and the act of erroneously operating the return button can be further reduced.

In the above example, the height of the cross key P383 is higher than the height of the ball lending button and the return button. When the button P381 used for the effect during the game is provided, the same effect can be obtained by replacing the structure of the cross key P383 with the effect button and adopting the same structure.

When the cross key P383 is provided on the upper surface of the upper spherical dish P341 as shown in FIG. The load related to the operation part of the cross key P383 that the operation part of the cross key P383 moves to is the ball lending button and the return button are operated, and the optical sensor provided in the ball lending button and the return button , and the operating portion of the ball lending button and the return button to a position where the operation of the return button can be detected so that the load on the operating portion of the moving ball lending button and the return button is smaller than the load. By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult to erroneously operate the ball lending button or the return button when the cross key P383 is operated, and the act of erroneously operating the ball lending button and the return button is reduced. can be done.

In the above example, the load on the operation part of the cross key P383, which moves to a position where the operation of the cross key P383 can be detected by the optical sensor provided on the cross key P383, is When the button and the return button are operated, the operation part of the ball loan button and the return button is moved to a position where the optical sensor provided in the ball loan button and the return button can detect the operation of the ball loan button and the return button. Although it is configured to be smaller than the load on the operation part of the moving ball lending button and the return button, it is not limited to this. button to be used) is provided, the same effect can be obtained by replacing the configuration of the cross key P383 with the effect button and adopting the same configuration.

Further, as shown in FIG. 90, the upper ball tray P341 is provided with an upper ball tray passage so that the game balls rented from the lending unit are sorted in the upper ball tray passage and sent to the launcher unit P240. It's becoming In addition, from the upper ball tray passage to the launcher unit P240, game balls flow in from the upper ball tray passage opening at the end of the upper ball tray passage and are led one by one to the ball feeding mechanism P241 of the launcher unit P240. there is

As described above, not only game balls but also game medals may be placed on the upper surface of the upper ball tray P341. Configure. With this configuration, game medals mixed in the upper ball tray passage cannot pass through the opening of the upper ball tray passage, thereby preventing game medals from entering the shooting device unit P240. Further, by configuring the maximum length of the upper ball tray passage opening to be shorter than the diameter of the game medals, the same effect can be obtained.

In addition, the area of the opening for removing balls provided in the lower ball tray P342 (the opening leading from the lower ball tray P342 to the coin box on the game machine island and the counting unit) is made larger than the area of the game medals. Configure. With this configuration, the game medals mixed in the lower ball tray P342 can pass through the opening for removing balls provided in the lower ball tray P342. It can be easily discharged to the island side.

Pachinko game machines also include a management game machine that encloses and circulates game balls. This management game machine also has a performance button, a ball lending button, and a return button in the same manner as the pachinko game machine described above. In addition, in the management game machine, a lending unit is arranged on the left side of the management gaming machine as a game machine island facility, and the management gaming machine and the lending unit are configured to be able to communicate with each other regarding lending information.

In such a managed gaming machine, when a score is obtained by winning a special prize or the like, game balls are not paid out, and are stored as electronic data in the game ball number display device. Further, when the ball lending button is operated, lending data indicating a predetermined number of game balls can be output from the lending unit to the game ball number display device, and when the return button is operated, the number of game balls is displayed. Data on the total number of game balls stored in the device can be output to the lending unit. Also, the ball lending button and the return button are constructed so that their operation is effective even during the game.

In the managed gaming machine, it is desirable that the ball lending button and the return button are arranged on the lending unit side (left side) compared to the effect button. As described above, when the ball lending button and the return button are operated, the number of game balls is updated by communicating with the game ball number display device, so when the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button is executed during the game, the game This is to prevent a person from accidentally operating the ball lending button and the return button. Also, the same effect can be achieved by arranging the ball lending button and the return button on the left side of the center of the management game machine and arranging the performance button on the right side of the center of the management game machine.

[15th embodiment]
<Structure of the glass frame P3 of the pachinko game machine P in the present embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 2, the glass frame P3 is configured to be able to perform an effect of changing the light emission mode by the frame lamp P350. The frame lamp P350 has a top lens fixed to the top of the glass frame P3 and side lenses fixed to the left and right parts of the glass frame P3.

The top lens or the side lens is covered with a translucent resin cover, and light from an LED provided on a lamp substrate disposed inside is emitted through the cover.

FIG. 94 schematically shows the top lens and side lenses. The side lens and the top lens are removable from the front surface of the game machine, and the side lens can be removed after removing the top lens. Specifically, the upper part of the side lens and part of the top lens overlap, so if you try to remove the side lens before the top lens, part of the top lens above the side lens The overlapping part is caught and the side lens cannot be removed.

In addition, the top lens and the side lenses protrude toward the player side (front) and are closer to the player than the game board.

In addition, when the player is seated in front of the gaming machine, the top lens is arranged so as to be positioned above the player's head, and the bottom of the top lens is attached to the lamp substrate provided on the top lens. By lighting the provided LED, it is possible to display a lighting mode corresponding to the liquid crystal display during the game or a lighting mode corresponding to the anticipation of the game.

FIG. 95 is a view of the gaming machine of FIG. 94 viewed from the right side. As shown in FIG. 95, screws for fixing the top lens are fastened from the glass frame side (rear surface of the top lens).

The screw is made of metal and has the function of reflecting light, so if a screw were to be provided at the bottom of the top lens, the screw would reflect the light from the liquid crystal, causing the light from the top lens to be reflected. The light and the light from the liquid crystal may become turbid, and the lamp performance may not be executed in the manner intended by the designer.

In order to prevent such a situation, screws for fastening the top lens to the glass frame are positioned on the side of the glass frame (rear surface of the top lens). As a result, the light from the liquid crystal is not reflected by the screw for fastening the top lens and the glass frame, so that the player can visually recognize the lamp effect of the top lens with high effect.

In addition, by providing a stepped portion at the bottom of the top lens and molding the bottom of the top lens with unevenness, the light from the liquid crystal is diffused, and the light from the liquid crystal is reflected toward the player. You can prevent it from slipping.

[16th embodiment]
<Structure of game board>
Materials for game boards include those using acrylic resin in addition to those using wood. The game board made of acrylic resin is transparent, and even if the liquid crystal is provided behind the game board, it does not interfere with the display area. By overlapping in the front-back direction (overlapping in the front-back direction), even if the size of the liquid crystal is larger than the cutout in the center of the game board, the liquid crystal display can be seen through the transparent board surface. Various effects can be executed in the display area. The following are the technologies used in acrylic resin game boards. Hereinafter, a region in which the acrylic resin game board and the liquid crystal arranged behind it overlap in the front-rear direction is referred to as a superimposed region.

The notch in the center of the game board, through which the liquid crystal can be seen, has a substantially flat cross section. In addition, the cross section is polished to increase the transparency (the cross section is smooth). In other words, the inside of the game board can be visually recognized when the cross section of the game board is viewed obliquely and when the cross section of the game board is viewed from the front of the game board.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to block his or her line of sight through the cross section when viewing the liquid crystal, so that the liquid crystal presentation can be confirmed without stress.

A warp passage is screwed to the game board. A warp path is a path that makes it easier for game balls that flow down the game board to be guided to the stage, and game balls that flow into the warp path roll on the stage and are easier to enter the starting hole. ing. In addition, the warp passage is made of transparent resin, and it is possible to visually recognize how the game ball flows down in the warp passage.

Among the effects displayed on the liquid crystal, there is a hold display that indicates that it is held by the hold function. Up to four reserved displays are displayed corresponding to special figures, and up to eight can be displayed when there are two special figures. In addition, since there is a reservation function for the general map, the reservation display of the general map is also performed. Hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, the pending display is any pending display among all pending displays, and if any pending display satisfies the configuration, the configuration will have an effect. be able to.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing that the game board (acrylic resin) and the liquid crystal are superimposed in the front-rear direction. The dashed line indicates the overlapping portion with the liquid crystal game board. In other words, the liquid crystal is behind the game board in the part drawn with the dashed line, but since the game board is made of a transparent material (acrylic resin), the part drawn with the dashed line of the liquid crystal is also liquid crystal production. can be visually recognized by the player from the front.

In a game machine with such a configuration, the reserved display displayed by the liquid crystal is not the overlapping area between the game board and the liquid crystal, but there is no shielding (non-transmissive parts) in front of the horizontal direction (except for the glass plate). Also, it is displayed in a liquid crystal region that does not overlap the boundary between the game board and the liquid crystal.

By configuring in this way, the visibility of the pending display can be ensured, so that the player can confirm important information in the game without stress.

Also, the game board is screwed with a winning opening, a warp path, or a decoration. Since the screw is made of metal, it does not have translucency. For this reason, if the game board is transparent, in order not to lower the visibility due to the screw, no hold display is performed in the overlapping part of the game board and the liquid crystal, or the hold display is displayed in the overlapping part of the game board and the liquid crystal. Even if it does, it is configured so that the hold display is not performed at the position overlapping the screwed part.

By configuring in this way, the visibility of the pending display can be ensured, so that the player can confirm important information in the game without stress.

If the warp passage is made of a transparent member, the liquid crystal display is visible through the warp passage. configured as follows.

By configuring in this way, the visibility of the pending display can be ensured, so that the player can confirm important information in the game without stress.

In addition, game nails are driven into the game board for changing the rolling mode of the game balls flowing down the game board. Since the game nail is made of metal, it does not have translucency. For this reason, when the game board is transparent, no suspension display is performed in the overlapping portion of the game board and the liquid crystal so as not to lower the visibility due to the game nail, or the suspension display is not performed in the overlapping portion of the game board and the liquid crystal. Even in the case of performing, the suspension display is not performed at the position overlapping the part where the game nail is driven.

By configuring in this way, the visibility of the pending display can be ensured, so that the player can confirm important information in the game without stress.

Among the effects displayed on the liquid crystal, there is a decorative pattern that changes to show the player's sense of expectation while the special pattern changes. The decoration pattern is, for example, three numbers "1" to "9" arranged side by side, and it is generally known that when three numbers are aligned, a big win is announced.

The display area of the liquid crystal that displays such decorative patterns is not the overlapping area with the game board, but there is no obstruction in front of the horizontal direction (excluding the glass plate), and the liquid crystal that does not overlap the boundary between the game board and the liquid crystal area.

By configuring in this way, the visibility of the decorative pattern can be ensured, so that the player can confirm important information in the game without stress.

Further, the decoration pattern displayed on the liquid crystal may be partially displayed in the overlapping area of the liquid crystal and the game board as shown in FIG. In such a mode, part of the left and right decorative patterns, part of the left only decorative pattern, or part of the right only decorative pattern overlaps the overlapping area of the liquid crystal and the game board. can be considered.

In this way, the visibility of the decorative patterns can be ensured even by configuring a portion of the liquid crystal and the game board to overlap with the superimposed region, and the decorative patterns can be displayed in a large size, so that the player can receive important information in the game. can be checked without stress.

Also, the game board is screwed with a winning opening, a warp path, or a decoration. Since the screw is made of metal, it does not have translucency. For this reason, if the game board is transparent, no decorative pattern is applied to the overlapping part of the game board and the liquid crystal so as not to lower the visibility due to screws, or a decorative pattern is not applied to the overlapping part of the game board and the liquid crystal. Even if it is displayed, the decorative pattern is not displayed at the position overlapping the screwed part.

By configuring in this way, the visibility of the decorative pattern can be ensured, so that the player can confirm important information in the game without stress.

When the warp passage is made of a transparent member, the liquid crystal display is made visible through the warp passage. configured as follows.

By configuring in this way, the visibility of the decorative pattern can be ensured, so that the player can confirm important information in the game without stress.

In addition, game nails are driven into the game board for changing the rolling mode of the game balls flowing down the game board. Since the game nail is made of metal, it does not have translucency. For this reason, if the game board is transparent, no decoration pattern is displayed on the overlapping part of the game board and the liquid crystal so as not to lower the visibility due to the game nail, or the overlapping part of the game board and the liquid crystal is Even when the decorative pattern is displayed, the decorative pattern is not displayed at a position overlapping the part where the game nail is driven.

By configuring in this way, the visibility of the decorative pattern can be ensured, so that the player can confirm important information in the game without stress.

Among the effects displayed on the liquid crystal, there is an addiction prevention display (also referred to as a warning display or a warning image) for preventing the player from becoming "addicted" to the game. The immersion prevention display is displayed at the end of the big win, at the end of the probability variation, at the end of the time reduction, or on the demo screen, and the display ends after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed.

As shown in FIG. 98, the liquid crystal display area for the immersion prevention display is not the overlapping area between the game board and the liquid crystal, but there is no blocking object (non-transmissive part) in front in the horizontal direction (except for the glass plate). , Also, it is displayed in a liquid crystal area that does not overlap the boundary between the game board and the liquid crystal.

By configuring in this way, the visibility of the addiction prevention display can be ensured, so that the player can confirm important information in the game without stress.

Further, the immersion prevention display displayed on the liquid crystal may be partially displayed in the overlapping area of the liquid crystal and the game board.

In this way, the immersion prevention display can be ensured in visibility, and the immersion prevention display can be displayed in a large size, so that important information in the game can be displayed. The player can confirm without stress.

Also, the game board is screwed with a winning opening, a warp path, or a decoration. Since the screw is made of metal, it does not have translucency. For this reason, if the game board is transparent, in order to prevent visibility from being lowered by the screws, the overlapping part of the game board and the liquid crystal is not displayed, or the overlapping part of the game board and the liquid crystal is prevented from being stuck. Even if the display is to be performed, it is constructed so as not to perform the immersion prevention display at the position overlapping the screwed portion.

By configuring in this way, the visibility of the addiction prevention display can be ensured, so that the player can confirm important information in the game without stress.

If the warp passage is made of a transparent member, the liquid crystal display is visible through the warp passage. configured to

By configuring in this way, the visibility of the addiction prevention display can be ensured, so that the player can confirm important information in the game without stress.

In addition, game nails are driven into the game board for changing the rolling mode of the game balls flowing down the game board. Since the game nail is made of metal, it does not have translucency. For this reason, if the game board is transparent, the display to prevent the game board and the liquid crystal from falling into place is not performed so as to prevent the visibility from being lowered by the game nail, or the overlapping part of the game board and the liquid crystal is not displayed. Even when the prevention display is performed, the immersion prevention display is not performed at a position overlapping the part where the game nail is driven.

By configuring in this way, the visibility of the addiction prevention display can be ensured, so that the player can confirm important information in the game without stress.

There is a light guide plate as an effect device installed in the game machine. The light guide plate irradiates a light source (such as an LED) from the cross section of the light guide plate, and the light is reflected on the processing marks in the light guide plate, and the light guide plate emits surface light, and a specific pattern emerges. It is placed between the game board and the glass plate. In other words, since the light guide plate is arranged closer to the player than the liquid crystal, by causing the light guide plate to emit light for the player who is gazing at the liquid crystal, the synergistic effect of the liquid crystal presentation and the light guide plate presentation enhances the game. It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As described above, a light source is necessary to illuminate the light guide plate, and the light source substrate is arranged near the cross section of the light guide plate.

As shown in FIG. 99, LEDs for irradiating the light guide plate with light are arranged above and below the liquid crystal. In this way, the light source (light source substrate) of the light guide plate is arranged at a position not overlapping the decorative pattern.

By configuring in this way, the visibility of the decorative pattern can be ensured, so that the player can confirm important information in the game without stress.

Further, although not shown, the hold display displayed on the liquid crystal is also displayed at a position not overlapping the light source of the light guide plate.

By configuring in this way, the visibility of the pending display can be ensured, so that the player can confirm important information in the game without stress.

Further, although not shown, the immersion prevention display displayed on the liquid crystal is also displayed at a position not overlapping the light source of the light guide plate.

By configuring in this way, the visibility of the addiction prevention display can be ensured, so that the player can confirm important information in the game without stress.

A movable object (also referred to as a movable object or a movable accessory) is an example of a performance device installed in a game machine. In FIG. 99, a movable object (upper right) arranged at the upper right of the game board and a movable object (lower left) arranged at the lower left of the game board are shown as "Cha". It is The positions of the movable object (upper right) and the movable object (lower left) shown in FIG. 99 are called standby positions, which are positions before the movable object moves. The movable object in the standby position may be hidden so that the player cannot see it, or it may be visible so that the player can see it. Also, the movable object in FIG. 99 is positioned between the liquid crystal and the game board, and is designed to move ahead of the liquid crystal.

When the operating conditions of the movable object are satisfied, the movable object (upper right) indicated as “nsu” and the movable object indicated as “cha” (lower left) move toward the center of the game board, and the game is played. The word "chance" is formed in the center of the board.

In this way, the moving mode of the movable object can create a sense of anticipation for the game. For example, even with the same liquid crystal effect, by making the expectation of giving benefits such as a big hit different between when the movable object operates and when the movable object does not operate, it is possible to determine whether the movable object operates or not. Players have come to expect.

For this reason, the player gazes at the liquid crystal when the movable object is not activated, and when the movable object moves, the player gazes at the movable object. ), place it outside the liquid crystal so as not to impair the visibility of the liquid crystal display.

By configuring in this way, the visibility of the liquid crystal display is not lowered when the movable object is on standby, and the operation mode can be visually recognized during operation, thereby improving the interest of the game.

As described above, the present invention, the present embodiment, the second embodiment, the third embodiment, the fourth embodiment, the fifth embodiment, the sixth embodiment, the seventh embodiment, the eighth embodiment, the ninth embodiment, The tenth, eleventh, twelfth, thirteenth, fourteenth, fifteenth, and sixteenth embodiments have been described. It should be understood by those skilled in the art that each embodiment is merely an example, and that various modifications can be made to combinations of each component and each treatment process, and such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention. be.

P pachinko machine, P1 outer frame, P2 front frame, P3 glass frame,
P4 back set unit, P5 game board, P40 main control board,
P41 effect control board, P42 image control board, P43 payout control board,
P44 Power supply board, P47 Power switch, P48 Ram clear switch,
P49 setting key switch, P50 main control display device,
P51 first special symbol display device, P52 second special symbol display device,
P80 effect display device, P81 effect operation means (P380 effect operation unit,
P381 production button, P382 lever, P383 cross key),
P82 production lamp (P350 frame lamp, P550 board lamp),
P83 speaker (P141 curtain board speaker, P371 upper speaker),
P560 production accessory, P710 first start winning device,
P720 second start winning device, P730 general winning device,
P740 Normal figure operation gate device, P750 Grand winning entrance device P755 Special electric accessory, P770 Normal electric accessory

A game machine comprising a starting port for starting a change of special symbols, a transparent game board, and a liquid crystal display part, wherein the game board is arranged such that a part of the game board overlaps a part of the liquid crystal display part. In the area where the game board and the liquid crystal display part overlap, the image displayed on the liquid crystal display part can be visually recognized through the game board, and the liquid crystal display part changes the special pattern. When a game ball enters the starting hole in the state where the game board and the liquid crystal display unit are overlapped, a holding display is displayed that enables the user to grasp the expected number of changes in the special symbols. The game machine does not display the hold display at the boundary of the area where the game board and the liquid crystal display part do not overlap.
Further, the present invention
a ball lending button,
and a return button,
It is configured to detect the operation of the ball lending button when the operation part of the ball lending button is pressed and the operating part of the ball lending button moves a predetermined distance,
The load applied to the operating part of the ball lending button when the operating part of the ball lending button is pressed and the operating part of the ball lending button moves a predetermined distance to detect the operation of the ball lending button is a predetermined load of 0.06 N or more. A game machine designed to load.
may be

Claims (1)

a ball lending button,
and a return button,
It is configured to detect the operation of the ball lending button when the operation part of the ball lending button is pressed and the operating part of the ball lending button moves a predetermined distance,
The load applied to the operating part of the ball lending button when the operating part of the ball lending button is pressed and the operating part of the ball lending button moves a predetermined distance to detect the operation of the ball lending button is a predetermined load of 0.06 N or more. A game machine designed to load.

Images